Home

USER'S GUIDE - QNX Software Systems

1. 0 340 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Network adapters Packets Dropped on receive 0 Ethernet Headers out of range Oversized Packets received Frames with Dribble Bits 0 Total Frames experiencing Collision s 0 The output from nicinfo depends on what the driver supports not all fields are included for all drivers However the output always includes information about the bytes and packets that were transmitted and received The categories shown in the above example are described below When dealing with a network problem start with these e Physical Node ID e Hardware Interrupt e I O Aperture e Packets Transmitted OK e Total Packets Transmitted Bad e Packets Received OK e Received packets with CRC errors Physical Node ID October 6 2005 The physical node ID is also known as the Media Access Control MAC address This value is unique to every network card although some models do let you assign your own address However this is rare and generally found only on embedded systems If the value represented is FFFFFF FFFFFF or 000000 000000 there s likely something wrong with the setup of the hardware or you need to assign a MAC address to the card Check the hardware manual to see whether or not this is the case Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 341 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Syste
2. l_inode blk 1_inode_ndx 1_1fn_block l _spare 6 l_ status longfilenames entry lfn_block lfn_index lfn_status lfn_name 505 inodes entry i_ fname 16 i_size i first xtnt i_xblk i_ftime i_mtime i_atime i_ctime i_num_xtnts i_mode i_uid i gid i_nlink i zero 4 i_type i status An inode entry If the filename is longer than 48 characters e the _fname field in the directory entry holds a 48 character truncated version of the name e the _lfn_block field points to an entry in longfilenames Extent blocks are used for any file that has more than a single extent The i_xblk field in the directory entry points to one of these extent blocks which in turn defines where the second and subsequent extents are to be found Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems QNX 4 disk structure An extent block is exactly one 512 byte disk block with the following form xblk_ next_xblk xblk_ prev_xblk xblk_num_xtnts xblk_spare 3 xblk_num blocks xblk xtnts 0 xblk xtnts 1 xblk xtnts 59 xblk signature IamXblk first xb1k only xblk_ first _xtnt An extent block Each extent block contains e forward backward pointers e acount of e
3. Previous active console Ctrl Alt Use the plus and minus keys in the numeric keypad for these keychords You can also jump to a specific console by typing Ctrl Alt n where n is a digit that represents the console number of the virtual console For instance to go to dev con2 if available press Ctrl Alt 2 When you terminate the session by typing logout or exit or by pressing Ctrl D the console is once again idle It doesn t appear when you use any of the cyclical console switching keychords The exception is console 1 where the system usually restarts Login For more information about the console see devc con in the Utilities Reference and Console devices in the Character I O chapter of the System Architecture guide After the character device driver processes what you type the command line is passed to a command interpreter or shell The default shell is sh which under Neutrino is a link to the Korn shell ksh There are other shells available including small ones that are suitable for embedded systems see Shells command interpreters in the Utilities Summary in the Utilities Reference In general terms the shell breaks the command line into tokens parses them and invokes the program or programs that you asked for The specific details depend on the shell that you re using this section describes what ksh does As you type the Korn shell immedia
4. To build the image using this buildfile you ll need to be root because it takes a copy of etc passwd and etc shadow which make passwords easy to remember but you can also put your own version of them into the buildfile as inline files Using two computers with modems you can have one automatically answer establish PPP services and authenticate You can then telnet and tftp to the server from a client Use these client pppd parameters in addition to the same chap secrets file pppd connect chat v f tmp dial_modem auth chap dev ser3 but use the appropriate serial port for the client side modem instead of dev ser3 Make sure you use the full path to your modem script The chat script dial modem is fairly simple ABORT NO CARRIER ABORT ERROR ABORT BUSY ATDTxxxxxxx CONNECT Configuration files for setting up a firewall If you ve installed the Extended Networking TDK you ll find various configuration files for IP Filtering in etce ipf conft October 6 2005 Here s a sample configuration file for IP Filtering which you ll find in etc ipf conf Copyright 2001 QNX Software Systems All Rights Reserved Appendix Ae Examples 497 Configuration files for setting up a firewall 2005 QNX Software Systems This source code has been published by QNX Software Systems QSS However any use reproduction modification distribution or transfer of this
5. Some limits are a complex interaction between many things To quote the simple obvious limit is misleading describing all of the interactions can be complicated The key thing to remember while reading this chapter is that there can be many factors behind a limit Configurable limits October 6 2005 When your re trying to determine your system s limits you can get the values of configurable limits special read only variables that store system information Neutrino also supports configuration strings which are similar to and frequently used in conjunction with environment variables For more information see the Configuring Your Environment chapter You can use the POSIX getconf utility to get the value of a configurable limit or a configuration string Since getconf is a POSIX utility scripts that use it instead of hard coded QNX specific limits can adapt to other POSIX environments Some configurable limits are associated with a path their names start with _PCc_ When you get the value of these limits you must provide the path see Filesystem limits below For example to get the maximum length of the filename type getconf _PC_NAME_MAX pathname Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 465 Filesystem limits 2005 QNX Software Systems Other limits are associated with the entire system their names start with _sc_ You don t have to provide a path when you get their values For example to get
6. chmod x etc re d re local e Make sure that the executable is in a directory that s included in the PATH environment variable as it s defined when the system executes etc re d re local I messed up my re 1local file and now I can t boot You can e Boot from CD and correct your re local file Or e Boot your system into debug shell mode press Space during booting up then press F5 to start the debug shell Once you re in the debug shell fesh enter the exit command then wait for the second shell prompt Type this command export PATH bin usr bin sbin usr sbin You can then correct your re local or move it out of the way so that you can boot without it cd etc re d cp rce local rc local bad rm rc local October 6 2005 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 179 October 6 2005 Chapter 9 Configuring Your Environment In this chapter What happens when you log in Customizing your home 184 Configuring your shell 184 Environment variables 187 Configuration strings 188 Setting the time zone 190 Customizing Photon 197 Terminal types 200 Troubleshooting 200 183 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 181 2005 QNX Software Systems What happens when you log in The Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter describes what happens when you boot your system and what you can do to customize the system This chapter describes how you can customize the environment that y
7. 2005 QNX Software Systems etc context conf Context definitions for SNMP v2 See etc context conf in the Utilities Reference etc country Set by phlocale this is used by applications such as the software installer qnxinstal11 to tailor behavior for the country that you re running the system in etc default A directory that contains default configuration files primarily for TCP IP facilities etc dhcpd conf Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol configuration see etc dhcepd conf in the Utilities Reference etc ftpd conf Specifies configuration options for ftpd that apply once you ve authenticated your connection See etc ftpd conf in the Utilities Reference etc ftpusers Defines users who may access the machine via the File Transfer Protocol See etc ftpusers in the Utilities Reference etc group User account group definitions see Managing User Accounts etc hosts Network hostname lookup database see also etc resolv conf below See etc hosts in the Utilities Reference etc inetd conf Internet super server configuration file that defines Internet services that inetd starts and stops 128 Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Where everything is stored October 6 2005 etc mib txt etc motd etc networks etc opasswd etc oshadow dynamically as needed See etc inetd conf in the Utilities Reference Defines the form
8. 56 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Utilities use more If you request usage for a command and the command either doesn t have an executable in the current path or doesn t contain usage message records use displays an error message For more information see use in the Utilities Reference or simply type use use Executing commands on another node or tty Priorities October 6 2005 If the machines on your network are running Qnet see Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing you can execute commands on another machine This is known as remote execution For example on n net dasher date where net dasher is the name of the node that you want to run the command on When you invoke a command on another node the command s standard input standard output and standard error output are displayed on your console screen or terminal unless you explicitly redirect them to another device To run a command on a specific tty use the t option specifying the terminal name For example on t con3 login root For more information see the on command in the Utilities Reference By default when you start a utility or other program it runs at the same priority as its parent Actually priorities aren t associated with a process but with the process s threads You can determine the priority of a process s threads by looking at the output of the pid
9. Menu format is specified as a PxConfig style file see the Photon Library Reference with each section specifying some form of control The types of control are e Item Placement this lets you control the overall ordering of menu items further To do this specify an item name or pattern to October 6 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 79 Modifying the Launch menu 2005 QNX Software Systems match see fnmatch in the Neutrino Library Reference as the section name You can provide a section name in other languages by including an entry with a language code as the key as described earlier In the simplest case the section has no entries but you can also use the type entry to further specify which type of item to apply the match to By default the matching is applied to all items but you may be more exclusive and supply specific types by grouping one or more of the following symbols as this entry s value a All types this is the default behavior c Command type items shell style command as discussed above d Directory items submenus e Executables items that can be executed directly without parsing or use of a third party viewer Files items that can t be executed directly they need a viewer For example this code first groups all the submenu items followed by everything else type d type cef e Separators these let you specify visual separations in y
10. e are more than 5 characters long e consist of multiple words or numbers and include punctuation or white space e you haven t used on other systems many systems and websites in particular don t store and communicate passwords in encrypted form this lets people who gain access to those systems see your password in plain text e incorporate both uppercase and lowercase letters e don t contain words phrases or numbers that other people can guess e g avoid the names of family members and pets license plate numbers and birthdays Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Managing other accounts For more information on system security see Securing Your System Forgot your password If you forget your password ask the system administrator root user to assign a new password to your account Only root can do this In general no one can retrieve your old password from the etc shadow file If your password is short or a single word your system administrator or a hacker can easily figure it out but you re better off with a new password If you re the system administrator and you ve forgotten the password for root you need to find an alternate way to access the etc passwd and etc shadow files in order to reset the root password Some possible ways to do this are e Boot the system from another disk or device where you can log in as root such as from a
11. 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 prune print gt mountpoints 2 Show the drivers cut d f2 lt mountpoints sort uniq xargs i pidin P FanQ lt pidlist grep v pid name October 6 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 237 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems 3 Show the mountpoints for the specified process ID grep pid mountpoints 4 Show the date of the specified driver use i drivername This procedure which approximates the functionality of the Windows XP driverquery command shows the drivers programs that have mountpoints in the pathname space that are currently running it doesn t show those that are merely installed 238 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 Chapter 12 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing In this chapter What is Qnet 241 When should you use Qnet 241 Conventions for naming nodes 242 Software components for Qnet networking 244 Starting Qnet 245 Checking out the neighborhood 248 Troubleshooting 248 October 6 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 239 2005 QNX Software Systems What is Qnet What is Qnet A Neutrino native network is a group of interconnected workstations running only Neutrino In this network a program can transparently access any resource whether it s a file a device or a process on any other node a computer or a workstation in yo
12. 2005 QNX Software Systems SCSI RAID LS 120 ORB Under QNX 4 the SCSI drivers didn t support any device that had an ID greater than 6 This isn t a problem under Neutrino The maximum rate given for a SCSI device is the maximum theoretical burst interface throughput Sustained throughput depends on many factors Currently Neutrino supports only hardware RAID Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks devices There are many third party solutions for SCSI RAID available for Neutrino search for them on the Internet LS 120 is a SuperDisk drive that uses new technology to greatly improve head alignment enabling a much greater storage capacity 120 MB than conventional 3 5 inch disks Neutrino treats an LS 120 drive like an EIDE drive An ORB drive is a fast large capacity removable storage disk drive that uses 3 5 storage media and attaches to the EIDE ATA chain Ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly An ORB drive is simple to set up and appears in the dev directory as a hard disk For example e The hard disk as a primary master appears as dev hdO e The ORB drive set up as a primary slave appears as dev hd1 To mount an ORB drive mount dev hdl fs orb_drive You don t need to remount the drive when you change disks 322 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Hard disks Zip and Jaz disks Zip
13. October 6 2005 Use the umask command to specify the mask for setting the permissions on new files The default mask is 002 so any new files give read and write permission to the user i e the owner of the file and the rest of the user s group and read permission to other users If you want to remove read and write permissions from the other users add this command to your profile umask 006 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 139 Filename extensions 2005 QNX Software Systems If you re the system administrator and you want this change to apply to everyone change the umask setting in etc profile For more Filename extensions This table lists some common filename extensions used in a Neutrino information about profiles see Configuring Your Environment system Extension Description Related programs utilities cI Troff style text e g from man and troff in the UNIX man manual pages third party repository a Library archive ar awk Awk script awk b Bench calculator library or be program bat MS DOS batch file For use on DOS systems won t run under Neutrino See Writing Shell Scripts and ksh for information on writing shell scripts for Neutrino bmp Bitmap graphical image pv Photon viewer build OS image buildfile mkifs c C program source code qcc make QNX Momentics development system required C cc cpp C program source code QCC make QNX Momentics development system required
14. October 6 2005 node names 242 typographical xxiii utility syntax 55 Coordinated Universal Time See UTC copy DOS command 59 copying command line 43 country 128 cp 49 58 403 interactive mode 489 cpim 200 cpio 399 402 cpp file extension 140 CPU limits 474 load monitor 75 usage by processes 449 CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check 246 350 426 creat 453 Critical Process Monitoring TDK 8 cron 3 ertc settings 362 erttrap 356 problems 364 _CS_ARCHITECTURE 189 CS_DOMAIN 189 243 CS HOSTNAME 189 243 _CS_HW_PROVIDER 189 CS_HW_SERIAL 189 _CS_LIBPATH 187 189 CS LOCALE 190 CS_MACHINE 190 CS_PATH 187 190 CS_RELEASE 190 CS_RESOLVE 190 258 273 css file extension 140 Index 529 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems CS_SRPC_DOMAIN 190 CS SYSNAME 190 CS TIMEZONE 171 190 CS VERSION 190 ctime ctimer 196 Ctll A 43 Ctrl Alt 41 Ctrl Alt 41 Ctrl Alt Backspace 102 Ctrl Alt Enter 41 102 Ctrl At H 88 Ctrl Alt n 42 102 disabling 109 Ctrl Alt Shift Backspace 103 109 disabling 104 Ctrl Break 39 Ctrl C 39 Ctrl D 14 39 42 43 Ctll E 43 Ctrl H 43 Ctrl K 43 Ctrl L 39 Ctrl Q 39 Ctrl S 39 Ctrl U 39 Ctll Y 43 current directory 116 222 417 changing 58 determining 45 58 PATH 54 cursor hardware 357 moving 39 cutting command line 43 CVS 381 410 attic 393 530 Index branching 391 commands add 385 394 checkout 384 392 393 commit
15. October 6 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 495 PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes 2005 QNX Software Systems runtime linker libc so libsocket so npm ttcpip so npm pppmgr so The files above this line can be shared by multiple processes data c devc con devc ser8250 devc pty pci bios seedres pipe io net bin echo echo bin stty stty tail pci chat ifconfig ping syslogd touch modem_ans_ppp sh Services telnetd etc config inetd usr sbin telnetd telnetd usr sbin tftpd tftpd usr sbin pppd pppd bin login login bin ksh ksh etc ppp chap secrets Client Server Secret Addrs EHE HEHE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE HEHE HE password etc syslog conf x tmp syslog Inetd config Files etc services etc services etc protocols etc protocols etc termcap etc termcap etc passwd etc passwd etc default login etc default login etc resolv conf etc resolv conf etc shadow etc shadow etc inetd conf telnet stream tcp nowait root usr sbin telnetd in telnetd tftp dgram udp wait root usr sbin tftpd in tftpd etc hosts 127 1 localhost localdomain localhost 496 Appendix A e Examples October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Configuration files for setting up a firewall 10 99 99 1 server server 10 99 99 2 client client
16. c0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Oh Single function Oh Build in self test not supported 20h Oh d800h length 16 enabled Ons Ons NC 0 Registers 00 00 00 00 05 00 02 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems CD ROMs OxC0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxDO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxEO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxFO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 Of 00 00 00 00 00 00 Find the entry for the device you want to locate and it ll give you the details on the manufacturer vendor ID and device ID You may need to search for keywords e g Audio in order to identify your device You can search the manufacturer s website for information or use the vendor and device IDs to cross reference with usr include hw pci_devices h You can also search http www pcidatabase com CD ROMs October 6 2005 You usually attach CD drives to a SCSI or EIDE ATA bus which driver you use depends on the bus Ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly If you attached the CD drive to an
17. root or non root 11 Logging in 12 Logging out 13 Shutting down and rebooting 14 Chapter 2 e Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down 9 2005 QNX Software Systems root or non root Neutrino is a multiuser operating system it lets multiple users log in and use the system simultaneously and it protects them from each other through a system of resource ownership and permissions Depending on the configuration your system boots into either Photon i e graphical or text mode and prompts you for your user ID and password For more details see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide Your system might have been configured so that you don t have to log in at all root or non root October 6 2005 When you first install Neutrino the installation process automatically creates a single user account called root This user can do anything on your system it has what Windows calls administrator s privileges UNIX style operating systems call root the superuser Initially the root account doesn t have a password To protect your system you should e Set a secure password for this account as soon as you ve installed the OS e Create a non root account see Managing User Accounts to use for your day to day work to help prevent you from accidentally modifying or deleting system level software You need to log in as root to do some things such as starting drivers performing system ad
18. s open to such attacks e g logins web browsers email Telnet and FTP servers Neutrino security in general 438 Neutrino is a UNIX style operating system so almost all of the general UNIX security information whether generic Linux BSD etc applies to Neutrino as well A quick Internet search for UNIX or Linux security will yield plenty of papers For example http www alw nih gov Security security html isa page that provides links to a variety of online security resources You ll also find many titles at a bookstore or library We don t market Neutrino as being either more or less secure than other operating systems in its class That is we don t attempt to gain a security certification such as is required for certain specialized applications However we do conduct internal security audits of vulnerable programs to correct potential exploits For flexibility and familiarity Neutrino uses the generic UNIX security model of user accounts and file permissions which is generally sufficient for all our customers In the embedded space it s fairly easy to lock down a system to any degree without compromising operation The ultrasecure systems that need certifications are generally servers as opposed to embedded devices For more information see Managing User Accounts and File ownership and permissions in Working with Files Chapter 19 e Securing Your System October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ne
19. startup code The software component that gains control after the IPL code has performed the minimum necessary amount of initialization After gathering information about the system the startup code transfers control to the OS static linking The process whereby you combine your programs with the modules from the library to form a single executable that s entirely self contained The word static implies that it s not going to change all the required modules are already combined into one Contrast runtime loading 520 Glossary October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems superuser symbolic link The root user which can do anything on your system The superuser has what Windows calls administrator s rights A special file that usually has a pathname as its data Symbolic links are a flexible means of pathname indirection and are often used to provide multiple paths to a single file Unlike hard links symbolic links can cross filesystems and can also create links to directories system page area thread timer timeslice October 6 2005 An area in the kernel that is filled by the startup code and contains information about the system number of bytes of memory location of serial ports etc This is also called the SYSPAGE area The schedulable entity under Neutrino A thread is a flow of execution it exists within the context of a process A kernel object used in conjunction with time based
20. t change existing variables such as PATH and TERM If you use ksh as your login shell you can edit etc profile and HOME profile to override existing variables and add new ones Any environment variables set in etc profile override previous settings in etc default login and HOME profile overrides both etc default login and etc profile For more information on configuration strings see Configuration strings below Configuration strings In addition to environment variables Neutrino uses configuration strings These are system variables that are like environment variables but are more dynamic When you set an environment variable the new value affects only the current instance of the shell and any of its children that you create after setting the variable when you set a configuration string its new value is immediately available to the entire system 188 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Configuration strings October 6 2005 Neutrino also supports configurable limits which are variables that store information about the system For more information see the Understanding System Limits chapter You can use the POSIX get conf utility to get the value of a configurable limit or a configuration string Neutrino also defines a non POSIX setconf utility that you can use to set configuration strings if you re logged in as root In a program call conf
21. the commands shown require that NETWORK is enabled too Ha HE AE HE ARE AE HE A HE a AEA EE FE HE EE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE a FE FE EE FE FE FE FE FE a FE HE Ea HE Ea FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HHHH HE devc pty amp waitfor dev ptyp0 4 qconn port 8000 FEAE HE HEHE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HEHH HE USB driver Ha HE HE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE AE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HHHH HE display msg Starting USB driver io usb duhci amp waitfor dev io usb io usb 4 Ha HE E HE AE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HEHH HE These env variables are inherited by all the programs which follow FEAE HE E HE HE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HEHH HE SYSNAME nto TERM qansi PATH proc boot bin sbin usr bin usr sbin LD_LIBRARY_PATH proc boot 1lib usr lib lib d1l HE AE AE HE AE AE EAE A EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE
22. 122 bin boot dev etc fs home 1lib proc root sbin tmp usr 123 123 124 127 132 132 132 133 134 134 134 134 136 var File ownership and permissions Setuid and setgid 138 Sticky bit 139 Default file permissions Filename extensions 140 Troubleshooting 144 7 Using Editors 145 147 148 Choosing an editor Supported editors 148 150 Third party editors AbiWord 152 Emacs 153 JED 155 Vim 155 Workspace ws vi ped 152 155 October 6 2005 121 136 139 Contents Vii 2005 QNX Software Systems Specifying the default editor 157 8 Controlling How Neutrino Starts 159 What happens when you boot 161 Loading a Neutrino image 164 diskboot 165 diskroot 169 etc system sysinit 170 Device enumeration 172 oem directory 174 overrides file 174 Host specific enumerators 175 etce re d re sysinit 176 re local 177 tinit 178 Troubleshooting 178 9 Configuring Your Environment 181 What happens when you login 183 Customizing yourhome 184 Configuring your shell 184 etc profile 184 SHOME profile 185 ksh s startup file 186 Environment variables 187 Setting PATH and LD LIBRARY PATH 187 Configuration strings 188 Setting the time zone 190 Examples 193 Programming with time zones 196 Customizing Photon 197 Starting applications automatically 197 The right fonts 197 viii Contents October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems 10 11 October 6 2
23. 2005 QNX Software Systems Configuration files for spooler PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP 2500C CLS PRINTER CMD PCL MLC PML POSTSCRIPT Supported PaperSize Using NCFTP October 6 2005 PNPCMD POSTSCRIPT 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 7250 10500 Exec 11000 17000 B 8262 11692 A4 5846 8262 A5 7000 9875 B5 11692 16524 A3 The following macros are expanded for each filter command line Sd Device m PnP manufacture model id n Printer name s Spooldir name A real 2 soa senna esas ees e FileVersion xx xx is the IP address of the printer prt0 is the port used Filter Filter Supported Resolution Supported PaperSize Supported Orientation Supported Intensity Supported InkType Resolution PaperSize Orientation Intensity InkType NonPrintable on the printer in this case port zero ps d ncftpput V E xx xx prtd phs ps phs to ps 300 300 600 600 1200 1200 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 0 Portrait 1 Landscape 0 Min 100 Max 1 B amp W 3 Color CMY 4 Color CMYK 600 600 8500 11000 Letter 0 Portrait 50 4 Color CMYK 500 Left 500 Top 500 Right 500 Bottom Appendix Ae Examples 491 Configuration files for spooler 2005 QNX Software Systems if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _850DDE PNPSTR MEFG HEWLETT PACKARD
24. Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 455 Filesystems 2005 QNX Software Systems case the 1K buffering provided by standard I O greatly reduces the number of messages to the filesystem You can improve performance by using e setvbuf to increase the buffering size e fileno to access the underlying file descriptor directly and to bypass the buffering during performance critical sections You can also optimize performance by accessing the disk in suitably sized chunks large enough to minimize the overheads of Neutrino s context switching and message passing but not too large to exceed disk driver limits for blocks per operation or overheads in large message passing an optimal size is 32K You should also access the file on block boundaries for whole multiples of a disk sector since the smallest unit of access to a disk block device is a single sector partial writes will require a read modify write cycle you can get the optimal I O size by calling Statvfs although most disks are 512 bytes sector Finally for very high performance situations video streaming etc it s possible to bypass all buffering in the filesystem and perform DMA directly between the user data areas and the disk But note these caveats e The disk and disk driver must support such access e No coherency is offered between data transferred directly and any data in the filesystem buffer cache e Some POSIX semantics such as file access
25. Here are some of the commands To Press Leave Emacs Open a file Save a file Move to the end of the current word Move to the beginning of the current word Page back Page forward Delete the current word Delete to the end of the current line Set a mark Copy text from the mark to the cursor Paste text To learn more about Emacs see e www gnu org manual Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl X Ctrl F filename or Ctrl X 4 f filename Ctrl X Ctrl S Esc F Esc B Esc V Ctrl V Ctrl D Ctrl K Ctrl i e Ctrl Shift 2 Ctrl W Ctrl Y e Cameron Deborah Bill Rosenblatt and Eric S Raymond 1996 Learning GNU Emacs Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates ISBN 1 56592 152 6 Chapter 7 e Using Editors October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Third party editors JED Vim JED is a lightweight implementation of Emacs designed to operate in a command window All of the commands and comments for Emacs apply to JED but JED is more flexible because it doesn t require a windowing environment To start JED choose Editors JED from the desktop s Launch menu or type jed filename For more information about JED see www jedsoft org Jjed Vim vi Improved expands on the power and speed of vi but makes the user experience more comfortable by including e a status line that indicates the current mode e context based colori
26. Manually setting up your video card above Also keep in mind that you can always run the Vesa generic driver devg vesabios so Your graphics card isn t detected If you have a card that you expect to work with one of our accelerated drivers but you get only the generic drivers detected by erttrap you might have a chipset that s missing from the graphics enumerator Try the following 1 Look in etc system enum devices graphics for the driver that you think you should run For example if you re using a Radeon card look for devg radeon so 2 Edit etc system enum devices overrides and add an entry for your card You need to specify the PCI Vendor and Device ID of the chipset which you can find by using the pei utility Add a line after the last known PCI ID and before the line cfg fname etc system config graphics traplist 3 Save the file and reboot the system If you edited the enumerator correctly there should be an entry in etc system config graphics traplist with the driver you hope to run 4 Run crttrap clear crttrap trap 5 The driver you want should now have been used and detected Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 365 Video cards 2005 QNX Software Systems Sometimes this procedure works other times it doesn t If it doesn t work use one of the generic drivers or contact us about adding support for your graphics chipset Even if this procedure works we can t guarantee the drive
27. Mass storage devices The devb umass driver supports devices that follow the Mass Storage Class Specification You can determine that the device is suitable by looking for the following information in the output from usb vv Mass Storage Class 08h SubClass Code Command Block Specification Olh Reduced Block Command RBC 02h SFF 8020i MMC 2 ATAPI 04h UFI 05h SFF 8070i 06h SCSI transparent Protocol Code Protocol Implementation 00h Control Bulk Interrupt 334 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Character devices with command completion interrupt Olh Control Bulk Interrupt with no command completion interrupt 50h Bulk Only Transport To use a USB mass storage device on a Neutrino system start io usb as described above then the devb umass driver By default this driver creates an entry for disk based devices in dev in the form dev hdn where n is the drive number Once you ve started the driver you can treat the device like a disk For example for a mass storage device that uses the UHCI controller type io usb d uhci devb umass cam pnp Troubleshooting No device is created in dev The device might not conform to the Mass Storage Class Specification Check the output from usb vv No fdn device was created in dev for a floppy drive The default name is dev hdn You can use the name command line option to cam disk so to override the prefix Character
28. The Neutrino User s Guide is intended for programmers who develop Neutrino based applications as well as OEMs and other resellers of the OS who may want to pass this guide on to their end users as a way to provide documentation for the OS component of their product If you ve installed the QNX Momentics development suite see the Welcome to QNX Momentics guide for an overview of the system and the documentation Your system might not include all of the things that this guide describes depending on what software you ve installed For example some utilities are included in the QNX Momentics development suite and others are included in a specific Board Support Package BSP The following table may help you find information quickly To find out about Go to How Neutrino compares to other Getting to Know the OS operating systems October 6 2005 continued About This Guide XXV What you ll find in this guide 2005 QNX Software Systems To find out about Go to Starting and ending a session and turning off a Neutrino system Adding users to the system managing passwords etc The basics of using the keyboard command line and shell command interpreter Using Neutrino s graphical user interface Files directories and permissions How to edit files Configuring what your machine does when it boots Customizing your shell setting the time etc Creating your ow
29. The plugin displays the track information in its text box clock so You can choose the clock s font and its size whether or not to show the date and the seconds and the format of the date AM PM If you select this plugin from the shelf it opens a User Configuration utility that lets you set and manage the time and date launcher so A plugin that lets you create on the shelf an item that runs an arbitrary command launchmenu so A plugin that supports the Launch menu You can have only one of these in your shelf at any given time If you try to add a second one into your shelf it s ignored If you want to change the location of the Launch menu you must first remove the original and then add the new one in the new location Note that this plugin doesn t work in a drawer it must be at the top level in a shelf For information Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Modifying the Launch menu led so pload so ptrcam so taskbar so volume so worldview so about specifying the contents of the Launch menu see Modifying the Launch menu below A set of three LEDs that show which of the Num Lock Caps Lock and Scroll Lock keys are on The light is on when the key is active A CPU Load Monitor that displays bar graphs that indicate the levels of CPU usage memory usage and disk and network activity A pointer cam that magnifies the im
30. and permissions Once you ve logged in the numeric user ID of your running programs and system resources determines your programs ability to access resources and perform operations such as sending signals to other processes Textual names are used only by utilities and applications that need to convert between names and numeric IDs Changing user names groups user IDs and so on in the account database has no effect on your permission to access files etc until you next log in The root user user ID 0 has permission to do nearly anything to files regardless of their ownership and permission settings For more information see File ownership and permissions in Working with Files 18 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems What does a user account do When the shell interprets a username pathname it gets the user s home directory from etc passwd If you remove or change a user s account any shell running in the system that had previously accessed that user s home directory via username may be using the old home directory information to determine the actual path because the shell caches the data New shells read the data afresh from etc passwd This may be a problem if a shell script that uses username invokes another shell script that also uses this feature the two scripts would operate on different paths if the home directory information associated w
31. and the CGI scripts are in usr www cgi bin export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr local httpd Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 375 Examples 2005 QNX Software Systems Script export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index html export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www cgi bin slinger amp The following example is the wrong way to configure Slinger Anyone can download the scripts because the documents and scripts are in the same directory export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr www export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index html export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www slinger amp To configure Slinger to start with SSI and enable debugging you can use these commands export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr local httpd export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index shtml export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www cgi bin slinger des amp Here are two examples of a simple CGI script that displays a randomly selected image on a web page The same script is presented here in C and per1 so that you can see how to implement scripts in either language You should put the executable C program rand images cgi and the per1 script rand_images p1 in usr www cgi bin Use chmod to make sure that both files have 755 permissions The images that they access are actually located in usr local httpd images The web pages access the images in their local directory the CGI script just figures out which one it wants to load To run these scripts from a web page use the following HTML with SSI commands
32. e Network Address Translation NAT known to Linux users as IP masquerading to connect several computers through a common external interface You ll find both of these in the Extended Networking Technology Development Kit TDK Sample IP filtering and NAT configuration files are supplied as etc ipf conf and etc ipnat conf October 6 2005 Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 441 Setting up a firewall 2005 QNX Software Systems If you re using a Neutrino machine as a gateway to an internal network you re applying IP filtering and NAT and you re tunneling traffic from your internal hosts through an IPSec tunnel on the the Neutrino gateway you ll likely need to enable the TCP IP npm t cpip v6 so stack option pfil_ipsec This option affects the processing order of IPSec and IP filtering in the TCP IP stack for outgoing packets This means that IP filtering and NAT are applied to the outgoing traffic before it s sent on the IPsec tunnel Starting IP Filter and NAT To configure IP Filter and NAT you need to login as root and set up the configuration files as described in the sections that follow Then use the following commands to start the utilities mount Ttcpip lsm ipfilter so ipf f filter_rule_file ipnat f nat_rule_file For more information see ipf ipnat lsm ipfilter so and mount in the Utilities Reference Configuring IP Filtering 442 Before you start the IP Filter you must s
33. example if a client requests a remote login by invoking rlogin then inetd starts rlogind remote login daemon to satisfy the request In most instances responses to client requests are handled this way Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking October 6 2005 o 2005 QNX Software Systems Running the Internet daemons October 6 2005 You use the super server configuration file etc inetd conf to specify the daemons that inetd can start As shipped in the Neutrino distribution the file describes all currently shipped Neutrino TCP IP daemons and some nonstandard pidin services Unless you want to add or remove daemon definitions you don t need to modify this file When it starts inetd reads its configuration information from this configuration file It includes these commonly used daemons ftpd File transfer rlogind Remote login rfitp Remote file transfer rshd Remote shell telnetd Remote terminal session tftpd DARPA trivial file transfer e Remember that you shouldn t manually start the daemon processes listed in this file they expect to be started by inetd e Running rshd or rlogind can open up your machine to the world Use the etc hosts equiv or rhosts files or both to identify trusted users but be very careful You may also find other resident daemons that can run independently of inetd see the Utilities Reference for descriptions bootpd Internet boot protocol server dhcpd Dynamic Host
34. i e longer than 48 characters especially slow down the filesystem 452 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filesystems e Use the i option to dinit to pregrow the inodes file which eliminates the runtime window of manipulating its metadata during a potential power loss e Big directories are slower that small ones because the filesystem uses a linear search Performance and robustness When you design or configure a filesystem you have to balance performance and robustness e Robustness involves synchronizing the user operations to the implementation of that operation to the successful response to the user For example the creation of a new file via creat may perform all the physical disk writes that are necessary to add that new filename into a directory on the disk filesystem and only then reply back to the client Performance may decouple the actual implementation of the operation from the reply For example writing data into a file via write might immediately reply to the client but leave the data in a write behind in memory cache in an attempt to merge with later writes and construct a large contiguous run for a single sequential disk access but until that occurs the data is vulnerable to loss if the power fails You must decide on the balance between robustness and performance that s appropriate for your installation expectations an
35. part of the backup solution you re developing For example to compress my archive tar to create a new file called my_archive tar gz type gzip my archive tar This file is much smaller than the original one which makes it easier to store Some of the utilities including gzip have options that let you control the amount of compression Generally the better the compression the longer it takes to do The default extension is tar gz but you ll see others such as tgz You can use the S option to gzip to specify the suffix Decompressing the archive 406 To decompress the archive use the compressor s corresponding utility In the case of a gz or tgz file use gunzip gunzip my_archive tar gz or gunzip my_archive tgz These commands decompress the file resulting in my _archive tar You can also use tar with the z option to extract from the archive without decompressing it first tar xzf my_archive tgz Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Storage choices Storage choices CDs October 6 2005 You can back up to a CD by using a CD burner on the Neutrino system or by creating an ISO image and copying it to a system with a CD burner that can burn ISO images You can use cdrecord to burn CDs on a Neutrino system To get this software go to our website http www qnx com log into your myQNX account and look in the 3rd Par
36. then you might be able to use spatch to recover some or all of this data The spatch utility lets you browse the raw disk and patch minor problems You can sometimes cure transient disk problems by reading and writing the failing block with spatch Before using spatch make sure you understand the details of a QNX 4 filesystem see QNX 4 disk structure earlier in this chapter Recovering disks and files Using chkfsys The chkfsys utility is your principal tool for checking and restoring a potentially damaged filesystem It can identify and correct a host of minor problems as well as verify the integrity of the disk system as a whole Normally chkfsys requires that the filesystem be idle and that no files be currently open on that device You ll have to shut down any processes that have opened files or that may need to open files while chkfsys is running October 6 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 423 Recovering disks and files 2005 QNX Software Systems To run chkfsys on a mountpoint type chkfsys mountpoint The utility scans the entire disk partition from the root down building an internal copy of the bitmap and verifying the consistency of all files and directories it finds in the process When it has finished processing all files chkf sys compares the internal bitmap to the bitmap on the disk If they match chkfsys is finished If any discrepancies are found chkfsys will upon you
37. use the pin utility The output that appears on your screen should look like this pin Sock Func Type Flags PID Base Size IRQ 1 Empty MF None 1 Empty 2 _ H n None 2 0 Network C I None 0x300 32 7 2 Empty MF None Each socket has two entries because the driver devp pecard supports combination cards that give room for two functions in each slot The categories displayed in the output example above are Sock The slot where the PC Card is attached In the example above the Network card appears in slot 2 Func Used when the card is a multifunction PC Card Type A label for the PC Card s function If the card is a Network card the Type column displays Network Flags Flags that aren t set are marked as The following table lists possible set flags 328 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems PCCARD and PCMCIA cards This flag Has a set value of c Card in B Battery low R Scheduled to be configured N Not enough resources to configure card IorM T O card or memory card F Not configured Window is part of previous configuration Window is an unlockable window Window is a temporary window Machine booted from this device or W Locked exclusive locked read write Locked read only Level mode IRQs Shared IRQs Attribute memory gt nF wD X W H G Wide 16 bit memory access PID The process ID of the process
38. 0 NETMASK 0 0 0 0 GATEWAY 10 0 0 1 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Choosing the right stack configuration Here you can see that the interface has been configured to 10 0 0 100 and the default route has been set to 10 0 0 1 Full TCP IP stack npm tcpip so October 6 2005 The full TCP IP stack npm tcpip so is based on the BSD TCP IP stack and it supports similar features If you aren t using phlip the Photon TCP IP and dialup configuration tool to configure the full stack you have to use the ifconfig and route utilities as described below you can t use command line options as you would for the tiny stack The npm tcpip so file is actually a symbolic link that points to either npm tcpip v4 so or npm tcpip v6 so depending on what you ve installed To start the full stack load the TCP IP shared object into io net For example io net dne2000 ptcpip To configure an interface with an IP address you must use the ifconfig utility To configure your network interface with an IP address of 10 0 0 100 you would use the following command ifconfig en0 10 0 0 100 If you also want to specify your gateway use the route command route add default 10 0 0 1 This configures the gateway host as 10 0 0 1 If you then want to view your network configuration use the netstat command netstat in displays information about the network interfaces Name Mtu
39. 11 Logging in 12 Photon mode 12 Text mode 12 Once you ve logged in 12 Logging out 13 Photon mode 13 Text mode 14 October 6 2005 Contents iii 2005 QNX Software Systems Shutting down and rebooting 14 3 Managing User Accounts 15 What does a user account do 17 User accounts vs user IDs login lookup and permissions 18 What happens when you log in 19 Account database 20 etc passwd 21 etc group 22 etc shadow 23 etc pwlock 23 Managing your own account 24 Changing your password 24 Forgot your password 25 Managing other accounts 25 Adding users 27 Removing accounts 29 Defining groups 30 Troubleshooting 32 4 Using the Command Line 35 Command line or GUI 37 Processing a command 37 Character device drivers 38 Input modes 38 Terminal support 38 Telnet 39 The keyboard ata glance 39 Physical and virtual consoles 40 Shell 42 Editing the command line 43 Command and filename completion 44 Reserved words 45 iv Contents October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Entering multiple commands 45 Aliases 46 Substitutions 46 Redirecting input and output 49 Pipes 50 Quoting special characters 51 History recalling commands 53 Shell scripts 53 Utilities 54 Understanding command syntax Displaying online usage messages Executing commands on another node or tty Priorities 57 Basic commands 58 International keyboards 59 Neutrino for MS DOS users 59 DOS commands and their Neutrino equival
40. 417 rules 120 valid characters CD ROM 225 DOS 225 Ext2 226 NFS 229 QNX 4 220 wildcards 48 209 fileno 456 dev shmem under 217 about 113 archiving 402 404 associations 109 backing up 399 blocks examining and restoring 426 checking integrity 420 424 compressing 237 405 concatenating 58 contents searching 47 209 converting for printing 290 300 copying 49 58 489 decompressing 237 406 October 6 2005 deleting 58 489 permissions 139 without returning used blocks 422 displaying one screenful at a time 58 extents 219 417 418 finding 47 209 former users 29 group ownership 136 hidden 65 118 wildcard characters and 49 inodes 220 417 links 220 417 maximum number of 467 listing 58 locations 121 maintenance utilities for chkfsys 422 423 dcheck 422 dinit 421 fdisk 421 spatch 423 zap 422 managing 85 manifest 236 maximum open per process 466 moving 58 names 219 maximum length 467 ownership 136 220 package filesystem in 233 permissions 136 411 default setting 139 185 restricting the changing of 467 Index 537 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems pregrowing 456 461 recovering lost 423 zapped 423 remapping bad disk blocks 422 renaming 58 spilling 136 234 structure 420 temporary 134 transferdaemon 265 troubleshooting 144 237 types 113 determining 116 144 version management 381 410 Filesystem Hierarchy Standard 121
41. CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol 494 chap secrets 495 character devices drivers 335 command line interpreting 38 T O attributes 338 character special files 114 characters control disabling 468 counting 50 deleting 39 dropouts 199 international 59 151 156 filenames 120 fonts 198 input methods 200 special quoting 51 209 wildcard 48 209 chat 494 chdir DOS command 59 checking in and out of CVS 382 checkout CVS command 384 393 chgrp 136 Chinese input method 200 chkdosfs 3 chkdsk DOS command 59 chkfsys 3 122 224 422 overriding clean flag 424 read only mode 425 recovering damaged filesystem 423 using on live system 425 when to run 424 Index 527 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems chmod 31 136 207 220 not supported by CIFS filesystem 471 chown 136 220 not supported by CIFS filesystem 471 chown restricting use of 467 ci CVS command 386 CIFS filesystem 227 471 starting 177 clean flag chkfsys 424 clients PPPoE 268 TCP IP 257 clock realtime settingup 171 clock so 74 els DOS command 59 emd DOS command 59 CMD_INT 372 coaxial cables 343 collisions excessive 349 frames 351 late 348 multiple 347 single 347 colors background 83 pterm 109 windows 83 COLUMNS 187 command DOS command 59 command interpreters See shells command line 37 default prompt 11 editing 43 528 Index interpreting 37 commands basic 58 built into shells 55 com
42. EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE NFS_REMOTE_FILESYSTEM This section is dependent on the NETWORK driver Don t forget to properly configure and run the nfsd daemon on the remote fileserver substitute the hostname or IP address of your NFS server for nfs_server The server must be exporting asr qnx630 target qnx6 mipsle HEAR AE AEA EHE HE AEA AEE AE AEA AE HE ERA AE HE AE EA EE EA EE EA EE EE EEE E HE a FE E EE EA EB EE display_msg Mounting NFS filesystem waitfor dev socket 4 fs nfs3 nfs_server usr qnx630 target qnx6 mipsle mnt session ksh amp type link bin sh proc boot ksh type link dev console dev ser1 type link tmp dev shmem HE HEH HE AEE AEE AE HE a E aE aE E HE FE HE FE E FE FE HE EH FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE EE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE HE HE a ER a a FE HE HEHE HEHHE uncomment for NFS REMOTE FILESYSTEM FEE HE HE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE FE a FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE E FE FE FE HE HE HEHE HEHHE type link bin mnt bin type link sbin mnt sbin type link usr bin mnt usr bin type link usr sbin mnt usr sbin type link lib mnt lib type link usr lib mnt usr lib type link etc mnt etc Appendix A e Examples 483 Buildfile for an NFS mounting target 2005 QNX Software Systems libc so libm so FEE HE HEHE FE HE FE FE
43. EIDE bus simply use the devb eide driver If the drive is on a SCSI bus you need to determine the proper driver for your SCSI interface see Hard disks below The cam cdrom so shared object provides a common access method for CD ROM devices The drivers load the cam cdrom so and fs cd so shared objects by default CD ROM devices support the ISO 9660 filesystem and appear in the dev directory as dev cdx where x is the number of the drive starting at 0 Simply mount the drive using the mount utility specifying ed as the type of filesystem mount tcd dev cd1 fs cdrom You don t need to remount the drive when you change CDs For information about specific options e g disabling audio extensions disabling multisession support see cam cdrom so and fs cd so in the Utilities Reference Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 313 DVDs 2005 QNX Software Systems DVDs Neutrino supports DVD ROMs and RAMs DVD ROM You can treat DVD drives like CD ROM drives However Neutrino currently doesn t support UDF format DVD disks You can use DVD drives to read CDs and the setup for a DVD ROM is the same as for a CD ROM For more details see CD ROMs above DVD RAM You can treat DVD RAM drives like hard disks They appear in the dev directory as a CD but you can mount and treat them just like a hard disk see Hard disks below Floppy disks The driver for a floppy drive is devb fdc In order
44. HE FE E HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E HE FE HE FE HE HE uncomment for NFS REMOTE FILESYSTEM SARE EH HE FE E HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HE fs nfs3 EHEHE AEE HEHE A AE AE HE HE A FE E HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE E HE FE EA FE FE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE A FE E FE FE FEAE HE FE HHH general commands 484 Appendix A e Examples October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems qnxbasedma build FEAE AE HEHE AEE AE AE AEE EAE HE AE AEE HE AEA AE HE EA EA FE FE AE AE FE HE EE a EA FE FE A EE EA EE EE EB EA 1s ksh pipe pidin uname slogger sloginfo slay HEE aE AE A AE AE AE AEA AEA AE EA AE A A AE A EAE EE EA EE EA EA EA EA EE EE EE EA END OF BUILD SCRIPT HEE AE AE AEE AE AEA aE AE A AEA AE A EA A A EA EE EA A aE EAE EA EEA EE EEE EE A qnxbasedma build October 6 2005 Here s the buildfile for boot on an x86 platform qnxbasedma build In a real buildfile you can t use a backslash to break a long line into shorter pieces but we ve done that here just to make the buildfile easier to read The buildfile for QNX Neutrino booting on a PC virtual x86 bios compres
45. HOME exrc Here are some of the vi commands that you ll use a lot To Press Leave vi without saving any changes q Save the current file iW Save the current file and exit Wq x OF ZZ Move the cursor to the left h see below Move the cursor to the right 1 see below Move the cursor up one line k see below Move the cursor down one line j see below Move to the beginning of the next word w Move to the end of the current or next word e depending on the cursor position Move to the beginning of the current or previous b word depending on the cursor position Page back Ctrl B continued October 6 2005 Chapter 7 e Using Editors 149 Supported editors 2005 QNX Software Systems ped 150 To Press Page forward Ctrl F Yank copy the current line yy Yank from the cursor to the end of the current yw word Delete from the cursor to the end of the current dw word Delete the current line dd Paste text before the cursor P Paste text after the cursor Pp In some implementations of vi including Neutrino s you can also use the arrow keys to move the cursor whether you re in command or input mode You can combine the commands to make them even more useful for example type a number before dd to delete several lines at once In addition vi has 26 named buffers that let you easily cut or copy and paste different blocks of text You can find numerous resources t
46. If this file doesn t exist sysinit sets the time zone to be UTC or Coordinated Universal Time formerly Greenwich Mean Time For more information see Setting the time zone in Configuring Your Environment If ete re d re rte exists and is executable sysinit runs it to set up the realtime clock We recommend that you set the hardware clock to UTC time and use the CS_TIMEZONE configuration string or the TZ environment variable to specify your time zone The system displays and interprets local times and automatically determines when daylight saving time starts and ends This means that you can have dial up users in different time zones on the same computer and they can all see the correct current local time It also helps when transmitting data from time zone to time zone You stamp the data with the UTC time stamp and all of the computers involved should have an easy time comparing time stamps in one time zone to time stamps in another Some operating systems such as Windows set the hardware clock to local time If you install Windows and Neutrino on the same machine you should set the hardware clock to local time Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 171 Device enumeration 2005 QNX Software Systems by executing the following command as root and putting it into etce re d re rte rtc l1 hw If you re using Photon you can just uncheck The hardware clock uses UTC GMT in phiocale if you do that
47. In order to access the remote node using phditto you must run phrelay on the remote machine You can end the phditto session by selecting Close from Phditto s window menu To view this menu right click the phditto label in the Taskbar Phindows Photon in Windows is a connectivity tool that lets you use Windows platforms to connect to and interact with graphical Photon applications running on a remote Neutrino computer Configuring the Neutrino machine for TCP IP use If you re using TCP IP make sure the configuration is correct before you use Phindows e The remote Neutrino host must have TCP IP installed and running e The remote host must also be running inetd with the following items added to the TCP IP configuration files In etc inetd conf add the line phrelay stream tcp nowait root usr bin phrelay phrelay In etc services add the line phrelay 4868 tcp These lines are already present in the configuration files but they re commented out Just remove the number sign to add these entries These two entries cause inetd to listen for incoming requests to establish a new Photon session When a request is detected from a remote Phindows client in our case inetd automatically establishes a full TCP IP connection and launches phrelay on that connection Phindows is then fully connected to the local machine For more information about inetd see the Utilities Reference 98 Chapter 5 e Using the
48. MDL HP Supported PaperSize 8500 8500 7250 11000 8262 5846 7000 11692 8500 CLS PRINTER CMD POSTSCRIPT 11000 14000 10500 17000 11692 8262 9875 16524 FF FF OH OF Letter Legal Exec B A4 A5 B5 A3 if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _25A854 PNPSTR MEFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP Supported PaperSize 8500 8500 7250 11000 8262 5846 7000 11692 Using SAMBA PNPCMD POSTSCRIPT Sd Device m PnP manufacture model id n Printer name s Spooldir name A real FileVersion 2 You need to have an environment variable 2500C CLS 11000 14000 10500 17000 11692 8262 9875 16524 to access the SAMBA shared printer PRINTER CMD PCL MLC PML POSTSCRIPT Letter Legal Exec B A4 AS B5 A3 The following macros are expanded for each filter command line DEVICE_URI set for smbspool Form for smb command used with smbspool which is set in DEVICE_URI Se Se Se te te 492 Appendix A e Examples No Username and password required DEVICE_URI smb server printer DEVICE_URI smb workgroup server printer Username and password required DEVICE_URI smb username password server printer October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Configuration files for spooler DEVICE_URI smb username password workgroup server printer Where username SAMBA use
49. MS DOS users in the Using the Command Line chapter of this guide Limitations Although Neutrino is powerful enough to use as a desktop OS we don t provide desktop applications such as word processing spreadsheets or email Some of these applications might be available from other sources such as the third party repository If you re using Neutrino to support self hosted QNX Momentics development you ll likely require an email solution of some sort We suggest you consider using an email client or Mail User Agent such as Mozilla mutt or elm along with the sendmail delivery agent see the third party repository You might find it useful to run an IMAP or POP server on another machine to host your email if you don t want to configure a local mail delivery using sendmail Or you may avoid using a local email client entirely by using a web based mail service hosted on another machine How Neutrino is unique Neutrino consists of a microkernel and various processes Each process even a device driver runs in its own virtual memory space October 6 2005 Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS 5 How Neutrino is unique 2005 QNX Software Systems DOS fil manac Neutrino microkernel Software bus Charact The QNX Neutrino architecture The advantage of using virtual memory is that one process can t corrupt another process s memory space For more information see The Philosophy of QN
50. NTP networks 129 networks configuration 263 directory 243 hostname database 128 names 129 status getting 274 newgrp 18 newsgroups 477 nfm autoip so 271 NFS buildfiles 481 filesystem 228 470 starting 177 server daemon 266 nfsd 230 266 NIC Network Interface Card 339 nice 57 nicinfo 250 275 340 Node Discovery Protocol NDP 243 node IDs physical 341 nodes 57 domain 243 names 242 252 fully qualified 243 548 Index remote Qnet contacting via 248 noditto 85 nophoton 131 176 npm pppoe so 269 npm qnet compat so 245 npm qnet 14_lite so 245 npm qnet so 243 245 security 440 npm tcpip so 261 263 CIFS 228 npm ttcpip so 261 262 CIFS doesn t work with 228 NFS 230 NTP Network Time Protocol 266 ntpd 266 null 50 125 Num Lock 75 numbers random 176 O o file extension 140 oem directory 174 OHCI Open Host Controller Interface 331 on 57 248 opasswd 32 129 open 452 455 options command line 55 endof 56 ORB drives 322 os DOS variable 63 OS images 123 216 413 buildfiles 140 481 485 487 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index creating 164 217 OS loader 164 oshadow 32 129 O SYNC 457 output displaying one screenful at a time 58 210 redirecting 49 stopping and resuming 39 overrides 174 ownership 136 P package filesystem 231 packager 236 packages creating 236 information about getting 234 Launch menu includingin 82 managing 232 manifest 140 pa
51. October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Modems Packets Dropped on receive This usually means you got an overrun while receiving a packet This has to do with DMA and the FIFO like a Transmit Underrun except in this case the DMA engine can t copy the packet into memory as fast as the data is coming from the network and the packet gets dropped Like the Transmit Underrun this is generally due to poor hardware Ethernet Headers out of range This entry indicates the number of packets whose Ethernet type length field isn t valid Oversized Packets received An oversized packet is simply a received packet that was too big to fit in the driver s Receive buffer Frames with Dribble Bits Dribble bits are extra bits of data that were received after the Ethernet CRC They re commonly caused by faulty hardware or by Ethernet cabling that doesn t conform to the 802 3 specifications Total Frames experiencing Collision s This is the total number of frames that have experienced a collision while trying to transmit on the network This can sometimes be high depending on how busy the network is A busy network experiences these types of errors more often than a quiet one Modems You can have any of the following types e Internal ISA Plug and Play or not e PCI based e External e Cable October 6 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 351 Modems 2005 QNX Software Systems Internal modems ISA
52. PID is a positive integer The system may reuse a process ID after the process dies provided no existing process group has the same ID Only the Process Manager can have a process ID of 1 Pseudo TTY a character based device that has two ends a master end and a slave end Data written to the master end shows up on the slave end and vice versa You typically use these devices when a program requires a terminal for standard input and output and one doesn t exist for example as with sockets The native network manager in Neutrino Name of an earlier generation RTOS created by QNX Software Systems Also short form of the company s name Quality of Service a policy e g loadbalance used to connect nodes in a network in order to ensure highly dependable transmission QoS is an issue that often arises in high availability HA networks as well as realtime control systems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems QSS quoting RAM raw mode QNX Software Systems A method of forcing a shell s special characters to be treated as simple characters instead of being interpreted in a special way by the shell For example Less my file name escapes the special meaning of the spaces in a filename Random Access Memory a memory technology characterized by the ability to read and write any location in the device without limitation Contrast flash EPROM and EEPROM In raw input mode the charact
53. Photon See the ph script for ideas and examples October 6 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 357 Video cards 2005 QNX Software Systems You can also manually add this command to the graphics modes file at the top line to test it out Setting up multiple displays You can use the io graphics configuration file to set up a dual or multiple monitor display You can configure either two or more separate cards for multiple displays or a single device to support multiple displays These graphics device drivers support multiple displays devg radeon so Graphics driver for ATI RADEON chipsets devg matroxg so Graphics driver for Matrox Millenium G series chipsets For specific chipsets and the number of displays supported see the documentation for devg radeon so and devg matroxg so in the Utilities Reference For information about the ioe graphics configuration file format and the options you can set see The io graphics configuration file in the documentation for io graphics in the Utilities Reference e You can use the phgrafx utility or io graphics command line to configure only single displays not multiple displays e We don t guarantee support for arbitrary combinations of video cards Here s a step by step example of creating a configuration file for a Radeon 9700 Pro video card for dual headed display 1 Create the GLOBAL section This has a single entry devices that lists all the vide
54. Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Connecting to other systems Starting Phindows October 6 2005 To launch Phindows on your Windows machine do one of the following e Click the Phindows icon if you created one e Choose the Start gt Programs QNX Momentics Phindows menu entry e Run the C Program Files phindows phindows exe program Phindows displays a Connect dialog where you can specify the type of connection TCP IP or direct connect serial Various connection options are available but the defaults usually work well If you request a TCP IP connection you must also specify the Internet address of the Neutrino computer you re connecting to e g 198 53 31 1 If the remote computer has been configured properly you should see a Photon login prompt at which point you re connected and running Photon If you request a serial connection then you must specify the COM port e g COM1 or COM2 If you don t specify a baud rate Phindows uses the current Windows default settings With a serial connection Phindows initially acts as a simple text terminal that lets you type commands directly to the modem e g ATDT1 613 591 0934 Once connected log into Neutrino and then issue the command usr bin phrelay This command causes Phindows to drop out of text terminal mode and begin acting as a Photon graphical terminal A Photon login screen should appear at this point Chapter 5
55. Qnet Network drivers devn Managers that form an interface with the hardware npm qnet so Native network manager to implement Qnet protocols Neutrino currently includes these versions e npm qnet compat so the original stack e npm qnet 14_lite so the new lightweight version which provides faster speed and enhanced reliability This version of the Qnet stack isn t compatible with the earlier version with regard to packet and protocol format By default npm qnet so is a symbolic link to the latest version of the Qnet protocol stack To determine which version you re using type ls 1 1ib d11 npm qnet so If any conflict arises see Troubleshooting later in this chapter yf you need to customize Qnet ask your sales representative about the Transparent Distributed Processing Software Kit TDP SK Starting Qnet You can start Qnet by e creating a useqnet file then rebooting or e explicitly starting the network manager protocols and drivers as described below October 6 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 245 Starting Qnet 2005 QNX Software Systems If you run Qnet anyone else on your network who s running Qnet can examine your files and processes if the permissions on them allow it For more information see e File ownership and permissions in the Working with Files chapter in this guide e Qnet
56. Reference Chapter 6 e Working with Files 125 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems dev random dev sem dev sern dev shmem dev slog dev socket dev text Read from this device to obtain random data see random in the Utilities Reference A pathname space where entries for named semaphores appear Serial ports See stty for configuration and devc ser for driver details in the Utilities Reference Contains files representing shared memory regions on the system also sometimes used for generic memory mapped files For more information see the description of the RAM filesystem in Working with Filesystems A device managed by slogger used to read or write system log messages Try sloginfo dev slog See slogger and sloginfo in the Utilities Reference for more information This directory is owned and managed through the TCP IP stack npm tcpip so or npm ttcpip so running under io net This directory contains pathnames through which applications interact with the stack For more information see the TCP IP Networking chapter in this guide This file is managed by procnto Text written to this device is output through debug output routines encoded in the startup code for your system The actual result therefore varies from board to board On a standard PC using startup BIOS the default is to write to the PC console For more information see startup in the Utili
57. Sticky Options none October 6 2005 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 387 CVS basics 2005 QNX Software Systems Changing files When we created foo c we didn t put any comments in We should probably fix that Using your favorite editor add the following line to the top of foo c This is a file to test cvs Now look at the status File foo c Status Locally Modified Working revision 1 1 Tue Jun 3 17 14 55 2003 Repository revision 1 1 home fred cvs myproj foo c v Sticky Tag none Sticky Date none Sticky Options none The status has changed to Locally Modified This is your signal that you ve made changes but have yet to tell CVS about them Let s do that now cvs commit foo c As before an editor appears asking for a log message This is a little different from when adding a file This time it s the reason for that change or a quick synopsis of what the change is Again it s free from so you can add what you like We ll say Added comments for clarity Save and exit The status is now File foo c Status Up to date Working revision 1 2 Tue Jun 3 17 30 49 2003 Repository revision 1 2 home fred cvs myproj foo c v Sticky Tag none Sticky Date none Sticky Options none 388 Chapter 17 e Using CVS October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems CVS basics More information on files what changed and why October 6 2005 The revision number is 1 2 instead of 1 1 We now have t
58. Systems Utilities Give us the tools and we will finish the job Sir Winston Churchill Once the shell has processed all of its special characters what remains typically consists of commands and the arguments to them Most commands correspond to executable files somewhere on your system although some such as ed are built into the shell It s possible for you to have more than one executable file with the same name on your system The shell uses the PATH environment variable to determine which version to use The value of PATH is a list of directories separated by colons in the order in which you want the shell to search for executables To see the value of your PATH type echo PATH A N CAUTION You can put your current directory in your PATH but it can leave you vulnerable to Trojan horse programs For example if is at the beginning of your PATH the shell looks in the current directory first when trying to find a program A malicious user could leave a program called 1s in a directory as a trap for you to fall into If you want to have your current directory in your PATH make sure that you put it after the directories that hold the common utilities For information about setting your PATH see Environment variables in Configuring Your Environment If you want to know which version of a command the shell will choose use the which command For example which ls bin 1s
59. TCP IP 259 RPC Remote Procedure Call 230 rpcbind 230 RS 232 protocol 336 rshd 265 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index runas DOS command 59 rwhod 266 character while booting 165 file extension 140 s file extension 140 SAMBA printing over 280 492 sandbox 384 savercfg 85 sbin 134 135 scanning for consistent data chkfsys 424 schtasks DOS command 59 SC_OPEN_MAX 466 screen clearing 39 printing 107 screensavers 85 scripts CGI 371 376 perl 376 shell 53 Scroll Lock 75 SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface 313 320 search permission 137 secondary boot loader 164 security CGI scripts 372 firewalls 441 497 general 435 inetd 264 October 6 2005 IPSec 440 message passing 439 Neutrino specific 439 password database 20 PATH 54 pdebug 439 printing 285 protecting encrypted passwords 21 qeonn 439 Qnet 246 440 random numbers for encryption 176 setuid and setgid commands 139 436 Trojan horse programs 54 437 viruses 437 web server 374 sed 206 seedres 167 self 133 sem 126 semaphores limits 473 named manager procnto 162 pathname space 126 sendmail 5 separators shelf 74 ser 352 serial mice 324 333 serial ports 114 126 multiport 337 performance 337 Server Side Includes See SSI servers CVS 394 Index 557 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems font 105 125 Internet super server 264 Photon 106 125 PPPoE 268 running chkfsys on 424 TCP IP 257 we
60. The QNX 4 filesystem achieves high throughput without sacrificing reliability This has been accomplished in several ways While most data is held in the buffer cache and written after only a short delay critical filesystem data is written immediately Updates to directories inodes extent blocks and the bitmap are forced to disk to ensure that the filesystem structure on disk is never corrupt i e the data on disk should never be internally inconsistent Sometimes all of the above structures must be updated For example if you move a file to a directory and the last extent of that directory is full the directory must grow In such cases the order of operations has been carefully chosen such that if a catastrophic failure e g a power failure occurs when the operation is only partially completed the filesystem upon rebooting would still be intact At worst some blocks may have been allocated but not used You can recover these for later use by running the chkfsys utility For more information see the Backing Up and Recovering Data chapter DOS filesystem The DOS filesystem provides transparent access to DOS disks so you can treat DOS filesystems as though they were Neutrino POSIX 224 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems CD ROM filesystem filesystems This transparency lets processes operate on DOS files without any special knowledge or work on their part The fs
61. You can use command line options to get more information 54 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Utilities which laf ls rwxrwxr x 1 root root 19272 May 03 2002 bin 1s If you try this for a command that s built into the shell which can t find it which cd which no cd in bin usr bin usr photon bin opt bin The whence command displays what the command means to the shell including any aliases in effect For example if you ve created an alias for 1s the output might be whence ls ls F Understanding command syntax October 6 2005 Whenever you look up a command in the Utilities Reference you ll see a syntax statement that summarizes how you can use the command For most commands this statement consists of command_name The name of the command to be executed This may be the name of an executable program such as a utility or it may be the name of a command built into the shell options The specific behavior that you want to invoke for the command Options typically consist of an alphanumeric character preceded by a hyphen e g c Some options take an argument e g n number If you specify an option that takes an argument you must include its argument as well operands Data the command requires e g a filename Ifa command lets you enter multiple operands they re usually processed in the order you list them Unlike options operand
62. all other nodes on your local subnetwork that are running Qnet You can access files and processes on other machines as if they were on your own computer at least as far as the permissions allow For example to display the contents of a file on another machine you can use less specifying the path through net less net alonzo etc TIMEZONE To get system information about all of the remote nodes that are listed in net use pidin with the net argument pidin net You can use pidin with the n option to get information about the processes on another machine pidin n alonzo less You can even run a process on another machine using your console for input and output by using the option to the on command on f alonzo date Troubleshooting 248 All the software components for the Qnet network should work in unison with the hardware to build a native network If your Qnet network isn t working you can use various Qnet utilities to fetch diagnostic information to troubleshoot your hardware as well as the network Some of the typical questions are Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting e Is Qnet running e Are io net and the drivers running e Is the Qnet protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed e Is the network card functional e How do I get diagnostic information e Is the Qnet version correct e Is the hostname uni
63. any packet if they are not matching above 2 This basically make ICMP packet being mapped I H HHH rdr en1 10 9 0 1 32 port 80 gt intra qnx com port 80 tcp This rdr rule says that if someone tries to access port 80 on 10 9 0 1 redirect it to intra qnx com October 6 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 499 Glossary October 6 2005 Glossary 501 2005 QNX Software Systems administrator alias atomic See superuser A shell feature that lets you create new commands or specify your favorite options For example alias my_ls 1ls F creates an alias called my_1s that the shell replaces with 1s F Of or relating to atoms In operating systems this refers to the requirement that an operation or sequence of operations be considered indivisible For example a thread may need to move a file position to a given location and read data These operations must be performed in an atomic manner otherwise another thread could preempt the original thread and move the file position to a different location thus causing the original thread to read data from the second thread s position BIOS ROM Monitor extension signature budget October 6 2005 A certain sequence of bytes indicating to the BIOS or ROM Monitor that the device is to be considered an extension to the BIOS or ROM Monitor control is to be transferred to the device by the BIOS or ROM Monitor with the expectation that the device will p
64. appear in the dev directory as serx where x is an integer There may be more than one entry in dev under the name ser Assume that the first two represent the comm ports of the system Any additional entry is likely the modem However if in doubt try all ser entries with qtalk For more information see Testing Modems below If the modem isn t detected seek out the isapnp utility to configure the modem s I O port and IRQ and then specify them when you start devc ser8250 If you start a serial driver for a UART or modem when another serial driver is already running you need to use the u option to give the new driver a number to append to the device name so that it doesn t conflict with any existing dev ser entry PCl based modems The devc ser8250 driver should automatically detect the modem which should appear in the dev directory as serx where x is an integer If no entry is created check the output from pei vvv and see what I O port and IRQ are assigned to the modem Use the correct I O port and IRQ from pei vvv to start deve ser8250 When you use the appropriate I O port and IRQ the dev directory entry gets created for you External modems October 6 2005 External modems are easy to set up Look in the dev directory for the serial port that the modem is attached to You ll attach this at the back of the system If you know the modem is attached to serial port 1 then look in the
65. as to avoid the damaged areas In this case some data will be lost but with some effort you can recover a large portion of the affected data Backup strategies Your backup strategy will consist of making one or more backups on a periodic or triggered basis For each backup you incorporate in your strategy you have to choose e the storage media and location of the backup data e how to archive and optionally compress your data e the contents and frequency or trigger condition of the backup e automated versus manual backup e local versus remote control of the backup Often a comprehensive backup strategy incorporates some backups on the local side i e controlled and stored on the same machine that the data is located on and others that copy data to a remote machine For example you might automatically back up a developer s data to a second hard drive partition on a daily basis and have a central server automatically back up the developer s data to a central location on a weekly basis Choosing backup storage media and location 400 Early in the process of determining your backup strategy you re likely to choose the location of your data backups and the media to store the backups on because these choices are the primary factors that affect the hardware and media costs associated with the system Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Backup strategies To ma
66. blue text 1 ona light gray background 7 You can also define the exact RGB values for all the 16 colors that pterm uses by creating a palette file For more information see pterm in the Utilities Reference When I change the language setting under Localization nothing changes Why This setting sets the ABLANG environment variable which some applications use to determine what language they should use Some applications may not support the language you ve selected Changing the setting typically doesn t affect applications that are running just new ones How can I disable the shelf If you just want to close the shelf in your current Photon session you can shut it down it using shelf e A more permanent approach is to set the PHSHELF DISABLE environment variable to 1 You can do this in your profile file with export PHSHELF _DISABLE 1 110 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 Chapter 6 Working with Files In this chapter Everything is a file 113 Filenames and pathnames 114 Where everything is stored 121 File ownership and permissions 136 Filename extensions 140 Troubleshooting 144 October 6 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 111 2005 QNX Software Systems Everything is a file This chapter concentrates on working with files in the QNX 4 filesystem which is the default under Neutrino and is compatible with the older QNX 4 OS For more information see the Working with F
67. by partition type It recognizes e CD ROMs e types 1 4 6 11 12 14 DOS e type 131 Ext2 if the e option is passed to diskboot e type 77 78 79 QNX 4 77 and 78 indicate secondary partitions These are mounted as s cdx for CD ROMs and s hdx type y where x is a disk number e g s cd0 s hd1 and y is added for uniqueness as it counts upwards For example the second DOS partition on hard drive 1 would be fs hd1 dos 2 By default one QNX 4 partition is mounted as instead This is controlled by looking for a diskroot file on each QNX 4 partition If only one such partition has a diskroot file specifying a mountpoint of that partition is unmounted as s hdx type y and is then mounted as if more than one is found then diskboot prompts you to select one The diskroot file is usually empty but it can contain some commands For more information see below Optionally diskboot runs the fat embedded shell fesh Next diskboot starts the console driver devc con Finally diskboot runs the main system initialization script etc system sysinit 168 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems diskroot diskroot The diskboot program uses the diskroot file to determine which QNX 4 partition to mount as The diskroot file can be one of e a0 length file This is the default which requests a mountpoint of f e a one line file that specifie
68. can t be loaded dynamically 198 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Customizing Photon fontdynamic A fallback file if font traplist doesn t exist This file specifies fonts that are loaded dynamically and has the same format as fontdir fontext A set of extension rules to handle character dropouts i e missing characters fontkey Used to trim specific keywords from the font foundry names fontmap Font mappings for the system For detailed information about the format of this file see phfont fontopts Command line options one option per line for invoking the appropriate font server fontorient Keywords used to identify Asian Oriental font foundry names Used to optimize the extension system fontpreferred The preferred Asian font to attempt to use first for Asian Oriental extension processing font traplist A dynamic list of fonts The ph script regenerates this file if it doesn t exist or if the contents of the font _repository have changed Each entry in the font traplist file contains information such as the name and type of the font its size and style a textual description of the font family and the range of characters defined within the font You may uninstall fonts specified in this file by deleting entries in etc system config font traplist To install a new font on your system drop the font files into the font_repository directory T
69. character set 121 PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED 467 pei 266 312 PCI BIOS 167 cards 327 indexes 266 modems 353 server 125 550 Index pei bios 167 344 pel cfg 300 PC_LLINK_MAX 467 PCMAX CANON 467 PCMAXINPUT 467 PCMCIA 327 PCNAME MAX 220 465 467 PC_NO_TRUNC 468 PC_PATH_ MAX 467 PC_PIPE_BUF 467 PC_VDISABLE 468 pdebug security and 439 ped 150 performance improving 139 449 perl 206 scripts 376 permissions 136 411 etc pwlock 20 etc group 20 etc passwd 20 etc shadow 20 account database 20 default setting 139 185 groups 18 30 31 root 18 setting 31 207 220 pfm 85 file associations 109 pfr file extension 140 198 pg UNIX command 3 ph directory 184 ph script 20 177 356 phapps 83 197 Phditto 97 disabling 85 PHEXIT DISABLE 105 phf file extension 140 198 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index phfont 140 PHFONT 105 PHFONTMEM 106 PHFONTOPTS 106 PHFONT_USE_EXTERNAL 105 PHGFX 106 phgrafx 84 356 Phindows 97 98 PHINPUT 106 PHINSTANCE 106 phlip 84 258 354 phlocale 59 84 128 132 190 phlogin phlogin2 12 20 32 105 configuration files 130 phmenu 82 PHOTON 106 359 Photon 69 applications launching on startup 83 BMP creating 300 colors 83 computers connecting to other 97 configuration files 130 disabling 131 176 draw stream 299 editor ped 150 events 69 executables location of 135 exiting 103 109 file manager 85 fonts 197 graphics settings 84
70. characters may have special meaning to the shell depending on their context If you want a command line to include any of the special characters that the shell processes then you may have to quote these characters to force the shell to treat them as simple characters You must quote the following characters to avoid their special interpretation I amp 7 Tab Newline Space You might need to quote the following characters depending on their context within a shell command _ In order to quote You can A single character Precede the character with a single backslash character All special characters within a Enclose the whole string in string of characters single quotes All special characters within a Enclose the whole string in string except for and double quotes For example these commands search for all occurrences of the string QNX Neutrino in the chapter1 html file grep QNX Neutrino chapterl html grep QNX Neutrino chapterl html grep QNX Neutrino chapterl html However note that grep QNX Neutrino chapterl html doesn t do what you might expect as it attempts to find the string QNX in the files named Neutrino and chapter1 html Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 51 Shell 2005 QNX Software Systems 52 Depending on the complexity of a command you might have to nest the quoting For example find name html xargs grep 1 QNX Ne
71. com The class codes that appear in the output from pei vvv are Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 331 USB devices 2005 QNX Software Systems Class Code Controller Type 0c0300 UHCI 0c0310 OHCI 0c0320 EHCI There might be multiple chips and therefore multiple drivers that you need to load You can also try running just one of the USB stacks if it fails try running another stack Log in as root and start the io usb stack with the appropriate module e OHCI controller devu ohci so e UHCI controller devu uhci so e EHCI controller devu ehci so This should create an entry in dev called dev io usb io usb If you re starting the USB stack and a driver in your startup scripts make sure that you use the wait for command to make sure that dev io usb io usb has appeared before you start the driver For example io usb dohci waitfor dev io usb io usb devu prn When the stack is running start the device drivers as described below USB hubs don t need a driver the stack itself supports them 332 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems USB devices Printers For a USB printer start the USB stack and then devu prn For example io usb dohci waitfor dev io usb io usb devu prn Mice and keyboards October 6 2005 Currently there s no support for USB keyboards in text mode but Intel machines can use BIOS emulation
72. commit affects the time it takes to create and delete a file on an x86 PII 450 machine with a UDMA 2 EIDE disk running a QNX 4 filesystem The table shows how many OK files could be created and deleted per second commit level Numbercreated Number deleted high 866 1221 medium 1030 2703 low 1211 2710 none 1407 2718 Note that at the commit high level all disk writes are synchronous so there s a noticeable cost in updating the directory entries and the POSIX mt ime on the parent directory At the commit none level all disk writes are time delayed in the write behind cache and so multiple files can be created deleted in the in memory block without requiring any physical disk access at all so of course any power failure here would mean that those files wouldn t exist when the system is restarted This example illustrates how the record size affects sequential file access on an x86 PIII 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using 458 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filesystems the QNX 4 filesystem The table lists the rates in megabytes per second of writing and reading a 256M file Record size Writing Reading 1K 14 16 2K 16 19 4K 17 24 8K 18 30 16K 18 35 32K 19 36 64K 18 36 128K 17 37 Note that the sequential read rate doubles based on use of a suitable record size This is because the overheads of context switching and message passing are reduced cons
73. daemon The rpebind server maps RPC program version numbers into TCP and UDP port numbers Clients can make RPC calls only if rpcbind is running on the server The nfsd daemon reads the etc exports file which lists the filesystems that can be exported and optionally specifies which clients those filesystems can be exported to If no client is specified any requesting client is given access The nfsd daemon services both NFS mount requests and NFS requests as specified by the exports file Upon startup nfsd reads the etc exports hostname file or if this file doesn t exist etc exports to determine which mountpoints to service Changes made to this file don t take affect until you restart nfsd NFS client An NFS client requests that a filesystem exported from an NFS server be grafted onto its local namespace For the client to work you need to start the version 2 or 3 of the NFS filesystem manager fs nfs2 or fs nfs3 first The file handle in version 2 is a fixed size array of 32 bytes With version 3 it s a variable length array of 64 bytes The fs nfs2 or fs nfs3 filesystem manager is also the NFS 2 or NFS 3 client daemon operating over TCP IP To use it you must have an NFS server and you must be running a TCP IP transport layer such as that provided by io net with npm ttcpip so It also needs socket so and libc so 230 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Package f
74. desktop system the buildfile specifies four consoles when it starts diskboot For more information see the description of diskboot in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter The maximum number of virtual consoles is nine The tiny console driver devc tcon supports only one console The root user can also specify the program if any that s initially launched on each console The terminal initialization utility tinit reads etc config ttys to determine what to launch on the consoles By default tinit launches a login command on the first console only but tinit is armed to launch a login on any other console on which you press a key This means that while console 1 is always available the other consoles aren t used unless you specifically switch to one of them and press a key If you increase the number of consoles on your machine make sure you edit etc config ttys so that tinit will know what to start on the additional consoles Each virtual console can be running a different foreground application that uses the entire screen The keyboard is attached to the virtual console that s currently visible You can switch from one virtual console to another and thus from one application to another by entering these keychords Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 41 Shell 2005 QNX Software Systems Shell If you want to go tothe Press Next active console Ctrl Alt Enter or Ctrl Alt
75. detect your video card We provide crttrap as a convenience utility in a static hardware environment embedded board you shouldn t need it Ensure you have a graphics modes file or the correct command line in your startup scripts to start your video card Don t run crttrap while you re running Photon The crttrap program queries the card to get all of its possible configurations and creates a file called etc system config graphics modes that you can edit The first line in this file is the one that io graphics uses For information about the different graphics options see ioe graphics in the Utilities Reference In an embedded system you don t need to use crttrap to get the configuration because it isn t likely to change Instead you can call io graphics directly specifying the appropriate options For example io graphics dl devg rage so options Neutrino s default setup starts the graphics driver for you via the ph script located in usr bin Changing video modes in Photon 356 To change the video modes of your graphics adapter in Photon use the Display Configuration tool You can start it by typing phgrafx on the command line by selecting Graphics from the shelf or by choosing Launch Configure Graphics Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Video cards To change the video modes 1 Select the configuration that you want to use 2 Clic
76. dev directory for ser1 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 353 Modems 2005 QNX Software Systems Cable Modems ISDN We assume that your cable modem is attached to your system via a network card and that the driver for your card has been started and is running properly If this isn t the case see Network adapters earlier in this chapter To set your configuration use the TCP IP configuration tool You can start it by typing phlip on the command line by selecting Network from Photon s shelf or by choosing Launch Configure Network Then do the following 1 Go to the Devices tab and use these settings e Choose eno e Choose DHCP for the connection e Inthe Server field enter the machine ID given by the cable network operator 2 Go to the Network tab and use these settings e Use the machine ID as the hostname e Set the domain name to be the domain name of your cable network operator e Set the gateway to be the IP address of your cable network operator e The default netmask 0 0 0 0 is filled in automatically e Inthe Name Servers field add any IP addresses you know there may be more than one The first entry should be the IP address of your cable operator 3 Reboot your machine DHCP will start automatically Testing modems You can use qtalk to test your modem 1 Make sure the modem is plugged into the phone line 354 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX
77. devce par 338 devce ser8250 335 352 353 deve tcon 12 41 devctl 457 462 devf 227 devg matroxg so 358 devg radeon so 358 devg vesabios so 365 devh ps2ser so 333 devh usb so 333 334 devi dyna 325 devi hid 333 devi hirun 324 devi microtouch 334 devices block special mounting 216 enumerating 131 134 172 279 311 337 Index 531 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems pathnames 124 Photon 106 125 terminals 127 unmounting 216 devn klsi so 334 devp pecard 327 devu ehci so 332 devu ohci so 332 devu prn 333 devu uhci so 332 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 128 261 267 270 dhcp client 261 dhcpd 265 dhcpd conf 128 diacritical marks 59 151 156 dietician 462 diff CVS command 389 Digital Subscriber Line See DSL dinit 218 219 412 414 421 453 dir DOS command 59 directories archiving 403 404 changing 117 checking structure 422 contents of root directory 414 creating 58 current 116 222 417 changing 58 determining 45 58 PATH 54 prompt including in 489 defined 113 415 entries 415 type 416 532 Index group ownership 136 home 18 20 22 26 28 46 184 links to 222 circular preventing 224 listing contents of 58 managing 85 moving 58 network 243 ownership 136 parent 116 222 417 permissions 136 platform specific 123 print spooling 285 299 QNX 4 signature 417 recovering lost 423 removing 58 removing without returning used blocks 422 renaming 58 spill 136 234 str
78. device the driver creates an entry in the dev directory e g a hard drive appears as hdx where x is the number of the drive starting from 0 For example suppose a system has two hard drives installed The driver creates the following entries in the dev directory dev hdo Usually the primary master dev hd1 Usually the primary slave or the next drive on the system the secondary master If the system has one hard drive and a CD ROM the entries are 316 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Hard disks dev hd0 The primary master dev cd0 The CD ROM drive A slave drive must have a master drive When the driver starts it displays on the console the type of detected hardware along with other debugging information that gets sent to the system logger slogger To view the system log run sloginfo When you view the output from sloginfo there will likely be a number of ASC_MEDIA_NOT_PRESENT entries The driver logs these messages if there isn t a CD in the CD ROM drive You can generally ignore them Troubleshooting for devb eide October 6 2005 If the driver doesn t detect the interface or drives attached to it e Check the supported hardware part of our website to see if the interface is supported see the introduction to this chapter Even if your interface isn t listed as being supported the EIDE controller can work in a generic mode that
79. devices 127 drivers 338 initializing 41 178 Photon 37 100 pseudo 125 raw input buffer 467 remote session daemon 265 October 6 2005 type setting 38 66 200 terminfo 38 66 200 test shell command 64 texinfo documentation files 140 text files 140 text mode booting into 131 176 disabling 105 textto 4 212 tftpd 265 tgt files 77 tgz file extension 406 third party repository editors 152 man 140 perl 206 troff 140 threads 3 data sharing 374 idle 450 limits 472 priority 57 450 472 state 451 throughput filesystem 455 tic 38 200 tilde expansion 46 time daylight saving time 196 displaying 74 setting 74 84 201 zone abbreviations 196 Central Europe 195 default 193 Eastern 193 Japanese 195 Newfoundland 195 Index 561 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems offset from UTC 196 Pacific 194 setting 171 190 201 world wide 132 193 zone setting 84 time DOS command 59 TIME DOS variable 63 timers limits 472 timezone 196 TIMEZONE file 171 190 tinit 41 127 176 178 titles window 83 tmp 134 TMP DOS variable 63 TMPDIR 63 185 187 toc file extension 140 touchscreens 325 calibrating 325 USB 334 tracerpt DOS command 59 tracert DOS command 59 training 477 transmissions aborted 349 underruns 349 Transparent Distributed Processing 241 Software Kit 245 trap file input 324 troff 140 Trojan horse programs 54 437 troubleshooting after unexpected system failure 424 bo
80. drag and drop operations for example you can drag a file to a folder to move it there You can right click a file or folder to view a shortcut menu that contains the available commands At the top of the File Manager are two text boxes that you can use to navigate and filter directory listings You can type a path name directly into the Path box to jump to that directory To view only files of a certain type or that start with a specific character use the Filter box For example enter p to view only files that start with the letter p or enter ps to view only files that have the ps suffix You can use the Photon File Manager menus to perform many file management tasks The toolbar at the top of the File Manager provides shortcuts for some commonly used commands For more information see pfm in the Utilities Reference You can view a listing of the most common keyboard shortcuts in File Manager by selecting Help Quick Reference You can also view all currently defined bookmarks in a panel by clicking the Bookmarks toolbar shortcut Some of these commands are also available from the right click menu in File Manager Getting help with the Helpviewer You can use the Photon Helpviewer to display our product documentation The documentation is organized under the usr help product directory To open the Helpviewer click the Help button in the Applications group on the shelf or select Help from the right click shortcut menu on t
81. e If you ve attached your printer to your machine s parallel port you can use either the lpr family or spooler In this case the device enumeration that the system does when it boots automatically starts spooler see Device enumeration in Controlling How Neutrino Starts We supply configuration files in etc printers for the most commonly used printers If you want to use the lpr family you have to set up the printer configuration file etc printcap Chapter 14 e Printing 279 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems If you want to use a network printer or a printer that s attached to another node s parallel port you need to use a TCP IP network for the lpr family spooler can use Qnet SAMBA NCFTP or even the lpr family to print on remote printers In order to print remotely you have to set up some configuration files whether you use the lpr family or spooler If you want to print from a Photon application e g helpviewer voyager you need to use spooler Another difference is that the 1pd daemon manages all of the defined printers spooler manages one printer but you can run more than one instance of spooler at a time Printing with lpr The lpr line printer system supports multiple printers multiple spooling queues both local and remote printers printers attached via serial lines that require line initialization e g baud rate To print a file using the line printer system y
82. e Using the Photon microGUI 99 Hotkeys and shortcuts 2005 QNX Software Systems Additional options You can use Phindows s command line options to e set compression and data caching options e connect to a remote Photon session e use a nonstandard color palette e span a single Photon session across multiple screens e share a Photon session with other users e create a shortcut to a Photon application on a Windows desktop For more information see the Phindows User s Guide Hotkeys and shortcuts pterm You can use many keyboard shortcuts and hotkeys to perform tasks quickly and easily The following tables show shortcuts for using pterm editing text fields in Photon applications managing windows working with the Photon workspace and others The Photon terminal emulator is called pterm It behaves like a character device driver see The keyboard at a glance in Using the Command Line If you re in typeover mode and you press Enter you return to insert mode The pterm program also supports the following shortcuts 100 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Hotkeys and shortcuts Text field October 6 2005 If you want to Press Copy selected text to the clipboard Paste selected text from the clipboard Toggle text selection Search help with selected text Set pterm options Scroll through buffered lines Increase or de
83. environment variables to provide information to the SSI command exec Using dynamic HTML clients can offer interactive realtime features on their web pages 372 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Dynamic HTML Clients can create dynamic HTML by placing SSI tokens in the HTML code of their web pages The SSI token contains a command that s handled by Slinger While transmitting the HTML code Slinger replaces a token with HTML data based on the tag contained in the SSI token For example the embedded server can e execute utilities at user defined points in an HTML document the output of these utilities can be optionally inserted into the document e insert contents of other HTML files at a user defined point e handle conditional statements e g if break goto so you can define what parts of an HTML file are transmitted For Slinger to process SSI tokens the HTML file must have shtm1 as its file extension You can use SSI tags to interact with a data server Syntax for SSI Commands October 6 2005 Here are some examples of SSI commands that you can use in your scripts lt echo var DATE_LOCAL gt Display the time and date lt echo var DATE_GMT gt Display the time and date using Greenwich Mean Time lt echo var REMOTE_ADDR gt Display the visitor s IP address lt echo var HTTP_USER_AGENT g
84. etc ppp chap secrets is as follows Client Server Secret Addresses allowed HEHE HE HE AE HE HE HE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE E HE FE FE FE E E FE FE FE ERR FE FE FE E E FE FE FE E E HE FE FE EE HE FE FE FE FE FE HH FE E HE HH HE password You can also extend the chat script that answers the modem to be a little more robust with specific events that should restart the answering service other than the events given You might want to add other features as well Here s the buildfile used to set up a machine to allow telnet connections to log in for shell access and tftp access for file transfer over PPP virtual x86 bios compress bootstrap startup bios K8250 2 8 0 57600 1843200 16 v PATH proc boot procnto vvv script startup script seedres pci bios amp waitfor dev pci Start 1 keyboard console devc con n8 amp Start serial A driver waitfor dev conl reopen dev conl devc ser8250 e b38400 waitfor dev serl pipe touch tmp syslog syslogd devc pty io net ppppmgr pttcpip waitfor dev io net ip ppp inetd amp display_msg She11 session PATH bin proc boot bin sh amp Make tmp point to the shared memory area type link tmp dev shmem Programs require the runtime linker ldqnx so to be at a fixed location type link usr lib ldqnx so 2 proc boot libc so type link bin sh bin ksh We use the c shared lib which also contains the
85. exposing your system to undue risk For example don t place your CGI scripts in the same directory as your regular system binaries because doing so could let people run any command on the machine that supports your web server Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 369 Running Slinger 2005 QNX Software Systems Use these environment variables to configure Slinger HTTPD_ROOT_DIR The name of the directory where Slinger looks for data files The default is usr local httpd HTTP_ROOT_ DOC The name of the root document When a web client requests the root document HTTPD_ROOT_DOC is appended to HTTPD_ROOT_DIR to build the full pathname of the root document The default is index html For example if HTTPD_ROOT_DOC is defined as index html and HTTPD_ROOT_DIR is defined as usr www Slinger appends index html to usr www to build usr www index html Once you ve decided on a directory structure you need to export these environment variables before starting Slinger export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr local httpd export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index html For information on setting environment variables when you login to your machine see Configuring Your Environment Running Slinger To run Slinger simply type slinger amp 370 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Dynamic HTML The Slinger web server communicates over TCP sockets so you need to have s
86. file is used only to control which hosts have access to the printers To allow access only to those remote users with accounts on the local host use the rs field in the printer s entry in etc printcap rs Network manager If you want to print on a remote printer you need to run the Neutrino network manager io net This manager loads shared objects DLLs to provide the protocols and device drivers needed For example to load the full TCP IP stack npm tcpip so anda device driver suitable for Ethernet adapters compatible with NE 2000 devn ne2000 so start io net like this io net dne2000 ptcpip 286 Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with lpr If you re using a TCP IP stack like this you might want to configure your network interface to specify the type and number of your NIC and the IP address and netmask for your TCP IP interface For more information see TCP IP Networking Printer capabilities etc printcap Before you can print anything the nodes must know something about the specific printer being used as a minimum where the printer is located A description of the printer is kept in a file named etc printcap on each node The etc printcap database contains one or more entries per printer This file isn t present when you first install Neutrino you have to create one to suit your printing needs This section describes the basic fields
87. for information on the others see etc printcap in the Utilities Reference A typical setup October 6 2005 Here s a basic etc printcap file that you can modify lptl tpptr printer in Docs department lp dev par1 sd usr spool output 1pt1 1 usr adm 1lpd errs mx 0 sh Each entry in the etc printcap file describes a printer Comments start with number sign An entry consists of a number of fields delimited by colons In the example above each field is on a separate line but you can string the fields together on one line as long as they each start and end with a colon Here s what each line means Chapter 14 Printing 287 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems lpti1 tpptr printer in Docs department The known names for the printer separated by bar characters The last name is the only name that can include spaces it s a long name that fully identifies the printer Entries may continue onto multiple lines by giving a backslash as the last character of a line Empty fields may be included for readability lp dev par1 The name of the device to open for output the default is dev 1p sd usr spool output 1pt1 The spooling directory the default is usr spool output 1pd Each printer should have a separate spooling directory if it doesn t jobs are printed on different printers depending on which printer daemon starts first By convention the nam
88. group 22 Each line in etc group is in this format groupname x group ID username username The fields are separated by colons and include groupname group ID The name of the group Like a user s name this can contain any characters except a colon but you should probably avoid any of the shell s special characters For more information see Quoting special characters in Using the Command Line The password for the group Neutrino doesn t support group passwords The numeric group ID username username The user names of the accounts that belong to this group separated by commas Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Account database Here s a sample entry techies x 123 michel ali sue jake etc shadow Each line in etc shadow is in this format username password 0 0 The fields are separated by colons and include username The user s login name password The user s encrypted password etc pwlock The passwd utility creates etc pwlock to indicate to other instances of passwd that the password file is currently being modified When passwd finishes it removes the lock file If you re the system administrator and you need to edit the account files you should 1 Lock the password database if the etc pwlock file doesn t exist lock the account files by creating it if it does exist wait un
89. helpviewer 86 hotkeys 100 loggingin 12 20 October 6 2005 logging out 13 multilingual applications 104 110 palette files 140 preferences 72 75 82 83 printing 299 rebooting 14 screensavers 85 server 125 shelf 71 disabling 110 modifying 72 shutting down 14 starting 69 178 applications starting 197 terminal 37 100 troubleshooting 107 web browser 91 window manager 82 configuration files 130 menu 82 option 83 workspace 69 photon directory 130 135 PHOTONOPTS 106 PHOTON PATH 106 phplay 140 phrelay 98 phrelaycfg 85 phs to 300 font maps 130 PHSHELF DISABLE 110 phshutdown 13 14 phuser 24 26 PHWM_ 106 PHWMEXIT 107 PHWMOPTS 107 Index 551 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems physical address space limits 472 console 40 338 display 105 memory 124 node IDs 341 pid process ID 3 proc directory 133 procnto 450 pidin 3 57 248 249 272 449 451 pin 328 ping 252 275 PIO Programmed Input Output 316 pipe 125 pipes 50 209 bytes writing atomically 467 manager starting 170 pkgetl 234 235 platforms directories 123 supported 7 pload so 75 Plug and Play modems 352 plugins arguments to 105 PnP BIOS 167 Point to Point Protocol See PPP Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet See PPPoE pointercam 75 Portable Archive Exchange See pax ports parallel 125 338 serial 114 126 multiport 337 552 Index performance 337 POSIX 3 PostScript 300 power outage recovering from 424 power turnin
90. in a filename as the QNX 4 filesystem see Filenames earlier in this chapter Setting up NFS October 6 2005 NFS consists of e aclient that requests that a remote filesystem be grafted onto its local namespace e a server that responds to client requests enabling the clients to access filesystems as NFS mountpoints The procedures used in Neutrino for setting up clients and servers may differ from those used in other implementations To set up clients and servers on a non Neutrino system see the vendor s documentation and examine the initialization scripts to see how the various programs are started on that system It s actually the clients that do the work required to convert the generalized file access that servers provide into a file access method that s useful to applications and users If you want to start an NFS filesystem when you boot your system put the appropriate command in etc host_cfg SHOSTNAME re d re local or etc re d re local For more information see the description of etc re d re sysinit in Controlling How Neutrino Starts Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 229 NFS filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems NFS server An NFS server handles requests from NFS clients that want to access filesystems as NFS mountpoints For the server to work you need to start the following programs Name Purpose rpebind Remote procedure call RPC server nfsd NFS server and mountd
91. in the Securing Your System chapter in this guide e Autodiscovery vs static in the Transparent Distributed Processing Using Qnet chapter of the Neutrino Programmer s Guide Creating useqnet To start Qnet automatically when you boot your system log in as root and create an empty useqnet file like this touch etc system config useqnet If this file exists your etc system sysinit script starts Qnet when you boot your machine If you need to specify any options to Qnet edit sysinit and change these lines Enable qnet if user has enabled it if test r etc system config useqnet a d dev io net then mount Tio net npm qnet so fi For example if the hardware is unreliable you might want to enable Cyclic Redundancy Checking on the packets Change the above lines to Enable qnet if user has enabled it if test r etc system config useqnet a d dev io net then mount Tio net npm qnet so do _crce 1 fi For more information about what happens when you boot your system see Controlling How Neutrino Starts 246 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Starting Qnet Starting the network manager protocols and drivers October 6 2005 The io net manager is a process that assumes the central role to load a number of shared objects It provides the framework for the entire protocol stack and lets data pass between modules In the case
92. in the Utilities Reference A directory that holds the default version of profile When you add a new user to the system this file is copied to the user s home directory For more information see the description of etc default passwd in the documentation for passwd and the description of profile in Configuring Your Environment A directory that includes files and directories used when you boot the system including e etc system sysinit the main script for initializing the system e etc system config nophoton a file indicating that you don t want to start Photon e etc system config useqnet a file indicating that you want to start Qnet For more information see the Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing chapter e etc system enum the location of configuration files for the enumerators For more information see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter For more information see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter Chapter 6 e Working with Files 131 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems ts home 1ib etc timezone A directory where phlocale looks for a list of possible time zones see Setting the time zone in Configuring Your Environment Additional filesystems are mounted under s See Working with Filesystems in this guide and devb and mount in the Utilities Reference This directory can include s cdn CD ROM filesy
93. in the document directory 374 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Examples e Isolate your data files directory from the system files directory For example usr www is much safer than the root directory The root directory opens up your whole system to be served by Slinger If you configure Slinger to support CGI e Place the CGI scripts in a directory isolated from your normal system binaries Don t use bin or usr bin as your CGI directory e Avoid setting your CGI script file permissions to set user ID when executing when the file is owned by a privileged user for example root e Keep your CGI scripts and documents in separate directories This prevents people from accessing your scripts Don t expose your machine to undue risk Make sure that e The permissions on all the files and directories are read only e No files are owned by user ID 2 because Slinger runs at user ID 2 and you don t want Slinger to own the files These precautions will help prevent anybody from giving your machine a new password file or tampering with your web pages For more information see the Securing Your System chapter in this guide Examples Configuration October 6 2005 We recommend that you put your documents and scripts in separate directories In this example the documents are in the usr local httpd directory the root document is index html
94. info is written through to disk e on disk signatures and special key information to allow fast data recovery in the event of disk damage e 505 character filenames e multi threaded design Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems QNX 4 filesystem Extents Filenames October 6 2005 e client driven priority e same disk format as the filesystem under QNX 4 e support for files up to 2G 1 byte in size For information about the implementation of the QNX 4 filesystem see QNX 4 disk structure in the Backing Up and Recovering Data chapter in this guide In the QNX 4 filesystem regular files and directory files are stored as a sequence of extents contiguous sequences of blocks on a disk The directory entry for a file keeps track of the file s extents If the filesystem needs more than one extent to hold a file it uses a linked list of extent blocks to store information about the extents When a file needs more space the filesystem tries to extend the file contiguously on the disk If this isn t possible the filesystem allocates a new extent which may require allocating a new extent block as well When it allocates or expands an extent the filesystem may overallocate space under the assumption that the process will continue to write and fill the extra space When the file is closed any extra space is returned This design ensures that when files even sever
95. is 9 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Daylight saving time doesn t apply in this locale October 6 2005 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 195 Setting the time zone 2005 QNX Software Systems Programming with time zones Inside a program you can set the TZ environment variable by calling setenv or putenv setenv TZ PST8PDT 1 putenv TZ PST8PDT To obtain the value of the variable use the getenv function char tzvalue tzvalue getenv TZ You can get the value of CS_TIMEZONE by calling confstr like this confstr _CS_TIMEZONE buff BUFF_SIZE or set it like this confstr CS_SET CS_TIMEZONE JST 9 0O The tzset function gets the current value of TZ or CS_TIMEZONE if TZ isn t set and sets the following global variables daylight Indicates if daylight saving time is supported in the locale timezone The number of seconds of time difference between the local time zone and Coordinated Universal Time UTC tzname A vector of two pointers to character strings containing the standard and daylight time zone names Whenever you call ctime ctime_r localtime or mktime the library sets tzname as if you had called tzset The same is true if you use the Z directive when you call strftime For more information about these functions and variables see the Neutrino Library Reference 196 Chapter 9 e Configuring Yo
96. it by changing the password or the login shell you can leave the files as they are Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 29 Managing other accounts 2005 QNX Software Systems e You can assign the files to another user find user user_name_or_ID chown new username e You can archive the files and optionally move them to other media find user user_name_or_ID pax wf archivefile e You can remove them find user user_name_or_ID remove CAUTION If you remove a user s account in the account database but don t remove or change the ownership of their files it s possible that a future account may end up with the same numeric user ID which would make the new user the owner of any files left behind by the old one Defining groups A user s account entry in etc passwd solely determines which group the user is part of on logging in while the groups a user is named in within the etc group file solely determine the groups the user may switch to after logging in see the newgrp utility As with user names and IDs the numeric effective group ID of a running program determines its access to resources For example if you have a team of people that require access to home projects on the system but you don t want the other users to have access to it do the following 1 Add a group called projects to the etc group file adding all necessary users to that group for details see Creating a new g
97. keys may behave differently from how they re described here depending on how you configure your system For more information see Character I O in the System Architecture guide Input modes Character device drivers run in either raw input mode or canonical or edited input mode In raw input mode each character is submitted to an application process as it s received in edited input mode the application process receives characters only after a whole line has been entered usually signalled by a carriage return Terminal support Some programs such as vi need to know just what your terminal can do so that they can move the cursor clear the screen and so on The TERM environment variable indicates the type of terminal that you re using and the usr 1ib terminfo directory is the terminal database In this directory you can find subdirectories a through z that contain the information for specific terminals Some applications use etc termcap the older single file database model instead of usr 1lib terminfo The default terminal is qansi m the QNX version of an ANSI terminal For more information about setting the terminal type see Terminal types in Configuring Your Environment 38 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Character device drivers Telnet If you re using telnet to communicate between two QNX machines QNX 4 or Neutrino use the 8 option to
98. limits apply to the entire system Processes A maximum of 4095 active at any time on ARM platforms the limit is 63 processes Prefix space resource manager attaches etc Limited by memory Sessions and process groups 4095 since you need at least one process per session or group Physical address space No limits except those imposed by the hardware see the documentation for the chip you re using These limits apply to each process e Number of threads 32767 e Number of channels 32767 e Number of timers 32767 e Priorities 0 through 255 Priority 0 is used for the idle thread by default priorities of 64 and greater are privileged so only processes with an effective user ID of 0 i e root can use them Non root processes can use priorities from 1 through 63 You can change the range of privileged priorities with the P option for procnto 472 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Other system limits File descriptors The total number of file descriptors has a hard limit of 32767 per process but you re more likely to be constrained by the F option to procnto or the RLIMIT_NOFILE system resource The default value is 1000 the minimum is 100 Sockets named semaphores message queues channel IDs chids and connection IDs coids all use file descriptors To determine the current limit use the ksh builtin command ulimit see the Utilit
99. link local IP address to use instead of relying on a central server Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 267 Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters 2005 QNX Software Systems Using PPPoE 268 PPPoE stands for Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet It s a method of encapsulating your data for transmission over a bridged Ethernet topology PPPoE is a specification for connecting users on an Ethernet network to the Internet through a broadband connection such as a single DSL line wireless device or cable modem Using PPPoE and a broadband modem LAN users can gain individual authenticated access to high speed data networks By combining Ethernet and the Point to Point Protocol PPP PPPoE provides an efficient way to create a separate connection to a remote server for each user Access billing and choice of service are managed on a per user basis rather than a per site basis It has the advantage that neither the telephone company nor the Internet service provider ISP needs to provide any special support Unlike dialup connections DSL and cable modem connections are always on Since a number of different users are sharing the same physical connection to the remote service provider a way is needed to keep track of which user traffic should go to where and which user should be billed PPPoE lets each user remote site session learn each other s network addresses during an initial exchange called discovery Once a session
100. microGUI because of its size and architecture Photon is a very small GUI It s designed to fit in embedded systems but it s also designed to be scaled up Photon is perfectly at home in high end high performance distributed systems Like Neutrino itself Photon is built around a small microkernel This modular architecture makes Photon fast flexible and inherently capable of network distributed computing Your workspace When you start Photon for the first time you re prompted to set up your graphics card and settings October 6 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 69 Overview of Photon 2005 QNX Software Systems When Photon starts you see your workspace which is an area where you can run applications The workspace consists of the taskbar the shelf and the desktop IB Welkome E Beta into Help internet amp Voyager WD ovoler connect utilities Bo File anager E caicutstor By Region ew eestor B Terminal BE Terminal char QNX Momentics D Find Ry system wfor G nage Viewer GP Snapshot Multimedia Games ED video Poker Othello E Columns h Peo Q sonare Configure System Monitor CD Player by Launch wed 20 anisonra Photon s workspace including the taskbar shelf and desktop The desktop is the main part of the screen It s where application windows appear In Photon the desktop is actually a view called a virt
101. must decide which hosts will be servers and which will be clients For example if you want to telnet from a machine you need to set it up as a client if you want to telnet fo a machine it has to be a server Hosts and gateways October 6 2005 In TCP IP terminology we always refer to network accessible computers as hosts or gateways Host A node running TCP IP that doesn t forward IP packets to other to other TCP IP networks a host usually has a single interface network card and is the destination or source of TCP IP packets Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 257 Overview of TCP IP 2005 QNX Software Systems Gateway A node running TCP IP that forwards IP packets to other TCP IP networks as determined by its routing table These systems have two or more network interfaces If a TCP IP host has Internet access there must be a gateway located on its network In order to use TCP IP you need an IP address and you also need the IP address of the host you wish to communicate with You typically refer to the remote host by using a textual name that s resolved into an IP address by using a nameserver Nameservers 258 A nameserver is a database that contains the names and IP addresses of hosts You normally access a TCP IP or Internet host with a textual name e g www qnx com and use some mechanism to translate the name into an IP address e g 209 226 137 1 The simplest way to do this mapping is to us
102. node and where they should be placed To get information about a package use the pkgcet1 utility Spill directory 234 The packages are read only and immutable The intent is to ensure that you can install packages such that there s never a collision between files in the repositories This lets multiple versions of software coexist on any one machine If you try to change a file that the package filesystem manages the file is transferred to the spill directory which contains all local modifications that have been made to used packages This operation is not surprisingly known as spilling and the files that you ve changed are called spilled files If the package filesystem s configuration file doesn t specify a location for the spill directory the package filesystem operates as a read only filesystem The default spill directory is var pkg spill Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Package filesystem As an example of spilling consider the passwd file After installing Neutrino you should choose a password for the root user it initially has no password When the passwd utility opens the passwd file for writing the package filesystem copies the file to the spill directory From this point on the package filesystem forwards all requests to the spill location rather than to the original file location in the package Virtual filesystem Actual filesyst
103. non PnP ISA PnP Internal modems can be ISA and are either Plug and Play PnP or not You have to manually set up non PnP ISA devices In order to identify your device you need to have the documentation for the device or be able to contact the device manufacturer to have it identified Currently there is no utility within Neutrino to obtain a list of ISA devices installed on your system Configure the modem to use an I O port and IRQ that don t conflict with anything else in the system The devc ser8250 driver should autodetect the modem and it should appear in the dev directory as serx where x is an integer There may be more than one entry under the name Assume that the first two entries represent the comm ports of the system Any additional entry is likely the modem If in doubt try all ser entries with qtalk For more information see Testing Modems below Entries will usually appear in this fashion Comml is enabled in the BIOS Comm2 is disabled Modem is configured to Comm2 s ioport and IRQ In the dev directory you ll see e serl Comml e ser2 Modem If you have an ISA PnP modem that can be manually assigned an IRQ and I O port via jumpers we recommend that you use the manual method rather than Plug and Play 352 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Modems The devc ser8250 driver should automatically detect the modem which should
104. of native networking the shared objects are npm qnet so and networking drivers such as devn ppc800 ads so The shared objects are arranged in a hierarchy with the end user on the top and hardware on the bottom CAUTION The device enumerator starts io net automatically when you boot and loads the appropriate drivers for the detected devices For information about customizing how the enumerator starts io net see Device enumeration in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide It s possible to run more than one instance of io net but doing so requires a special setup If you want to start io net by hand you should slay the running io net first You can start the io net from the command line telling it which drivers and protocols to load io net del900 p npm qnet amp This causes io net to load the devn e1900 so Ethernet driver and the Qnet protocol stack Or you can use the mount and umount commands to start and stop modules dynamically like this io net amp mount Tio net devn el1900 so mount Tio net npm qnet so To unload the driver type umount dev io net en0O Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 247 Checking out the neighborhood 2005 QNX Software Systems You can t unmount a protocol stack such as TCP IP or Qnet Checking out the neighborhood Once you ve started Qnet the net directory includes an entry for
105. of this section If the mount fails October 6 2005 If the mount fails the first portion of the QNX 4 partition is probably damaged since the driver will refuse to mount what it considers to be a corrupted filesystem In this case you can use the dinit utility to overlay enough good information onto the disk to satisfy the driver dinit hr dev hd0t79 The r option tells dinit to rewrite e the root block e the bitmap with all blocks allocated e the constant portions of the root directory Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 429 What to do if your system will no longer boot 2005 QNX Software Systems You should now be able to reissue the mount command and once again try to create a mountpoint for a QNX 4 filesystem called hd After doing this you ll need to rebuild the bitmap with chkfsys even on a good partition At least a portion of your QNX 4 filesystem should now be accessible You can use chkfsys to examine the filesystem and recover as much data as possible If the hard disk is mounted as hd e g the machine boots from CD enter path_on_CD chkfsys hd If the hard disk is mounted as e g a network boot enter network_path chkfsys In either case e If possible you should run chkfsys from somewhere other than the filesystem that you re trying to recover e Make note of any problems reported and allow chkfsys to fix as much as it can What you do next depe
106. on the QNX partition It displays the message Hit Esc for altboot If you let it time out the loader loads the operating system image file from boot if you press Escape the loader gets the image from altboot instead As the loader reads the image it prints a series of periods If an error occurs the loader prints one of the following characters and the boot process halts 164 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems diskboot s No OS signature was found D or An error occurred reading the disk The only difference between the default installed images is that boot uses DMA for accessing the EIDE controller while altboot doesn t You can find the buildfiles for these images in boot build e gqnxbasedma build for boot see the Examples appendix e qnxbase build for altboot You can t rename unlink or delete boot and altboot although you can change the contents or copy another file to these files For example these commands don t work mv altboot oldaltboot mv newboot altboot but these do cp altboot oldaltboot cp newboot altboot If you modify your boot image it s a good idea to copy your working image from boot to altboot then put your new image in boot That way if you make a mistake you can press Escape when you next boot and you Il have a working image for recovery diskboot October 6 2005 T
107. on whether or not you specified a specific PHY or if you let the driver select the default which varies from card to card Power Management State This value tells you the NIC s current power status Off Standby Idle or Active If you can t send or receive packets make sure the status is Active if it isn t there may be a problem with power management on your system Maximum Transmittable data Unit October 6 2005 The Maximum Transmittable data Unit MTU is the size of the largest frame length that can be sent on a physical media This isn t commonly used for debugging however it may be useful for optimizing a network application A value of 0 is invalid and is a good indicator that the card isn t set up correctly The default value is 1514 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 343 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems Maximum Receivable data Unit This is the MTU s complement it affects the largest frame length that can be received The default value is 1514 Receive Checksumming Enabled Transmit Checksumming Enabled Not all cards support these options If your adapter supports them they tell your card which check summing method to use IPv4 TCPv4 UDPv4 TCPv6 or UDPv6 Hardware Interrupt The hardware interrupt is the network card s interrupt request line IRQ How an IRQ is assigned depends on whether the card is a PCI or an ISA card In the case of a PCI card pei bios assigns th
108. on your system For example you can get the arguments used when starting the process the state of the process s threads and the memory that the process is using The number of threads doesn t effect system reaction time as much as the number of threads at a given priority The key to performing realtime operations properly is to set up your realtime threads with the priorities required to ensure the system response that you need Do you need to run Photon If not you can prevent Photon from starting when you boot Type touch etc system config nophoton and reboot This reduces the number of processes that the system runs when it starts Faster boot times Here are a few tips to help you speed up booting e If your system s setup is static you can set up its device drivers yourself instead of running the enumerators e Remove as much as you can from the system initialization files and from the OS image if necessary For more information see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide Filesystems Here are the basic steps to improving the performance of your filesystems October 6 2005 1 Optimize disk hardware and driver options This is most important on non x86 targets and systems without hard drives e g Microdrive Compact Flash Not using the fastest available DMA mode or degrading to PIO can easily affect Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 451 Filesystems 2005 QNX So
109. process The proc directory also includes proc boot The image filesystem that comprises the boot image For more information see Making an OS Image in Building Embedded Systems proc dumper A special entry that receives notification when a process terminates abnormally proc self The address space for yourself i e for the process that s making the query proc mount Pathname space mountpoints If you list the contents of the proc directory proc mount doesn t show up but you can list the contents of proc mount Chapter 6 e Working with Files 133 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems root sbin tmp usr The root directory is the home directory for the root user This directory contains essential system binaries including e drivers e g devb devc dev devp devu e enumerators e g enum devices e initialization programs e g diskboot seedres e configuration utilities e g dinit and repair utilities e g chkfsys chkdosfs e managers e g io net mqueue pipe Many of these files are used when you boot the system for more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts This directory contains temporary files Programs are supposed to remove their temporary files after using them but sometimes they don t either due to poor coding or abnormal termination You can periodically clean out extraneous temporary files when your syst
110. process manager This directory contains device files possibly including dev adn dev conn dev console dev f dn dev hdn dev hdntn dev io net dev mem CD ROM block devices see devb in the Utilities Reference for driver information Text mode console TTY device see devc con in the Utilities Reference The device that s used for diagnostic log messages on a full x86 system this is a write only device managed by the system logger slogger Buildfiles for embedded systems may configure a link from this path to another device such as a serial port See slogger in the Utilities Reference Floppy disk block devices see devb fde in the Utilities Reference for driver details Hard disk block devices data representing an entire drive spanning all partitions see devb in the Utilities Reference Hard disk partition block devices the data in these devices is a subset of that represented by the corresponding hdn file see devb in the Utilities Reference A directory owned and operated by io net under which you can find files relating to the network devices for your various LANs C programs can perform devcti operations on these files to interact with the driver e g to obtain driver statistics A device that represents all physical memory 124 Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Where everything is stored October 6 2005 dev mq de
111. process 1 is using 53 of the CPU Process 1 is always the process manager procnto In this case it s the idle thread that s using most of the CPU The entry for devb eide reflects disk I O The make utility is also using the CPU In the second iteration procnto and devb eide use most of the CPU but the next few iterations show that htmlindex a program that creates the keyword index for our online documentation gets up to 96 of the CPU When htmlindex finishes running procento and devb eide use the CPU while the HTML files are written Eventually procnto including the idle thread gets almost all of the CPU You might be alarmed that htmlindex takes up to 96 of the CPU but it s actually a good thing if you re running only one program it should get most of the CPU time If your system is running several processes at once hogs could be more useful It can tell you which of the processes is using the most CPU and then you could adjust the priorities to favor the threads that are most important Remember that in Neutrino priorities are a property of threads not of processes For more information see Priorities in the Using the Command Line chapter Here are some other tips to help you improve your system s performance Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Faster boot times e You can use pidin to get information about the processes that are running
112. remote printer name and IP address in the etc hosts file on the node you want to print from For example 10 2 0 4 tcpip_printer e Add an entry to describe the printer in the etc printcap file on the same node rlpt2 rm tcpip_printer rp ps sd usr spool output lpd rlpt2 This example shows that the name of the remote machine in this case the actual printer is tepip_printer and the spool directory is usr spool output 1pd rlpt2 Note that the remote printer is specified as ps which is the name some network printers use for accepting PostScript files You need to find out the name your printer wants you to use it may require different names for different types of print file format e g PostScript and text files Make sure you ve created your spool directory that s about it Follow the usual steps described in Local and remote printers and you should be able to print to your remote printer using a command line like this lpr Prlpt2 root junk ps This sends a PostScript file named root junk ps to the remote printer named tcpip_printer located at the IP address 10 2 0 4 298 Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with spooler Printing Setting up October 6 2005 To keep it simple we ve taken the easy way out in this example by sending a PostScript file to a PostScript printer It s easy because the formatting is embedded in the PostScript text You mi
113. savers and set the activation time a password and any command line options that the selected screen saver might have Browsing files with the File Manager Photon comes with a file manager pfm that lets you browse directories and files using a graphical interface To open the Photon File Manager click File Manager in the Applications group on the shelf or type pfm amp on the command line File Edit Go Bookmarks Help 2 9 G O RGI E ol l a Up Refresh Home Cut Copy Paste New Print Add Bookmarks Bookmarks Filename Size Date Owner Group Permissio Link ae The_official_Lex 554 223 01 08 2004 04 root root rw rw r Bevs 4 096 01 08 2004 02 root root rwx rwx F X small_coeffs h 01 08 2004 04 root root rw rW r snapl jpg 75 886 01 15 2004 11 root root rw rw r status txt 110 01 08 2004 04 root root rw rw r Mwnorm dat 01 08 2004 04 root root rw rwe Te workspace 01 08 2004 02 root root rwx rwx r x Q 7 items 623 5KB Photon File Manager The Photon File manager represents files and folders graphically Double click a folder to open it and display its contents double click October 6 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 85 Getting help with the Helpviewer 2005 QNX Software Systems a file to open it in an associated application if an association exists The File Manager also supports
114. server supplies options configuration parameters that dhcp client doesn t know how to apply dhcp client passes them to a script that it executes You can use this script to apply any options you want to use outside of those that dhcp client sets for you For more information see the entry for dhcp client in the Utilities Reference Using AutolP 270 AutoIP is a module that you must mount into io net It is used for quick configuration of hosts on a small network AutoIP assigns a link local IP address from the 169 254 16 network to its interface if no other host is using this address The advantage of using AutoIP is that you don t need a central configuration server The hosts negotiate Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Using the SRI SNMP suite for Neutrino among themselves which IP addresses are free to use and monitor for conflicts It s common to have a host employ both DHCP and AutoIP at the same time When the host is first connected to the network it doesn t know if a DHCP server is present or not If you start dhcp client with the a option apply IP address as an alias then both a link local IP address and DHCP IP address can be assigned to your interface at the same time If the DHCP server isn t present dhep client times out leaving the link local IP address active If a DHCP server becomes available later dhcp client can be restarted and a DHCP IP address
115. shell e sets the HOSTNAME PROCESSOR and SYSNAME environment variables if they aren t already set e adds the appropriate directories to the PATH environment variable the root user s PATH includes directories such as sbin that contain system executables e sets up the file permission mask umask see File ownership and permissions in Working with Files e displays the date you logged in the message of the day found in etc motd and the date you last logged in e sets the TMPDIR environment variable to tmp if it isn t already set e runs any scripts in the etc profile d directory as dot files i e instead of executing them as separate shells the current shell loads their commands into itself For more information about dot files see dot builtin command in the documentation for ksh in the Utilities Reference If you have a script that you want to run whenever anyone on the system runs a login shell put it in the etc profile d directory You must have root level privileges to add a file to this directory For example if you need to set global environment variables or run certain tasks when anyone logs in then this is the place to put a script to handle it If you re using sh as your login shell make sure that the script has a sh extension SHOME profile October 6 2005 The system runs HOME profile whenever you log in after it runs etc profile If you change your
116. so 2 b0300000 312K 16K npm tcpip so b8200000 592K 144K devn e1900 so b82b8000 56K 4096 devn epic so b82c7000 44K 4096 npm qnet 14_lite so b82d3000 132K 16K If the output includes an npm qnet shared object Qnet is running Is the Qnet protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed In order to ascertain the above use the following command ls dev io net Ideally you should see the following output eno ipod ip_en ipv6_en qnet_en The enO entry represents the first and only Ethernet driver and qnet en represents the Qnet protocol stack Is the network card functional 250 To determine whether or not the network card is functional i e transmitting and receiving packets use the nicinfo command If you re logged in as root your PATH includes the directory that contains the nicinfo executable if you re logged in as another user you have to specify the full path Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting usr sbin nicinfo Now figure out the diagnostic information from the following output 3COM 90xC 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet Controller Physical Node ID 000103 E8433F Current Physical Node ID 000103 E8433F Media Rate oo ioi enda e EE 10 00 Mb s half duplex UTP MTU eroa ere as A ee ere a Ea TE SAS 1514 TATE ee as ee SEE EP PEGE 0 I O Port Range 0xA800 gt OxA
117. software or any software which includes or is based upon any of this code is only permitted under the terms of the ONX Open Community License version 1 0 see licensing qnx com for details or as otherwise expressly authorized by a written license agreement from QSS For more information please email licensing qnx com Se Se Se Se OSE OE HHHH Sample of filter rules block in on enl all head 100 block return icmp host unr in proto tcp from any to 10 9 0 1 port 25 group 100 block return rst in proto tcp from any to 10 9 0 1 port 23 group 100 First line create a group head If a packet matched a group head rule the packet will only go through that group and skip other groups we set a group say we are interesting any packets coming in on enl interface The second line is saying if there is a TCP packet coming in through enl try to reach 10 9 0 1 port 25 smtp we block the packet and send a ICMP error HOST UNREACHABLE back The third line is almost the same as second except we are interesting in port 23 telnet and we will send a TCP RESET packet back Se te Se Se OSE OE HHH block in on en0 all head 200 pass in quick proto tcp from any to 10 9 0 1 port 8823 keep state group 200 block in log proto tcp udp from any to 10 9 0 1 32 port 20000 lt gt 40000 group 200 block in log body proto tcp from any to 10 9 0 1 32 flags S SA group 200 This is another set of rules rule group 200 Any packet coming in from e
118. standard utilities find information about users The encrypted password isn t stored in this file it s stored in etc shadow which only root has permission to read This helps prevent attempts to decrypt the passwords To protect the security of your user community make sure you don t change these permissions etc passwd October 6 2005 Each line in etc passwd is in this format username has pw userid group comment homedir shell The fields are separated by colons and include username The user s login name This can contain any characters except a colon but you should probably avoid any of the shell s special characters For more information see Quoting special characters in Using the Command Line has_pw This field must be empty or x If empty the user has no password if x the user s encrypted password is in etc shadow userid The numeric user ID group The numeric group ID Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 21 Account database 2005 QNX Software Systems comment homedir shell A free form comment field that usually contains at least the user s real name this field must not contain a colon The user s home directory The initial command to start after login The default is bin sh You can t specify any arguments to the login program Here s an sample entry from etc passwd fred x 290 120 Fred L Jones home fred bin sh etc
119. that you want to pass to grep xargs grep 1 QNX Neutrino Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Shell e The quoting also indicates when you want to execute the less command As given the shell passes the output from all of the invocations of xargs to less In contrast this command find name html xargs grep 1 QNX Neutrino less passes the command grep 1 QNX Neutrino less to xargs which will have quite different results if it works at all For more information see Quoting in the docs for ksh in the Utilities Reference History recalling commands The shell lets you recall commands that you ve previously entered use the T and J up and down arrows to move through the history buffer You can edit the command if you wish and then press Enter to reexecute it The shell also includes a builtin fe command that you can use to display and edit previous commands as well as an r alias to fc that reexecutes a previous command For example r string reexecutes the last command that starts with the given string Shell scripts You can enter shell commands into a text file called a shell script and then invoke the commands in batch mode by executing or shelling the file For more information see the Writing Shell Scripts chapter in this guide October 6 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 53 Utilities 2005 QNX Software
120. the filename is separated from the other information that describes a file Glossary 509 2005 QNX Software Systems interrupt An event usually caused by hardware that interrupts whatever the processor was doing and asks it do something else The hardware will generate an interrupt whenever it has reached some state where software intervention is required interrupt latency IPC IPL IRQ 510 Glossary The amount of elapsed time between the generation of a hardware interrupt and the first instruction executed by the relevant interrupt service routine Also designated as Tig Contrast scheduling latency Interprocess Communication the ability for two processes or threads to communicate Neutrino offers several forms of IPC most notably native messaging synchronous client server relationship POSIX message queues and pipes asynchronous as well as signals Initial Program Loader the software component that either takes control at the processor s reset vector e g location 0xFFFFFFFO on the x86 or is a BIOS extension This component is responsible for setting up the machine into a usable state such that the startup program can then perform further initializations The IPL is written in assembler and C See also BIOS ROM Monitor extension signature and startup code Interrupt Request a hardware request line asserted by a peripheral to indicate that it requires servicing by software The IR
121. the NIC Packets Transmitted OK This is the number of multicast packets transmitted from the NIC Memory Allocation Failures on Transmit Before transmitting data the driver reserves system memory for a buffer to hold the data to be transmitted Once the card is ready the buffer is sent to it When a memory allocation error occurs the system is likely very low on memory Make sure that there s sufficient memory on the system if you continuously get this error consider adding more memory Another thing to check for is memory leaks on the system which may be slowly consuming system memory Packets Received OK This value states how many packets were successfully received from the network card If a card is having problems receiving data check the cables and the hub connection Problems receiving data might be related to the driver It s possible the driver can be properly set up and able to send data but may not be able to receive Usually when data is received but doesn t get sent the driver is the cause Check the driver s setup to make sure it s initialized correctly Use sloginfo to check the system log for clues 346 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Network adapters Bytes Received OK This is the number of bytes of data received from the network This value increases with the number of packets received Single Collisions on Transmit This is the number of c
122. the cat command the OS loads cat from the image filesystem as well and opens the file datal Configuring an OS image You can create an OS image by using mkifs MaKe Image FileSystem For more information see Building Embedded Systems and mkifs in the Utilities Reference dev shmem RAM filesystem October 6 2005 Neutrino provides a simple RAM based filesystem that allows read write files to be placed under dev shmem This filesystem isn t a true filesystem because it lacks features such as subdirectories It also doesn t include and entries for the current and parent directories The files in the dev shmem directory are advertised as name special files S IFNAME which fools many utilities such as gzip and more that expect regular files S IFREG For this reason many utilities might not work for the RAM filesystem This filesystem is mainly used by the shared memory system of procnto In special situations e g when no filesystem is available you can use the RAM filesystem to store file data There s nothing to stop a file from consuming all free RAM if this happens other processes might have problems You ll use the RAM filesystem mostly in tiny embedded systems where you need a small fast temporary storage filesystem but you don t need persistent storage across reboots The filesystem comes for free with procnto and doesn t require any setup or device driver You can simply c
123. to support them Photon supports USB Human Interface Devices HID such as keyboards and mice To connect USB HIDs 1 Start the USB stack as described above 2 Start io hid loading the devh usb so module io hid dusb If your system also uses serial or PS 2 input devices you can load the devh ps2ser so module as well 3 After starting Photon start devi hid for the USB HID devices as follows devi hid kbd u USB_device_number mouse You can start io hid in your rc local file but not devi hid because Photon hasn t started when your system runs re local Instead add the devi hid command to the input trap file see inputtrap in the Utilities Reference In Photon once the devices are running you can use the input cfg utility to configure the mouse From the shelf click Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 333 USB devices 2005 QNX Software Systems Launch Configure Mouse You can use the hidview utility to get information about the human interface devices Touchscreens For USB touchscreens start the USB stack then io hid loading the devh usb so driver Then start devi microtouch io hid dusb devi microtouch microtouch touchusb Ethernet adapters For Ethernet adapters start the USB stack then io net loading the appropriate driver For example to start the driver for a Kawasaki based USB Ethernet adapter do the following io usb dohci waitfor dev io usb io usb io net dklsi options
124. uses programmed input output PIO modes which is slower but works in almost all cases e Ensure that the interface is correctly set up in the BIOS and that the BIOS can see the drives correctly e Check that the drives are set up correctly each slave drive must have a corresponding master as per the ATAPI specs A single chain can t have two master drives or two slave drives e Ensure that the power connection is functioning correctly e Pass the device ID and vendor ID to the driver e Pass the I O port and IRQ to devb eide Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 317 Hard disks 2005 QNX Software Systems Here are some other problems that you might encounter and what you should try e Ifthe driver hangs disable busmastering e g devb eide eide nobmstr e If you see sloginfo entries of eide_transfer_downgrade UDMA CRC error downgrading to MDMA reduce the transfer mode and check the cables e Ifyou see sloginfo entries of eide_timer timeout path XX device XX verify that the driver is using the correct interrupt reduce the transfer mode and check the cables e Ifa PCMCIA disk doesn t work when configured in contiguous T O mapped addressing i e 0x320 not 0x1 0 0x170 specify the interface control block address The control block address is offset 12 from the base If a PCMCIA interface is located at I O port 0x320 and IRQ 7 specify devb eide eide ioport 0x320 0x32c irq 7 noslave e If your devi
125. ve created the repository you need to edit these files in the CVSROOT directory readers A list of the users who can only read from the repository Chapter 17 e Using CVS 383 CVS basics 2005 QNX Software Systems writers A list of those who can read from and write to the repository A user can t be in both files Getting files in and out of the repository There are two ways of getting source into the repository adding new files or importing an existing directory tree Let s look at creating new files first Since we re going to be working with a new repository you have to first create the local working copy But there s nothing there is there You can check out the CVSROOT directory mentioned in the previous section as you can any other directory Since that s all you have you ll have to start with that You also need to make a place for the local copy which is called your sandbox because we all like playing in sandboxes right and put it in your home directory cd HOME mkdir sandbox cd sandbox Now we need to get our working copy of the repository cvs d HOME cvs checkout or cvs d HOME cvs get The dot for the filename translates to give me the entire repository You ll notice a directory called Cvs in every directory that you ve checked out CVS uses this directory to store information about where in the repository the files belong the versions of the files and
126. you press a keychord and in yet others you click a button or select an item from a menu One important distinction between the editors is whether they re text based or graphical Text based editors are more flexible because you can use them in text mode in a console window in Photon remotely via telnet or qtalk and so on graphical editors tend to be friendlier and easier to use but can run only in a graphical window If you start a graphical editor from the command line you ll probably want to start it as a background process by adding an ampersand amp to the command line so that you can continue to use the current window while the editor is still open If you re using a text based editor start it as a foreground process by omitting the ampersand Neutrino includes these editors vi A powerful but somewhat cryptic text based editor that you ll find in most if not all UNIX style operating systems ped The Photon editor an easy to use graphical editor Chapter 7 e Using Editors 147 Supported editors 2005 QNX Software Systems qed The QNX editor a fullscreen text based editor that has been around since the time of QNX 2 and still has many devotees We don t recommend that you use it but you can find out more about it in the QED Fullscreen Editor guide in your online documentation The QNX Momentics Professional Edition features an Integrated Development Environment IDE tha
127. 0 awk 140 206 b file extension 140 backdrops 84 135 backquotes 47 Backspace 39 backups 399 bad_blks 422 bad blocks bad_blks 422 determining severity 400 removing 422 bat file extension 140 batch files 59 140 October 6 2005 be bench calculator 140 bin 123 134 binary output files 140 bind ksh builtin 44 bind DNS resolver security 436 BIOS 161 extensions 163 PCI 167 PnP reading 167 UDMA mode 319 bit bucket 50 125 bitmap blocks 413 creating 421 bitmap disk allocation file 122 414 bitmap graphical images 140 bitmapped font files 140 bits QNX4FS_FILE_LINK 417 Bitstream TrueDoc Portable Font Resource files 140 198 bje cfg 300 block special files 114 blocks bad in middle of file 426 bitmap 413 examining withina file 426 extent 417 418 files and file extents 420 key components on disk 412 loader 413 421 partition block 421 recovering 224 422 423 root block 413 verifying allocation 422 BMP Index 525 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems converting Photon draw stream into 300 file extension 140 Board Support Packages See BSPs bookmarks 89 boot image 133 162 loader writing to disk 164 ROM 164 script 162 boot directory 123 boot file 122 164 413 414 bootable CDs 408 images 140 booting 161 applications starting 177 Ext2 filesystem can t boot from 226 Photon disabling 131 176 running chkfsys on servers 424 speeding up 451 troubleshooting 179 426 bootp 164 bootpd 26
128. 0 mA 2 0 0 0x03 HID 0x01 Boot interface 0x01 Keyboard Control 1 0 Control 8 1 Interrupt IN 8 20 ms 1 0 0x03 HID 0x01 Boot interface 0x02 Mouse Control 1 0 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems USB devices October 6 2005 Attributes Control Max Packet Size 8 The vendor and product fields indicate the type of device and possibly what chipset it uses The common types of USB controllers are UHCI Universal Host Controller Interface EHCI Enhanced Host Controller Interface OHCI Open Host Controller Interface made by others The EHCI controller supports high speed signalling only Either a OHCI or UHCI controller s should be present to support low or full speed devices If your system doesn t have an EHCI controller the device will work at the slower speed The operating system needs to run the stack in order to know how to interact with USB devices and controllers You need to 1 Identify your controller The documentation for the hardware should describe the type of controller OHCI UHCI or EHCI If you don t know what type of controller you re using you can identify it using pci vvv Find the entry for the USB controller to determine the manufacturer vendor ID and device ID You can either find the information on the manufacturer s website www usb org or use the vendor and device IDs to cross reference it at http www pcidatabase
129. 005 Input methods 200 Terminal types 200 Troubleshooting 200 Writing Shell Scripts 203 What s a script 205 Available shells 205 Running a shell script 207 Example of a Korn shell script 207 Efficiency 211 Caveat scriptor 211 Working with Filesystems 213 Introduction 215 Setting up starting and stopping a block filesystem Mounting and unmounting filesystems 216 Image filesystem 216 Configuring an OS image 217 dev shmem RAM filesystem 217 QNX 4 filesystem 218 Filesystem robustness 224 DOS filesystem 224 CD ROM filesystem 225 Linux Ext2 filesystem 226 Flash filesystems 227 CIFS filesystem 227 NFS filesystem 228 Setting up NFS 229 NFS server 230 NFS client 230 Package filesystem 231 Packages in their repositories 232 Spill directory 234 215 Contents ix 2005 QNX Software Systems Underlying filesystem 236 Control files 236 Patches 236 Inflator filesystem 237 Troubleshooting 237 12 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 239 What is Qnet 241 When should you use Qnet 241 Conventions for naming nodes 242 Software components for Qnet networking 244 Starting Qnet 245 Creating useqnet 246 Starting the network manager protocols and drivers 247 Checking out the neighborhood 248 Troubleshooting 248 Is Qnet running 249 Are io net and the drivers running 249 Is the Qnet protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed 250 Is the network card functional 250 How do I get diagnost
130. 2005 The maximum rate is the maximum theoretical burst interface throughput Sustained throughput depends on many factors such as the drive cache size drive rotation speed PCI bus and filesystem Don t expect a UDMA 6 drive to have a sustained throughput of 100M s e Check to make sure that the device you re attempting to connect can operate at the expected UDMA modes e Correct the assignment of primary secondary and master slave interfaces For example putting two hard drives as primary secondary rather than master slave on the primary may allow driver parallelism Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 319 Hard disks 2005 QNX Software Systems SCSI devices A SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface bus is simply another bus that you can attach multiple peripherals to Neutrino supports many brands and varieties of SCSI adapters see Block oriented drivers devb in the Summary chapter of the Utilities Reference When the SCSI driver starts up it scans the bus for attached devices When the driver finds a supported device it creates an entry in the dev directory e g a hard drive is hdx where x is the number of the drive starting from 0 If the driver doesn t find any devices it might not know the device ID of the adapter Passing the device ID and vendor ID to the driver often corrects this problem On a self hosted system you can pass these options to the driver via diskboot see Controlling How
131. 2005 The shell that you ll likely use for scripting under Neutrino is ksh a public domain implementation of the Korn shell The sh command is usually a symbolic link to ksh For more information about this shell see e the Using the Command Line chapter in this guide e the entry for ksh in the Utilities Reference e Rosenblatt Bill and Arnold Robbins 2002 Learning the Korn Shell 2nd Edition Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates ISBN 0 596 00195 9 Neutrino also supplies or uses some other scripting environments e An OS buildfile has a script file section tagged by script The mkifs parses this script but it s executed by procnto at boot time It provides a very simple scripting environment with the ability to run a series of commands and a small amount of synchronization Chapter 10 Writing Shell Scripts 205 Available shells 2005 QNX Software Systems The embedded shell esh provides a scripting environment for running simple scripts in an embedded environment where the overhead of the full ksh might be too much It supports the execution of utilities simple redirection filename expansion aliases and environment manipulation The fat embedded shell fesh provides the same limited environment as esh but supplies additional builtin commands for commonly used utilities to reduce the overhead of including them in an embedded system The fesh shell includes builtins for cp df 1s mkdir rm and rmdi
132. 22 symbolic 222 removing 224 Linux Ext2 filesystem 226 469 mounting 168 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index load monitor 75 loader blocks 413 creating 421 loaders primary boot or partition 164 secondary or OS 164 local 135 localtime 196 log CVS command 389 393 logger system 124 126 167 170 loggingin 12 19 bypassing 177 environment variables 187 profiles 185 logging out 13 login 12 33 41 178 remote daemon 265 time of last 129 login file 188 login ID 17 18 creating 27 removing 29 login shell program 20 22 26 28 29 non POSIX 33 logman DOS command 59 LOGNAME 20 63 logout 14 42 long filenames enabling for QNX 4 filesystems 219 lp UNIX command 3 lpe UNIX command 3 lpd 265 282 error messages 307 lock files 282 lpd lock 282 October 6 2005 lpq DOS command 59 lpq UNIX command 3 lpr 3 279 280 282 490 DOS version 59 error messages 304 remote printing 296 lpre 3 283 error messages 307 lprm UNIX command 3 lprq 3 283 error messages 305 lprrm 3 283 error messages 306 lpstat UNIX command 3 ls 45 46 50 58 116 186 long listing 489 LS 120 drives 322 lsm ipfilter so 442 Istat 224 MAC Media Access Control addresses 341 Macromedia Flash resolution for 105 magnetic optical drives 323 make 140 Makefile source 140 man 135 man UNIX command 3 56 140 managers 134 device enumerator 131 134 172 311 337 message queues 171 Index
133. 376 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Examples lt H2 gt Here is a random image lt H2 gt lt P gt Perl Script lt exec cgi rand_images pl gt lt BR gt C Program lt exec cgi rand_images cgi gt lt BR gt rand_images c October 6 2005 To compile this application run cc o rand_images cgi rand_images c Listing This program selects a random number and then chooses an image based on that number This allows the image to change each time the webpage is loaded include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt time h gt set variables char dir images char files filel jpg file2 jpg file3 jpg file4 jpg file5 jpg int num int size int main size sizeof files sizeof files 0 srand int time NULL num rand 4 Print out head with Random Filename and Base Directory printf lt img src s s alt s border 1 gt n lt BR gt dir files num files num printf Location s s n n lt BR gt dir files num return 0 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 377 Examples 2005 QNX Software Systems rand_images pl usr bin perl This script selects a random number and then chooses an image based on that number This allows the image to change each time the webpage is loaded Se 4b Fe Se s
134. 386 diff 389 get 384 394 import 386 init 383 395 log 389 393 remove orrm 393 status 387 tag 391 update 394 update or up 391 conflicts 392 head branch 391 merging 392 removing and restoring files 393 server 394 sticky tags 391 394 CVSROOT 383 cyberattacks 435 Cyclic Redundancy Check See CRC D D character while booting 165 daemons file transfer 265 remote 265 trivial 265 Internet 264 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index Internet boot protocol 265 Internet domain names 266 line printer 265 login remote 265 network routing tables 266 NFS server 266 printer 282 shell remote 265 SNMP agent 266 system status tables 266 terminal session remote 265 tiny HTTP web server 266 data ensuring integrity of 399 423 recovering 423 data server 374 data sharing 374 date 191 DOS version 59 DATE DOS variable 63 date setting 74 84 191 daylight 196 daylight saving time 196 days leap 192 dcheck 422 demd_blk h 457 DCMD_FSYS_PREGROW FILE 457 dd 408 dead keys 59 debugging drivers 6 printing 285 304 re local 179 security 439 Slinger 376 startup code 126 def file extension 140 October 6 2005 default 128 deferred transmissions 347 deflate 237 del DOS command 59 Del key 39 Denial Of Service DOS attacks 437 desktop 70 background 84 menu 70 devb 225 devb eide 313 316 starting 167 troubleshooting 317 devb fde 314 devb umass 334 devc con 12 41 338 starting 166 168
135. 4 soft 355 testing 354 troubleshooting 355 Win 355 modes See permissions more 3 56 58 motd 129 185 mount 133 216 237 247 313 315 configuration 457 NFS 230 mountpoints 117 pathname space 133 move DOS command 59 Mozilla 5 93 mq mqueue directory 125 mq and mqueue starting 171 mrouted 265 MRU Maximum Receivable data Unit 344 msgs UNIX command 3 msiexec DOS command 59 MTU Maximum Transmittable data Unit 343 multicast mode 345 Multimedia TDK 8 multimonitor display 358 mute 75 mutexes limits 473 mutt 5 mv 58 interactive mode 489 October 6 2005 myQNxX account center 477 N name resolution 243 named 266 named semaphores limits 473 manager procnto 162 pathname space 126 named special files 114 217 nameservers 258 information about 273 NAT Network Address Translation 441 sample configuration file 499 native networking 241 navigation buttons in documentation 90 NCFTP printing over 280 491 NDP Node Discovery Protocol 243 net 241 249 net cfg 258 netfront 93 netstat 263 274 network activity 75 card functionality checking 250 drivers 245 261 manager io net 244 261 native Qnet 241 routing tables daemon 266 Index 547 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems running chkfsys on servers 424 settings 84 TCP IP 257 network adapters 338 mounting 124 Network Address Translation See NAT Network File System See NFS Network Interface Card See NIC Network Time Protocol See
136. 49 synchronous 457 icons 135 in documentation 89 90 Launch menu 78 IDE Integrated Development Environment 135 command line alternative to 37 documentation 140 editor 148 security 439 system fine tuning 449 462 idle thread 450 IDs group 17 adding 30 31 assigning 28 login 17 18 27 user 17 18 assigning 27 root 18 ifconfig 3 263 ifs file extension 140 image filesystems 140 images filesystem creating 227 OS 123 216 creating 164 217 images directory 135 Index 541 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems img file extension 140 import CVS command 386 include directory 135 index online documentation 89 inetd 264 inetd conf 98 129 264 CVS server 394 phrelay 98 inflator 237 info directory 135 file extension 140 GNU utility 140 infocmp 38 200 information nodes See inodes init CVS command 383 395 Initial Program Loader See IPL initialization system 161 inodes 122 414 417 454 entries 220 417 pregrowing 453 input drivers 324 starting 106 methods 200 modes 38 redirecting standard 49 trap file 324 input cfg 84 325 333 input hostname 324 inputtrap 324 Ins key 39 insert mode 39 Integrated Development Environment See IDE integrity ensuring on entire disk system 423 542 Index interactive mode 489 interface controllers information displaying 275 internal modems 352 international characters 59 151 156 filenames 120 fonts 198 input methods 200 Internet boot protoc
137. 5 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting PATH In particular your current directory isn t in your PATH for security reasons Either add the executable s directory to your PATH or specify the path to the command e g my_program For more information see Utilities earlier in this chapter Why does root have access to different commands The root user has a different PATH setting that includes such directories as sbin and usr sbin These directories contain executables and managers that typically only root can use If you aren t logged in as root you can still run some of the utilities in sbin if you have the right permission but you ll have to specify the full path e g sbin logger or add the directory to your PATH When I list a directory I don t see files that start with a dot Files whose names start with a dot are called hidden files To list them use the a option to 1s Why am I getting a No such file or directory message The shell can t find the file or directory that you specified Here are some things to check e Have you typed the name correctly In Neutrino the names of files and directories are case sensitive e Does the name contain spaces or other special characters If you have a file called my file and you don t escape the meaning of the space the shell uses the space when breaking the command line into tokens so the command looks for one file calle
138. 5 Filename length Pathname length File size Directory size 255 bytes 260 bytes 2G 1 uses a 32 bit filesystem format Depends on the type of filesystem e The root directory of FAT12 16 is special in that it s pregrown and can t increase You choose the size when you format and is typically 512 entries FAT32 has no such limit e Neutrino s FAT12 16 filesystem is limited to 64K entries There are no such limits on FAT32 it has a practical limit of 2G 1 which is about 33 million entries on the directory size e For long non 8 3 names a single filename may need multiple entries thus reducing the possible size of a directory Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 469 Filesystem limits 2005 QNX Software Systems Filesystem size Depends on the FAT format e for FAT12 it s 4084 clusters largest cluster is 32K hence 128M e for FAT16 it s 65524 clusters thus 2G e for FAT32 you get access to 268435444 clusters which is 8T Disk size Limited by the disk driver and io blk These filesystems don t really support permissions but they can emulate them CD ROM ISO9660 filesystem The limits for CD ROM ISO9660 filesystems include Filename length 32 bytes for basic IS09660 128 for Joliet 255 for Rockridge Pathname length 1024 bytes Disk size This filesystem also uses a 32 bit 2G 1 format We don t allow the creation of anything via s cd so it s read o
139. 5 bootptab 127 braces 48 branching 391 browser 91 BSPs Board Support Packages 162 buffers canonical input 467 double 459 overrun attack 436 raw input 467 526 Index standard I O 455 BUFSIZ 452 455 460 build file extension 140 buildfiles 140 164 481 485 487 boot and altboot 165 OS images creating 217 PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH 187 script files 205 builtin commands 55 bunzip2 405 burst headers suppressing on print jobs 288 buttons mouse swapping 84 navigation in documentation 90 bytes received 347 transmitted 345 bzip2 405 C C code 140 header files 140 c file extension 140 C code 140 definition files 140 cable modems 268 354 cables 318 343 cache size for floppies 315 Cache Verify Policy 93 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index cacls DOS command 59 calculator 140 calib 325 calibration files touchscreen 325 call DOS command 59 callouts kernel 162 cam cdrom so 313 camera pointer 75 cancel UNIX command 3 Canon printers 300 canonical input mode 38 buffer size 467 Caps Lock 75 CardBUS 327 carrier 349 cascading style sheets 140 case 208 cat 58 ec file extension 140 ed 54 58 symbolic links 117 cD DOS variable 63 CD ROM drives 313 316 filesystem 132 225 470 mounting 124 168 edplayer so 74 cdrecord 407 408 CDs bootable 408 burning 407 playing 74 cfg file extension 140 CGI 369 scripts 371 376 channels limits 472 October 6 2005
140. 5 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 447 2005 QNX Software Systems Getting the system s status Getting the system s status Neutrino includes the following utilities that you can use to fine tune your system hogs List the processes that are hogging the CPU pidin Process ID INfo Display system statistics ps Report process status psin Display system information in a Photon window sin Display system information For details about these utilities see the Utilities Reference If you have the Integrated Development Environment on your system you ll find that it s the best tool for determining how you can improve your system s performance For more information see the IDE User s Guide Improving performance October 6 2005 If you run hogs you ll discover which processes are using the most CPU time For example hogs n 5 PID NAME MSEC PIDS SYSTEM 1 1315 53 43 6 devb eide 593 24 19 54358061 make 206 8 6 1 2026 83 67 6 devb eide 294 12 9 1 2391 75 79 6 devb eide 335 10 11 54624301 htmlindex 249 T 8 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 449 Improving performance 2005 QNX Software Systems 450 1 1004 24 33 54624301 htmlindex 2959 71 98 54624301 htmlindex 4156 96 138 54624301 htmlindex 4225 96 140 54624301 htmlindex 4162 96 138 1 71 35 2 6 devb eide 75 37 2 1 3002 97 100 Let s look at this output The first iteration indicates that
141. 545 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems named semaphores 162 network io net 244 261 pipe 170 window 82 83 106 130 manifests package 236 manual pages 135 mapping pathname space 8 119 mass storage devices 334 Matrox Millenium chipsets 358 Maximum Receivable data Unit See MRU Maximum Transmittable data Unit See MTU md DOS command 59 Media Access Control addresses See MAC addresses melt 399 405 mem 124 memory allocation failures 346 aperture 344 physical 124 shared 126 limits 473 procnto 217 usage 75 451 menu file 79 menus Desktop 70 Launch 13 71 74 83 modifying 75 Photon window manager 82 merging 392 message of the day 129 185 message passing security 439 message queues 546 Index limits 474 manager starting 171 pathname space 125 messages system 124 126 167 170 usage 56 metadata 453 mib txt 129 mice acceleration 84 buttons swapping 84 configuring 324 pointercam 75 PS 2 324 333 serial 324 333 speed 84 wheel enabling 84 microGUI See Photon microkernel See also kernel advantages of 6 Microsoft Windows time setting 201 minimal routing 259 MIPS directories 123 limits 474 mk file extension 140 mkdir 58 mkefs 227 mkifs 140 164 205 217 mkisofs 407 mkkbd 59 140 mktime 196 mode DOS command 59 modems 351 cable 354 example 494 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index external 353 Host Signal Processor HSP 355 PCI 353 settings 8
142. 59 Neutrino for MS DOS users 2005 QNX Software Systems DOS command Neutrino command s attrib Batch files cacls call script chdir chkdsk cls cmd command comp copy date del dir erase diskcomp diskpart 60 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line ls 1 chmod and 1s a Shell scripts see Writing Shell Scripts in this guide or the docs for ksh ls 1 ksh script If the script begins with bin sh you can invoke it like a regular program e g script without prefixing it with sh or ksh ed builtin ksh command For QNX 4 Neutrino disk filesystems use chkf sys for DOS FAT filesystems use chkdosfs clear ksh ksh cmp or diff cp OF pax date and rtc Note that you must use rtc to set the hardware clock to the new date and time rm 1s rm See below fdisk command continued October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Neutrino for MS DOS users DOS command Neutrino command s driverquery fc find findstr format ftype getmac help logman lpq lpr md mode move msiexec path print query rem rename replace October 6 2005 See Troubleshooting in Working with Filesystems cmp or diff as appropriate grep i grep fdformat and dinit File type associations are a property of the Photon File Manager pfm See Browsing files with the File Manager in Using the Photon microGUI See ifconfig netsta
143. 59 error messages discarding 50 lpr 304 redirecting 49 system logging 124 126 167 170 ERRORLEVEL DOS variable 63 EscB 43 EscD 43 EscEsc 44 EscF 43 esh 43 206 ESP Encapsulated Security Payload 440 Ethernet headers 351 hubs USB 332 Ethernet adapters USB 334 events Photon 69 ex 148 executables finding 54 keeping loaded in memory 139 running as a specific user or group 138 execute permission 137 207 execution remote 57 exit 14 42 536 Index exploits 435 export 186 187 191 exports 230 exports hostname 230 expressions arithmetical 48 exrc file 149 Ext2 filesystem 226 469 mounting 168 Extended Networking TDK 257 441 497 Extensible Markup Language XML files 140 extensions filename 118 140 extents 219 locating extent blocks 417 418 structure 420 external modems 353 F fat embedded shell fesh 206 FAT12 FAT16 FAT32 filesystems 225 469 fc DOS command 59 FCS Frame Check Sequence 350 fdisk 218 409 421 reporting errors 427 fesh 206 fiber cables 343 FIFO special files 114 file 116 144 file descriptors maximum 473 File Manager 85 file associations 109 FILE variables 455 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index filenames about 114 completing 44 extensions 118 140 generating 48 209 hyphen starting with 66 international characters 120 long enabling 219 longer than 16 characters 417 maximum length 220 465 relationship to inode entries
144. 8 ph rw r r 1 barney techies 254 Nov 11 2002 profile drwxrwxr x 2 barney techies 4096 Jul 04 09 06 ws rw rw r 1 barney techies 3585 Dec 05 2002 123 html Chapter 6 e Working with Files 137 File ownership and permissions 2005 QNX Software Systems The first column is the set of permissions A leading d indicates that the item is a directory see Types of files earlier in this chapter You can also use octal numbers to indicate the modes see chmod in the Utilities Reference Setuid and setgid Some programs such as passwd need to run as a specific user in order to work properly which 1 passwd rwsrwxr x 1 root root 21544 Mar 30 23 34 usr bin passwd Notice that the third character in the owner s permissions is s This indicates a setuid set user ID command when you run passwd the program runs as the owner of the file i e root An S means that the setuid bit is set for the file but the execute bit isn t set You might also find some setgid set group ID commands which run with the same group ID as the owner of the file but not with the owner s user ID If setgid is set on a directory files created in the directory have the directory s group ID not that of the file s creator This scheme is commonly used for spool areas such as usr spool mail which is setgid and owned by the mail group so that programs running as the mail group can update things there but the files st
145. 83 Browsing files with the File Manager 85 Getting help with the Helpviewer 86 Surfing the web with Voyager 91 Connecting to other systems 97 Hotkeys and shortcuts 100 Photon environment variables 104 Troubleshooting 107 October 6 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 67 2005 QNX Software Systems Overview of Photon Overview of Photon The Photon microGUI is Neutrino s graphical user interface and you can use it as a desktop environment similar to other GUI desktop environments This means you can run applications in windows use the mouse for point and click and dragging operations view directories and files graphically in a tree hierarchy view multimedia files and so on Photon also provides the framework for graphical applications in embedded systems Many of the applications and utilities that come with Photon are documented in the Neutrino Utilities Reference For information about programming Photon applications see the Photon Programmer s Guide Why is it called Photon Whenever you use your mouse or press a key you re giving input to a Photon application And whenever the application displays data in a window it s providing output All these interactions are processed as tiny packets of data called events You can think of all these input and output events traveling between you and Photon applications as photons particles of light Why is it called a microGUI We call Photon a
146. 87F Hardware Interrupt 0x7 Promiscuous iec teea ae ea a Disabled Multicast secsec ee mn a eee Enabled Total Packets Txd OK 1283237 Total Packets Txd Bad 9 Total Packets Rxd OK 7923747 Total Rx Errors 6 0 Total Bytes Txd 82284687 Total Bytes Rxd 1612645356 Tx Collision Errors 34380 Tx Collisions Errors aborted 0 Carrier Sense Lost on Tx 0 FIFO Underruns During Tx 0 Tx deferred srs seed stealer s sa 8 505 83301 Out of Window Collisions 0 FIFO Overruns During Rx 0 Alignment errors 0 GRE GrrOrs lt i 5 6 eo 5 dies eS be Stee Sie eS 0 You should take special note of the Total Packets Txd OK and Total Packets Rxd OK counters If they re zero the driver might not be working or the network might not be connected Verify that the Media Rate has been auto detected correctly by the driver How do get diagnostic information You can find diagnostic information in proc qnetstats If this file doesn t exist Qnet isn t running The qnet stats file contains a lot of diagnostic information that s meaningful to a Qnet developer but not to you However you can use grep to extract certain fields October 6 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 251 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems cat
147. Chapter 13 TCP IP Networking In this chapter Overview of TCP IP 257 Software components for TCP IP networking 260 Choosing the right stack configuration 261 Running the Internet daemons 264 Running multiple instances of the TCP IP stack 266 Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters 267 Using the SRI SNMP suite for Neutrino 271 Troubleshooting 272 October 6 2005 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 255 2005 QNX Software Systems Overview of TCP IP Overview of TCP IP The term TCP IP implies two distinct protocols TCP and IP Since these protocols have been used so commonly together TCP IP has become a standard terminology in today s Internet Essentially TCP IP refers to network communications where the TCP transport is used to deliver data across IP networks This chapter provides information on setting up TCP IP networking on a Neutrino network It also provides troubleshooting and other relevant details from a system administration point of view A Neutrino based TCP IP network can access resources located on any other system that supports TCP IP QNX Momentics includes the tiny TCP IP stack and the full TCP IP 4 stack Other components such as DHCP SNMP and TCP IP 6 are available only in the Extended Networking Technology Development Kit TDK Clients and servers There are two types of TCP IP hosts clients and servers A client requests TCP IP service a server provides it In planning your network you
148. Configuration Protocol daemon lpd Line printer daemon see Printing mrouted Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP daemon Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 265 Running multiple instances of the TCP IP stack 2005 QNX Software Systems named Internet domain name server ntpd Network Time Protocol daemon routed RIP and RIPv2 routing protocol daemon rwhod System status database slinger Tiny HTTP web server snmpd SNMP agent nfsd NFS server These daemons listen on their own TCP ports and manage their own transactions They usually start when the computer boots and then run continuously although to conserve system resources you can have inetd start bootpd only when a boot request arrives Running multiple instances of the TCP IP stack In some situations you may need to run multiple instances of the TCP IP stack 1 Start the first instance of the TCP IP stack by invoking io net as follows io net del900 pci 0x0 ptcpip 2 Start the second instance of the TCP IP stack by invoking io net as follows io net il del1900 pci 0x1 ptcpip prefix sock2 You can get the PCI index of your NIC cards by using the pei vvv command If you re using different types of NIC cards you don t have to specify the PCI index The i option in the second instance of TCP IP tells io net to register itself as dev io net1 The prefix option to 266 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking October 6 2005 2005 QNX Softw
149. E AEE AEE HE AE AEE HE EA EAE HE EA EE AE EAE HE AE FE HE EE A FE FE FE E FE A A EA EE EA EE A RA HH QNX Neutrino 6 x on the MIPS Malta evaluation board Galileo GT64120A HH FEAE AE HEHE FE FE FEAE HE FE FE AE AE HE FE AE FE EHE FE FE AE EHE FE FE AE AE HE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE HE HE FE FEAE HE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE E FE FE AEE HE FE AEE EA aE RA SUPPORTED DEVICES SERIAL PCI NETWORK FLASH USB RS 232 ports UARTO and UART1 4 PCI slots AMD 79C973 4MB Intel Strata Flash UHCI USB Host Controller For detailed instructions on the default example configuration for these devices see the CONFIGURING ON BOARD SUPPORTED HARDWARE section below the build script section or refer to the BSP docs Tip Each sub section which relates to a particular device is marked with its tag ex SERIAL You can use the search features of your editor to quickly find and add or remove support for these devices Appendix Ae Examples 481 Buildfile for an NFS mounting target 2005 QNX Software Systems HEE aE AE A EAE EAE AEA AE EA AE A EA A EAE AE EAA EE EA A aE EA EAE EA EE EE A NOTES HEE aE AE A EEEE EEEE E EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE LARARE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE START OF BUILD SCRIPT HEE HE AE A AEE AE AEA EA E EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE E
150. E FE FE AE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE EAE PCI server FEAE AE HE AE AE EHE HE AEA AE HE AE AEA AE HE AE AE AE HE EE AE HE EA EE Aa E HE EAE AE EE E HE a EE AE AE A HEHE display_msg Starting PCI server pci malta amp waitfor dev pci 4 Ha AEE AEE AE HE A HE a AE EE a HE HE FE HE FE FE HE EE EA FE FE HE FE HE FE HB a HE EE FE HE Ea FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HEHH HE FLASH driver FEE FEE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HEHH HE display_msg Starting flash driver devf malta amp HAE HE AEE AE HE aE aE a EE ER a EE EE HE EE E HE FE EE aE a FE EH HE FE Ea HR HH HE NETWORK driver substitute your IP address for 1 2 3 4 HAE HE HE AEE AE HE A aE a aE EE a EE HE FE FE FE HE HE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE a FE FE FE FE HE HE EE HE HR HE FE EH HE display_msg Starting on board ethernet with large TCP IP stack io net dpcnet ptcpip waitfor dev io net en0 4 ifconfig en0 1 2 3 4 482 Appendix A e Examples October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Buildfile for an NFS mounting target October 6 2005 FEAE AE AE HE AE A EE HE AEA E HE A AEA E HE EA E E EA E E EA aE EE EAA aE aE E HE FE aE HE A EE HEHE HHH REMOTE_DEBUG gdb or Momentics refer to the help documentation for the gdb qconn and the IDE for more information on remote debugging
151. E FE HE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE HE uncomment for FLASH driver EHE EHE FE AE FE E HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HH HE devf malta flashctl EHEHE AEE HE HE A AE AE E HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE AE HE HE FE AE AE HE HE HE FE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE E HE FE EA FE FE AE HE FE FE AE E HE FE FE AE HE FE EA FE FE FEAE HE FE HHH uncomment for NETWORK driver SEAR AE AE HEHE A AE AEE HE FE FE E HE FE FE AE AE HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE E HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE AE HE HEHEHE io net ifconfig nicinfo netstat ping EHE EHE AE HE FE E HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE AE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE HE uncomment for USB driver EHE EHE HE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HH HE io usb usb EAE EH HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE
152. EEE EEEE EEE image 0x800a0000 virtual mipsle srec bootstrap FEAE AE HEHE FE FE AE AE HE FE FE AE AE HE FE AE FE E HE FE FE AE EHE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE AE HE FE FE FE HE HE FE FEAE HE FE FE FE E FE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE E FE FE HEHE HE FE EB a A A default frequency for 4kc is 80Mhz adjust f parameter for different frequencies FEAE AE HEHE AE AE FEAE HE FE FE AE AE HE FE AE FE E HE FE FE AE E HE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE HE HE FE FEAE HE FE FE FE E FE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE E FE AEAEE TE EE aE RA startup malta f 80000000 v PATH proc boot procnto 32 v script script procmgr_symlink proc boot libc so 2 usr lib ldqnx so 2 display_msg Welcome to QNX Neutrino 6 x on the Malta evaluation board FEAE FE E HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE E FE a FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HEHH HE SERIAL driver FEAE FEE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE E HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE a FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HHHH HE devc ser8250 e c1843200 b38400 0x180003f8 0x80020004 0x180002f8 0x80020003 amp waitfor dev serl reopen dev serl slogger amp pipe amp AEAEE HE AE FE AE EHE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE AE HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE FE E HE HE FE FE AE HE HE FE AE E HE FE FE E HE FE FE AE E HE FE FE E H
153. HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE E HE a FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE PE FE HE FE FE FE HE HE HEHE HEHHE uncomment for NETWORK driver FEE HE AE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE E HE a FE E FE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE HE HE HEHE HEHHE devn pcnet so libsocket so npm tcpip so DAREA EEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE uncomment for USB driver HEE aE AE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE devu uhci so libusbdi so data c devc ser8250 HEE aE AE A AEE AE AE A AEA EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE uncomment for REMOTE_DEBUG gdb or Momentics HAE AEE AE AE A EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE E EEEE EEEE EE devc pty qconn FEAE AE EHE AE FE EAE HE FE FE AE AE HE FE FE FE E HE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE AE HE FE FE FE AE HE FE AE FE HE HE FE FEAE HE FE FE AE E FE FE FE AE A FE AE E FE FE EHE EE FE HEHHEE RA uncomment for PCI server SEAR AE AE HEHE HE AE AEE HE A FE E HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE HE FE AE FE E HE FE AE AE HE FE FE FE HE HE FE AE AE HE FE FE AE A FE FE FEAE HE FE HHH pci malta pci EAE AE HE FE H
154. IP transport layer provided by npm ttcpip so For information about passwords and some examples see fs cifs in the Utilities Reference If you want to start a CIFS filesystem when you boot your system put the appropriate command in etc host_cfg SHOSTNAME re d re local or etc re d re local For more information see the description of etc re d re sysinit in Controlling How Neutrino Starts NFS filesystem The Network File System NFS protocol is a TCP IP application that supports networked filesystems It provides transparent access to shared filesystems across networks NFS lets a client workstation operate on files that reside on a server across a variety of NFS compliant operating systems File access calls from a client are converted to NFS protocol see RFC 1094 and 228 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems NFS filesystem RFC 1813 requests and are sent to the server over the network The server receives the request performs the actual filesystem operation and sends a response back to the client In essence NFS lets you graft remote filesystems or portions of them onto your local namespace Directories on the remote systems appear as part of your local filesystem and all the utilities you use for listing and managing files e g 1s ep mv operate on the remote files exactly as they do on your local files This filesystem allows the same characters
155. ITOR to specify a line oriented editor and VISUAL to specify a fullscreen editor Applications might use one or or both of these variables Some applications that use both use VISUAL in preference to EDITOR when a fullscreen editor is required or EDITOR in preference to VISUAL when a line oriented editor is required Few modern applications invoke line oriented editors and few users set EDITOR to one so you can t rely on applications to give preference one way or the other For most uses we recommend that you set VISUAL and EDITOR to the same value Once you ve tried various editors you can set these environment variables so that your favorite editor becomes the default At the command line prompt type export VISUAL path export EDITOR path where path is the path to the executable for the editor For example if you want to use jed as the default editor type which jed usr local bin Jjed export VISUAL usr local bin Jjed export EDITOR usr local bin Jjed To check the value of the EDITOR environment variable type Chapter 7 e Using Editors 157 Specifying the default editor 2005 QNX Software Systems echo SEDITOR You ll likely want to set these variables in your profile HOME profile so that they re set whenever you log in For more information see SHOME profile in Configuring Your Environment 158 Chapter 7 e Using Editors October 6 2005 Chapter 8 Controlling How Neutrino S
156. Input devices 324 Audio cards 326 PCCARD and PCMCIA cards 327 USB devices 330 Character devices 335 Network adapters 338 Modems 351 Video cards 356 October 6 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 309 2005 QNX Software Systems Introduction Introduction When you boot a Neutrino desktop system it starts a device enumerator a manager that detects most hardware devices The enumerator loads a set of configuration files from etc system enum devices that define what your system should do e g start a specific driver when you add or remove hardware You can edit the enumerator s configuration files if necessary For more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts in this guide and enum devices in the Utilities Reference An embedded Neutrino system typically has specific hardware so when the system boots it s likely to explicitly start the appropriate drivers You can find a list of currently supported hardware in the Developer Support Center area of our website http www qnx com The website lists the chipsets and hardware that we ve tested with Neutrino However many times there are slight variants of chipsets that will work with the drivers even if they aren t listed It s often worth trying these chipsets to see if the driver will work with your hardware but note that the hardware might not behave as expected Neutrino doesn t currently support tapes You ll use the information in this c
157. Links 417 Extent blocks 418 Files 420 File maintenance utilities 420 fdisk 421 dinit 421 chkfsys 422 dcheck 422 zap 422 spatch 423 Recovering disks and files 423 Using chkfsys 423 Recovering from a bad block in the middle ofa file 426 What to do if your system will no longer boot 426 If the mount fails 429 If the disk is unrecoverable 430 If the filesystem is intact 431 Contents XV 2005 QNX Software Systems Xvi 19 20 21 Contents Securing Your System 433 General OS security 435 Remote and local attacks 435 Effects of attacks 437 Viruses 437 Neutrino security in general 438 Neutrino specific security issues 439 Message passing 439 pdebug 439 qconn 439 Qnet 440 IPSec 440 Setting up a firewall 441 Starting IP Filter and NAT 442 Configuring IP Filtering 442 Configuring Network Address Translation NAT Fine Tuning Your System 447 Getting the system s status 449 Improving performance 449 Faster boot times 451 Filesystems 451 Performance and robustness 453 Metadata updates 453 Throughput 455 Configuration 457 How small can you get 462 Understanding System Limits 463 The limits on describing limits 465 Configurable limits 465 Filesystem limits 466 Querying filesystem limits 467 445 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems 22 October 6 2005 QNX 4 filesystem 468 Ext2 filesystem 469 DOS FAT12 16 32 filesystem 469 CD ROM ISO9660 filesystem 470 NFS2 and NFS3 filesyst
158. Network Address Ipkts Ierrs Opkts Oerrs Coll 100 32976 lt Link gt 0 0 0 0 0 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 263 Running the Internet daemons 2005 QNX Software Systems 100 32976 127 en0 1500 lt Link gt enO 1500 10 127 0 0 1 0 00 50 da c8 61 92 21 10 0 0 100 21 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 To display information about the routing table in the full stack use netstat rn the resulting display looks like this Routing tables Flags Refs Use Internet Destination Gateway default 10 0 0 1 UGS 10 10 0 0 100 U 10 0 0 100 10 0 0 100 UH 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 UH 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Mtu Interface end en0 100 100 The table shows that the default route to the gateway was configured 10 0 0 1 Running the Internet daemons If a host is a server it invokes the appropriate daemon to satisfy a client s requests A TCP IP server typically runs the inetd daemon also known as the Internet super server You can start inetd in your machine s re local file see the description of etc re d re sysinit in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts 264 chapter in this guide CAUTION Running inetd lets outside users try to connect to your machine and thus is a potential security issue if you don t configure it properly The inetd daemon listens for connections on some well known ports as defined in etc inetd conf in the TCP IP network On receiving a request it runs the corresponding server daemon For
159. Neutrino Starts In the following example the driver automatically scans for SCSI devices on the chain and adds them into the dev directory as they re found For example if the system has four hard drives in it the entries in the dev directory are as follows e dev hdo lowest SCSI ID first e dev hdl e dev hd2 e dev hd3 the last SCSI hard drive detected When the driver starts it sends debugging information to the system log which you can view using sloginfo This information is often very helpful when you re trying to debug a problem with a SCSI adapter or device If the driver doesn t correctly detect a device check the following e Is the SCSI chain terminated correctly This is frequently the problem when a device doesn t show up correctly shows up and then disappears or doesn t show up at all 320 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Hard disks October 6 2005 e Is the SCSI adapter supported Even if an adapter claims to be compatible with a supported adapter that doesn t mean that the driver will work with it correctly Compatible doesn t mean identical To be certain look for the device ID on our website see the introduction to this chapter Does the SCSI BIOS see all the devices correctly If it does then all the devices are set up correctly and don t have any conflicting SCSI IDs You can also check this by using another operatin
160. OME directory it also sets LOGNAME to your user name and SHELL to the login shell named in your account It then starts the login shell which is typically a command interpreter bin sh but could also be an application that gets launched as soon as you log in e When you log in via Photon s phlogin2 or phlogin the utility also changes to your HOME directory and sets your LOGNAME and SHELL environment variables according to your user name and your account s login shell However the graphical login doesn t start your login shell as an interactive program it runs your login shell with the arguments c usr bin ph A N CAUTION If your login shell is something other than bin sh or bin ksh you might not be able to log in at all using phlogin2 or phlogin The ph command launches the Photon desktop environment From the Photon desktop you can start a command line interpreter i e shell in a pterm window This shell is the one identified by the SHELL environment variable Account database The account database consists of the following files listed with the appropriate access permissions 20 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Account database File Owner Group Permissions etc passwd root root rw r r etc group root root rw r r etc shadow root root rw etc pwlock root root rw r r Note that anyone can read etc passwd This lets
161. ONNECT In order to run etc autoconnect you must set this environment variable to 1 For more information see etc autoconnect in the Utilities Reference DISPLAY The name of the physical display on which to draw FLASHQUALITY The resolution for voyager to use with Macromedia Flash IVE_HOME Used by Java VM J9PLUGIN_ARGS Arguments passed to Browser Java plugins PHEXIT DISABLE PHFONT Set this environment variable to turn off the Photon Login dialog s Exit button so that users won t be able to exit to text mode For more information see phlogin2 and phlogin in the Utilities Reference The registered name of the font server e g dev phfont For more information see ph in the Utilities Reference PHFONT_USE_EXTERNAL If this environment variable exists io graphics runs the font manager as a separate process see phfont instead of using phfont so You should set this environment variable for systems that have remote clients accessing font services on the host machine e g phindows phditto Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 105 Photon environment variables 2005 QNX Software Systems 106 PHFONTMEM The size of an area in shared memory to set up between the task and the Photon font server for returning text bitmaps normally required only by graphics drivers For more information see PfAttach in the Photon Library Reference PHFONTOPTS Options to pass to the Photon font server For
162. PnP based With non PnP cards you can manually start the driver and specify the T O port IRQ and DMA channel For example this command starts the Sound Blaster driver io audio dsb ioport port irq req dma ch dmal ch amp To find out what to set the I O port and IRQ to manually open the system and look at the card Then start the driver using the configuration settings that the card is set to Ensure that the I O port and IRQ are reserved in the BIOS for non PCI devices If you re using a Sound Blaster card check the following 326 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems PCCARD and PCMCIA cards PnP based PCI Cards e If the driver rejects the card make sure that the I O port doesn t conflict with another piece of hardware Try changing the I O port to see if that helps e If you hear a bit of sound and then nothing make sure that the IRQ isn t conflicting with another device and is reserved in the BIOS You can also try changing the IRQ as well e Ifthe driver starts correctly but there s no sound check the DMA settings on the card and try changing them if possible The device enumerator should configure and start ISA PnP cards If it doesn t you might need to obtain a copy of isapnp which is used to initialize ISA PnP cards Neutrino doesn t supply this utility but it s freely available on the Internet and has been ported to Neutrino The device enumer
163. PostScript files to lpr forcing output to the remote printer just as you did in Remote printing to a TCP IP enabled printer using lpr You might be wondering what happened to the destination passed by spooler d Well that is discarded because lpr unlike phs to ps doesn t return the job to the filter but completes it itself 5 Finally start a new instance of spooler telling it the pathname of your new configuration file in this case etc printers test cfg and the name of the printer you want to use in this case rlpt2 like this spooler d dev null c etc printers test cfg n rlpt2 amp The n option specifies the name of the printer which appears in a Photon application s Print dialog 6 If you want to start spooler like this whenever you boot your machine add the above command to your etc rce d re local file For more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts Now you should be able to print your PostScript file on your remote TCP IP enabled printer either from Photon or from the command line October 6 2005 Chapter 14 Printing 303 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems e Remote printing from Photon Select the correct printer in this example rlpt2 in the Select Printer dialog box e Remote printing from the command line Copy the print file to the directory that spooler uses cp root my_file ps dev printers rlpt2 spool For configuration files for printing w
164. Q is handled by the PIC which then interrupts the processor usually causing the processor to execute an Interrupt Service Routine ISR October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems ISR kernel Interrupt Service Routine a routine responsible for servicing hardware e g reading and or writing some device ports for updating some data structures shared between the ISR and the thread s running in the application and for signalling the thread that some kind of event has occurred See microkernel level sensitive link message metadata October 6 2005 One of two ways in which a PIC Programmable Interrupt Controller can be programmed to respond to interrupts If the PIC is operating in level sensitive mode the IRQ is considered active whenever the corresponding hardware line is active Contrast edge sensitive A filename a pointer to the file s contents Contrast symbolic link A parcel of bytes passed from one process to another The OS attaches no special meaning to the content of a message the data in a message has meaning for the sender of the message and for its receiver but for no one else Message passing not only allows processes to pass data to each other but also provides a means of synchronizing the execution of several processes As they send receive and reply to messages processes undergo various changes of state that affect when and for how long they may run Data about
165. QNX EUTRINO RTOS V6 3 USER S GUIDE QNX SOFTWARE SYSTEMS 2005 QNX Software Systems QNX Neutrino RTOS User s Guide For release 6 3 or later Printed under license by QNX Software Systems Co 175 Terence Matthews Crescent Kanata Ontario K2M 1W8 Canada Voice 1 613 591 0931 Fax 1 613 591 3579 Email info qnx com Web http www qnx com 2004 2005 QNX Software Systems All rights reserved Publishing history June 2004 First edition Electronic edition published 2005 Technical support options To obtain technical support for any QNX product visit the Technical Support section in the Services area on our website www qnx com You ll find a wide range of support options including our free web based Developer Support Center QNX Momentics Neutrino and Photon microGUI are registered trademarks of QNX Software Systems in certain jurisdictions All other trademarks and trade names belong to their respective owners Printed in Canada Part Number 002503 Contents About This Guide xxi Typographical conventions xxiii Note to Windows users xxiv What you ll find in this guide xxv Note to Windows users xxvii Assumptions xxvii 1 Getting to Know the OS 1 How QNX Neutrino compares to other operating systems 3 UNIX 3 Microsoft Windows 4 Limitations 5 How Neutrino is unique 5 Resource managers 8 2 Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down 9 root or non root
166. QNX Momentics PE installation CD ROM and from there manually reset the password e Access the necessary files from the root account of another Neutrino machine using Qnet For more information see Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing e Remove the media on which the etc passwd and etc shadow are stored and install it on another Neutrino machine from which you can modify the files e Inthe case of an embedded system build a new image that contains new passwd and shadow files and then transfer it to your target system Managing other accounts October 6 2005 As a system administrator you need to add and remove user accounts and groups manage passwords and troubleshoot users problems You must be logged in as root to do this because other users don t have permission to modify etc passwd etc shadow and etc group Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 25 Managing other accounts 2005 QNX Software Systems CAUTION While it s safe at any time to use the passwd utility to change the password of an existing user who already has a password it isn t necessarily safe to make any other change to the account database while your system is in active use Specifically the following operations may cause applications and utilities to operate incorrectly when handling user account information e adding a user either by using the passwd utility or by manually editing etc passwd e putting a passwor
167. Running Slinger 370 Dynamic HTML 371 CGI method 371 SSI method 372 Data server method 374 Security precautions 374 Examples 375 Contents Xiii 2005 QNX Software Systems Xiv 17 18 Contents Configuration 375 Script 376 Using CVS 379 A crash course in CVS 381 CVS basics 381 Revisions 381 Basic operations 382 Repositories 382 Editors and CVS 383 Creating a repository 383 Getting files in and out of the repository 384 Putting changes back into the repository 386 Importing an existing source tree 386 Getting information on files 387 Changing files 388 More information on files what changed and why 389 CVS and directory trees 390 Concurrent development branching and merging 391 Branching 391 Merging 392 Removing and restoring files 393 Setting up a CVS server 394 Backing Up and Recovering Data 397 Introduction 399 Backup strategies 400 Choosing backup storage media and location 400 Choosing a backup format 402 Controlling your backup 402 Archiving your data 402 Creating an archive 403 Extracting from an archive 405 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems October 6 2005 Compressing an archive 405 Decompressing the archive 406 Storage choices 407 CDs 407 Bootable CDs 408 Removable media 409 Backing up physical hard disks 409 Ghost Images 410 Remote backups 410 CVS 410 Remote filesystems 411 Other remote backups 411 QNX 4 disk structure 411 Partition components 412 Directories 415
168. S server where root_dir is the path that you want to use for your CVS root directory By convention the path should end with CVSRoot but it isn t enforced You can have more than one root directory just add multiple instances of allow root root dir 3 Run the CVS init command evs d root_dir init This creates the root_dir directory and populates it with all the things it needs in there For more information see http www cvshome org October 6 2005 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 395 Chapter 18 Backing Up and Recovering Data In this chapter Introduction 399 Backup strategies 400 Archiving your data 402 Storage choices 407 Remote backups 410 QNX 4 disk structure 411 File maintenance utilities 420 Recovering disks and files 423 What to do if your system will no longer boot 426 October 6 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 397 2005 QNX Software Systems Introduction Introduction October 6 2005 No matter how reliable your hardware and electrical supply are or how sure you are that you Il never accidentally erase all your work it s just common sense to keep backups of your files Backup strategies differ in ease of use speed robustness and cost Although we ll discuss different types of archives below here s a quick summary of the file extensions associated with the different utilities Extension Utility tar pax or tar cpio pax or cpio GZ gzip or g
169. Software Systems Modems 4 Use the stty command to set the modem s baud rate For example to set the speed of the modem on dev ser1 to 57600 56K modems use this speed type stty baud 57600 lt dev serl Type qtalk mdevice where device is the name of the serial port e g dev ser1 Type at The modem should reply OK Troubleshooting modems If you followed the instructions above but the modem doesn t reply OK check the following October 6 2005 Make sure your baud rate settings are correct Is the modem plugged in Is the modem a software modem Neutrino doesn t support Win modems or HSP Host Signal Processor modems otherwise known as soft modems Neutrino works with PnP modems but you must specify in the BIOS that you aren t running a PnP aware OS Does the modem conflict with another device at the same I O port and IRQ If the modem is an internal ISA modem you may need to reserve an I O port range and IRQ in the BIOS so that the PCI doesn t use it Have you disabled the comm port in the BIOS if you re using the same I O port and IRQ of a comm port This applies only to internal modems Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 355 Video cards 2005 QNX Software Systems Video cards Our website includes a list of the video cards Neutrino supports see the introduction to this chapter Automatically detecting your card By default the operating system uses the crttrap utility to
170. X Neutrino in the System Architecture guide Neutrino s most important features are its microkernel architecture and the resource manager framework that takes advantage of it for a brief introduction see Resource managers below Drivers have exactly the same status as other user applications so you debug them using the same high level source aware breakpointing IDE that you d use for user applications This also means that e You aren t also debugging the kernel when you re debugging a driver e A faulty driver isn t likely to crash the OS 6 Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems How Neutrino is unique October 6 2005 e You can usually stop and restart a driver without rebooting the system Developers can usually eliminate interrupt handlers typically the most tricky code of all by moving the hardware manipulation code up to the application thread level with all the debugging advantages and freedom from restrictions that that implies This gives Neutrino an enormous advantage over monolithic systems Likewise in installations in the field the modularity of Neutrino s components allows for the kind of redundant coverage expressed in our simple yet very effective High Availability HA manager making it much easier to construct extremely robust designs than is possible with a more fused approach People seem naturally attracted to the ease with which func
171. Xi 2005 QNX Software Systems xii 15 Contents Remote printing over Qnet 302 Remote printing over TCP IP 302 Troubleshooting 304 Understanding lpr error messages 304 Troubleshooting remote printing problems 307 Connecting Hardware 309 Introduction 311 PCI AGP devices 312 CD ROMs 313 DVDs 314 Floppy disks 314 Hard disks 315 EIDE 316 SCSI devices 320 SCSI RAID 322 LS 120 322 ORB 322 Zip and Jaz disks 323 Input devices 324 Mice and keyboards 324 Touchscreens 325 Audio cards 326 ISA cards 326 PCI Cards 327 PCCARD and PCMCIA cards 327 USB devices 330 Printers 333 Mice and keyboards 333 Touchscreens 334 Ethernet adapters 334 Mass storage devices 334 Character devices 335 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems 16 October 6 2005 General serial adapters 335 Multiport serial adapters 337 Parallel ports 338 Terminals 338 T O attributes 338 Network adapters 338 Identify your NIC 339 Start the driver 339 Make sure the driver is communicating properly with the hardware 340 Modems 351 Internal modems 352 PCI based modems 353 External modems 353 Cable Modems ISDN 354 Testing modems 354 Troubleshooting modems 355 Video cards 356 Automatically detecting your card 356 Changing video modes in Photon 356 Manually setting up your video card 357 Setting up multiple displays 358 Troubleshooting your video card 362 Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 367 Where should you put the files 369
172. _b1ks file then run chkfsys to recover the remaining good blocks If this procedure fails you can use the spatch utility to copy as much of the file as possible to another file and then zap the bad file and run chkfsys What to do if your system will no longer 426 boot If a previously working Neutrino system suddenly stops working and will no longer boot then one of the following may have occurred e the hardware has failed or the data on the hard disk has been damaged Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems What to do if your system will no longer boot e someone has either changed overwritten the boot file or changed the system initialization file these are the two most common scenarios The following steps can help you identify the problem Where possible corrective actions are suggested 1 October 6 2005 Try booting from CD or across the network e Ifyou have a network to boot over try booting your machine over the network Once the machine is booted you ll need to log in as root e Ifyou don t have a network boot from your installation CD The filesystem will already be running in this case and you ll be logged in as root Start the hard disk driver For example to start a driver for an Adaptec series 4 SCSI adapter type devb aha4 options amp If you re using another type of driver enter its name instead For example devb ei
173. a printer down for maintenance Note that users can still enter jobs in a spool queue while a printer is stopped Place selected jobs at the top of a printer queue You can use this command to promote high priority jobs lpr places jobs in the queue in the order they were received October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with lpr Spooling directories Each node you wish to print from must have a spooling directory to hold the files to be printed By default the pathname for this directory is usr spool output 1pd you can change the pathname of the spooling directory in the etc printcap file If this directory doesn t exist you must create it on all nodes The 1pd daemon doesn t work without a spooling directory and it doesn t tell you why That s why it s a good idea to run the system logger see syslogd in the Utilities Reference when you re trying to debug printing problems then you can check for error messages in var log syslog Access control October 6 2005 The printer system maintains protected spooling areas so that users can t circumvent printer accounting or remove files other than their own e Only the print manager daemon can spool print jobs The spooling area is writable only by a daemon user and daemon group e The lpr program runs with the user ID root and the group ID daemon Running as root lets lpr read any file required Accessibility is verified by calling ac
174. ace mapping The process whereby the Process Manager maintains an association between resource managers and entries in the pathname space persistent When applied to storage media the ability for the media to retain information across a power cycle For example a hard disk is a persistent storage media whereas a ramdisk is not because the data is lost when power is lost Photon microGUI The proprietary graphical user interface built by QNX Software Systems PIC Programmable Interrupt Controller a hardware component that handles IRQs PID Process ID Also often pid e g as an argument in a function call See also process ID POSIX An IEEE ISO standard The term is an acronym of sorts for Portable Operating System Interface the X alludes to UNIX on which the interface is based 514 Glossary October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems preemption prefix tree The act of suspending the execution of one thread and starting or resuming another The suspended thread is said to have been preempted by the new thread Whenever a lower priority thread is actively consuming the CPU and a higher priority thread becomes READY the lower priority thread is immediately preempted by the higher priority thread The internal representation used by the Process Manager to store the pathname table priority inheritance The characteristic of a thread that causes its priority to be raised or l
175. ader of each cylinder group for fs ext2 so Creating a new filename thus involves allocating a free inode entry and populating it with the details for the new file and then placing the name for the file into the appropriate directory Deleting a file involves removing the name from the parent directory and marking the inode as available These operations must be performed in this order to prevent corruption should there be a power failure between the two writes note that for creation the inode should be allocated before the name as a crash would result in an allocated inode that isn t referenced by any name an orphaned resource that a filesystem s check procedure can later reclaim If the operations were performed the other way around and a power failure occurred the result would be a name that 454 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filesystems refers to a stale or invalid inode which is undetectable as an error A similar argument applies in reverse for file deletion For traditional filesystems the only way of ordering these writes is to perform the first one or more generally all but the last one of a multiple block sequence synchronously i e immediately and waiting for I O to complete before continuing A synchronous write is very expensive because it involves a disk head seek interrupts any active sequential disk streaming and blocks the thread until the w
176. aemon 266 context definitions 128 party configuration 129 variable names 129 snmpd 266 so file extension 140 SOCK 267 socket so NFS 230 sockets 114 TCP IP 126 limits 473 soft links See symbolic links soft modems 355 software flow control 336 free 477 patches 236 third party October 6 2005 editors 152 man 140 perl 206 troff 140 Software Kits SKs 8 245 sort 50 DOS version 59 sound card volume controlling 75 spatch 423 examining blocks within a file 426 special characters quoting 51 209 spell UNIX command 3 spill directory 136 234 spoofing 342 345 spooler 279 299 configuration files 489 spooling 279 directories 285 299 spreadsheets 5 sre 136 SRI SNMP suite 271 SSI 372 stack smashing attack 436 standard I O performance 455 460 redirecting 49 standards 3 startup code 123 162 debugging 126 Photon applications launching 83 disabling 131 176 stat 452 static routing 259 Index 559 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Statistics system 449 451 status or stat CVS command 387 status system 449 statvfs 452 456 stderr 49 stdin 49 stdio h 455 stdout 49 sticky bit 139 sticky tags CVS 391 394 strain reducing 84 stream editor sed 206 strftime 196 stty 336 338 355 su 29 SuperDisk drives 322 superuser See root support technical 477 supported hardware 311 symbolic links 222 cd command and 117 removing 224 SYMLOOP_MAX 224 Symmetric Multiprocessi
177. age directly under the pointer You can specify the horizontal and vertical radius in pixels The taskbar that lets you switch between applications simply by selecting their icons You can change the font font size active and inactive colors and you can decide whether or not to display balloons when you hover over an entry A slider that controls the volume coming from the sound card To mute and unmute the volume select the small speaker icon in this plugin A miniature version of your nine virtual consoles You can decide when to display window frames always never or depending on the size of the world view Modifying the Launch menu The launchmenu so plugin populates the Launch menu based on the contents of the HOME ph launchmenu and etc photon launchmenu directories October 6 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 75 Modifying the Launch menu 2005 QNX Software Systems If there are conflicting items the item found first prevails so items encountered in your home directory s launchmenu directory take precedence over items encountered in the global one Creating items and submenus Inside HOME ph launchmenu and etc photon launchmenu each directory corresponds to a submenu and each file or symbolic link corresponds to a menu item with the following exceptions e Files named menu contain special menu formatting commands see Additional menu control below e Items wi
178. age of bugs or weaknesses in the system Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 435 General OS security 2005 QNX Software Systems Local attack The attacker has an account on the system in question and can use that account to attempt unauthorized tasks Remote exploits Remote exploits are generally much more serious than local ones but fortunately remote exploits are much easier to prevent and are generally less common For example suppose you re running bind a DNS resolver on port 53 of a publicly connected computer and the particular version has a vulnerability whereby an attacker can send a badly formed query that causes bind to open up a shell that runs as root on a different port of the machine An attacker can use this weakness to connect to and effectively own the computer This type of exploit is often called a buffer overrun or stack smashing attack and is described in the article Smashing the Stack for Fun and Profit by Aleph One see http www insecure org stf smashstack txt The simple solution to these problems is to make sure that you know which servers are listening on which ports and that you re running the latest versions of the software If a machine is publicly connected don t run any more services than necessary on it Local exploits 436 Local exploits are much more common and difficult to prevent Having a local account implies a certain amount of trust and it isn t always easy t
179. al device or remote filesystem umount Unmount a device or filesystem For example if s cifs is already running you can mount filesystems on it like this mount t cifs o guest none SMB_SERVER 10 0 0 1 QNX_BIN bin See the Utilities Reference for details on usage and syntax Image filesystem By an image we refer to an OS image here which is a file that contains the OS your executables and any data files that might be related to your programs for use in an embedded system You can think of the image as a small filesystem it has a directory structure and some files in it The image contains a small directory structure that tells procnto the names and positions of the files contained within it the image also contains the files themselves When the embedded system is running the image can be accessed just like any other read only filesystem cd proc boot 1s script cat datal data2 devc ser8250 esh ls procnto cat datal This is a data file called datal contained in the image Note that this is a convenient way of associating data files with your programs 216 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems dev shmem RAM filesystem The above example actually demonstrates two aspects of having the OS image function as a filesystem When we issue the 1s command the OS loads 1s from the image filesystem pathname proc boot 1s Then when we issue
180. al files at one time are written they re as contiguous as possible Since most hard disk drives implement track caching this not only ensures that files are read as quickly as possible from the disk hardware but also serves to minimize the fragmentation of data on disk For more information about performance see Fine Tuning Your System The original QNX 4 filesystem supported filenames no more than 48 characters long This limit has now increased to 505 characters via a backwards compatible extension that s enabled by default The same on disk format is retained new systems see the longer name but old ones see a truncated 48 character name Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 219 QNX 4 filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Long filenames are supported by default when you create a QNX 4 filesystem to disable them specify the N option to dinit To add long filename support to an existing QNX 4 filesystem login as root and create an empty read only file named longfilenames owned by root in the root directory of the filesystem ed root_dir touch longfilenames chmod a r longfilenames chown root root longfilenames After creating the longfilenames file you must restart the filesystem for it to enable long filenames You can determine the maximum filename length that a filesystem supports by using the getconf utility getconf _PC_NAME_MAX root_dir where root_dir is the root directory of the f
181. ame The command interpreter or shell parses the command line and uses the space character to break the command into tokens If your filename includes a space you need to quote the space so that the shell knows you want a literal space For more information including other special characters that you need to watch for see Quoting special characters in Using the Command Line 144 Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 Chapter 7 Using Editors In this chapter Choosing an editor 147 Supported editors 148 Third party editors 152 Specifying the default editor 157 October 6 2005 Chapter 7 e Using Editors 145 2005 QNX Software Systems Choosing an editor Choosing an editor October 6 2005 An editor is a utility designed to view and modify files Editors don t apply any persistent formatting to viewed text although many use colors or styles to provide additional contextual information such as type information in source code files For example if you re editing C code some editors use different colors to indicate keywords strings numbers and so on Which editor you use is largely a question of personal taste e Do you want to use a mouse or other pointer or do you want to use just the keyboard e Do you need to type international characters accents and diacritical marks or just ASCII e How do you like to invoke commands In some editors you type a single character in others
182. among other things The choices are in usr photon keyboard and include mappings for specific languages e g German French as well as for several versions of the Dvorak keyboard layout a layout that some people consider more efficient than the standard QWERTY one If we don t supply the mapping you need you can use the mkkbd utility to create your own Some keyboard layouts e g for the French and German languages use accent keys which by themselves don t generate a character Neutrino treats these keys as dead keys Pressing a dead key followed by a second key modifies the second key creating an accented character For example to create a U character if you re using the French keyboard layout press Shift followed by Shift U You can also generate composed characters by pressing and releasing Alt followed by two keys or keychords For example if you re using the US English layout you can press and release Alt followed by Shift and then Shift U to get a U character Neutrino for MS DOS users If you re familiar with Microsoft Windows you might need to know about the Neutrino equivalents for the basic DOS commands and variables DOS commands and their Neutrino equivalents The following table lists the Neutrino equivalents of some common MS DOS commands For more information about the Neutrino commands see the Utilities Reference October 6 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line
183. and Jaz disks are large capacity removable storage disks used for backing up hard disks and for transporting large files These disks attach to the EIDE ATA chain Before you attempt to use them ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly These drives are simple to set up and they appear in the dev directory as a hard disk For example e The hard disk set up as a primary master appears as dev hdO e The Zip disk set up as a primary slave appears as dev hd1 To mount the drive type mount dev hdl fs zip_drive You don t need to remount the drive when you change disks Magnetic optical drives October 6 2005 Magnetic optical MO drives are usually attached to a SCSI or EIDE ATA bus Before you attempt to use the drive ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly The driver that you need depends on whether the drive is attached to a SCSI or EIDE interface If it s SCSI you ll need to determine the proper driver for your SCSI interface If it s EIDE simply use the devb eide driver For more information see Hard disks above The MO drive should appear in your dev directory as dev mox where x is the number of the drive starting at 0 To mount the drive type mount dev mo0 fs mo_drive You don t need to remount the drive when you change disks Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 323 Input device
184. and archives all the contents of the t 79 partition into one very large archive my_archive tar You can keep the archive on your local system but we recommend that you keep a copy of it on a remote system if the local system gets physically damaged or the hard disk is corrupted you ll lose a local archive Extracting from an archive To extract from the archive you can use pax with the r option pax rf my_archive tar or tar with the x extract v verbose and filename options tar xvf my_archive tar To view the contents of the archive without extracting them use tar with the t option instead of x Compressing an archive An archive can be quite large especially if you archive the entire partition To conserve space you can compress archives although it takes some time to compress on storage and decompress on retrieval Neutrino includes the following compressors and decompressors e bzip2 and bunzip2 e freeze and melt e gzip and gunzip The best choice is usually gzip because it s supported on many operating systems while freeze is used mainly for compatibility with QNX 4 systems There are also many third party compressors October 6 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 405 Archiving your data 2005 QNX Software Systems The gzip utility is licensed under the Gnu Public License GPL which is a consideration if you re going to distribute gzip to others as
185. application utility or configuration utility by clicking on its icon Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 71 Modifying the shelf 2005 QNX Software Systems e change the current console by clicking on a console in the World View You can also switch your console by pressing Ctrl Alt 1 9 where the number is the console number e control the CD Player Right click anywhere on the taskbar or shelf to configure or exit the shelf application To run or restart shelf type shelf amp ata command line Drag the taskbar or shelf border to make it smaller or larger If you drag the border to the bottom or right of the screen the taskbar or shelf is put in autoshow mode which means it appears only when you move the mouse over the edge of the screen Modifying the shelf You can configure the shelf by right clicking on the shelf or taskbar and selecting Setup or by running shelf c from the command line The shelf s configuration dialog looks like this 72 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Modifying the shelf October 6 2005 v All Shelves v GBWorkspace v Shef Launch Menu J amp Taskbar Separator Clock Shelf v amp Applications E p Installer File Manager Voyager Editor Selected Component Name Help Type Launch Application This item type is a plugin A shelf plug in adds functionality to your sh
186. applied without interfering with any TCP IP connections currently using the link local IP address Having both a DHCP assigned address and a link local address active at the same time lets you communicate with hosts that have link local IP addresses and those that have regular IP addresses For more information see nfm autoip so and dhep client in the Utilities Reference Using the SRI SNMP suite for Neutrino October 6 2005 The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that uses the TCP IP protocol suite and facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth The SRI SNMP Suite for Neutrino consists primarily of ports of the EMANATE and EMANATE Lite technologies developed by SNMP Research International SRI EMANATE Lite is a statically extensible agent the EMANATE agent can be extended dynamically Both agents support SNMP V1 V2 and V3 and include development kits for developers to extend the agents Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 271 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting If you re having trouble with your TCP IP network i e you can t send packets over the network you need to use several utilities for troubleshooting These utilities query hosts servers and the gateways to fetch diagnostic information
187. are Systems Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters npm tcpip so causes the second stack to be registered as sock2 dev socket instead of the default dev socket TCP IP applications that wish to use the second stack must specify the environment variable SOCK For example SOCK sock2 telnet 10 59 or SOCK sock2 netstat in or SOCK sock2 ifconfig en0 192 168 2 10 If you don t specify SOCK the command uses the first TCP IP stack Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters October 6 2005 When you add a host to the network or connect your host to the Internet you need to assign an IP address to your host and set some other configuration parameters There are a few common mechanisms for doing this e Dial up providers use the Point to Point Protocol PPP e Broadband providers such as Digital Subscriber Line DSL or Cable use Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE or DHCP e A typical corporate network deploys DHCP Along with your IP address the servers implementing these protocols can supply your gateway netmask nameservers and even your printer in the case of a corporate network Users don t need to manually configure their host to use the network Neutrino also implements another autoconfiguration protocol called AutolIP zeroconf IETF draft This autoconfiguration protocol is used to assign link local IP addresses to hosts in a small network It uses a peer negotiation scheme to determine the
188. at for specifying variable names for SNMP utilities see etc mib txt in the Utilities Reference Contains an ASCII message of the day that may be displayed when users log in as long as etc profile is configured to display it The default etc profile displays this file only if the etc motd file is more recent than the time you last logged in to the system as determined by the time your HOME lastlogin file was last modified For more information see the description of etc profile in Configuring Your Environment Network name database file For more information see etc networks in the Utilities Reference Backup of etc passwd file before its last change via the passwd utility See the Managing User Accounts chapter Backup of etc shadow file before its last change via the passwd utility See Managing User Accounts etc party conf etc passwd Configuration file for SNMP v2 party definitions See etc party conf in the Utilities Reference for more details This file defines login accounts See the chapter Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down as well as Managing User Accounts for more details also see passwd login phlogin2 and phlogin in the Utilities Reference Chapter 6 e Working with Files 129 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems etc photon A directory that contains some Photon related configuration files including pterm Configuration files for pterm s
189. ation about the hardware loads callout routines that the kernel uses for interacting with the hardware and then loads and starts the microkernel and process manager procnto which starting with release 6 3 0 also manages named semaphores IPL and startup for a board are generally part of a Board Support Package BSP for a particular board After proento has completed its initialization it runs the commands supplied in the boot script which might start further customization of the runtime environment either through a shell script or through some program written in C C or a combination of the two Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems What happens when you boot October 6 2005 On a non x86 disk booted system that s pretty well how it happens most customization is done in the boot script or in a shell script that it calls For more details see Making an OS Image in Building Embedded Systems For an x86 BIOS boot this becomes more complex Reset vector y C BIOS extension BIOS extension ie y Startup OS boot image procnto Boot script 4 Initialization scripts and programs Booting a Neutrino system with an x86 BIOS After gaining control the BIOS configures the hardware and then it scans for BIOS extension signatures 0x55AA It calls each BIOS extension e g a network card with a boot ROM or hard disk controller u
190. ator should start PCI cards correctly If your PCI card doesn t work swap PCI slots Sometimes the IRQ that s assigned to the particular slot doesn t work well with the card For additional information about the card use the pei utility For a list of supported hardware see our website as described in the introduction to this chapter PCCARD and PCMCIA cards October 6 2005 Neutrino supports PCMCIA 1 0 2 0 and CardBUS type cards By default the driver detects the ISA PCI based controller If an adapter isn t detected check the supported hardware page to ensure that your PC Card adapter s chipset is supported Currently the driver doesn t let you specify the adapter s I O port and IRQ but you can specify the card s I O port and IRQ If the driver fails to start e Ensure that the devp pecard server has a free memory window at OxD4000 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 327 PCCARD and PCMCIA cards 2005 QNX Software Systems e Check the BIOS on the PC or Laptop to see that this memory isn t cached or used by another device e Check that the PC Card controller in the BIOS is set to CardBus 16bit not PCIC mode If the chipset is set up in PCIC compatible mode the chip works like an Intel 82365 compatible PCMCIA controller and isn t visible in the PCI space If the chipset is set to CardBus 16bit the chip is visible in the PCI space and operates as a PC Card adapter To display PC Card information
191. attached to the PC Card driver devp pccard Base The base address of the PC Card This information is useful for starting device drivers Size The number of bytes in the I O port range IRQ The PC Card s IRQ This information is useful when starting the driver manually October 6 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 329 USB devices 2005 QNX Software Systems USB devices A Universal Serial Bus USB provides a hot swappable common interface for USB devices e g network input character I O audio and hubs For more information on USB USB specifications and a list of frequently asked questions see www usb org 330 If you don t know what kind of USB device you re using you can use the usb utility to identify it usb vvv less The output from this command looks like this Device Address Vendor Product Device Release USB Spec Release Serial Number Class Max PacketSize0O Languages Current Frame Configurations Configuration Attributes Max Power Interfaces Interface Class Subclass Protocol Endpoints Endpoint Attributes Max Packet Size Endpoint Attributes Max Packet Size Interval Interface Class Subclass Protocol Endpoints Endpoint Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 1 0x05c7 QTRONIX 0x2011 USB Keyboard and Mouse r1 12 v1 00 N A 0x00 Independent per interface 8 0x0409 English 511 1024 bytes 1 1 Oxa0 Bus powered Remote wakeup 5
192. b embedded 266 369 security 374 services 98 394 sessions limits 472 setconf 189 191 setenv 196 setgid 138 setrlimit 473 474 setuid 138 436 setvbuf 452 456 460 sh 42 205 See also ksh Korn shell SH 4 directories 123 limits 474 shadow 20 entries 23 users removing 29 share 135 shared memory 126 limits 473 procnto 217 shared objects 133 140 shelf 71 clock 74 configuration files 130 disabling 110 modifying 72 shelf cfg 73 SHELL 20 63 shells 558 Index 18 aliases 46 setting 108 186 489 command completion 44 command line interpreting 42 commands builtin 55 finding 54 multiple 45 recalling 53 configuring 184 debug 179 dot file 211 embedded 206 fatembedded 206 filename completion 44 login program 20 22 26 28 29 non POSIX 33 prompt setting 489 quoting 51 209 redirection 49 remote daemon 265 scripts 53 205 return codes 210 substitutions 46 test 64 variables 208 wildcard characters 48 209 shells directory 130 shmem 217 shortcuts keyboard 100 shtml file extension 373 shutdown 14 DOS version 59 shutting down 14 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index unexpectedly 122 SIFNAME 217 SIFREG 217 signals SIGINT 291 SIGTERM 14 sin 3 449 skel 131 Slinger 266 369 slogger 124 126 167 170 sloginfo 126 167 Small Computer Systems Interface See SCSI SMB Server Message Block protocol 227 snapshot 107 SNMP 271 agent d
193. bytes The problem with this is that with frames smaller than 64 bytes the NIC can t detect the error Generally if you experience late collisions with large frames on your network you re very likely also experiencing late collisions with small frames These types of errors are generally caused by Ethernet cables that are longer than that allowed by the IEEE 802 3 specification or are the maximum size permitted by the particular type of cable or by an excessive amount of repeaters on the network between the two nodes Another thing to note is that these errors may actually be caused by a node on the network that has faulty hardware and is sending damaged frames that look like collision fragments These damaged frames can sometimes appear to a network card to be a late collision Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Network adapters Transmits Transmits aborted excessive collisions This error occurs if there are excessive collisions on the network The network card gives up on transmitting the frame after 16 collisions This generally means that the network is jammed and is too busy Routers also give up on transmitting a frame if they experience excessive collisions but instead of alerting the original transmitter routers simply discard the frame If these sort of errors are being experienced see if the network can be reduced or introduce a strategically placed switch i
194. can also filter packets based on the IP address they came from block in quick from 10 7 0 0 16 pass in all These rules block all packets from IP Address 10 7 0 0 witha netmask of 16 IP Filter accepts both forms of netmask so you can also write this as 255 255 0 0 If the filter doesn t find a match for rule 1 it looks at rule 2 But if the filter finds a match for rule 1 it stops searching because you specified the quick keyword There s usually a machine called a router that bridges the outside world to the inside world and vice versa You can usually tell a router from a regular system because a router generally has more than one interface Every packet comes in on an interface and every packet goes out on an interface Use these keywords to identify the interfaces lon Loopback Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 443 Setting up a firewall 2005 QNX Software Systems 444 enn Ethernet ppp PPP connection where n is the interface number For example if you want to block all packets on ppp0O use these rules block in quick on pppO all pass in all You can also intermix IP addresses and interfaces The more criteria the firewall needs to match against the tighter the firewall becomes For example if you want to receive packets on pppO but not from IP address 10 7 0 0 16 you could specify a rule like this block in quick on pppO from 10 7 0 0 16 to any pass in all These rules mean that the pac
195. ccessing menu items like this About This Guide XxXiii Typographical conventions 2005 QNX Software Systems You ll find the Other menu item under Perspective Show View We use notes cautions and warnings to highlight important messages Notes point out something important or useful WARNING Warnings tell you about commands or procedures that could be dangerous to your files your hardware or even yourself IS CAUTION Cautions tell you about commands or procedures that may have unwanted or undesirable side effects Note to Windows users In our documentation we use a forward slash as a delimiter in all pathnames including those pointing to Windows files We also generally follow POSIX UNIX filesystem conventions XXIV About This Guide October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems What you ll find in this guide What you ll find in this guide The QNX Neutrino User s Guide tells you how to Use the QNX Neutrino runtime environment regardless of the kind of computer it s running on embedded system or desktop Think of this guide as the companion how to doc for the Utilities Reference Assuming there s a Neutrino system prompt or Photon login waiting for input this guide is intended to help you learn how to interact with that prompt Perform such traditional system administration topics as setting up user accounts security starting up a Neutrino machine etc
196. ces support UDMA 4 or higher but sloginfo reports that the driver is using a lower mode make sure you re using an 80 conductor cable e If you have an 80 conductor cable and your devices support UDMA 4 or higher but sloginfo reports that the driver is using a lower mode the device firmware might be out of date The driver relies on the device firmware to detect the cable type You can check to see if the device manufacturer has a firmware upgrade or you can use the udma xxx command line option to override the mode For example devb eide eide vid 0x8086 did 0x2411 pci 0 chnl 1 master udma 4 If the drives are detected but they re running slowly 318 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Hard disks e Use sloginfo to examine the devb driver output in the system log It will tell you the current speed of the driver e g max udma 5 cur udma 3 1S Neutrino automatically uses the maximum UDMA mode unless you ve specified a maximum in the BIOS The following table shows the maximum mode and rate for each disk specification The PIO MDMA and lower UDMA modes use a 40 pin cable higher UDMA modes require an 80 pin cable Specification PIO MDMA UDMA UDMA Maximum 40 pin 80 pin rate ATA 0 0 N A N A 4 M s ATA 2 4 2 N A N A 16 M s ATA 3 4 2 N A N A 16 M s ATA 4 4 2 2 N A 33 M s ATA 5 4 2 2 4 66 M s ATA 6 4 2 2 5 100 M s ATA 7 4 2 2 6 133 M s Ee October 6
197. cess see the Library Reference The group ID is used in setting up proper ownership of files in the spooling area for lprrm e Users can t modify control files Control files in a spooling area are made with daemon ownership and group ownership daemon Their mode is 0660 This ensures that users can t modify control files and that no user can remove files except through lprrm e Users may alter files in the spool directory only via the print utilities The spooling programs lpd lprq and lprrm run setuid to root and setgid to group daemon to access spool files and printers Chapter 14 Printing 285 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Local access to queues is controlled with the rg entry in the etc printcap file xrg lprgroup Users must be in the group lprgroup to submit jobs to the specified printer The default is to allow all users access Note that once the files are in the local queue they can be printed locally or forwarded to another host depending on the configuration The print manager authenticates all remote clients The method used is the same as the authentication scheme for rshd see the Utilities Reference The host on which a client resides must be present in etc hosts equiv or etc hosts 1pd and the request message must come from a reserved port number Other utilities such as rlogin also use etc hosts equiv to determine which hosts are equivalent The etc hosts 1pd
198. cfig Configuration files various Various programs formats formats differ continued 140 Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filename extensions Extension Description Related programs utilities conf Configuration files various Various program formats formats differ css Cascading style sheet Used in the QNX Momentics PE development system for Eclipse documentation def C definition file QCC make QNX Momentics development system required dil MS Windows dynamic link Not used directly in Neutrino library necessary in support of some programs that run under MS Windows such as some of the QNX Momentics development tools See so shared objects for the Neutrino equivalent gif GIF graphical image pv Photon viewer gz Compressed file gzip Backing Up and Recovering Data h C header file qcc make QNX Momentics development system required htm HyperText Markup Language voyager web browser HTML file for Web viewing html HyperText Markup Language helpviewer voyager web HTML file for Web viewing browser ifs img A QNX Image filesystem mkifs see also Making an OS October 6 2005 typically a bootable image Image in Building Embedded Systems QNX Momentics development system continued Chapter 6 e Working with Files 141 Filename extensions 2005 QNX Software Systems Extension Description Related programs utilities jar Java archive co
199. change your password use the passwd command This utility prompts you for your current and new passwords see Managing your own account in Managing User Accounts 12 Chapter 2 e Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Logging out To log in as a different user enter login at the command prompt and then enter the user s name and password The su switch user ID utility also lets you run as another user but temporarily It doesn t run the user s profiles or significantly modify the environment For more information see the Utilities Reference To determine your current user name use the id command Logging out Photon mode October 6 2005 To log out of Photon 1 Select Log Out from the Launch or Desktop menu or enter phshutdown on the command line The shutdown dialog appears 2 Select Logout End Photon session and click Ok If your system is configured to start Photon the phlogin2 or phlogin dialog reappears If you started Photon manually from text mode the system returns to text mode Even if your system started Photon automatically you can exit your Photon session and run in text mode To switch from Photon to text mode 1 In the login dialog click Shutdown The shutdown dialog appears 2 Enable Exit to text mode and click Ok If you start a terminal session from within Photon for example by clicking Terminal on the shelf th
200. cific directories e g mipsle ppcbe x86 as well as the directories described in the sections that follow The bin directory contains binaries of essential utilities such as chmod 1s and ksh To display basic utility syntax type use utilityname from the command line For more information see use in the Utilities Reference The boot directory contains files and directories related to creating bootable OS images image filesystems Image filesystems contain OS components your executables and data files that need to be present and running immediately upon bootup For general information on this topic see Making an OS Image in the Building Embedded Systems guide and mkifs in the Utilities Reference This directory includes boot build This directory contains the mkifs buildfiles used to build OS images The buildfiles for a standard x86 based Neutrino system are qnxbase build and qnxbasedma build boot fs By convention we use this directory to store image filesystems built by mkifs To boot from one of the images you ll need to copy it to boot ona bootable QNX 4 filesystem device first boot sys IPL and startup code are located here This is one of the paths searched by the mkifs utility as it tries to resolve components named in the buildfile Chapter 6 e Working with Files 123 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems dev As described earlier the dev directory belongs to the
201. cification is EST5EDT4 M4 1 0 02 00 00 M10 5 0 02 00 00 It explicitly states that daylight saving time starts on the first 1 Sunday 0 of April 4 at 2 00 A M and ends on the last 5 Sunday 0 of October 10 at 2 00 A M The specification for Pacific time is PST8PDT Pacific Standard Time is 8 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC Standard time and daylight saving time both apply to this locale By default Pacific Daylight Time is one hour ahead of standard time that is PDT7 Since it isn t specified daylight saving time starts on the first Sunday of April at 2 00 A M and ends on the last Sunday of October at 2 00 A M 194 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Setting the time zone Newfoundland time The specification for Newfoundland time is NST3 30NDT2 30 e Newfoundland Standard Time is 3 5 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Standard time and daylight saving time both apply to this locale e Newfoundland Daylight Time is 2 5 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC Central European time The specification for Central European time is Central Europe Time 2 00 e Central European Time is 2 hours later than Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Daylight saving time doesn t apply in this locale Japanese time The specification for Japanese time is JST 9 e Japanese Standard Time
202. cify one or more runnable targets where each target corresponds to a single menu item You specify the targets in this form item text target action item2 _text target action Target files are organized into one or more sections where each section specifies a target The square brackets are part of the syntax the text in them is the menu item s default text following the same conventions as discussed above for filenames Each target is described by key value pairs within the section You must specify the target action pair it specifies what to do when the item is invoked The action can be one of e a full path to another file or directory The launchmenu so plugin examines that file and treats it accordingly it could be an executable a regular file directory or even another target file e a filename of an executable that can be found by searching the directories specified in your PATH environment variable e a sShell style command in the form envl vall command options If you don t specify the target key the plugin ignores the section when it s generating menu items The optional keys are Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 77 Modifying the Launch menu 2005 QNX Software Systems sicon The full path of a small maximum 24 x 18 pixels icon to display for the item If you don t specify this the launchmenu so plugin tries to find an icon using the association mechanism or from the ex
203. configured for up to four virtual consoles dev con1 dev con4 The deve con driver is also the keyboard driver for non USB keyboards in text mode You can start the driver with this command devc con amp For more information see deve con in the Utilities Reference 1 0 attributes To set or display the I O attributes for a character device tty use the stty utility For more information about setting up your terminal see Terminal support in Using the Command Line Network adapters The main steps in setting up a network adapter are e identifying your Network Interface Card NIC 338 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Network adapters e starting the driver e making sure the driver and hardware communicate Identify your NIC The documentation for the hardware should describe the type of chipset used If you don t know what type of chipset you re using you can identify it using pci vvv Find the entry for the Network controller and it ll give you details on the manufacturer vendor ID and device ID Either find the information on the manufacturer s website or use the vendor ID and device ID to cross reference it with this online site http www pcidatabase com With the information you get from that site you can visit the QNX supported hardware site see the introduction to this chapter In the Network section locate your chipset and its ass
204. crease font and window size Increase or decrease font size only Ctrl Alt X or Ctrl Alt C Ctrl Alt V or Ctrl right mouse button Ctrl Alt R Ctrl Alt H Ctrl Alt O Ctrl Alt Ctrl Alt 4 Ctrl Alt Page Up Ctrl Alt Page Down Ctrl Alt Home and Ctrl Alt End Ctrl Alt and Ctrl Alt Ctrl Alt and Ctrl Alt If you want to Press Cut selected text Ctrl X or Ctrl Alt X Copy selected text to the Ctrl C or clipboard Ctrl Alt C Paste selected text from the Ctrl V or clipboard Ctrl Alt V or Ctrl right mouse button Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 101 Hotkeys and shortcuts 2005 QNX Software Systems The window manager pwm provides the following shortcuts If you want to Press Move the window to the front Alt F2 Move the window to the back Alt F3 Close the window Alt F4 or Restore the window to previous size if it s been maximized Move the window Resize the window use the mouse or cursor keys to choose the new size Minimize the window Maximize the window Workspace double click the window menu button Alt F5 or double click the title bar Alt F7 Alt F8 Alt F9 Alt F10 or double click the title bar The window manager pwm provides the following shortcuts If you wan
205. create new file associations with p m but they didn t work correctly For example based on the existing associations I tried to associate txt files with ped but ped doesn t start Make sure you have usr photon bin in your PATH environment variable then do the following Start pfm Press F11 or select Associations from the Edit menu Click Add to add a new file association A OND Enter these settings e Pattern txt e Open ped e View ped e Edit ped 5 Choose Done to close the New Association Type dialog 6 Choose Done to close the Associate dialog How can I disable the Ctrl Alt 1 2 keychords that allow console switching in Photon Place this line in your ete re d re local file export PHWMOPTS S For more information see pwm in the Utilities Reference If a mouse isn t connected to my computer how do I shut down Photon You can press Ctrl Alt Shift Backspace to shut down Photon If it doesn t work the computer may be locked up in which case you might have to press the reset button To avoid using the reset button run inetd then telnet into the box and slay the processes that Photon is using How do I change the text and background colors of the terminal There s a K option for pterm that lets you select the initial colors Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 109 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems For example pterm K 17 sets the colors to
206. d requirements Metadata updates October 6 2005 Metadata is data about data or all the overhead and attributes involved in storing the user data itself such as the name of a file the physical blocks it uses modification and access timestamps and so Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 453 Filesystems 2005 QNX Software Systems The most expensive operation of a filesystem is in updating the metadata This is because e The metadata is typically located on different disk cylinders from the data and is even disjoint to itself bitmaps inodes directory entries and hence incurs seek delays e The metadata is usually written to the disk with more urgency than user data because the metadata affects the integrity of the filesystem structure and hence may incur a transfer delay Almost all operations on the filesystem even reading file data unless you ve specified the noatime option see io b1k so in the Utilities Reference involve some metadata updates Ordering the updates to metadata Some filesystem operations affect multiple blocks on disk For example consider the situation of creating or deleting a file Most filesystems separate the name of the file or link from the actual attributes of the file the inode this supports the POSIX concept of hard links multiple names for the same file Typically the inodes reside in a fixed location on disk the inodes file for s qnx4 so or in the he
207. d usually imply that the etc printcap file or the protection modes of the files are incorrect Files may also be inaccessible if people bypass the lpr program In addition to messages generated by 1pd any of the filters that lpd spawns may log messages to the syslog file or to the error log file the file specified in the 1 entry in etc printcap If you want to debug problems run syslogd Troubleshooting remote printing problems October 6 2005 If the file you send doesn t print you may get an error message from one of the 1p print utilities see Understanding lpr error messages If you don t get an error message check the following e Although the spawned 1pd program creates spooler subdirectories as required to hold print jobs you must create the main spooling directory yourself make sure this directory default usr spool output 1pd exists e Verify the contents of the etc printcap on each node e Make sure that the etc hosts 1pd on the printing node contains the name of the sending node Chapter 14 e Printing 307 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems e Make sure that io net is running with the appropriate shared objects e Run syslogd and examine the syslog file for logged system messages 308 Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 Chapter 15 Connecting Hardware In this chapter Introduction 311 PCI AGP devices 312 CD ROMs 313 DVDs 314 Floppy disks 314 Hard disks 315
208. d either specify the path to the command or add the path to the script s PATH variable e A script can t change its parent shell s environment or current directory unless you run it as a dot file e A script won t run if it contains DOS end of line characters If you edit a Neutrino script on a Windows machine use the textto utility with the 1 option to convert the file to the format used by the QNX 4 filesystem 212 Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts October 6 2005 Chapter 11 Working with Filesystems In this chapter Introduction 215 Setting up starting and stopping a block filesystem 215 Mounting and unmounting filesystems 216 Image filesystem 216 dev shmem RAM filesystem 217 QNX 4 filesystem 218 DOS filesystem 224 CD ROM filesystem 225 Linux Ext2 filesystem 226 Flash filesystems 227 CIFS filesystem 227 NFS filesystem 228 Package filesystem 231 Inflator filesystem 237 Troubleshooting 237 October 6 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 213 2005 QNX Software Systems Introduction Introduction Neutrino provides a variety of filesystems so that you can easily access DOS Linux as well as native QNX 4 disks The Filesystems chapter of the System Architecture guide describes their classes and features The System Architecture guide sometimes describes features that haven t yet been implemented For example io cam doesn t exist as a process the devb drivers are
209. d for each file printed and do accounting if there s an af field in the printer s printcap entry If there are fields for both input and output filters the output filter is used only to print the banner page it s then stopped to allow input filters to access the printer Used to convert files from one form to another For example va varian Benson Varian lp dev va0 sd usr spool vad of usr 1lib vpf tf usr 1lib rvcat mx 2000 p1 58 px 2112 py 1700 tr f The t entry specifies usr lib rvcat as the filter to use when printing troff output This filter is needed to set the device into print mode for text and into plot mode for printing troff files and October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with lpr October 6 2005 raster images Note that the page length is set to 58 lines by the p1 entry for 8 5 by 11 fanfold paper To enable accounting add an af filter to the varian entry like this va varian Benson Varian lp dev va0 sd usr spool vad of usr lib vpf if usr lib vpf tf usr lib rvcat af usr adm vaacct mx 2000 p1 58 px 2112 py 1700 tr f Neutrino doesn t provide print filters you have to either port them from another UNIX type OS or write your own If you don t want to do this you can use the spooling system which provides print drivers for specific families of currently popular printers See spooler in the Utilities Reference and Printing with sp
210. d my and another called file Use quoting to escape the meaning of the special characters e g less my file or less my file For information about the other characters that you need to quote see Quoting special characters How do I work with a file whose name starts with a hyphen Neutrino utilities use the hyphen to denote an option e g head n 10 some_file If you create a file whose name October 6 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 65 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems starts with a hyphen and you pass that filename as an argument to a utility the utility parses the filename as one or more options Most utilities recognize a double hyphen to mean end of options Put this before your filename head my file For more information see the Utility Conventions chapter in the Utilities Reference Why do I get a Unrecognized TERM type message when I start programs such as vi Either your TERM environment variable isn t set correctly or there isn t an entry for your terminal type in usr 1ib terminfo or possibly etc termcap see Terminal support earlier in this chapter 66 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 Chapter 5 Using the Photon microGUI In this chapter Overview of Photon 69 Modifying the shelf 72 Modifying the Launch menu 75 Modifying the Desktop menu 82 Starting applications automatically 83 Configuration tools
211. d on an account that previously didn t have a password e editing the etc passwd or etc group files If it s likely that someone might try to use the passwd utility or update the account database files while you re editing them lock the password database by creating the etc pwlock file before making your changes As described below you should use the passwd utility to change an account s password However you need to use a text editor to e change an existing user s user name full name user ID group ID home directory or login shell e create a new account that doesn t conform to the passwd utility s allowed configuration e remove a user account e add or remove a group e change the list of members of a group If you re using Photon you can use phuser which provides a graphical front end to passwd and also lets you choose an icon or shell for a user and edit the groups 26 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Managing other accounts The changes you make manually to the account files aren t checked for conformance to the rules set in the passwd configuration file For more information see the description of etc default passwd in the documentation for passwd in the Utilities Reference Adding users October 6 2005 To add a user log in as root then either use phuser if you re using Photon or use passwd passwd new _username Mak
212. dard POSIX shell In either case see your system administrator for help Why can t I log in in text mode If you enter your user name and password to the text mode login prompt login and it responds Login incorrect it s likely because your user name doesn t exist or you ve typed the wrong password Both user names and passwords are case sensitive make sure you don t have Caps Lock on To avoid giving clues to unauthorized users Login doesn t tell you whether it s the user name or the password that s wrong If you can t resolve the problem yourself your system administrator root user can set a new password on your account This symptom can also occur if one or more password related files are missing If the system administrator is in the middle of updating the files it s possible that its absence will be temporary Try again in a minute or two if this might be the case Otherwise see your system administrator for help If you are the system administrator and can t access the system try accessing it from another Neutrino machine using Qnet from a development machine using the qconn interface or boot and run from the installation CD ROM to gain shell access to examine and repair the necessary files My text mode login fails with a message command No such file or directory The system couldn t find the command specified as your login shell This might happen because e The command wasn t found
213. data for a filesystem metadata includes all the overhead and attributes involved in storing the user data itself such as the name of a file the physical blocks it uses modification and access timestamps and so on Glossary 511 2005 QNX Software Systems microkernel A part of the operating system that provides the minimal services used by a team of optional cooperating processes which in turn provide the higher level OS functionality The microkernel itself lacks filesystems and many other services normally expected of an OS those services are provided by optional processes mountpoint The location in the pathname space where a resource manager has registered itself For example a CD ROM filesystem may register a single mountpoint of cdrom mutex Mutual exclusion lock a simple synchronization service used to ensure exclusive access to data shared between threads It is typically acquired pthread _mutex_lock and released pthread_mutex_unlock around the code that accesses the shared data usually a critical section name resolution In a Neutrino network the process by which the Qnet network manager converts an FQNN to a list of destination addresses that the transport layer knows how to get to name resolver Program code that attempts to convert an FQNN to a destination address NDP Node Discovery Protocol proprietary QNX Software Systems protocol for broadcasting name resolution requ
214. day e training e an online knowledge base that you can search e detailed hardware support lists e free software e and more Some of these resources are free others are available only if you ve purchased a support plan For more information about our technical support offerings see the Services section of our website at http www qnx com Chapter 22 e Technical Support 477 Appendix A Examples In this appendix Buildfile for an NFS mounting target 481 qnxbasedma build 485 Buildfile that doesn t use diskboot 487 _profile 488 kshre 489 Configuration files for spooler 489 PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes 494 Configuration files for setting up a firewall 497 October 6 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 479 2005 QNX Software Systems Buildfile for an NFS mounting target This appendix includes examples of the following buildfile for an NFS mounting target qnxbasedma build buildfile that doesn t use diskboot profile kshre configuration files for spooler PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes configuration files for setting up a firewall Buildfile for an NFS mounting target Here s a sample buildfile for an NFS mounting target October 6 2005 In a real buildfile you can t use a backslash to break a long line into shorter pieces but we ve done that here just to make the buildfile easier to read FEAE AE HEHE AEE AE AE H
215. dcard character 48 home directory 18 46 pipe 50 209 utility syntax 56 1 file extension 140 1 3D Graphics TDK 8 A a file extension 140 AbiWord 152 ABLANG 78 104 110 ABLPATH 104 AB_RESOVRD 104 absolute pathnames 115 accents 59 151 156 account center myQNX 477 accounts user 11 17 adding 27 managing 25 524 Index removing 29 acl conf 127 add CVS command 385 394 address space 133 limits 472 474 adduser UNIX command 3 administrator system See root AH Authentication Header 440 aliases 46 examples 489 setting 108 186 Alt Enter 102 Alt Esc 102 Alt Shift Esc 102 altboot file 122 164 413 414 ansi terminal type 39 anti aliasing 84 197 applications hiding and showing 71 launching 71 74 profiling 11 ar 140 archives 402 compressing 405 creating 403 decompressing 406 extracting from 405 library 140 arithmetical expressions 48 ARM directories 123 limits 474 arrow keys 39 53 as 140 ASC_MEDIA_NOT_PRESENT 317 ASCII text files 140 Asian fonts 84 198 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index assembly language source 140 associations file 109 at UNIX command 3 AT style keyboards 324 ATI RADEON chipsets 358 attacks buffer overrun 436 denial of service DOS 437 stack smashing 436 takeover 437 attic CVS 393 attrib DOS command 59 audio cards 326 wave files 140 Authentication Header See AH autoconnect 105 127 AUTOCONNECT 105 AutoIP 267 27
216. de options qnx4 options amp This should create a block special file called dev hdo that represents the entire hard disk Run fdisk Running the fdisk utility will immediately give you useful information about the state of your hard disk The fdisk utility might report one of several types of problems Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 427 What to do if your system will no longer boot 2005 QNX Software Systems Problem Probable cause Remedy Error reading block 1 Wrong disk parameters Bad partition information Either the disk controller or the hard disk itself has failed Your hardware has probably lost its information about this hard drive likely because the battery for the CMOS memory is running low If the disk size is reported correctly by fdisk but the partition information is wrong then the data in block 1 of the physical disk has somehow been damaged If the disk is good replacing the controller card might let you continue using the disk Otherwise you ll have to replace the hard drive reinstall Neutrino and restore your files from backup Rerunning the hardware setup procedure or the programmable option select procedure on a PS 2 will normally clear this up Of course replacing the battery will make this a more permanent fix Use fdisk to recreate the correct partition information It s a good idea to write down or print out a hard co
217. de2 to the printer attached to node1 using a command like this lpr h Plpt1 tmp test Here s what happens 1 2 You enter the lpr command to print a file remotely The lpr utility requests printing service The 1pd daemon on node2 hears the request spawns a copy of itself to service the request and then creates a spooling subdirectory to hold the files to be printed The spawned 1pd daemon places the print job in the spooler as two files a data file containing the file to be printed and a header file containing information about the print job to be printed as an optional front sheet The spawned 1pd daemon processes the spooled print jobs in the order they were received it starts sending data packets containing the print job to the remote 1pd daemon The 1pd daemon on node receives the packets as a printing request and after checking that the request is from an approved node spawns a copy of itself to service the request and also creates a spooling subdirectory to hold the files to be printed If the request isn t from an approved source a refusal message is sent back to the source address The spawned 1pd collects the data packets places the print job into the spooler queue and then sends the print jobs in the order they were received to the printer you specified 296 Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with lpr Remote printing to a printer on another networ
218. des for each video driver supported by your graphics card The list is generated by a hardware scan Photon performs during installation Localization phlocale Localization or Time amp Date in the shelf or Launch Configure Localization Set your machine s time zone language keyboard see International keyboards in Using the Command Line time and date Changing the language on your machine affects only the applications that support your choice Other applications continue to use their default language Mouse input cfg Mouse in the shelf or Launch gt Configure Mouse Set the speed and acceleration of the mouse pointer You can also swap the buttons to reduce the strain if you re using the mouse with your left hand and enable the wheel if the mouse has one Network phlip Network in the shelf or Launch Configure Network Manage your network and modem settings Print manager prjobs View start or cancel jobs in the print queue 84 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Browsing files with the File Manager Remote access phrelaycfg Create or delete the etc system config noditto file which prevents anyone from using phditto to access your Photon workspace from a remote machine Screen saver savercfg Screen Saver in the shelf or Launch Configure Screen Saver Configure the Photon screen saver You can select from a list of screen
219. device If you aren t logged in as root you have to specify the full path to nicinfo This utility displays information about the given network interface connection or dev io net enO if you don t specify one The information includes the number of packets transmitted and received collisions and other errors as follows 3COM 90xC 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet Controller Physical Node ID 000103 E8433F Current Physical Node ID 000103 E8433F Media Rate oc Goias a eee eee Sis 10 00 Mb s half duplex UTP MTU hae days toy diaree Segoe Hey vce Sareta Shes cers 1514 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 275 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Lanei OE ee as eae ae SS ee OOA 0 I O Port Range 0xA800 gt OxA87F Hardware Interrupt 0x7 Promiscuous 2 e ee00ee Disabled MULELTCASU sok oe we SS Oe eee hee Enabled Total Packets Txd OK 1585370 Total Packets Txd Bad 9 Total Packets Rxd OK 11492102 Total Bx Errors os exes eae hee sete 0 Total Bytes Txd 102023380 Total Bytes Rxd 2252658488 Tx Collision Errors 39598 Tx Collisions Errors aborted 0 Carrier Sense Lost on Tx 0 FIFO Underruns During Tx 0 Tx deferred 0 0000s 99673 Out of Window Collisions 0 FIFO Overruns During Rx 0 Alig
220. devices General serial adapters By default a serial port driver automatically detects the I O port and IRQ A standard PC system uses the deve ser8250 driver the BSP documentation indicates the drivers specific to your target hardware If the driver doesn t detect all the serial ports ensure that the ports are enabled in the BIOS If the ports are enabled try specifying the I O port and IRQ of the ports when you start the driver Use a comma to October 6 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 335 Character devices 2005 QNX Software Systems 336 separate the I O port and the IRQ use a space to separate each port IRQ pair in the command For example devc ser8250 3 8 4 2 8 3 If you start a serial driver for a UART or modem when another serial driver is already running you need to use the u option to give the new driver a number to append to the device name so that it doesn t conflict with any existing dev ser entry The standard devc ser8250 driver supports only the RS 232 protocol The Character Driver Development Kit DDK includes the source to deve ser8250 which you can use to implement any additional protocols or features The serial drivers support software and hardware flow control e To enable software flow control start the serial driver with the s option or use stty after starting the driver stty tosflow tisflow lt dev serl e To disable software flow control start the driver with t
221. doesn t start Photon and leaves you with a black screen try the following 1 Restart the system and boot into safe mode don t start Photon 2 Ensure that your graphics card is supported 3 Clear the modes file From the command line type crttrap clear 4 Restart your system and try to detect your video card again If this fails clear the modes file but don t restart the system Then run crttrap manually from the command line with the verbose option crttrap trap VVVVV If crtt rap hangs again you should be able to see where it failed or what the last adapter it tried to detect was If you can determine the adapter that it failed to trap remove it from the trap list by editing etc system config graphics traplist The list that s generated comes from the enumerators so you might have to change the enumerators so they no longer detect the card in your system e g if you have two video cards in your system You can find the enumerators in etc system enum devices graphics Once you ve removed the offending device from the traplist check to see if crttrap detects the card properly 364 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Video cards October 6 2005 crttrap trap VVVVV If crttrap still hangs try setting the mode manually by editing etc system config graphics modes Create this file it if it doesn t already exist For more information see
222. dos so shared object see the Utilities Reference lets you mount DOS filesystems FAT12 FAT16 and FAT32 under Neutrino This shared object is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting a DOS FAT filesystem If you want to read and write to a DOS floppy disk mount it by typing something like this mount t dos dev fd0 fd For information about valid characters for filenames in a DOS filesystem see the Microsoft Developer Network at http msdn microsoft com FAT 8 3 names are the most limited they re uppercase letters digits and _ VFAT names relax it a bit and add the lowercase letters and Neutrino s DOS filesystem silently converts FAT 8 3 filenames to uppercase to give the illusion that lowercase is allowed but it doesn t preserve the case For more information on the DOS filesystem manager see fs dos so in the Utilities Reference and Filesystems in the System Architecture guide CD ROM filesystem Neutrino s CD ROM filesystem provides transparent access to CD ROM media so you can treat CD ROM filesystems as though they were POSIX filesystems This transparency lets processes operate on CD ROM files without any special knowledge or work on their part The fs cd so shared object provides filesystem support for the ISO 9660 standard as well as a number of extensions including Rock Ridge RRIP Joliet Microsoft and multisession Kodak Photo CD enhanced audio This s
223. dos so fs ext2 so cam cdrom so fs cd so These programs only need to be run once from the boot image data uip will waste less memory as the ram from the boot image will be used directly without making a copy of the data i e as the default data cpy does When they have been run once they will be unlinked from proc boot data uip seedres pci bios devb eide devb amd devb aha2 devb aha4 devb aha7 devb aha8 devb ncr8 diskboot slogger fesh JE E te te For more information about buildfiles including some other samples see Building Embedded Systems 486 Appendix A e Examples October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Buildfile that doesn t use diskboot Buildfile that doesn t use diskboot October 6 2005 This buildfile is for an OS image that starts up without using diskboot In a real buildfile you can t use a backslash to break a long line into shorter pieces but we ve done that here just to make the buildfile easier to read The build file for QNX Neutrino booting on a PC virtual x86 bios compress boot startup bios s64k PATH proc boot bin usr bin LD_LIBRARY_PATH proc boot 1ib usr 1ib 1lib d1ll procnto smp script startup script display_msg display_msg Neutrino Inside QNX 6 3 0 display_msg procmgr_symlink proc boot libc so 2 usr lib ldqnx so 2 display_msg gt Starting PCI Services seedre
224. ds pppd to establish TCP IP point to point links When starting pppd there are a few pppd options that are specific to running pppd over a pppoe session Here s an example of etc ppp pppoe up bin sh pppd debug dev io net ppp_en ac pc detach defaultroute require ns mtu 1492 name username The required pppd options for use with pppoed are dev io net ppp_en The device that you want npm pppoe so to create ac pc Required options that disable any packet compression Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 269 Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters 2005 QNX Software Systems detach Prevent pppd from becoming a daemon This lets pppoed know when the pppd session is finished You can omit this option if you specify the pppoed option scriptdetach mtu 1492 Set the interface MTU to the supported size for PPPOE This is the Ethernet MTU minus the overhead of PPPOE encapsulation If pppoed has problems connecting to certain sites on the Internet see PPPOE and Path MTU Discovery in the Neutrino technotes Using DHCP A TCP IP host uses the DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol to obtain its configuration parameters IP address gateway nameservers and so on from a DHCP server that contains the configuration parameters of all the hosts on the network The Neutrino DHCP client dhep client obtains these parameters and configures your host for you to use the Internet or local network If your DHCP
225. e For more information on the way Neutrino handles flash filesystems see e mkefs and flashct1 in the Utilities Reference e Filesystems in the System Architecture guide e Building Embedded Systems CIFS filesystem CIFS the Common Internet File System protocol lets a client workstation perform transparent file access over a network to a Windows system or a UNIX system running an SMB server It was October 6 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 227 NFS filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems formerly known as SMB or Server Message Block protocol which was used to access resources in a controlled fashion over a LAN File access calls from a client are converted to CIFS protocol requests and are sent to the server over the network The server receives the request performs the actual filesystem operation and then sends a response back to the client CIFS runs on top of TCP IP and uses DNS The f s cifs filesystem manager is a CIFS client operating over TCP IP To use it you must have an SMB server and a valid login on that server The fs cifs utility is primarily intended for use as a client with Windows machines although it also works with any SMB server e g OS 2 Peer LAN Manager and SAMBA The s cifs filesystem manager requires a TCP IP transport layer such as the one provided by io net with the full TCP IP stack npm tcpip so The CIES filesystem manager doesn t work properly with the tiny TCP
226. e IRQ for an ISA card the IRQ is hard wired Two ISA devices can t share the same IRQ but two PCI devices can DMA Channel This is the DMA channel used for the card This varies depending on the card and on the channels it has available I O Aperture The I O aperture is a hexadecimal value that shows the address in I O space where the card resides The I O aperture uses the I O address between the given values to locate and map the I O ports The range depends on the platform Memory Aperture 344 The memory aperture is a hexadecimal value that shows the address in memory where the card s memory is located The memory aperture uses the memory address between the given values to locate and map memory The range depends on the platform Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Network adapters ROM Aperture The ROM aperture is a hexadecimal range that shows the address of the card s ROM The ROM aperture uses the memory address between the displayed values to locate and map memory Promiscuous Mode Multicast When a card is placed in promiscuous mode the card accepts every Ethernet packet sent on the network This is quite taxing on the system but is a common practice for debugging purposes Also when a card is placed in promiscuous mode a network MAC address can be spoofed i e the card accepts all packets whether they re addressed to it or not Then on a h
227. e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 241 Conventions for naming nodes 2005 QNX Software Systems the Neutrino utilities cp mv and so on to manipulate files anywhere on the Qnet network as if they were on your machine Because it s meant for a group of trusted machines such as you d find in an embedded system Qnet doesn t do any authentication of requests Files are protected by the normal permissions that apply to users and groups see File ownership and permissions in Working with Files although you can use Qnet s maproot and mapany options to control in a limited way what others users can do on your machine Qnet isn t connectionless like NFS network errors are reported back to the client process TCP IP is intended for more loosely connected machines that can run different operating systems TCP IP does authentication to control access to a machine it s useful for connecting machines that you don t necessarily trust It s used as the base for specialized protocols such as FTP and Telnet and can provide high throughput for data streaming For more information see the TCP IP Networking chapter in this guide NFS was designed for filesystem operations between all hosts all endians and is widely supported It s a connectionless protocol the server can shut down and be restarted and the client resumes automatically It also uses authentication and controls directory access Fo
228. e a table in the etc hosts file This works well for small to medium networks if you have something a bit more complicated than a small internal network with a few hosts you need a nameserver e g for an ISP connection to the Internet When you use a name to connect to a TCP IP host the nameserver is asked for the corresponding IP address and the connection is then made to that IP address You can use either e anameserver entry in the configuration string CS RESOLVE obtained from a configuration file default etc net cfg or e a nameserver entry in the etc resolv conf file For example nameserver 10 0 0 2 nameserver 10 0 0 3 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Overview of TCP IP Routing October 6 2005 You can use phlip the Photon TCP IP and dialup configuration tool to configure the network and specify nameservers phlip sets configuration string CS_RESOLVE You can also set CS RESOLVE manually This string if it exists is always searched instead of etc resolv conf For more information on finding TCP IP hostnames and nameservers see etc hosts and etc resolv conf in the Utilities Reference Routing determines how to get a packet to its intended destination The general categories of routing are Minimal routing Static routing Dynamic routing You will only be communicating with hosts on your own network For example you re isolated on your o
229. e needed scripts and includes the needed binaries in the image Make an image of the floppy using the dd utility For example dd if dev fd0 of floppy img Create a directory with all the needed binaries in the layout that you want in your CD ROM ISO image For example mkdir iso_image cp Rc bin iso_image bin cp Rc etc iso_image etc Make sure that the isocatalog is in usr share cdburning on the system Create the ISO image using mkisofs making sure to specify the catalog with the c option For example mkisofs 1 f r joliet quiet V My Label b floppy img c usr share cdburning isocatalog o my_iso_image iso Burn the ISO image to a CD 408 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Storage choices Removable media Other forms of removable media are also useful for backing up data Neutrino supports LS 120 magnetic optical MO drives internal ZIP drives and USB mass storage devices Each has its own benefits and weaknesses it s up to you to determine which form of media is best for backing up your data For instructions on how to install this hardware see the Connecting Hardware chapter in this guide Backing up physical hard disks Ee A October 6 2005 The instructions here are for copying from one hard disk to another of identical properties size make model To make a copy of a drive that differs in size and make contact technical
230. e of the spooling directory has the same name as its associated printer Make sure you create the named spooling directory before you print IE 1f usr adm lpd errs A file to take printing error messages by default errors are sent to the console Sometimes errors that are sent to standard error output don t appear in the log file We highly recommend that you use the system logger daemon syslogd mx 0 Remove the default limits on the size of the spooling buffer sh Suppress the printing of the burst header a page that lists the user ID and job information about the print job 288 Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with lpr Printers on serial lines When you connect a printer via a serial line you must set the proper baud rate and terminal modes The following example is for a DecWriter III printer connected locally via a 1200 baud serial line lp LA 180 DecWriter III lp dev 1p br 1200 s 06320 tr of usr lib lpf 1f usr adm lpd errs lp The name of the file to open for output br The baud rate for the tty line fs Flags that set CRMOD no parity and XTABS tr f Print a formfeed character when the queue empties This is handy when the printer has continuous paper because you can tear the paper off when the print job finishes instead of first having to take the printer offline and manually advance the paper of usr lib lpf U
231. e of zero length if no boot file exists Represents an OS image file that will be loaded into memory during the alternate boot process This file will be of zero length if no alternate boot file exists A directory is simply a file that has special meaning to the filesystem the file contains a collection of directory entries October 6 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 415 QNX 4 disk structure 2005 QNX Software Systems Offset gt 0 i_fname 16 One F 7 physical 16 teres block 20 i first xtnt ofa directory 28 i_xblk 32 i_ftime i 36 i_mtime 1 40 i_atime 44 i_ctime 2 48 i_num_xtnts 3 50 i_mode 52 i uid 4 i 54 i gid 5 56 i _nlink 58 i_zero 4 6 62 i_type 7 63 i_status A directory entry The bits in the i_status field indicate the type of the directory entry QNX4FS FILE LINK QNX4FS FILE USED Entry type 0 0 Unused directory entry 0 1 Normal used directory entry 1 0 Link to an entry in inodes which should be used continued 416 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems QNX 4 disk structure QNX4FS_FILE_LINK QNX4FS FILE USED Entry type 1 Links October 6 2005 1 Invalid The first directory entry is always for the dot link and includes a directory signature Iv QNX The hexadecimal equivalent of the character is 0x03 This en
232. e output you re using the tiny TCP IP stack Is the TCP IP protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed In order to ascertain the above use the following command ls dev io net Ideally you should see the following output eno ipo ip en ipv6_en The enO entry represents the first and only Ethernet driver ip en and ipv6_en represent the TCP IP protocol stack which was started by mounting npm tcpip so which is actually a shared object that io net loads What is the nameserver information Use the following command to get the nameserver information getconf _CS_RESOLVE If you aren t using the configuration string type cat etc resolv conf October 6 2005 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 273 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems How do map hostnames to IP addresses The etc hosts file contains information regarding the known hosts on the network For each host a single line should be present with the following information internet_address official_host_name aliases Display this file by using the following command cat etc hosts How do get the network status If you re using the full TCP IP stack use the following netstat commands to get the network status netstat in List the interfaces including the MAC and IP addresses that they ve been configured with netstat rn Display the network routing tables that determine how the stack can reach another host If the
233. e pterm utility starts a shell that runs as the current Photon user You can log in and out as a different user just as in text mode but when you log out the pterm window closes Chapter 2 e Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down 13 Shutting down and rebooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Text mode To log out of text mode enter logout at the command prompt You can also log out by terminating your login shell just enter the exit shell command or press Ctrl D Shutting down and rebooting You rarely need to reboot a Neutrino system If a driver or other system process crashes you can usually restart that one process Don t simply turn off a running Neutrino system because processes might not shut down properly and any data that s in a filesystem s cache might not get written to the disk For information about reducing this effect see Filesystems in the Fine Tuning Your System chapter To shut down or reboot the system in text mode use the shutdown command You can do this only if you re logged in as root This utility has several options that let you e name the node to shut down default is the current node e specify the type of shutdown default is to reboot e shut down quickly e list the actions taken while shutting down i e be verbose In Photon you can run phshutdown from the command line or choose Shutdown from the Launch or Desktop menu By default you don t have to be ro
234. e space A dev serl In a typical disk based Neutrino system the directory maps to the root of a filesystem on a physical hard drive partition This filesystem on disk doesn t actually contain a dev directory which exists virtually adopted via the process manager In turn the filename ser1 doesn t exist on a disk filesystem either it has been adopted by the serial port driver This capability allows virtual directory unions to be created This happens when multiple resource managers adopt files that lie in a common directory within the pathname space October 6 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 119 Filenames and pathnames 2005 QNX Software Systems In the interests of creating a maintainable system we suggest that you create directory unions as rarely as possible For more information on pathname space management see Pathname Management in the Process Manager chapter of the System Architecture guide Filename rules 120 Neutrino supports a variety of filesystems each of which has different capabilities and rules for valid filenames For information about filesystem capabilities see Working with Filesystems for filesystem limits see Understanding System Limits The QNX 4 filesystem is the normal hard disk filesystem that Neutrino uses In this filesystem filenames can be up to 48 bytes long but you can extend them to 505 bytes see Filenames in Working with Filesystems Indi
235. e sure that the user name is no longer than 14 characters otherwise that user won t be able to log in If you specify a user name that s already registered passwd assumes you want to change their password If that s what you want just type in the new password and then confirm it If you don t wish to change the user s password type Ctrl C to terminate the passwd utility without changing anything If the user name isn t already registered passwd prompts you for account information such as the user s group list home directory and login shell The etc default passwd configuration file specifies the rules that determine the defaults for new accounts For more information see the description of this file in the documentation for passwd The prompts include User id default Specify the numeric user ID for the new user By default no two users may share a common user ID because applications won t be able to determine the user name that corresponds to that user ID Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 27 Managing other accounts 2005 QNX Software Systems Group id default Choose a numeric group ID that the user will belong to after initially logging in m The passwd utility doesn t add the new user to the group s entry in the etc group file you need to do that manually using a text editor See Defining Groups for more details Real name Enter the user s real na
236. e that contains executables data files plugins etc associated with the Integrated Development Environment IDE which is shipped as part of the QNX Momentics Professional Edition usr sbin Nonessential system binaries such as cron dumper and nicinfo usr share Data that s independent of the architecture such as icons backdrops and various awk programs Chapter 6 e Working with Files 135 File ownership and permissions 2005 QNX Software Systems usr sre A directory for source code var The var directory contains variable data files including cache files lock files log files and the following var dumps The directory where dumper saves any dumps that result when a program terminates abnormally var pkg spill The default spill directory for the package filesystem if you re using it it isn t used by default For more information see Spill directory in Working with Filesystems File ownership and permissions Each file and directory belongs to a specific user ID and group ID and has a set of permissions also referred to as modes associated with it You can use these utilities to control ownership and permissions To Use Specify the permissions for a file or directory chmod Change the owner and optionally the group fora file or chown directory Change the group for a file or directory chgrp For details see the Utilities Reference 136 Chapter 6 e Working with F
237. e the date command if the time isn t automatically maintained by the computer hardware You can set the TZ environment variable by using the env utility or the export shell command You can use setconf to set CS_TIMEZONE For example env TZ PST8PDT export TZ PST8PDT setconf _CS_TIMEZONE PST8PDT The format of the TZ environment variable or CS TIMEZONE string is as follows spaces are for clarity only std offset dst offset rule The expanded format is as follows stdoffset dst offset start time end time where std and dst Three or more letters that you specify to designate the standard or daylight saving time zone Only std is required If you omit dst then daylight saving time doesn t apply in this locale Upper and lowercase letters are allowed Any characters except for a leading colon digits comma minus plus and ASCII NUL 0 are allowed Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 191 Setting the time zone 2005 QNX Software Systems offset rule The value you must add to the local time to arrive at Coordinated Universal Time UTC The offset has the form hh mm ss Minutes mm and seconds ss are optional The hour hh is required it may be a single digit The offset following std is required If no offset follows dst summer time is assumed to be one hour ahead of standard time You can use one or more digits the value is always interpreted as a decima
238. e user account database if the etc pwlock file doesn t exist lock the account files by creating it if it does exist wait until it s gone 2 Remove the account entry in etc passwd and etc shadow to disable future logins or change the login shell to a program that simply terminates or that displays a message and then terminates 3 Remove references to the user from the etc group file 4 Unlock the account database by removing etc pwlock 5 If necessary remove or change ownership of system resources that the user owned 6 If necessary remove or alter references to the user in email systems TCP IP access control files applications and so on Instead of removing a user you can disable the account by using the passwd utility to change the account s password In this way you can tell which system resources the former user owned since the user D to name translation still works When you do this the passwd utility automatically handles the necessary locking and unlocking of the account database If you ever need to log into that account you can either use the su switch user utility to switch to that account from root or log in to the account If you forget the password for the account remember that the root user can always change it What should you do with any resources that a former user owned Here are some of your options e If you ve retained the user account in the account database but disabled
239. eady offline The daemon couldn t open the printer device This can happen for several reasons e g the printer is offline or out of paper or the paper is jammed The actual reason depends on the meaning of error codes returned by the system device driver some printers can t supply enough information to distinguish when a printer is offline or having trouble especially if connected through a serial line Another possible cause of this message is that some other process such as an output filter has an exclusive open on the device all you can do in this case is kill off the offending program s and restart the printer with lpre printer is ready and printing The lprq program checks to see if a daemon process exists for the printer and prints the file status located in the spooling directory If the daemon isn t responding the root user can use 1prc to abort the current daemon and start a new one waiting for host to come up October 6 2005 This implies that there s a daemon trying to connect to the remote machine named host to send the files in the local Chapter 14 Printing 305 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems queue If the remote machine is up 1pd on the remote machine is probably dead or hung and should be restarted sending to host The files should be in the process of being transferred to the remote host If not root should use 1pre to abort and restart the local daemon Warning prin
240. eature The Find panel is located under the Topics list If it isn t visible select View Topics or press Ctrl T Enter the word s in the Find box and click Go If you enter multiple terms helpviewer finds topics that contain all the terms October 6 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 87 Getting help with the Helpviewer 2005 QNX Software Systems 88 You might need to generate a full text search index on a set of help files if one doesn t exist To do so select File Generate Index For large help sets such as Neutrino s this operation can take several minutes You can refine the search by selecting one or more of these find options Match Whole Words Check this box to match whole words If unchecked partial word matches are found For example grep also matches egrep Case Sensitive Check this box to match the case in the search terms Search Topic Text Check this box to search all the text in a topic If unchecked only topic headings are searched Search All Topics Check this box to search all the topics in the help set The pterm terminal window lets you select highlight a portion of text and then invoke the Helpviewer by either e pressing the right mouse button to bring up the pterm menu and selecting Search help or e pressing Ctrl Alt H The Helpviewer starts then searches the table of contents for any topics that contain the selected text The fi
241. ected address space so a bug in a device driver won t cause the entire OS to shut down DNS Domain Name Service an Internet protocol used to convert ASCII domain names into IP addresses In QNX native networking dns is one of Qnet s builtin resolvers 506 Glossary October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems edge sensitive edited mode EPROM EEPROM event October 6 2005 One of two ways in which a PIC Programmable Interrupt Controller can be programmed to respond to interrupts In edge sensitive mode the interrupt is noticed upon a transition to from the rising falling edge of a pulse Contrast level sensitive See canonical mode Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory a memory technology that allows the device to be programmed typically with higher than operating voltages e g 12V with the characteristic that any bit or bits may be individually programmed from a state to a0 state To change a bit from a 0 state into a 1 state can only be accomplished by erasing the entire device setting all of the bits to a 1 state Erasing is accomplished by shining an ultraviolet light through the erase window of the device for a fixed period of time typically 10 20 minutes The device is further characterized by having a limited number of erase cycles typically 10e5 10e6 Contrast EEPROM flash and RAM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory a memory technology that s sim
242. ectory and overrides file under etc system enum An easy way to set up the directory is to copy the etc system enum directory including all its subdirectories to your etc host __cfg SHOSTNAME system directory and then start customizing Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 175 etc re d re sysinit 2005 QNX Software Systems etc re d re sysinit The etc system sysinit script runs etce re d re sysinit to do local initialization of your system etc re d re sysinit S o B random dumper rc local tinit Initialization done by etc re d re sysinit The rc sysinit script does the following 1 It starts a secure random number generator random to provide random numbers for use in encryption and so on If the var dumps directory exists re sysinit starts the dumper utility to capture in var dumps dumps of processes that terminate abnormally If etc host_cf g S HOSTNAME re d re local exists and is executable re sysinit runs it Otherwise if etc re d rce local exists and is executable re sysinit runs it There isn t a default version of this file you must create it if you want to use it For more information see re 1local below Finally re sysinit runs tinit By default the system starts Photon but if you create a file called etc system config nophoton then re sysinit tells tinit to use text mode For more information see tinit below 176 Chapt
243. ecutable if the item is a PhAB application licon The full path of a large maximum 48 x 48 pixels icon to display for the item group This entry lets you logically group items from different target files for use when ordering the items For more information see Controlling the order of items below order This entry lets you specify the order of the items generally in conjunction with the group entry As mentioned above the section name specifies the default text displayed for the item If you want to provide items in multiple languages you can specify an entry whose key is a language code as used by the ABLANG environment variable see the International Language Support chapter of the Photon Programmer s Guide and whose key is the text in that language For example Calculator target phcalc fr_FR Calculatrice Controlling the order of items By default the launchmenu so plugin sorts items alphanumerically by the displayed text However it also provides a degree of control over item ordering within the target specification If you re shipping a package that includes a number of items to be included in a menu and you want them to be ordered in a specific manner regardless of their names for instance you deem some items to be more important and want to ensure they appear first you can control this ordering in one of these ways 78 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Softwa
244. ed the job remains queued until the work can be completed Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with lpr lprq show printer queue The lprq program works recursively backwards displaying the queue of the machine with the printer and then the queue s of the machine s that lead to it This utility has these forms of output e short format the default gives a single line of output per queued job e long format if you specify the 1 option shows the list and sizes of files that comprise a job lprrm remove jobs from a queue The lprrm command deletes jobs from a spooling queue If necessary lprrm first kills a running daemon that s servicing the queue and restarts it after the required files are removed When removing jobs destined for a remote printer lprrm acts like lprq except it first checks locally for jobs to remove and then tries to remove files in queues off machine You can remove only your own print jobs from the queue lprc printer control program October 6 2005 The 1pre program is used to control the operation of the line printer system For each printer configured in etc printcap lpre may be used to e disable or enable a printer e disable or enable a printer s spooling queue e rearrange the order of jobs in a spooling queue e find the status of printers and their associated spooling queues and printer daemons The lpre program
245. ee DCMD_FSYS_PREGROW FILE in lt sys dcmd_blk h gt Configuration October 6 2005 You can control the balance between performance and robustness on either a global or per file basis e Specifying the O_SYNC bit when opening a file causes all I O operations on that file both data and metadata to be performed synchronously The fsync and sync functions let you flush the filesystem write behind cache on demand otherwise any dirty data is flushed from cache under the control of the global blk delwri option the default is two seconds see io b1k so in the Utilities Reference e You control the global configuration with the commit option either to io b1k so as an option to apply to all filesystems or via the mount command as an option to apply to a single instance of a mounted filesystem The levels are none low medium and high which differ in the degree in which metadata is written synchronously versus asynchronously or even time delayed Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 457 Filesystems 2005 QNX Software Systems At any level less robust than the default i e medium the filesystem doesn t guarantee the same level of integrity following an unexpected power loss because multiple block updates might not be ordered correctly The sections that follow illustrate the effects of different configurations on performance Block I O commit level Record size This table illustrates how the
246. efined the revision explicitly instead by using a second r option evs diff r1 1 r1 2 foo c Index foo c RCS file home fred cvs myproj foo c v retrieving revision 1 1 retrieving revision 1 2 diff r1 1 r1 2 0al 2 gt This is a file to test cvs gt The results are exactly the same CVS and directory trees CVS automatically traverses directory trees starting with your current working directory if you don t specify a filename or a directory name For example cvs stat gives the status of all files in the current working directory and in any other directories below it This feature is quite handy for making changes to various portions of a tree over time To check in the whole set of changes at once you just go to the root of the tree and use cvs commit You re prompted for only one log message The same message is applied to all of the commits made as a result of this single command 390 Chapter 17 e Using CVS October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Concurrent development branching and merging Concurrent development branching and Branching October 6 2005 merging Sometimes you need to work on more than one version of a file For example you might need to fix bugs in a released version of a program while you re working on new features for a future release CVS makes this easier by letting you branch your files When you create a branch CVS effectively creates anoth
247. electrically and depending upon the organization of the flash memory device erasing may be accomplished in blocks typically 64k bytes at a time instead of the entire device Contrast EPROM and RAM FQNN Fully Qualified Node Name a unique name that identifies a Neutrino node on a network The FQNN consists of the nodename plus the node domain tacked together 508 Glossary October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems garbage collection group HA hard link hidden file image inode October 6 2005 The process whereby a filesystem manager recovers the space occupied by deleted files and directories Also known as space reclamation A collection of users who share similar file permissions High Availability in telecommunications and other industries HA describes a system s ability to remain up and running without interruption for extended periods of time See link A file whose name starts with a dot such as profile Commands such as 1s don t operate on hidden files unless you explicitly say to In the context of embedded Neutrino systems an image can mean either a structure that contains files i e an OS image or a structure that can be used in a read only read write or read write reclaim filesystem i e a flash filesystem image Information node a storage table that holds information about files other than the files names In order to support links for each file
248. elf Add Plug In After Command to launch helpviewer O Show text only Show icon and text O Show icon only O Use large icon if present Shelf configuration dialog When you configure your shelf the new settings are saved for the current user only Your shelf configuration file is stored in your home directory under HOM E ph shelf shelf cfg The first time you log in the default version of etc photon shelf shelf cfg is copied to SHOME ph shelf shelf cfg The items you can add or modify on the shelf include Group A group of applications or utilities A group can contain child groups Drawer Like a group but a drawer expands horizontally out of its parent container rather than vertically in the shelf Separator A space that visually separates two containers Any space not used in a shelf is occupied by a separator Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 73 Modifying the shelf 2005 QNX Software Systems 74 so you always have at least one separator per shelf If you try to remove a separator it s repositioned World view A world view plugin which lets you see which consoles contain open windows and lets you set the current console CD player A CD player plugin Volume A volume control plugin You can choose additional plugins by selecting the Browse button including cdplayer so You can play a CD stop skip forward and skip back
249. em ak pkgs var BE Ea passwd base pkg Ea C anx spill a passwd been core 2 1 etc spilled etc passwd F passwd Working with the spill directory If you want to restore a spilled file to its original version in the package use the pkgct1 command For more information see the Utilities Reference October 6 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 235 Package filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Underlying filesystem There must be a filesystem underneath the redirection layer of the package filesystem If you want to copy a file to one of the virtual directories e g bin then the package filesystem creates the appropriate structure on the underlying filesystem and then lets the original access request simply fall through to the next server If there s no underlying filesystem then new files can t be added to the virtual filesystem without first generating a package for them Control files Patches The package filesystem uses these control files Manifest files XML files that you use to put together a package for distribution The purpose of these files which live at the root of every installed package is to describe which files are exported the services the package provides the dependencies of the package etc The packager utility builds these files Package configuration file An XML control file that s used to configure the package filesystem itself The installer u
250. em 470 CIFS filesystem 471 Embedded flash filesystem 471 Other system limits 472 File descriptors 473 Synchronization primitives 473 TCP IP limits 473 Shared memory 473 Message queues 474 Platform specific limits 474 Technical Support 475 Examples 479 Buildfile for an NFS mounting target 481 qnxbasedma build 485 Buildfile that doesn t use diskboot 487 profile 488 kshre 489 Configuration files for spooler 489 Using lpr 490 Using NCFTP 491 Using SAMBA 492 PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes Configuration files for setting up a firewall 497 ipf conf 497 ipnat conf 499 Glossary 501 Contents 494 xvii 2005 QNX Software Systems Index 523 xviii Contents October 6 2005 October 6 2005 List of Figures The QNX Neutrino architecture 6 Photon s workspace including the taskbar shelf and desktop 70 Desktop menu 71 Shelf configuration dialog 73 Photon File Manager 85 The Photon helpviewer 87 Navigation buttons in the online docs 90 The Voyager browser 92 The Photon editor ped 151 Booting a Neutrino system 162 Booting a Neutrino system with an x86 BIOS 163 Initialization done by diskboot 167 Initialization done by etc re d re sysinit 176 One file referenced by two links 221 Symbolic links 223 Actual filesystem using the package filesystem 233 Virtual filesystem using the package filesystem 233 Working with the spill directory 235 Compo
251. em is idle The usr directory is a secondary file hierarchy that contains shareable read only data and includes usr bin A directory that contains most user commands such as diff errno and we usr help A directory that contains the documentation in the product directory and common images in the 1ib images directory For more information see 134 Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Where everything is stored October 6 2005 Getting help with the Helpviewer in Using the Photon microGUI and helpviewer in the Utilities Reference usr include The top of a directory structure that contains the C and C header files This directory includes sys platform specific and other directories usr info Documentation for various utilities usr 1lib Object files libraries and internal binaries that you shouldn t execute directly or in scripts You ll link against these libraries if you write any programs usr libexec A directory that could contain system daemons and system utilities in general these are run only by other programs usr local A directory where the system administrator can install software locally It s initially empty usr man Manual pages for various utilities usr photon The top of a directory structure that contains executables data files and so on associated with Photon usr qde The top of a directory structur
252. ems you ll feel right at home with QNX Neutrino many people even pronounce QNX to rhyme with UNIX some spell it out Q N X At the heart of the system is the Neutrino microkernel surrounded by other processes and the familiar Korn shell ksh see the Using the Command Line chapter Each process has its own process ID or pid and contains one or more threads Neutrino is a multiuser OS it supports any number of users at a time The users are organized into groups that share similar permissions on files and directories For more information see Managing User Accounts Neutrino follows various industry standards including POSIX shell and utilities and TCP IP This can make porting existing code and scripts to Neutrino easier Neutrino s command line looks just like the UNIX one Neutrino supports many familiar utilities grep find 1s awk and you can connect them with pipes redirect the input and output examine return codes and so on Many utilities are the same in UNIX and Neutrino but some have a different name or syntax in Neutrino UNIX Neutrino See also adduser passwd Managing User Accounts continued Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS 3 How QNX Neutrino compares to other operating systems 2005 QNX Software Systems UNIX Neutrino See also at cron fsck chkfsys chkdosfs Backing Up and ifconfig eth0 lp lpc lpq lpstat lprm cancel man Pg ifconfig en0 lpr lpre
253. enable an eight bit data path If you re connecting to a Neutrino box from some other operating system and the terminal isn t behaving properly quit from telnet and start it again with the 8 option To telnet from Windows to a Neutrino machine use ansi or vt100 for your terminal type The keyboard at a glance October 6 2005 The table below describes how the character device drivers interpret various keys and keychords groups of keys that you press simultaneously The drivers handle these keys as soon as you type them Your keyboard might not behave as indicated if e The driver is in raw input mode instead of edited input mode e You re working with an application that has complex requirements for user interaction e g the application might take control over how the keyboard works or e You re working at a terminal that has keyboard limitations If you want to Press Move the cursor to the left lt left arrow Move the cursor to the right right arrow Move the cursor to the start of a line Home continued Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 39 Character device drivers 2005 QNX Software Systems If you want to Press Move the cursor to the end of a line End Delete the character left of the cursor Backspace Delete the character at the cursor Del Delete all characters on a line Ctrl U Toggle between insert and typeover Ins modes if an application supports
254. ents MS DOS local command interpreter variables Troubleshooting 64 5 Using the Photon microGUI Overview of Photon 69 Why is it called Photon 69 Why is it called a microGUT Your workspace 69 Modifying the shelf 72 Modifying the Launch menu 75 Creating items and submenus 76 Target files 77 Controlling the order of items Additional menu control 79 Troubleshooting 81 Modifying the Desktop menu 82 October 6 2005 57 59 63 Contents Vv 2005 QNX Software Systems vi Contents Starting applications automatically 83 Configuration tools 83 Browsing files with the File Manager 85 Getting help with the Helpviewer 86 Searching for a topic or keyword 87 Bookmarking a topic to view it again later 89 Navigating around help files 89 Viewing more than one topic at once 91 Surfing the web with Voyager 91 Setting preferences 93 Connecting to other systems 97 Phditto 97 Phindows 98 Hotkeys and shortcuts 100 pterm 100 Text field 101 Window 102 Workspace 102 Exiting Photon 103 Photon environment variables 104 Troubleshooting 107 Working with Files 111 Everything is a file 113 Types of files 113 Filenames and pathnames 114 Absolute and relative pathnames 115 Dot and dot dot directories 116 No drive letters 117 Pathnames that begin witha dot 118 Extensions 118 Pathname space mapping 119 Filename rules 120 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Where everything is stored
255. ents with the kernel In fact a resource manager looks just like any other user level program See also device driver The superuser which can do anything on your system The superuser has what Windows calls administrator s rights Scheduling algorithm whereby a thread is given a certain period of time the timeslice to run Should the thread consume CPU for the entire period of its timeslice the thread will be placed at the end of the ready queue for its priority and the next available thread will be made READY If a thread is the only thread READY at its priority level it will be able to consume CPU again immediately See also FIFO and sporadic Realtime operating system runtime loading 518 Glossary The process whereby a program decides while it s actually running that it wishes to load a particular function from a library Contrast static linking October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems scheduling latency The amount of time that elapses between the point when one thread makes another thread READY and when the other thread actually gets some CPU time Note that this latency is almost always at the control of the system designer Also designated as T Contrast interrupt latency session A collection of process groups established for job control purposes Each process group is a member of a session A process belongs to the session that its process group belongs to A newly created process joi
256. environment variables EDITOR The path to your favorite editor the default is vi ENV The name of the profile that ksh should run whenever you start a shell The code for these changes could look like this export EDITOR usr local bin jed export ENV HOME kshrc 488 Appendix A e Examples October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems kshre kshre Here s an example of a profile that ksh runs if you set the ENV environment variable as described above for profile alias rm rm i alias 11 l1s 1 export PS1 pwd This profile does the following e Uses an alias to turn on interactive mode for the rm command In interactive mode rm asks you for confirmation before it deletes the file The cp and mv commands also support this mode e Creates an alias 11 that runs 1s with the 1 set This gives a long listing that includes the size of the files the permissions and so on e Changes the primary prompt to include the current working directory the default if you aren t root is You can also change the secondary prompt by setting PS2 Note that you should use single quotes instead of double quotes around the string If you specify export PS1 pwd the pwd command is evaluated right away because double quotes permit command substitution when you change directories the prompt doesn t change Configuration files for spooler This section includes the configuration files to use for rem
257. er 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems rce local rc local October 6 2005 As described above re sysinit runs etc host_cfg SHOSTNAME re d re local or etc rce d re local if the file exists and is executable You can use the rc local file to customize your startup by e starting additional programs e mounting libraries for processes that are already running You can also use re local to slay running processes and restart them with different options but this is a heavy handed approach Instead of doing this modify the device enumeration to start the processes with the correct options For more information see Device enumeration earlier in this chapter For example you can e run an NFS or CIFS client to mount a remote filesystem e start inetd to allow users on other machines to access your machine see TCP IP Networking e start 1pd or a specific instance of spooler or both to support printing see Printing e arrange to bypass the login prompt when booting into Photon by adding this usr photon bin Photon 1 usr photon bin phlogin O Uuser password Note that you have to put your password as plain text in your re local but presumably you aren t concerned with security if you want to bypass the login prompt The 0 option to phlogin brings you back to text mode when you terminate your Photon session without the 0 pressing Ctrl Shi
258. er copy of a file or files and lets you edit either version CVS keeps track of which changes apply to which version The main development stream in CVS is called the head You could decide to develop new features on the head branch and create separate branches for released software O gt senn Branching a file in CVS For example let s suppose you re releasing version 1 0 of your new product Stella and that this product includes a file called foo c You can create a branch for this release like this cvs tag b Stella_1 0 foo c The tag Stella_1 0 is a sticky tag any changes that you make in your sandbox are associated with the Stella_1 0 branch not the head If you want to work on the head you can update your sandbox specifying the A option which clears the sticky tags cvs update A Chapter 17 e Using CVS 391 Concurrent development branching and merging 2005 QNX Software Systems Merging or cvs up A What if you need to have both versions checked out You could keep updating your sandbox to use the head as shown above and the branch cvs update r Stella_1 0 but keeping track of which version you re working on could be difficult Instead you can check out the branch in another directory cd cvs mkdir version1 0 cd version1 0 cvs checkout r Stella_1 0 path_to_the _files So you ve made a change in one branch and you need to make it in the other Y
259. er device library performs no editing on received characters This reduces the processing done on each character to a minimum and provides the highest performance interface for reading data Also raw mode is used with devices that typically generate binary data you don t want any translations of the raw binary stream between the device and the application Contrast canonical mode remote execution Running commands on a machine other than your own over a network replenishment reset vector October 6 2005 In sporadic scheduling the period of time during which a thread is allowed to consume its execution budget The address at which the processor begins executing instructions after the processor s reset line has been activated On the x86 for example this is the address OxFFFFFFFO Glossary 517 2005 QNX Software Systems resource manager root round robin RTOS A user level server program that accepts messages from other programs and optionally communicates with hardware Neutrino resource managers are responsible for presenting an interface to various types of devices whether actual e g serial ports parallel ports network cards disk drives or virtual e g dev nul1l1 a network filesystem and pseudo ttys In other operating systems this functionality is traditionally associated with device drivers But unlike device drivers Neutrino resource managers don t require any special arrangem
260. er name rlpt1 is used by local clients and could be the same as the remote name 1pt1 Make sure there s an entry for nodel in etc hosts Multiple printers Now let s add another printer to node1 this time connected to dev par2 i J S amp dev parl dev par2 TCP IP nodel node2 October 6 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 293 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems You should define multiple printers carefully because the default capabilities aren t suitable for all printers For example use the sd field to specify a unique spool directory for each printer The etc printcap file on nodel now looks like this lpt1 lp dev par1 sd usr spool output l1pt1 lpt2 lp dev par2 sd usr spool output l1pt2 This specifies the following these printers e lpt1 connected to dev par1 and using usr spool output 1pt1 for spooling e lpt2 connected to dev par2 and using usr spool output 1pt2 for spooling Make sure there s an entry for node2 in the etc hosts 1pd file on nodel To refer to these two printers remotely from node2 create a etc printcap file on node2 that looks like this lpt1 rm nodel1 rp lpt1 sd usr spool output 1lpt1 lp lpt2 rm node1 rp lpt2 sd usr spool output 1lpt2 lp This specifies the two printers we just located on node1 with the names t
261. eration 2005 QNX Software Systems For details on the different command line options and a description of the syntax for the configuration files see enum devices in the Utilities Reference oem directory If you re an OEM and you ve written any device drivers create an oem directory under etc system enum to contain configuration files for the devices overrides file 174 If you need to set up devices or options that are specific to your particular system configuration create an overrides file under etc system enum The enumerator includes this file last and adds any definitions in it to the set that enum devices works with If the overrides file has something that a previously included file also has the later definition wins For example e If you want to stop a particular device from running or change how it starts create a etc system enum overrides file and add a device entry for the device device pci ven 1234 dev 2000 device pci ven 1234 dev 2001 requires IONET_CMD uniq netnum devn en 0 mount Tio net 1lib d11 devn pcnet so dev io net en netnum device pci ven 1234 dev 2002 device pci ven 1234 dev 2003 The first block of this code specifies to do the following if the enumerator detects devices 2000 and 2001 from vendor 1234 1 If io net isn t running start it IONET_CMD is a macro defined in etc system enum include net that specifies the default i
262. erform additional initializations On the x86 architecture the two bytes 0x55 and 0xAA must be present in that order as the first two bytes in the device with control being transferred to offset 0x0003 In sporadic scheduling the amount of time a thread is permitted to execute at its normal priority before being dropped to its low priority Glossary 503 2005 QNX Software Systems buildfile A text file containing instructions for mkifs specifying the contents and other details of an image or for mkefs specifying the contents and other details of an embedded filesystem image canonical mode channel CIFS CIS 504 Glossary Also called edited mode or cooked mode In this mode the character device library performs line editing operations on each received character Only when a line is completely entered typically when a carriage return CR is received will the line of data be made available to application processes Contrast raw mode A kernel object used with message passing In Neutrino message passing is directed towards a connection made to a channel threads can receive messages from channels A thread that wishes to receive messages creates a channel using ChannelCreate and then receives messages from that channel using MsgReceive Another thread that wishes to send a message to the first thread must make a connection to that channel by attaching to the channel using Co
263. eries of script files to initialize the system 166 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems diskboot October 6 2005 n W diskboot etc system sysinit etc rc d rc devices etc re d re rtc etc re d re sysinit Initialization done by diskboot The main script for initializing the system is etc system sysinit you usually keep local system initialization files in the etc re d directory For example if you want to run extra commands at startup on a node say to mount an NFS drive you might create a script file named rc local make sure it s executable and put it in the etce re d directory For more information see the description of rc local later in this chapter Here s what diskboot does 1 It starts the system logger slogger Applications use slogger to log their system messages you can use sloginfo to view this log 2 Next diskboot runs seedres to read the PnP BIOS and fill procnto s resource database 3 Then diskboot starts pci bios to support the PCI BIOS 4 After that diskboot starts devb eide or other disk drivers Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 167 diskboot 2005 QNX Software Systems If you want to pass any options to devb eide or other drivers pass them to diskboot in your buildfile 5 Next diskboot looks for filesystems i e partitions and CDs to mount which it does
264. error PC_VDISABLE If defined not 1 this is the character value that can be used to individually disable special control characters in the termios control structure For more information see Configurable limits above QNX 4 filesystem The limits for QNX 4 filesystems include Filename length 48 bytes or 505 if longfilenames exists before mounting see Filenames in the description of the QNX 4 filesystem in Working with Filesystems Pathname length 1024 bytes File size 2G 1 Directory size No practical limit although the files that the directory uses to manage its contents are limited to 2G 1 bytes which works out to approximately 33 million files in a single directory You wouldn t want to do that though as directory scans are linear they d be very slow Filesystem size 2G x 512 limited by the disk driver 764 Disk size bytes limited by the disk driver 468 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filesystem limits Ext2 filesystem The limits for Linux Ext2 filesystems include Filename length Pathname length File size Directory size Filesystem size Disk size 255 bytes 1024 bytes 2G 1 2G 1 directories are files with inode and filename information as data 2G x 512 264 bytes limited by the disk driver DOS FAT12 16 32 filesystem The limits for DOS FAT12 16 32 filesystems include October 6 200
265. es 1024 yres 768 bitpp 16 refresh 60 region_x 1024 4 For each plugin create a PLUGIN name section In this example we set the Photon plugin DLL PLUGIN photon dllpath gri photon so Save the configuration file in this case as usr photon config radeon conf Load the configuration file and start the graphics driver by using the c option of io graphics io graphics c usr photon config radeon conf Here s the complete example GLOBAL devices radeon DEVICE radeon dllpath devg radeon so pci_vendor_id 0x1002 pci_device_id 0x4e44 pci_index 0 displays 2 plugins photon photon 360 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Video cards DEVICE radeon 0 xres 1024 yres 768 bitpp 16 refresh 60 DEVICE radeon 1 xres 1024 yres 768 bitpp 16 refresh region_x 60 1024 PLUGIN photon dllpath gri photon so Here s a second example that shows how to use two different devices for two displays GLOBAL devices banshee DEVICE banshee dllpath pci_vendor_id pci_device_id pci_index plugins photon xres 1280 yres 1024 bitpp 32 DEVICE rage128 dllpath ragel28 devg banshee so 0x121a 0x5 0 photon devg ati_rage128 so pci_vendor_id 0x1002 pci_device_id 0x5050 pci_index 0 plugins photon October 6 2005 361 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware V
266. es appear correctly in the Photon microGUI environment Filenames from older versions of Microsoft Windows may be encoded using 8 bit characters with various language codepage in effect The DOS filesystem in Neutrino can translate these filenames to UTF 8 representations but you need to tell the filesystem which codepage to use via a command line option For more information see s dos so in the Utilities Reference Where everything is stored October 6 2005 The default Neutrino filesystem generally follows the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard but we don t claim to be compliant or compatible with it This standard describes where files and directories should or must be placed in UNIX style operating systems For more information see http www pathname com fhs The Neutrino pathname space is extremely flexible Your system may be configured differently This section describes the contents of these directories a el el el el el el a a s home lib proc root sbin tmp ust var TTI in boot dev etc Chapter 6 e Working with Files 121 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems The directory is the root of the pathname space Usually your primary hard disk or flash filesystem is mounted here On a QNX 4 filesystem this directory includes the following files altboot bitmap boot diskroot inodes Contains an al
267. escriptor provided by opening dev kbd it invokes devi hirun like this 324 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Input devices devi hirun kbd fd d dev kbd msoft fd amp If inputtrap detects a PS 2 mouse interfaced through the auxiliary port on the keyboard controller nousedev and a keyboard interfaced through the primary keyboard port on the keyboard controller kbddev it invokes devi hirun like this devi hirun kbddev ps2 mousedev amp Once the mouse has been started you can change the behavior of the mouse by using the Photon Input configuration utility You can start it by typing input cfg on the command line by selecting Mouse in the shelf or by choosing Launch Configure Mouse Currently there s no support for USB keyboards in text mode but Intel machines can use BIOS emulation to support them Photon supports USB mice and keyboards for more information see USB devices later in this chapter Touchscreens October 6 2005 Neutrino supports various touchscreens check the list of supported hardware on our website to determine which driver to use for yours See also Input drivers devi in the Summary chapter of the Utilities Reference Determine which options are appropriate for your setup and then start the driver For example here s how to start the driver for a Dynapro SC4 touchscreen devi dyna dyna 4 fd d dev serl amp This command s
268. essed than individual files can You have several archive formats to choose from under Neutrino including pax and tar Neutrino also supports cpio cpio but Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Archiving your data we recommend it only when the archive needs to be readable by other systems that use cpio archives Creating an archive The simplest backup you can do on your system is to duplicate the files individually using cp or pax For example to duplicate a single file cp t my_file backup_directory or echo my_file pax rw backup_directory To back up an entire directory type cp Rt my_directory backup_directory or find my_directory print pax rw backup_directory To back up only certain files matching some criteria use the find utility or other means of identifying the files to be backed up and pipe the output to pax rw like this find my_directory name ch pax rw backup_directory To combine individual files into a single archive use tar or pax These utilities take all the files that you give them and place them into one big contiguous file You can use the same utilities to extract discrete files from the archives October 6 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 403 Archiving your data 2005 QNX Software Systems 404 The filesystem can t support archives or any other files that are lar
269. ests on a Neutrino LAN 512 Glossary October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems network directory Neutrino NFS A directory in the pathname space that s implemented by the Qnet network manager Product name of the RTOS developed by QNX Software Systems Network FileSystem a TCP IP application that lets you graft remote filesystems or portions of them onto your local namespace Directories on the remote systems appear as part of your local filesystem and all the utilities you use for listing and managing files e g 1s cp mv operate on the remote files exactly as they do on your local files Node Discovery Protocol node domain nodename package See NDP A character string that the Qnet network manager tacks onto the nodename to form an FONN A unique name consisting of a character string that identifies a node on a network A directory tree of files laid out in a structure that matches where they would be if they were transported to the root of some filesystem package filesystem October 6 2005 A virtual filesystem manager that presents a customized view of a set of files and directories to a client The real files are present on some media the package filesystem presents a virtual view of selected files to the client Glossary 513 2005 QNX Software Systems Neutrino doesn t start the package filesystem by default pathname prefix See mountpoint pathname sp
270. et up a configuration file to specify the rules for allowing and restricting access to your systems In this configuration file e Specify only one rule per line e Use a character to mark the rest of a line as a comment You can have arule and a comment on the same line e Use extra whitespace to make your file easier to read The filter processes the rules from top to bottom appending each one to the others For example suppose you set up these rules block in all pass in all Chapter 19 e Securing Your System October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Setting up a firewall October 6 2005 When a packet comes in the filter looks at the first rule block in all This rule succeeds so does the filter look at the second rule The answer is yes unlike other packet filters IP Filtering uses a flag to track whether or not it s going to pass the packet on Unless the flow is interrupted the filter goes through the entire rule set and decides whether to pass or deny the packet based on the last matching rule Remember that the last matching rule takes precedence The above example isn t very useful in the real world If you don t want to go through all the rules but exit on the first match what do you do You use the quick keyword like this block in quick all pass in all So now the filter looks at the first line and if it finds a match exits It s as if the second line didn t exist You
271. et variables dir images files filel jpg file2 jpg file3 jpg file4 jpg file5 jpg srand time num rand files Pick a Random Number Print Out Header With Random Filename and Base Directory print lt img src dir files num alt files num border 1 gt n lt BR gt print Location dir files num n n lt BR gt 378 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server October 6 2005 Chapter 17 Using CVS In this chapter A crash course in CVS 381 CVS basics 381 CVS and directory trees 390 Concurrent development branching and merging 391 Removing and restoring files 393 Setting up a CVS server 394 October 6 2005 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 379 2005 QNX Software Systems A crash course in CVS A crash course in CVS CVS Concurrent Versions System is an open source tool used for managing versions of files You can put any types of files under CVS control but this chapter concentrates on source and other text files Version control is the ability to track changes in a file over time Each time a file is changed the date the name of the user who changed the file and a description are all recorded This lets you track when the file changed who changed it and why CVS can also help coordinate changes made to a single file by many users Using CVS for controlling versions of source files lets you mark which changes should be part of a software release and wh
272. ev ser1 represents a serial port FIFO special files p Persistent named pipes through which two programs communicate For example PipeA Block special files b Entries that represent a block device such as a disk For example dev hd0 represents the raw block data of your primary disk drive Socket files s Entries that represent a communications socket especially a UNIX domain socket For more information see socket and the UNIX protocol in the Neutrino Library Reference Some files are persistent across system reboots such as most files in a disk filesystem Other files may exist only as long as the program responsible for them is running Examples of these include shared memory objects objects in the proc filesystem and temporary files on disk that are still being accessed even though the links to the files their filenames have been removed Filenames and pathnames To access any file or directory you must specify a pathname a symbolic name that tells a program where to find a file within the directory hierarchy based at root A typical Neutrino pathname looks like this home fred profile 114 Chapter 6 Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filenames and pathnames In this example profile is found in the fred directory which in turn resides in the home directory which is found in the root directory P L home Lb fred profile Like Linux and o
273. evel of the OS An in memory version of the etc resolv conf file excluding the domain name CS_SRPC_DOMAIN CS _SYSNAME CS_TIMEZONE CS_VERSION The secure RPC Remote Procedure Call domain The name of the OS An alternate source to the TZ for time zone information For more information see Setting the time zone below The version of the OS Setting the time zone If you re running Photon the easiest way to set the time zone is via phlocale You simply select the appropriate zone and phlocale does everything else If you re not running Photon you need to set the TZ environment variable or the CS TIMEZONE configuration string To set the time zone when you boot your machine you have to put the same information in the etc TIMEZONE file see the description of etc system sysinit in Controlling How Neutrino Starts 190 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Setting the time zone October 6 2005 If TZ isn t set the system uses the value of the CS TIMEZONE configuration string instead The POSIX standards include the TZ environment variable CS TIMEZONE is a Neutrino implementation The description below applies to both Various time functions use the time zone information to compute times relative to Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly known as Greenwich Mean Time GMT You usually set the time on your computer to UTC Us
274. executable a link a directory and so on If you always want 1s to use this option create an alias alias ls ls F If you ever want to invoke the generic 1s command specify the path to the executable or put a backslash in front of the command e g ls For information on adding an alias to your profile so that it s always in effect see ksh s startup file in Configuring Your Environment Substitutions The shell lets you use a shorthand notation to include the values of certain things in the command line The shell does the following substitutions in this order e directories tilde expansion e parameters e commands e arithmetical expressions e braces e filename generation Directories tilde expansion The shell interprets the tilde character as a reference to a user s home directory The characters between the tilde and the next slash if any are interpreted as the name of a user For example mary some_file refers to some_file in the home directory of the user named mary 46 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Shell Parameters Commands October 6 2005 If you don t specify a user name it s assumed to be yours so some_file refers to some_file in your home directory Your home directory is defined in your entry in the password database see the description of etc passwd in Managing User Accounts To i
275. file file export ENV SHOME kshre People frequently call the profile kshre but you can give it whatever name you want This file doesn t need to be executable Use ksh s profile to set up your favorite aliases and so on For example if you want 1s to always display characters that tell you if a file is executable a directory or a link add this line to the shell s profile alias ls l1s F 186 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Environment variables Any changes that you make to the profile apply to new shells but not to existing instances For an example of kshrc see the Examples appendix Environment variables Many applications use environment variables to control their behavior For example less gets the width of the terminal or window from the COLUMNS environment variable many utilities write any temporary files in the directory specified by TMPDIR For more information see the Commonly Used Environment Variables appendix of the Utilities Reference When you start a process it inherits a copy of its parent s environment This means that you can set an environment variable in your profile and all your shells and processes inherit it provided that no one in the chain undefines it For example if you have your own bin directory you can add it to your PATH by adding a line like this to your profile export PATH SPATH home username b
276. filesystem isn t unmounted properly a filesystem checker is usually responsible for cleaning up the next time the filesystem is mounted Although the s ext2 so module is equipped to perform a quick test it automatically mounts the filesystem as read only if it detects any significant problems which should be fixed using a filesystem checker Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Flash filesystems This filesystem allows the same characters in a filename as the QNX 4 filesystem see Filenames earlier in this chapter Flash filesystems The Neutrino flash filesystem drivers implement a POSIX compatible filesystem on NOR flash memory devices The flash filesystem drivers are standalone executables that contain both the flash filesystem code and the flash device code There are versions of the flash filesystem driver for different embedded systems hardware as well as PCMCIA memory cards e The components for flash filesystems are available only in the Flash Filesystem amp Embedding Technology Development Kit TDK e Flash filesystems don t include and entries for the current and parent directories The naming convention for the drivers is devf system where system describes the embedded system For example the dev 800fads driver is for the 8300FADS PowerPC evaluation board For information about these drivers see the devf entries in the Utilities Referenc
277. filesystems 215 CD ROM 132 225 470 CIFS 227 471 commit level 458 DOS 224 mounting 168 double buffering 459 embedded creating 227 Ext2 226 469 mounting 168 FAT12 FAT16 FAT32 225 469 features 215 fine tuning 451 flash 227 471 floppy disk 132 hard disk 132 ISO 9660 313 metadata 453 mounting 168 216 mountpoints 132 NFS 228 470 538 Index OS image using as 216 package 231 QNX 4 218 468 consistency checking for 224 mounting 168 RAM 217 record size 458 remote 411 mounting 177 restoring 423 storing dataondisk 411 structure 411 throughput 455 type default 215 unmounting 216 virtual 237 filters printing 290 300 utilities 50 find 30 47 52 209 403 DOS version 59 firewalls 441 497 Flash Filesystem amp Embedding TDK 227 237 flash filesystems 227 471 read only 237 flashctl 237 FLASHQUALITY 105 floppy disks DOS formatting 315 driver 314 filesystems 132 mounting 124 flow control 336 focus assigning 83 font_repository 198 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index font traplist 199 fontadmin 84 197 fontdesc 198 fontdir 198 fontdynamic 199 fontext 199 fontkey 199 fontmap 199 fontopts 199 fontorient 199 fontpreferred 199 fonts anti aliasing 84 Asian 84 file extensions 140 installing 199 maps 130 server 105 125 setting up 197 substitutions 84 fontsleuth 199 fopen 452 format DOS command 59 FQNN fully qualified node name 243 fragmentat
278. ft Alt Backspace simply logs you in again Alternatively you can set up a user s profile to start Photon with the ph command and then add this command to your re local file Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 177 tinit 2005 QNX Software Systems login f username For more information see login in the Utilities Reference Don t use the re local file to to set up environment variables because there s another shell that starts after this script is run so any environment variable that you set in this file disappears by the time you get a chance to log in After you ve created re local make sure that you set the executable bit on the file with the command chmod x rce local tinit The tinit program initializes the terminal as follows 1 If the p option is specified tinit starts Photon 2 Otherwise tinit looks at etc config ttys and runs login or shells based on the contents of the file For more information including a description of etc config ttys see tinit in the Utilities Reference Troubleshooting Here are some problems you might encounter while customizing how your system starts up The applications I put in re local don t run Check the following e Make sure that the file is executable use the chmod command to correct this if necessary 178 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting
279. ftware Systems the speed by a factor of ten For more information see Connecting Hardware 2 Optimize the filesystem options Determine how you want to balance system robustness and performance see below Concentrate on the cache and vnode options the other sizes scale themselves to these The default cache is 15 of the total RAM or 10MB whichever is smaller This might be too small for intensive use Set the commit option either globally or as a mount option to force or disable synchronous writes Consider using a RAM disk for temporary files e g tmp 3 Optimize application code Read and write in large chunks 16 32K is optimal Read and write in multiples of a disk block on block boundaries typically 512 bytes but you can use stat or statvfs to determine the value at runtime Avoid standard I O where possible use open read and write instead of fopen fread and fwrite The f functions use an extra layer of buffering The default size is given by BUFSIZ you can use setvbuf to specify a different buffer size Pregrow files if you know their ultimate sizes Use direct I O DMA to user space Use filenames that are no longer than 16 characters If you do this the filesystem won t use the inodes file so there won t be any inter block references In addition there will be one less disk write and hence one less chance of corruption if the power fails Long filenames
280. functions A timer is created via timer _create and armed via timer_settime A timer can then deliver an event either periodically or on a one shot basis A period of time assigned to a round robin scheduled thread This period of time is small four times the clock period in Neutrino programs shouldn t rely on the actual value doing so is considered bad design Glossary 521 1 48 51 51 209 48 end of options 56 66 current directory 54 116 222 417 not supported by dev shmem 217 flash filesystems 227 parent directory 116 222 417 not supported by dev shmem 217 flash filesystems 227 incommand syntax 56 altboot 122 164 413 414 bad_blks 422 bitmap 122 414 rewriting with chkfsys 422 boot 122 164 413 414 485 diskroot 122 168 169 exre 149 inodes 122 414 417 454 entries 220 417 October 6 2005 Index pregrowing 453 kshre 186 example of 489 interactive mode 201 lastlogin 129 lock 282 longfilenames 219 221 417 menu file 79 ph 184 profile 108 158 185 example of 488 pwlock 20 23 29 rhosts 265 pathname separator 115 root directory 114 117 122 dev 119 etc directory 127 See also individual files 45 character while booting 165 wildcard character 48 208 47 47 Index 523 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems 47 46 51 gt 50 gt gt 50 lt 50 lt sys h gt See individual files 48 utility syntax 56 wil
281. g off don t 14 PPC directories 123 limits 474 PPP Point to Point Protocol 267 269 494 pppd 269 494 PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 267 268 pppoe up 269 pppoed 269 preferences default editor 157 Photon 72 75 82 83 Voyager web browser 93 prefix space limits 472 preview 301 primary boot loader 164 prime meridian 192 print DOS command 59 printcap 279 287 examples 292 PRINTER 293 printers 130 printers USB 333 printing access control 285 accounting information 290 burst headers suppressing 288 files converting for 290 300 filters 290 300 jobs canceling 283 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index starting 282 lpr 280 490 managing lpre 283 prjobs 301 NCFTP over 280 491 overview 279 Photon 299 preview 301 printer capabilities 287 Qnet over 280 302 queue managing 84 283 remotely 289 SAMBA over 280 492 serial lines 289 spooler 299 configuration files 489 spooling daemon 265 282 spooling directories 285 299 TCP IP over 280 297 298 302 troubleshooting 304 priorities privileged 472 range 472 specifying 57 450 prjobs 84 301 problems command line 64 devb eide 317 environment setting 200 files 144 237 modems 355 Photon 107 printing 304 profiles 200 October 6 2005 Qnet 248 system starting and shutting down 178 TCP IP 272 user accounts 32 video cards 362 proc 133 process groups limits 472 process ma
282. g system if it detects the devices correctly and doesn t display any problems the setup is correct Remember that if a SCSI chain isn t terminated correctly a device may appear on the chain but will likely have problems after some use Each device on a SCSI chain needs to have a unique ID number between 1 and the maximum value supported by the adapter check the user manual for the adapter If two devices have the same ID one or both may malfunction or not be recognized by the computer Is there a PCI bridging problem Try moving the SCSI card to another PCI slot Sometimes a PCI bridging problem can prevent Neutrino from properly attaching to the card This can happen because Neutrino doesn t support bridges of type other Is the BIOS set up for a PnP aware OS Neutrino isn t a PnP aware OS Does the adapter or chain need an external power source If so even if the device has power it can t communicate with your computer if the SCSI adapter doesn t have power Check the type of SCSI cable There are several types and the type of adapter you re using determines the type of cable you need Also check to make sure that there are no bent pins on the cable If you re using an adapter to convert between SCSI 2 and SCSI 3 for example make sure you re using an adapter that s recommended for your hardware Not all adapters convert the connections correctly Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 321 Hard disks
283. ger than 2G When you use pax as an archiver pax w mode it writes tar format archives Your choice of which to use is based on the command line syntax that works better for you not the format of the archives because the formats are identical The pax utility was created as part of the POSIX standard to provide a consistent mechanism for archive exchange pax stands for Portable Archive eXchange thus avoiding conflict between variants of the tar utility that behave differently You can create archives of e Single files although there isn t much point in doing so with tar and pax For example pax wf my_archive tar code c This command takes code c and creates an archive sometimes referred to as a tarball called my_archive tar The wf options tell pax to write a file e Multiple files to archive more than one file pass more files on the end of the command line For example pax wf my_archive tar code c header h readme txt Pax archives them all together resulting in the archive my archive tar e Directories just specify a directory name on the command line pax wf my_archive tar workspace This command archives all the contents of workspace into my_ archive tar e Partitions specify the directory name of the partition pax wf my_ archive tar fs hd0 t79 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Archiving your data This comm
284. ges from other programs and optionally communicates with hardware All of the Neutrino device drivers and filesystems are implemented as resource managers Neutrino resource managers are responsible for presenting an interface to various types of devices This may involve managing actual hardware devices such as serial ports parallel ports network cards and disk drives or virtual devices such as dev nu11 the network filesystem and pseudo ttys The binding between the resource manager and the client programs that use the associated resource is done through a flexible mechanism called pathname space mapping In pathname space mapping an association is made between a pathname and a resource manager The resource manager sets up this mapping by informing the Neutrino process manager that it s responsible for handling requests at or below in the case of filesystems a certain mountpoint This allows the process manager to associate services i e functions provided by resource managers with pathnames Once the resource manager has established its pathname prefix it receives messages whenever any client program tries to do an open read write etc on that pathname For more detailed information on the resource manager concept see Resource Managers in System Architecture Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS October 6 2005 October 6 2005 Chapter 2 Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down In this chapter
285. gher the receive trigger t the higher the possibility of losing data Multiport serial adapters October 6 2005 For multiple serial adapters you may need to specify the I O port and IRQs manually in the driver for each port see General serial adapters for examples By default the driver should detect the ports and IRQs but with some multiport adapters the enumerators don t detect the ports correctly You can edit the enumerators to detect your multiport card and have it set up each port for you You need to edit the etc system enum devices overrides file see the Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 337 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide and enum devices in the Utilities Reference Parallel ports Terminals On a standard PC and some x86 systems parallel ports use the devc par driver see the BSP documentation for the driver for your target hardware By default the driver detects the parallel port If you need to you can use the p option to specify the location of the parallel port If the driver fails to detect your parallel port ensure that the port is enabled in the BIOS If that fails try specifying the I O port when you start the driver On a standard PC and some x86 systems the deve con driver controls the physical console which consists of the display adapter the screen and the system keyboard By default the driver is
286. ght have to filter the print file to get your printer to work using lpr you can specify the filter to use in the etc printcap entry for the printer for more information on this see Filters with spooler Neutrino provides the spooler utility as an alternative printing mechanism to the standard UNIX like 1p family Photon applications use spooler for printing and use a filter to convert Photon draw stream phs output into the form that the printer understands spooler The spooler utility is usually started by an enumerator when you start Neutrino see Controlling How Neutrino Starts The utility manages one printer but you can run more than one instance of spooler When you start spooler or the system starts it e It sets up an entry for the printer in the dev pathname space dev printers printer_name spool e Next spooler queries the printer to determine its type constructs a properties file for the specific printer from the system s general printer configuration files see below and stores the file in the printer s directory under dev e Then spooler creates a spooling directory var spool printers printer_name host e Next spooler stores the printer properties file in the spooling directory Chapter 14 Printing 299 Printing with spooler 2005 QNX Software Systems 300 The etc printers directory includes general configuration files for the most popular types of printers curre
287. gives the root user local control over printer activity Here are the program s major commands and their intended Chapter 14 Printing 283 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems 284 uses see the Utilities Reference entry for the command format and full list of commands start abort Enable printing and ask 1pd to start printing jobs Terminate an active spooling daemon on the local host immediately and then disable printing preventing new daemons from being started by lpr You typically use the abort command to forcibly restart a hung printer daemon e g when lprq reports that a daemon is present but nothing is happening The abort command doesn t remove any jobs from the spool queue for this use lprrm enable and disable restart stop topq Chapter 14 e Printing Turn spooling in the local queue on or off in order to allow or prevent lpr from putting new jobs in the spool queue For example you may want to use the disable command when testing new printer filters because this lets root print but prevents anyone else from doing so The other main use of this option is to prevent users from putting jobs in the queue when the printer is expected to be unavailable for a long time Allow ordinary users to restart printer daemons when lprq reports that no daemon is present Halt a spooling daemon after the current job completes this also disables printing This is a clean way to shut
288. grams that report information on filesystem usage see the entries as normal files The dinit utility creates this directory with initially enough room for 32 directory entries 4 blocks The root directory contains directory entries for several special files that always exist in a QNX 4 filesystem The dinit utility creates these files when the filesystem is first initialized 2 bitmap inodes gt boot gt altboot gt longfilenames Contents of the root directory 414 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems QNX 4 disk structure File Description A link to the directory fsg Also a link to the directory bitmap Represents a read only file that contains a map of all the blocks on the disk indicating which blocks are used inodes A normal file of at least one block on a longfilenames boot altboot Directories floppy RAM disk and 16 blocks on other disks inodes is a collection of inode entries The first entry is reserved and used as a signature info area The first bytes of the inode file are set to IamTHE inodeFILE An optional file that stores information about files whose names are longer than 48 characters see QNX 4 filesystem in Working with Filesystems Represents an OS image file that will be loaded into memory during the standard boot process This file will b
289. hapter if the enumerator can t detect your system s devices or if you want to manually configure static devices in an embedded system Ey e You need to be logged in as root to start any drivers e Make sure that PnP aware OS is disabled in the BIOS before you run Neutrino October 6 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 311 PCI AGP devices 2005 QNX Software Systems PCI AGP devices If you don t know what type of controller you re using you can use the pei utility to identify it pei vvv less The output from this command looks something like this Class Vendor ID Device ID PCI index Class Codes Revision ID Bus number Device number Function num Status Reg Command Reg Header type BIST Mass Storage IDE 8086h Intel Corporation 7111h 82371AB EB PIIX4 IDE Controller Oh 010180h 1h 0 4 1 280h 5h I O space access enabled Memory space access disabled Bus Master enabled Special Cycle operations ignored Memory Write and Invalidate disabled Palette Snooping disabled Parity Checking disabled Data Address stepping disabled SERR driver disabled Fast back to back transactions to different agents disabled Latency Timer Cache Line Size PCI IO Address Max Lat Min Gnt PCI Int Pin Interrupt line Device Dependent 0x40 0x50 0x60 0x70 0x80 0x90 OxA0 OxBO 312 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 07 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
290. hared object is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting an ISO 9660 filesystem The CD ROM filesystem accepts any characters that it sees in a filename it s read only so it s up to whatever prepares the CD image October 6 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 225 Linux Ext2 filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems to impose appropriate restrictions Strict adherence to ISO 9660 allows only 0 9A 2_ but Joliet and Rockridge are far more lenient For information about burning CDs see Backing Up and Recovering Data Linux Ext2 filesystem 226 The Ext2 filesystem provided in Neutrino provides transparent access to Linux disk partitions Not all Ext2 features are supported including the following e file fragments subblock allocation e large files greater than 2 G e filetype extension e compression e B tree directories The fs ext2 so shared object provides filesystem support for Ext2 This shared object is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting an Ext2 filesystem CAUTION Although Ext2 is the main filesystem for Linux systems we don t recommend that you use fs ext2 so as a replacement for the QNX 4 filesystem Currently we don t support booting from Ext2 partitions Also the Ext2 filesystem relies heavily on its filesystem checker to maintain integrity this and other support utilities e g mke2fs aren t currently available for Neutrino If an Ext2
291. he sS option or use stty osflow isflow lt dev serl e To enable hardware flow control start the driver with the option or use stty tohflow tihflow lt dev serl e To disable hardware flow control start the driver with the F option or use stty ohflow ihflow lt dev serl Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Character devices In edited mode e flow control is disabled Don t enable software and hardware flow control at the same time Heavy serial port usage can be very taxing on some systems by default the serial adapter triggers an interrupt for each character transmitted or received You can use these options to reduce the number of interrupts T number Enable the transmit FIFO and set the number of characters to be transmitted at each TX interrupt to 1 4 8 or 14 The default is O FIFO disabled t number Enable the receive FIFO and set its threshold to 1 4 8 or 14 characters The default is O trigger disabled A receive timeout guarantees that the characters won t remain buffered too long For example imagine that the device receives This sentence is coming across the serial port By default the system has to service 47 interrupts to receive this sentence If you set the receive trigger level to 14 the number of interrupts is reduced to four This helps the overall system performance but you re trading off reliability the hi
292. he buildfile for the default boot image qnxbasedma build includes these lines script startup script To save memory make everyone use the libc in the boot image For speed less symbolic lookups we point to libc so 2 instead of libc so Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 165 diskboot 2005 QNX Software Systems procmgr_symlink proc boot libc so 2 usr lib ldqnx so 2 Default user programs to priority 10 other scheduler pri 100 Tell diskboot this is a hard disk boot b1 Tell diskboot to use DMA on IDE drives D1 Start 4 text consoles buy passing n4 to devc con o By adding e Linux ext2 filesystem will be mounted as well pri 100 PATH proc boot diskboot b1 D1 odevc con n4 This script starts the system by running diskboot a program that s used on disk based systems to boot Neutrino For the entire qnxbasedma build file see the Examples appendix e You can pass options to diskboot to control how the system boots and even to device drivers In this buildfile diskboot passes the n4 option to deve con to set the number of virtual consoles e You can set up your machine to not use diskboot For a sample buildfile see the Examples appendix When diskboot starts it prompts Press the space bar to input boot options Most of these options are for debugging purposes The diskboot program looks for a Neutrino partition to mount then runs a s
293. he desktop You can also start the helpviewer by typing helpviewer amp on the command line 86 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Getting help with the Helpviewer eo eeloviewer PEE File Edit View Bookmarks Help gE elote m 3 Home Print Back Forward Up Find Where Mark Contents Bookmarks History Options QNX Neutrino RTOS 6 3 Section QNX Neutrino RTOS 6 3 Topics iE Getting Started y High Availability QNX Neutrino RTOS fs Integrated Devel Phindows for QNI Photon Multilingt f Photon microGU f Power Manager System Architecture NX 4 to QNX Nel User s Guide NX Neutrino RT Programmer s Guide Bi Sxstemanalyste Building Embedded Systems Utilities Reference Library Reference Match Whole Words Librar Reference icasasensitive Audio Developer s Guide O Search Topic Text Addon Interfaces Library Reference X Search All Topics QNX Neutrino Operating System Version 6 3 The Photon helpviewer In the Topics list click the arrow next to a topic to view the subtopics it contains or double click a topic to make it the top topic in the list Clicking on a topic displays its content in the topic pane You can also browse to topics by clicking on hypertext links within the topic text Links are indicated by color and underline Searching for a topic or keyword You can search for words in the help files by using the Find f
294. he fontsleuth program loads them October 6 2005 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 199 Terminal types 2005 QNX Software Systems automatically and they become available for use by other applications Input methods Photon includes input methods for Chinese Japanese and Korean You can launch these applications by typing cpim Chinese Input Method vpim Japanese or kpim Korean Using a standard keyboard you can input characters in these languages to any application that normally accepts text For more information see the Photon Multilingual Input bookset Terminal types You need to set the TERM environment variable to indicate to your console or pterm what type of terminal you re using The usr 1ib terminfo directory contains directories that contain terminal database information You can use the utilities tic and infocmp to change the mappings in the database For example you could run infocmp on usr 1ib terminfo q qansi m and this would generate the source for this database You could then modify the source and then run the tic utility on that source to compile the source back in to a reconcilable database The etc termcap file is provided for compatibility with programs that use the older single file database model as opposed to the newer library database model For more information see Strang John Linda Mui and Tim O Reilly 1988 termcap amp terminfo Sebastopol CA O Reilly and Assoc
295. he pregrowth could be performed during an initialization phase where speed isn t critical allowing for better write performance later The optimal case is to pregrow the file without zero filling it using a devctl and then overwrite with the real data contents How small can you get The best way to reduce the size of your system is to use our IDE to create an OS image The System Builder perspective includes a tool called the Dietician that can help slim down the libraries included in the image For more information see the IDE User s Guide as well as Building Embedded Systems 462 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System October 6 2005 Chapter 21 Understanding System Limits In this chapter The limits on describing limits 465 Configurable limits 465 Filesystem limits 466 Other system limits 472 October 6 2005 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 463 2005 QNX Software Systems The limits on describing limits The limits on describing limits Neutrino is a microkernel so many things that might be a core limit in some operating systems become dependent on the particular manager that implements that service under Neutrino especially for filesystems where there are multiple possible filesystems Many resources depend on how much memory is available Other limits depend on your target system For example the virtual address space for a process can vary by processor from 32M on ARM to 3 5G on x86
296. helf A directory that contains the default configuration file for the shelf and the default layout of the Launch menu shells An optional directory where you can put configuration files for phlogin2 or phlogin wm Configuration files for the window manager pwm For more information see Using the Photon microGUI etc printers etc profile A directory that contains printertype cfg files and a fontmap file used by the phs to ps utility For more information see Printing with spooler in the Printing chapter The startup profile script executed by the shell when you log in it s executed before SHOME profile See Configuring Your Environment etc profile d A directory where the default etc profile script looks for scripts to run when any user logs in The etc profile script runs each script in this directory that matches SHELL For example if the value of the SHELL environment variable is bin sh the script runs the scripts that match sh 130 Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Where everything is stored etc re d A directory where you usually keep local system initialization files For more information see the description of etc system sysinit in Controlling How Neutrino Starts etc resolv conf etc skel etc system October 6 2005 Resolver configuration file see also etc hosts above See etc resolv conf
297. his chapter i The entries in net for nodes in the same domain as your machine don t include the domain name For example if your machine is in the qnx com domain the entry for karl is net karl if you re ina different domain the entry is net kar1l qnx com name resolution The process by which npm qnet so converts an FQONN to a list of destination addresses that the transport layer knows how to get to name resolver A piece of code that implements one method of converting an FQNN to a list of destination addresses Each network directory has a list of name resolvers that are applied in turn to attempt to resolve the FQNN The default is the Node Discovery Protocol NDP October 6 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 243 Software components for Qnet networking 2005 QNX Software Systems Software components for Qnet networking You need the following software entities along with the hardware for Qnet networking l tg Client processes Microkernel Symbolic link ese je te a ie nat Aa fat tN gt npm qnet so npm qnet compat so or npm gnet 14 lite so bonnet X 4 Network drivers devn so Hardware Components of Qnet io net Manager to provide support for dynamically loaded networking modules 244 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Starting
298. ht stack configuration 2005 QNX Software Systems The device enumerator starts io net automatically when you boot loads the full TCP IP stack and starts the appropriate drivers for the detected devices If you want to use the tiny stack or specify any options e g to enable IPSec when you boot you need to edit the device enumeration files For more information and an example see Device enumeration in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide Tiny stack npm ttcpip so 262 Use the tiny stack when you need to conserve resources It supports many but not all of the functions found in the full TCP IP stack see npm ttcpip so in the Utilities Reference for a list of its limitations When you start the tiny stack use the command line options to set the configuration parameters For example io net dne2000 pttcpip if en0 10 100 default 10 1 To see how you ve configured your system or to view the current network connections when using the tiny stack read the proc ipstats file like this cat proc ipstats You ll see something like this Ttcpip Jun 15 2000 22 36 01 verbosity level 0 ip checksum errors 0 udp checksum errors 0 tcp checksum errors 0 packets sent 0 packets received 0 en0 addr 10 0 0 100 netmask 255 0 0 0 down 100 addr 127 0 0 1 netmask 255 0 0 0 up DST 10 0 0 0 NETMASK 255 0 0 0 GATEWAY en0 DST 127 0 0 0 NETMASK 255 0 0 0 GATEWAY 100 DST 0 0 0
299. iates ISBN 0937175226 Troubleshooting Here are some common problems you might encounter while customizing your environment 200 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting October 6 2005 A script I put in etc profile d doesn t run Check the following e Make sure that the script s name has ksh or sh as its extension e Make sure the executable bit is set on the script e Make sure that the script begins with the line bin sh How do I set the time so it s right in Neutrino and Microsoft Windows If you have Windows in one partition and Neutrino in another on your machine you might notice that setting the clock on one OS changes it on the other Under Neutrino you usually set the hardware clock to use UTC Coordinated Universal Time and then set the time zone Under Windows you set the hardware clock to use local time To set the time so that it s correct in both operating systems set the hardware clock to use local time under Neutrino For more information see the description of etc system sysinit in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter of this guide How can I properly check if kshre is being run as a script rather than as a terminal session If the i option is set then kshrc is running in interactive mode Here s some code that checks to see if this option is set case in i set o emacs export EDITOR
300. ic information 251 Is the Qnet version correct 252 Is the hostname unique 252 Are the nodes in the same domain 253 13 TCP IP Networking 255 Overview of TCP IP 257 Clients and servers 257 Hosts and gateways 257 Nameservers 258 Routing 259 Software components for TCP IP networking 260 x Contents October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Choosing the right stack configuration 261 Tiny stack npm ttepip so 262 Full TCP IP stack npm tepip so 263 Running the Internet daemons 264 Running multiple instances of the TCP IP stack 266 Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters 267 Using PPPoE 268 Using DHCP 270 Using AutoIP 270 Using the SRI SNMP suite for Neutrino 271 Troubleshooting 272 Are io net and the drivers running 272 Is the TCP IP protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed 273 What is the nameserver information 273 How do I map hostnames to IP addresses 274 How do I get the network status 274 How do I make sure I m connected to other hosts 275 How do I display information about an interface controller 275 14 Printing 277 Overview of printing 279 Printing with lpr 280 User interface 281 Spooling directories 285 Access control 285 Network manager 286 Printer capabilities etc printcap 287 Some etc printcap examples 292 Remote printing to a printer on another network 297 Remote printing to a TCP IP enabled printer using lpr 298 Printing with spooler 299 Setting up spooler 299 October 6 2005 Contents
301. ical power supplied to the Fiber Optic Transceiver FOT Jabber detected You typically see this error only on a 1OMbit network It means that a network card is continuing to transmit after a packet has been sent This error shouldn t occur on faster networks because they allow a larger frame size Receive Alignment errors A receive alignment error means that the card has received a damaged frame from the network When one of these errors occurs it also triggers an FCS Frame Check Sequence error These errors occur if the received frame size isn t a multiple of eight bits one byte These errors are commonly due to faulty wiring cable runs that are out of the IEEE 802 3 specification a faulty NIC or possibly a faulty hub or switch To narrow down this problem do a binary division of the network to help eliminate the source Received packets with CRC errors An entry in this field indicates the number of times on a hardware level the card received corrupt data This corruption could be caused by a faulty hub cable or network card The best way to try to solve Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC errors is to do a binary division of the systems on the network to determine which system is sending bad data Once you ve done that you can start replacing the hardware piece by piece Because this error is on the receiving end it s difficult to determine if the CRC is bad on a sent packet 350 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware
302. ich shouldn t This means you can release a project while continuing to work on future features It is this concurrency that makes using CVS for software version control so popular We ll start off with the basics of using CVS from the initial setup to manipulating your source files We ll also cover more advanced CVS concepts such as concurrent development and remote access For more information about CVS including the full CVS User s Guide see http www cvshome org CVS basics Revisions October 6 2005 CVS stores your files in a central place called a repository The repository is stored on disk either on your local machine or on a remote server This section describes the locally stored version Every time you make changes to a file that s stored in CVS a new revision is created Each revision includes the date of the change the name of the user who made the change and a log message that describes the change You can retrieve arbitrary revisions of a file for inspection at any time You can use symbolic names called tags to mark a particular revision for easy reference Chapter 17 e Using CVS 381 CVS basics 2005 QNX Software Systems A revision is denoted by a sequence of numbers and dots It s analogous to the standard numbering scheme used for versions of software For example a file called foo c might have had three changes over the last few days The first revision would be numbered 1 1
303. ich is also normally assigned to the screen October 6 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 49 Shell 2005 QNX Software Systems Pipes Sometimes you want to override this behavior If you want a process to Use this symbol Read from a file or another device input lt redirection Write stdout to a file output redirection gt Write stdout to a file appending to the file s gt gt contents output append For example the 1s command lists the files in a directory If you want to redirect to output of 1s to a file called filelist enter ls gt filelist You can specify a file descriptor for the above redirections For example if you don t want to display any error messages redirect stderr to dev null a special file also known as the bit bucket that swallows any data written to it and returns end of file when read from my command 2 gt dev null For more information see Input output redirection in the docs for ksh in the Utilities Reference You can also use a pipe to to build complex commands from smaller ones grep some term html sort u we 1 Programs such as grep sort and we a utility that counts characters words and lines that read from standard input and write to standard output are called filters 50 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Shell Quoting special characters October 6 2005 Certain
304. ich you typically invoke at boot time from the etc re d re local file see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter acts as a master server for coordinating and controlling the spooling queues configured in the etc printcap file When it starts lpd makes a single pass through the etc printcap database restarting any printers that have jobs In normal operation lpd listens for service requests on a socket within the Internet domain under the printer service specification for requests for printer access The daemon spawns a copy of itself to process the request the master daemon continues to listen for new requests The daemons use simple text files as lock files for synchronization the parent daemon uses usr spool output 1pd lock while its children use a lock file in the printer s spool directory as specified in the printcap file Clients communicate with 1pd using a simple transaction oriented protocol Authentication of remote clients is done based on the privileged port scheme employed by rshd See Access control below lpr start a print job 282 The lpr command lets you put a print job in a local queue and notifies the local Lpd daemon that new jobs are waiting in the spooling area The daemon either schedules the job to be printed locally or if printing remotely attempts to forward the job to the appropriate machine If the printer can t be opened or the destination machine can t be reach
305. ideo cards 2005 QNX Software Systems photon xres 1024 yres 768 bitpp 16 region_x 1280 PLUGIN photon dllpath gri photon so Troubleshooting your video card Here are some things to check if erttrap fails to detect your video card or has problems The display is slightly misaligned on the monitor Each monitor behaves differently in certain resolutions and refresh rates If Photon seems to be slightly off center you may need to use the controls on your monitor to adjust the display to properly align with the video mode See your monitor s documentation for more information The refresh rate isn t correct the display isn t centered or in the worst case there s no display at all The timings set by drivers might not match the timings required by the monitor or LCD You might have to edit usr photon config crtc settings This file contains the timing information required by many drivers to set the standard resolutions and refresh rates Many older drivers as well as the generic drivers don t use this file because they use the video BIOS to set the graphics mode If this file isn t present the timings are calculated using a generic timing formula GTF The GTF isn t completely accurate you can manually edit the crtc settings file to set the exact timing for the resolution and refresh rate At least the following drivers use this file 362 Chapter 15 e Connecti
306. ider that reading the 256M file 1K at a time requires 262 144 IO READ messages whereas with 16K records it requires only 16 384 such messages 1 16th of the non negligible overheads Write performance doesn t show the same dramatic change because the user data is by default placed in the write behind buffer cache and written in large contiguous runs under timer control using O_SYNC would illustrate a difference The limiting factor here is the periodic need for synchronous update of the bitmap and inode for block allocation as the file grows see below for a case study or overwriting an already allocated file Double buffering This example illustrates the effect of double buffering in the standard TO library on an x86 PHI 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using the QNX 4 filesystem The table shows the rate in megabytes October 6 2005 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 459 Filesystems 2005 QNX Software Systems per second of writing and reading a 256M file with a record size of 8K Scenario Writing Reading File descriptor 18 31 Standard I O 13 16 setvbuf 17 30 Here you can see the effect of the default standard I O buffer size BUFSIZ or 1K When you ask it to transfer 8K the library implements the transfer as 8 separate 1K operations Note how the standard I O case does match the above benchmark see Record size above for a 1K record and the file descriptor case is the same as the 8K sce
307. ies Reference or call getrlimit see the Library Reference Synchronization primitives There are no limits on the number of mutexes and condition variables condvars There s no limit on the number of unnamed semaphores but the number of named semaphores is limited by the number of available file descriptors see File descriptors above TCP IP limits The number of open connections and sockets is limited only by memory and by the maximum number of file descriptors per process see File descriptors above Shared memory The number of shared memory areas is limited by the allowed virtual address space for a process which depends on the target architecture See the RLIMIT_AS and RLIMIT_DATA resources for setrlimit in the Library Reference October 6 2005 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 473 Other system limits 2005 QNX Software Systems Message queues The number of message queues is limited by the number of available file descriptors see File descriptors above The default maximum number of entries in a queue and the default maximum size of a queue entry depend on whether you re using the traditional mqueue or alternate mq implementation of message queues Attribute Traditional Alternate Number of entries 1024 64 Message size 4096 256 For more information see mqueue and mq in the Utilities Reference and mq_open in the Neutrino Library Reference Platform s
308. iew of selected files to the client Neutrino doesn t start the package filesystem by default but you can use it if you wish The package filesystem is implemented as s pkg see the Utilities Reference For an overview of the package filesystem see Virtual filesystems in the Filesystems chapter of the System Architecture guide Packages in their repositories 232 The purpose of the package filesystem is to manage packages in their repositories It ensures that various nodes can pick and choose a custom set of files and directories they want to use In essence the package filesystem creates a virtual filesystem that redirects access requests to a real filesystem based on a set of user selected packages The contents of the various packages determine what the virtual filesystem looks like For example consider a system that includes two packages Core and Util where the Core Package contains e pkgs base qnx os corel1 0 e pkgs base qnx os corel 0 etc passwd e pkgs base qnx os corel 0 bin true e pkgs base qnx os corel 0 x86 bin cat e pkgs base qnx os corel 0 x86 bin echo and the Util package contains e pkgs base qnx utill 0 x86 bin 1s The actual filesystem looks like this Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Package filesystem October 6 2005 a E a Go O ears ipsa cals of on ia bin nop Saad passwd t
309. igher software level you can accept packets addressed to whomever you please Promiscuous mode is disabled by default Support When you enable multicast mode you can mark a packet with a special destination so that multiple nodes on the network may receive it Multicast packets are also accepted Packets Transmitted OK Before you look at this value determine that some form of network transfer ping telnet file transfer was attempted If a card isn t set up properly the number of sent packets shown here is either very small or zero If the card isn t displaying any sent packets the cause is probably a driver problem Check all the options you re passing to the driver one or more may be incorrect Bytes Transmitted OK October 6 2005 This is the number of bytes of data sent on the network This value increases with the number of packets transmitted on the network Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 345 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems Total Packets Transmitted Bad Broadcast Multicast You can use this statistic to determine if you have faulty hardware If all the sent packets are reported as bad there s likely a hardware problem but you might be using the wrong driver Check the hardware for compatibility If it looks as if it s hardware related try switching the hardware to see if the problem disappears Packets Transmitted OK This is the number of broadcast packets transmitted from
310. igning 27 name login 17 18 27 name real 22 28 removing 29 root 18 running programs as a specific 138 trusted 265 usr 134 UTC Coordinated Universal Time 171 191 hardware clock 171 201 UTF 8 filenames 120 typing 151 156 utilities basic 58 documentation 135 DOS equivalents for 59 location of 123 134 135 logging information about users 21 names completing 44 remote execution 57 syntax conventions 55 usage messages 56 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair 343 var 136 Index 563 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems variables See also environment variables DOS equivalents for 63 shell 208 vector reset 161 ver DOS command 59 version control 381 Vesa driver 365 vi 148 video cards 356 drivers 84 modes 356 vim 155 virtual address space limits 474 virtual consoles 41 70 74 75 virtual filesystems 237 viruses 437 VISUAL 157 volume controlling 75 volume so 75 Voyager web browser 91 140 Cache tab 93 Connection tab 94 preferences 93 User Info tab 95 vpim 200 vserver 93 vt100 terminal type 39 W waitfor 332 wav file extension 140 564 Index we 50 web browser 91 web servers embedded 266 369 security 374 rendering engines 93 whence 55 which 54 wildcards 48 209 Win modems not supported 355 window manager configuration files 130 menu 82 options 83 starting 106 windows colors changing 83 dragging 83 hotkeys 102 titles alignment 83 Windows Micros
311. ilar to EPROM but you can erase the entire device electrically instead of via ultraviolet light Contrast flash and RAM A notification scheme used to inform a thread that a particular condition has occurred Events can be signals or pulses in the general case they can also be unblocking events or interrupt events in the case of kernel timeouts and interrupt service routines An event is delivered by a thread a timer the kernel or an interrupt service routine when appropriate to the requestor of the event Glossary 507 2005 QNX Software Systems extent A contiguous sequence of blocks on a disk fd File Descriptor a client must open a file descriptor to a resource manager via the open function call The file descriptor then serves as a handle for the client to use in subsequent messages FIFO First In First Out a scheduling algorithm whereby a thread is able to consume CPU at its priority level without bounds See also round robin and sporadic filename completion A shell feature that saves typing type enough of the file s name to identify it uniquely and then press Esc twice If possible the shell fills in the rest of the name filter A program that reads from standard input and writes to standard output such as grep sort and we You can use a pipe to combine filters flash memory A memory technology similar in characteristics to EEPROM memory with the exception that erasing is performed
312. iles October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems File ownership and permissions October 6 2005 You can change the permissions and ownership for a file or directory only if you re its owner or you re logged in as root If you want to change both the permissions and the ownership change the permissions first Once you ve assigned the ownership to another user you can t change the permissions Permissions are divided into these categories u Permissions for the user i e the owner g Permissions for the group o Permissions for others i e everyone who isn t in the group Each set of permissions includes r Read permission w Write permission x Execute permission For a directory this is permission to list or search the directory sors Setuid or setgid see below tort Sticky bit see below For example if you list your home directory using 1s al you might get output like this total 94286 drwxr xr x 18 barney techies 6144 Sep 26 06 37 drwxrwxr x 3 root root 2048 Jul 15 07 09 drwx 2 barney techies 4096 Jul 04 11 17 AbiSuite rw rw r 1 barney techies 185 Oct 27 2000 Sig rw 1 barney techies 34 Jul 05 2002 cvspass drwxr xr x 2 barney techies 2048 Feb 26 2003 ica rw rw r 1 barney techies 320 Nov 11 2002 kshre rw rw r 1 barney techies 0 Oct 02 11 17 lastlogin drwxrwxr x 3 barney techies 2048 Oct 17 2002 mozilla drwxrwxr x 11 barney techies 2048 Sep 08 09 0
313. ilesystem You can create NFS mountpoints with the mount command by specifying nfs for the type and o ver3 as an option You must start fs nfs3 or fs nfs3 before creating mountpoints in this manner If you start fs nfs2 or fs nfs3 without any arguments it runs in the background so you can use mount To make the request the client uses the mount utility as in the following examples e Mount an NFS 2 client filesystem s nfs2 must be running first mount t nfs 10 1 0 22 home mnt home e Mount an NFS 3 client filesystem s nfs3 must be running first mount t nfs o ver3 server_node qnx_bin bin In the first example the client requests that the home directory on an IP host be mounted onto the local namespace as mnt home In the second example NFS protocol version 3 is used for the network filesystem Here s another example of a command line that starts and mounts the client fs nfs3 10 7 0 197 home bob homedir Although NFS 2 is older than POSIX it was designed to emulate UNIX filesystem semantics and happens to be relatively close to POSIX Package filesystem Neutrino s package filesystem is a virtual filesystem manager that presents a customized view of a set of files and directories to a client October 6 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 231 Package filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems The real files are present on some media the package filesystem presents a virtual v
314. ilesystem You can t use the characters 0x00 0x1F 0x7F and OxFF in filenames In addition 0x2F is the pathname separator and can t be in a filename component You can use spaces but you have to quote them on the command line you also have to quote any wildcard characters that the shell supports For more information see Quoting special characters in Using the Command Line Links and inodes 220 File data is stored distinctly from its name and can be referenced by more than one name Each filename called a link points to the actual data of the file itself There are actually two kinds of links hard links which we refer to simply as links and symbolic links which are described in the next section In order to support links for each file the filename is separated from the other information that describes a file The nonfilename Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems QNX 4 filesystem October 6 2005 information is kept in a storage table called an inode for information node If a file has only one link i e one filename the inode information i e the nonfilename information is stored in the directory entry for the file If the file has more than one link the inode is stored as a record in a special file named inodes the file s directory entry points to the inode record home giuseppe File contents File content
315. ilesystems chapter in this guide Everything is a file In a Neutrino system almost everything is a file devices data and even Services are all typically represented as files This lets you work with local and remote resources easily from the command line or through any program that works with files Types of files October 6 2005 Neutrino supports the following types of files and 1s 1 uses the character shown in parentheses to identify the type Regular Directory d Symbolic link 1 A file that contains user data such as C code HTML and data For example home fred myprog c Conceptually a directory is something that contains files and other directories For example home fred A directory is implemented as a disk file that stores a list of the names of files and other directories Each filename is associated with an inode information node that defines the file s existence For more information see QNX 4 filesystem in Working with Filesystems An additional name for a file or directory For example usr bin more is a symbolic link to usr bin less For more information see Symbolic links in Working with Filesystems Chapter 6 e Working with Files 113 Filenames and pathnames 2005 QNX Software Systems Named special n A shared memory region such as dev shmem Pg101e0001 Character special files c Entries that represent a character device For example d
316. ill belong to their normal owners If you change the ownership of a setuid command the setuid bit is cleared unless you re logged in as root Similarly if you change the group of a setgid command the setgid bit is cleared unless you re root 138 Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems File ownership and permissions Sticky bit CAUTION Setuid and setgid commands can cause a security problem If you create any make sure that only the owner can write them and that a malicious user can t hijack them especially if root owns them The sticky bit is an access permission that affects the handling of executable files and directories e If it s set for an executable file the kernel keeps the executable in memory for a while after the program ends the exact length of time depends on what else is happening in the system This can improve the performance if you run a program e g a compiler or linker frequently e Fora directory it affects who can delete a file in the directory You always need to have write permission on the directory but if the sticky bit is set for the directory you also need to be the owner of the file or directory or have write permission on the file If the third character in a set of permissions is t e g r t the sticky bit and execute permission are both set T indicates that only the sticky bit is set Default file permissions
317. in If you re the system administrator and you want this change to apply to everyone export the environment variables from etc profile or from a script in etc profile d For more information see the discussion of etc profile earlier in this chapter Setting PATH and LD LIBRARY PATH October 6 2005 The login utility doesn t preserve environment variables except for a few special ones such as PATH and TERM The PATH environment variable specifies the search paths for commands while LD_LIBRARY_PATH specifies the search paths for shared libraries for the linker The initial default values of PATH and LD LIBRARY PATH are specified in the buildfile before procento is started Two Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 187 Configuration strings 2005 QNX Software Systems configuration strings see Configuration strings below CS PATH and _CS_LIBPATH take the default values of PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH The login utility uses _CS_PATH to set the value of PATH and passes this environment variable and both configuration strings to its child processes If you type set or env in a shell that was started from login you ll see the PATH variable but not LD_LIBRARY_PATH _CS_LIBPATH works in the same manner as LD_LIBRARY_PATH You can use the etc default login file to indicate which environment variables you want login to preserve You can edit this file to add new variables such as LD LIBRARY PATH but you can
318. in Process ID INformation command If you want to run something at a specific priority use on specifying the p option If you want to specify a relative priority use the nice command Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 57 Basic commands 2005 QNX Software Systems Basic commands Here are some Neutrino commands that you ll frequently use If you want to Use Determine your current pwd builtin ksh command directory Change directory ed builtin ksh command List the contents of a directory ls Rename move files and mv directories Delete remove files rm Copy files and file hierarchies cp Or pax Create directories mkdir Remove directories rmdir Concatenate and display files cat Display output on a less or more page by page basis Find files based on search find criteria Change a file s chmod permissions attributes Create hard and symbolic links 1n Create a tape archive tar Or pax Extract files from a tar file tar Extract files froma tar gzor gunzip filename pax ror tgz file tar xzf filename 58 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems International keyboards For more information about these and other commands see the Utilities Reference its Utilities Summary arranges all the utilities according to what you use them for International keyboards If you re using Photon you can use phlocale to change the keyboard mapping
319. in login s PATH usually bin usr bin Specify the full pathname to the program e g usr local bin myprogram in the user s etc passwd account entry e The account entry specifies options or arguments for your login shell You can t pass arguments to the initial October 6 2005 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 33 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems command because the entire string is interpreted as the filename to be executed 34 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts October 6 2005 Chapter 4 Using the Command Line In this chapter Command line or GUI 37 Processing a command 37 Character device drivers 38 Shell 42 Utilities 54 Basic commands 58 International keyboards 59 Neutrino for MS DOS users 59 Troubleshooting 64 October 6 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 35 2005 QNX Software Systems Command line or GUI Command line or GUI Like QNX 4 UNIX and DOS Neutrino is based on a command line interface Although Neutrino includes an easy to use graphical interface see the Using the Photon microGUI chapter you ll likely have to type a command sometime especially if you re the system administrator For information about choosing Photon or text mode see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide For developing software you don t always have to use the command line the QNX Momentics Professional Edition includes an Integrated Development Environ
320. in this section Later on we ll look at some more advanced things that you can do with it 386 Chapter 17 e Using CVS October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems CVS basics The import command assumes you have a directory tree somewhere on your disk It must not be in either your repository or your local copy of the repository To add the entire tree to your CVS repository use the following format cd source_to_add evs drepository_path import path_in_repository vendor init and provide a comment when the editor appears This may seem a little odd at first but the import command has other uses than simply importing It always imports the contents of the current working directory The path_in_repository tells CVS to create this path within the repository and to put the contents of the current directory there CVS uses the last two arguments vendor and init to create a branch see Concurrent development branching and merging later in this chapter and a tag for the imported files They aren t applicable if you re importing your own software but CVS requires them anyway Getting information on files You can see the status of the file by using the status or stat command cvs status foo c This gives output similar to the following File foo c Status Up to date Working revision 1 1 Tue Jun 3 17 14 55 2003 Repository revision 1 1 home fred cvs myproj foo c v Sticky Tag none Sticky Date none
321. information see Promiscuous Mode below Current Operation Rate 342 The media rate is the speed at which the network card operates On most cards it s either 1OMb s or 100 Mb s This display also shows what form of duplex the card uses Most cards run at half or full duplex transmission Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Network adapters e Full duplex transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions simultaneously e Half duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions but not at the same time The easiest way to illustrate this is to think of a road If the road has two lanes it s full duplex because cars can drive in both directions at the same time without obstructing the other lane If the road has only a single lane it s half duplex because there can be only one car on the road at a time When you examine the media rate check the speed the form of duplex and what the hub supports Not all hubs support full duplex Active Interface Type This is the type of interface used on the Ethernet adapter This is usually UTP unshielded twisted pair STP shielded twisted pair Fiber AUI Attachment Unit Interface MII or BNC coaxial Active PHY Address This is an identifier that tells you which of the physical PHYs were used to interface to the network The numbers range from 0 31 and change depending
322. ing and you can customize it This can make your code more readable and reduces the likelihood of coding errors You can configure individual colors for dozens of cases but the interface can make customizations time consuming New users might find that the friendly interface hides some of the more powerful features although the basic features are intuitive Workspace supports various languages including English French Japanese Chinese and Russian To type international characters use the compose sequences described in Photon compose sequences in the Unicode Multilingual Support appendix of the Photon Programmer s Guide To start Workspace select Editors Workspace from the desktop s Launch menu or type ws filename amp on the command line The basic commands are the same as ped s 156 Chapter 7 e Using Editors October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Specifying the default editor For more information or to download the latest version of Workspace see http pages infinit net micbel Specifying the default editor October 6 2005 Some system processes ask you to use an editor to provide some information For example if you check something into a version control system such as CVS you re asked to explain the changes you made Such processes use the VISUAL or EDITOR environment variable or both to determine which editor to use the default is vi Historically you used ED
323. ion reducing 219 Frame Check Sequence See FCS fread 452 461 free software 477 freeze 405 fs_qnx4 h 411 fs cd so 225 313 fs cifs 228 fs dos so 225 fs ext2 so 226 fs nfs2 230 fs nfs3 230 October 6 2005 fs pkg 231 fs qnx4 so 218 fsck UNIX command 3 fsynce 457 ftpd 265 configuration 128 ftpd conf 128 ftpusers 128 ftruncate 457 462 ftype DOS command 59 full duplex 343 fully qualified node name FQNN 243 fwrite 452 G gateways 257 generic timing formula GTF 362 get CVS command 384 394 getconf 189 220 465 getenv 196 getmac DOS command 59 getrlimit 473 ghostimages 410 GIF graphicalimages 140 graphical user interface 69 graphics drivers settings 84 starting 106 graphics modes 356 graphics traplist 364 Greenwich Mean Time GMT See UTC Coordinated Universal Time Index 539 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems grep 47 50 52 209 group 20 128 entries 22 users removing 29 groups adding 31 changing 18 creating 30 files and directories specifying for 136 IDs 17 adding 31 assigning 28 passwords not supported 22 permissions 18 30 running programs as a specific 138 groups shelf 73 GTF See generic timing formula GUI 69 gunzip 399 405 406 gzip 140 399 405 GPL issues 406 H h file extension 140 half duplex 343 hard disks 315 backing up 409 filesystems 132 mounting 124 hardware clock UTC or local time 171 201 540 Index cursor 357 detecti
324. ipt that starts up the main system services In order to edit this file you must log in as root Before you change the sysinit script make a backup copy of the latest working version If you need to create the script remember to make it executable before you use it see chmod in the Utilities Reference The sysinit script does the following 1 2 It starts slogger if it isn t yet running The script starts the pipe manager pipe This manager lets you pass the output from one command as input to another for more information see Redirecting input and output in Using the Command Line Next sysinit starts mqueue which manages message queues using the traditional implementation If you want to 170 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems etc system sysinit use the alternate implementation of message queues that uses asynchronous messaging you need to start the mq server For more information see the Utilities Reference Starting with release 6 3 0 procnto manages named semaphores which mqueue used to do and still does if it detects that procento isn t doing so 4 October 6 2005 If this is the first time you ve rebooted after installing the OS sysinit runs etc re d rc setup once which creates various directories and swap files Next sysinit sets the CS_TIMEZONE configuration string to the value stored in etc TIMEZONE
325. is established between an individual user and the remote site for example an Internet service provider the session can be monitored for billing purposes Many apartment houses hotels and corporations are now providing shared Internet access over DSL lines using Ethernet and PPPoE A PPPoE connection is composed of a client and a server Both the client and server work over any Ethernet like interface It s used to hand out IP addresses to the clients based on the user and workstation if desired as opposed to workstation only authentication The PPPoE server creates a point to point connection for each client Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters Establishing a PPPoE session Use the pppoed daemon to negotiate a PPPoE session The npm pppoe so shared object provides PPP to Ethernet services Start ie net with this shared object For example io net del900 pttcpip ppppmgr ppppoe Then make a session to any server using the file etc ppp pppoe up to start pppd pppoed Make a session to the server with a name of PPPOE_GATEWAY pppoed name PPPOE_GATEWAY Once the PPPoE session is established pppoed uses pppd to create a point to point connection over the PPPoE session The pppd daemon gets a local TCP IP configuration from the server ISP Starting a point to point connection over PPPoE session October 6 2005 The pppoed daemon nee
326. it knows which repository this directory was checked out from All future operations apply to this repository This command tells CVS that you want to add the file It isn t really added yet CVS needs you to explicitly tell it when you ve finished making changes to your local copy of the repository This lets you change or add several files or directories in your own time and then tell CVS to take the changes all at once when they re ready You use the commit command to do this Putting changes back into the repository The commit or ci check in command tells CVS to make the repository look like your local copy If multiple people are using the same repository it s a little different but for now we assume that you re the only person using the repository cvs commit foo c or cvs ci foo c When you do this CVS starts an editor to let you enter a description of the file Type in something meaningful such as A file to test the basic functionality of CVS This is completely free form so you can add whatever message you like When you re finished save and exit CVS then tells you the file is committed Importing an existing source tree It s probably easy to see that adding an existing source tree to CVS using the sequence of add and commit commands outlined above is tedious for more than a couple of files In these cases we ll use the import command We ll cover the most basic use of this command
327. ith lpr SAMBA and NCFTP see the Examples appendix Troubleshooting Understanding lpr error messages The following error messages from the 1p print utilities may help you troubleshoot your printing problems lpr error messages lpr filename copyfile is too large The submitted file was larger than the printer s maximum file size as defined by the mx capability in its printcap entry lpr printer unknown printer The printer wasn t found in the etc printcap database perhaps because an entry is missing or incorrect lpr printer jobs queued but cannot start daemon The connection to 1pd on the local machine failed probably because the printer server has died or isn t responding The superuser can restart 1pd by typing usr bin lpd You can also check the state of the master printer daemon 304 Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting lpr sin P lpd Another possibility is that the user ID for lpr isn t root and its group ID isn t daemon You can check by typing ls lg usr bin lpr printer printer queue is disabled This means the queue was turned off with the lpre disable command see 1pre printer control program to prevent lpr from putting files in the queue This is usually done when a printer is going to be down for a long time The superuser can turn the printer back on using lpre lprq error messages waiting for printer to become r
328. ith the user name has changed since the first shell looked the information up What happens when you log in October 6 2005 You typically start a session on the computer by logging in see Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down the configuration of your account determines what happens then When you log in the system creates a user session led by a process that runs under your user ID and default group ID as determined from your account entry in etc passwd The user ID and group ID determine the permission the process has to access files and system resources In addition if the process creates any files and directories they belong to that user and group Each new process that you start inherits your user ID and group ID from its parent process For more information about file permissions see File ownership and permissions in Working with Files For more information on characteristics that programs inherit from their parent programs see spawn in the Neutrino Library Reference For more information on sessions and process groups see EEE Std 1003 1 2001 Standard for Information Technology Portable Operating System Interface Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 19 Account database 2005 QNX Software Systems The text mode login login handles a user s login shell differently from the graphical login phlogin2 or phlogin e When you log in via the login utility login changes directory to your H
329. ith these arguments filter xwidth ylength nlogin hhost acct_file The x and y options specify the horizontal and vertical page size in pixels from the px and py entries in the etc printcap file The rest of the arguments are the same as for if filters Some etc printcap examples This section gives you some examples to show you how to set up your printer descriptions see also etc printcap in the Utilities Reference Single printer Let s assume we have two nodes node1 and node2 and node1 has a printer connected to dev par1 5 dev parl TCP IP nodel node2 The etc printcap file on node1 might be as follows lpt1 1lp dev par1 292 Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with lpr This file simply gives the name 1pt1 to the printer connected to dev par1 It doesn t need to describe any other capabilities because the default settings suffice To access this printer from nodel specify lpr Plpt1 or set the PRINTER environment variable to 1lpt1 Make sure the spooling directory exists and that there s an entry for node2 in the etc hosts 1pd file on nodel1 The etc printcap file on node2 might be as follows rlpt1 xrm nodel rp lpt1 1lp This file specifies the remote host with the printer named 1pt1 to be nodel The local print
330. ive letters see SHOMEPATH SHOMEPATHS HOME OS Run the uname utility uname SPATHS PATH SPATHEXTS Neutrino treats file extensions as part of the SPROCESSOR_ARCHITECTURE October 6 2005 filename Executable status is a file permission See chmod Run the uname utility uname p continued Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 63 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems DOS Local Neutrino equivalent SPROCESSOR_IDENTIFIERS SPROMPTS SRANDOMS SSYSTEMDRIVES SSYSTEMROOT STEMP STMP STIMES SUSERNAMES Troubleshooting Run the sin utility sin info PS1 PS2 see Parameters in the documentation for ksh and kshre in the Examples appendix RANDOM Neutrino doesn t use drive letters the system root is always The system root is always TMPDIR TMPDIR Run the date utility date LOGNAME Here are some common problems you might encounter while working on the command line Why can t I run my program called test The shell has a builtin command called test When the shell parses the command line it matches any builtin commands before it looks for executable files You have two choices rename your program or specify the path to it e g test Why do I get a not found message when I try to run my program The program is likely in a directory that isn t listed in your 64 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 200
331. k Using TCP IP and 1pr you can print a file on a remote printer connected to a server on another network You just have to set up your Neutrino network node for remote printing and the remote server for TCP IP and handling printers compatible with lpr For instance let s suppose you want to print root junk ps a PostScript file on a node on your Neutrino network but the only Postscript printer available windows printer is connected to a Windows server with an IP address of 10 2 1 8 First make sure that the Windows server is configured for TCP IP printing and that the printer is compatible with lpr Then as root on your Neutrino node 1 Add a printer description in etc printcap like this rlpt4 rm windows _server lp rp windows_printer sd usr spool output l1pd rlpt4 2 Add a new line in etc hosts like this 10 2 1 8 windows_server 3 Create the spool directory mkdir usr spool output lpd rlpt4 4 Make sure io net is running with a TCP IP stack 5 Start lpd To print a PostScript file on the printer type lpr Prlipt4 junk ps October 6 2005 Chapter 14 Printing 297 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Remote printing to a TCP IP enabled printer using lpr A TCP IP enabled printer doesn t need an attached computer to provide print services the printer itself provides the services So you use the same basic steps described above with the following minor alterations e Enter the
332. k Apply The screen turns black and then should go into the new mode If the mode you selected didn t work properly you can wait for 15 seconds at which point the display automatically reverts to the previous settings or you can press Esc or Enter 3 When the mode has changed and seems to be working properly click Accept This utility also lets you change the driver resolution refresh rate and palette 8 bit color mode only and disable the hardware cursor If you want to edit the command line that s used to start the adapter click the Advanced button This is the same as editing the top line in the graphics modes file Manually setting up your video card 1 Identify your video adapter The documentation for the hardware should describe the chipset used on your adapter 2 Identify which driver you should be using Use the list of supported hardware to determine which driver is appropriate for your adapter see the introduction to this chapter 3 Test the driver by using io graphics to start it manually io graphics drage vid 0x1002 did 0x4755 index 0 xres 1024 photon yres 768 bitpp 16 refresh 80 pphoton For information about the options see Graphics drivers devg in the Utilities Summary in the Utilities Reference as well as the entry for io graphics You ll also need to start Photon and other utilities to ensure that this is working correctly The best thing to do is create a script that starts
333. ke the best choice first take a close look at what you need to back up and how often you need to do it This information determines the storage capacity transfer bandwidth and the degree to which multiple users can share the resource Your choices of backup media vary depending on whether you create backup copies of your data on a local machine or on a remote machine by transferring the data via a network e Local backups offer the advantage of speed and potentially greater control by the end user but are limited to backup technologies and media types that Neutrino supports directly e Remote backups often allow use of company wide backup facilities and open up additional storage options but are limited by the need to transfer data across a network and by the fact that the facilities are often shared restricting your access for storing or retrieving your backups Here s a summary of some of the backup media you might consider and their availability for local or remote backups Media Local Neutrino Remote Floppy Yes Yes LS 120 Yes Yes Tape No Yes CD Yes Yes DVD No Yes Hard disk Yes Yes Flash device Yes Yes USB mass storage device Yes Yes October 6 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 401 Archiving your data 2005 QNX Software Systems Choosing a backup format When backing up your data you need to decide whether to back up each file and directory separately or in an archive with a collection of o
334. kets from 10 7 0 0 are blocked only if they come in on interface pppO they pass through if they come in on another interface All of the above examples show you how to filter incoming packets but you can also filter outgoing packets by using the keyword out For example pass out quick on pppO from 20 20 20 0 24 to any block out quick on ppp0 from any to any In this example if a packet comes from 20 20 20 1 32 it s sent out by the first rule If a packet comes from 1 2 3 4 32 the second rule blocks it Another important keyword is log So far all the examples have quietly either passed or blocked without letting anyone know it was doing it If you want to make sure that the firewall is doing its job you can log what s happening although you probably don t want to log everything For example Chapter 19 e Securing Your System October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Setting up a firewall block in quick on pppO from 192 168 0 0 16 to any block in quick on pppO from 172 16 0 0 12 to any block in quick on pppO from 224 0 0 0 3 to any block in log quick on pppO from 20 20 20 0 24 to any pass in all These rules make the filter log all packets that get blocked on pppo from 20 20 20 0 24 You can also set bidirectional rules on interfaces pass out quick on 100 pass in quick on 100 Here are some other keywords that you can use in the rules proto The protocol e g tep icmp udp port TCP or UDP port nu
335. l 2005 QNX Software Systems If you want to Press Move to the beginning of the line Ctrl A Move to the end of the line Ctrl E Move to the end of the current word Esc F Move to the beginning of the current word Esc B Delete the character at the cursor Ctrl D Delete the character before the cursor Ctrl H Delete from the cursor to the end of the current word Esc D Delete from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl K Paste text Ctrl Y As in emacs commands that involve the Ctrl key are keychords for commands that involve Esc press and release each key in sequence For more information see emacs interactive input line editing in the documentation for ksh In order to process these commands ksh uses the character device in raw mode but emulates all of the driver s processing of the keys Other shells such as esh use the character device in canonical edited input mode Command and filename completion You can reduce the amount of typing you have to do by using command completion and filename completion To do this type enough of the command s or file s name to identify it uniquely then press Esc twice If possible the system fills in the rest of the name For example if you type appb then EscEsc the system completes the command name appbuilder If you prefer to use Tab for completing names set the shell s complete key binding by typing bind I complete 44 Chapter 4 e U
336. l layer that you can use for example to set up a secure tunnel between machines or networks It consists of these subprotocols AH Authentication Header Guarantees the integrity of the IP packet and protects it from intermediate alteration or impersonation by attaching a cryptographic checksum computed by one way hash functions ESP Encapsulated Security Payload Protects the IP payload from wire tapping by encrypting it using secret key cryptography algorithms 440 Chapter 19 e Securing Your System October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Setting up a firewall IPsec has these modes of operation Transport Protects peer to peer communication between end nodes Tunnel Supports P in IP encapsulation operation and is designed for security gateways such as VPN configurations The IPsec support is subject to change as the IPsec protocols develop For more information see IPSec in the Neutrino Library Reference To find out how to enable IPSec see Device enumeration in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide Setting up a firewall Just as a building or vehicle uses specially constructed walls to prevent the spread of fire so computer systems use firewalls to prevent or limit access to certain applications or systems and to protect systems from malicious attacks To create a firewall under Neutrino you can use a combination of e IP Filtering to control access to your machine
337. l number The hour may be between 0 and 24 the minutes and seconds if present between 0 and 59 If preceded by a the time zone is east of the prime meridian otherwise it s west which may be indicated by an optional preceding Indicates when to change to and back from summer time The rule has the form date time date time where the first date describes when the change from standard to summer time occurs and the second date describes when the change back happens Each time field describes when in current local time the change to the other time is made The format of date may be one of the following Jn The Julian day n 1 lt n lt 365 Leap days aren t counted That is in all years including leap years February 28 is day 59 and March 1 is day 60 It s impossible to refer explicitly to the occasional February 29 n The zero based Julian day 0 lt n lt 365 Leap years are counted it s possible to refer to February 29 192 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Setting the time zone Examples Eastern time October 6 2005 Mm n d The dth day 0 lt d lt 6 of week n of month m of the year 1 lt n lt 5 1 lt m lt 12 where week 5 means the last d day in month m which may occur in the fourth or fifth week Week 1 is the first week in which the dth day occurs Day zero is Sunday The time ha
338. layout 59 LEDs 75 PS 2 324 333 setting 84 shortcuts 100 keys dead 59 keyword index online documentation 89 knowledge base 477 Korean input method 200 Index 543 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems kpim 200 ksh Korn shell 3 20 42 205 configuring 184 interactive mode 201 key bindings 44 profile 186 shell scripts 205 L language setting 84 104 110 Launch menu 78 languages def 104 Launch menu 71 74 83 modifying 75 Shutdown 13 launcher so 74 launchmenu_notify 82 launchmenu so 74 LD_LIBRARY_PATH 187 leap days and years 192 led so 75 LEDs keyboard 75 left arrow 39 left handedness adjusting for 84 less 3 52 58 187 210 lib 132 135 libc so NFS 230 libexec 135 libraries location of 132 135 library archives 140 limits channels 472 configurable 465 544 Index file descriptors 473 files link count 467 names length of 467 message queues 474 path names length of 467 physical address space 472 pipes number of bytes written atomically 467 platform specific 474 prefix space 472 process groups 472 processes 472 semaphores 473 sessions 472 shared memory 473 synchronization primitives 473 TCP IP 473 terminals canonical input buffer size 467 raw input buffer size 467 threads 472 timers 472 lines counting 50 links 220 417 circular preventing 224 creating to directory 414 directories 222 dot directory link 417 dot dot directory link 417 QNX4FS_FILE_LINK bit 417 removing 2
339. les 130 hotkeys 102 menu 82 options 83 pwmopts 83 PWMOPTS 107 PWM _PRINTSCRN_ APP 107 Q Qcc qee 140 qconn security 439 qde 135 ged 148 Qnet 241 customizing 246 diagnostic information 251 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index printing over 280 302 protocol stack 245 250 252 remote execution 57 security 440 software components 244 starting 131 245 troubleshooting 248 qnetstats 251 QNX Package file QPK 140 QNX Package Manifest file QPM 140 QNX Package Repository file QPR 140 QNX Repository Manifest file QRM 140 QNX4FS_FILE_LINK bit 417 qnxbase build 123 165 qnxbasedma build 123 165 485 qnxinstall 128 140 236 QNX 4 filesystems 218 468 consistency checking for 224 disk structure 411 filenames 219 mounting 168 169 qpk file extension 140 qpm file extension 140 qpr file extension 140 qrm file extension 140 qtalk 352 354 query DOS command 59 quoting 51 209 October 6 2005 R RADEON chipsets 358 RAID Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks 322 RAM filesystem 217 RAM system limits 474 random 126 176 RANDOM 63 DOS version 63 raw copies 409 raw disks browsing 423 raw input mode 38 buffer 467 re d 131 re devices 172 re local 176 179 282 re rte 171 re setup once 171 re sysinit 172 176 read permission 137 read 452 455 461 readlink 224 realtime clock setting up 171 rebooting 14 recovering from unexpected 424 receive a
340. lignment errors 350 record size 458 recovering a zapped file 423 blocks 422 lost files directories 423 recursive make 140 redirection 49 Index 555 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks See RAID refresh rate 357 regular files 113 217 relative pathnames 115 rem DOS command 59 remote access via Phditto disabling 85 remote execution 57 Remote Procedure Call See RPC remove CVS command 393 rename DOS command 59 rendering engines 93 replace DOS command 59 repositories CVS 381 third party editors 152 man 140 perl 206 troff 140 reset vector 161 resolution video 357 resolv conf 131 258 273 resolver configuration files 131 Qnet 243 resource managers defined 8 inflator 237 return codes from shell scripts 210 revisions 381 rftpd 265 rhosts 265 right arrow 39 RIP Routing Information Protocol 259 266 556 Index RLIMIT_AS 473 474 RLIMIT_DATA 473 RLIMIT_NOFILE 473 rlogind 265 rm 58 interactive mode 489 rm CVS command 393 rmdir 58 ROM monitor 161 root l1 home directory 134 ownership 137 PATH 65 permissions 18 137 privileged priorities 472 prompt default 11 security 436 user accounts managing 25 root block QNX 4 filesystem 413 creating 421 restoring 422 root directory QNX 4 filesystem 414 creating 421 route 259 263 routed 259 266 routers 443 Routing Information Protocol See RIP routing protocols 260 routing tables 264 daemon 266 routing
341. linked even though they reside on different filesystems they re even on different nodes see the following diagram You can t do this using hard links but you can with a symbolic link as follows ln s net node2 usr barney net nodel usr fred Note how the symbolic link and the target directory need not share the same name In most cases you use a symbolic link for linking one directory to another directory However you can also use symbolic links for files as in this example ln s net nodel usr src game c net nodel usr eric src sample c Node 1 Node 2 E E usr TE ee eric src fred barney sam hello c my file eT Ao Symbolic links Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 223 DOS filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Removing a symbolic link deletes only the link not the target Several functions operate directly on the symbolic link For these functions the replacement of the symbolic element of the pathname with its target is not performed These functions include unlink which removes the symbolic link stat and readlink Since symbolic links can point to directories incorrect configurations can result in problems such as circular directory links To recover from circular references the system imposes a limit on the number of hops this limit is defined as SYMLOOP_MAX in the lt limits h gt include file Filesystem robustness
342. ll This data is stored in the etc passwd and etc shadow files where it s accessed by login utilities as well as by other applications that need user account information User names and passwords are case sensitive User accounts let e users log in with a user name and password starting a session under their user ID and group ID e users create their own login environments e applications determine the user name and account information relating to a user ID and group ID if they re defined in etc passwd and etc group e g 1s 1 displays the names not the IDs of the user and group who own each file e utilities and applications accept user names as input as an alternative to numeric user IDs Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 17 What does a user account do 2005 QNX Software Systems e shells expand username paths into actual pathnames based on users home directory information stored in their accounts Groups are used to convey similar permissions to groups of users on the system Entries in etc passwd and etc group define group membership while the group ID of a running program and the group ownership and permission settings of individual files and directories determine the file permission granted to a group member When you log in you re in the group specified in etc passwd You can switch to another of your groups by using the newgrp utility User accounts vs user IDs login lookup
343. lprq lprrm use less more Recovering Data TCP IP Networking Printing Printing Printing Printing Using the Command Line Using the Command Line For details on each command see the Neutrino Utilities Reference Microsoft Windows QNX Neutrino and Windows have different architectures but the main difference between them from a user s perspective is how you invoke programs Much of what you do via a GUI in Windows you do in Neutrino through command line utilities configuration files and scripts although Neutrino does support a powerful Integrated Development Environment IDE to help you create test and debug software and embedded systems Here are some other differences e QNX Neutrino and DOS use different end of line characters Neutrino uses a linefeed while DOS uses a carriage return and a linefeed If you need to transfer text files from one OS to the other you can use Neutrino s textto utility to convert the files For example to convert the end of line characters to Neutrino style textto 1 my_file 4 Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems How Neutrino is unique To convert the end of line characters to DOS style textto c my_file e Neutrino uses a slash instead of a backslash to separate components of a pathname e You can t use DOS commands in Neutrino but many have equivalent commands For more information see Neutrino for
344. m view The files not surprisingly are called hidden files Other than the special treatment by 1s and some other programs such as the Photon file manager pfm nothing else is special about hidden files Use 1s a to list all files including any hidden ones Extensions 118 Filename extensions something at the end of a filename tell programs and users what type of data a file contains In the QNX 4 filesystem the Neutrino native hard disk filesystem extensions are just an ordinary part of the filename and can be any length as long as the total filename size stays within the 505 byte filename length limit Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filenames and pathnames Most of the time file extensions are simply naming conventions but some utilities base their behavior on the extension See Filename extensions later in this chapter for a list of some of the common extensions used in a Neutrino system Pathname space mapping You may have noticed that we ve talked about files and directories appearing in their parent directories rather than just saying that the parent directories contain these files This is because in Neutrino the pathname space is virtual dictated not just by the filesystem that resides on media mounted at root but rather by the paths and pathname aliases registered by the process manager For example let s take a small portion of the pathnam
345. mber For example block in log quick on en0 proto tcp from any to 20 20 20 0 24 port 23 These are just a few of the combinations of rules and keywords that you can use For an example of ipf conf see Configuration files for setting up a firewall in the Examples appendix in this guide Configuring Network Address Translation NAT October 6 2005 Before starting NAT you must create a configuration file that specifies a simple rule such as Map pppO 192 168 1 0 24 gt 20 20 20 1 32 You can find a more detailed example of a configuration file in etc ipnat conf We ve included this file in Configuration files for setting up a firewall in the Examples appendix For the above example when a packet goes out on the pppo interface with an IP address of 192 168 1 0 anda netmask of 24 the Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 445 Setting up a firewall 2005 QNX Software Systems packet is rewritten within the IP stack such that its source address is 20 20 20 1 with a netmask of 32 The packet is then sent to the original destination The system also keeps track of the translated connection in progress so it can send the response to the correct system 446 Chapter 19 e Securing Your System October 6 2005 Chapter 20 Fine Tuning Your System In this chapter Getting the system s status 449 Improving performance 449 Faster boot times 451 Filesystems 451 How small can you get 462 October 6 200
346. me The real name isn t widely used by system utilities but may be used by applications such as email Home directory home username Enter the pathname of the user s home directory usually home username The passwd utility automatically creates the directory you specify If the directory already exists passwd by default prompts you to select a different pathname For information on disabling this feature see the description of etc default passwd in the documentation for passwd Login shell bin sh This is the program that s run once the user logs in Traditionally this is the shell bin sh giving the user an interactive command line upon logging in m You can specify any program as the login shell but you can t pass command line arguments to it Also the phlogin2 or phlogin graphical login fails if the login shell is anything but a POSIX compatible shell Instead of specifying a custom program within the account entry you should customize the user s profile file in their home directory bin sh runs this profile automatically when it starts up For more information see Configuring Your Environment New password Specify the initial password for the account You re asked to confirm it by typing it again 28 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Managing other accounts Removing accounts October 6 2005 To remove a user account 1 Lock th
347. ment IDE that provides a graphical way to write build and test code The IDE frequently uses Neutrino utilities but hides the command line from you For more information see the IDE User s Guide If you want to use command lines from Photon you can start a pterm terminal by clicking on the Terminal icon Jal Terminal on the Photon shelf located at the right edge of your workspace You can run many terminals at once each capable of running multitasking processes Photon terminals emulate character devices so the information in this chapter applies to them as well as to real character devices Processing a command October 6 2005 When you type a command several different processes interpret it in turn 1 The driver for your character device interprets such keys as Backspace and Ctrl C 2 The command interpreter or shell breaks the command line into tokens interprets them and then invokes any utilities 3 The utilities parse the command line that the shell passes to them and then they perform the appropriate actions Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 37 Character device drivers 2005 QNX Software Systems Character device drivers When you type a command the first process that interprets it is the character device driver The driver that you use depends on your hardware for more information see Character I O drivers deve in the Utilities Summary of the Utilities Reference Some
348. ministration tasks and profiling applications The default command line prompt indicates which user ID you re using e For root it s a number sign e For other users it s a dollar sign Chapter 2 e Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down 11 Logging in 2005 QNX Software Systems For information about changing the prompt see kshre in the Examples appendix Logging in Photon mode If you ve configured your system to start Photon the system automatically starts phlogin2 or phlogin to display a login dialog Enter your user name or click your user icon enter your password and then click Login Text mode If your system is configured to boot into text mode the system automatically starts the Login utility which prompts you for your user name and then your password If you type an invalid user name the system prompts you for the password anyway This avoids giving clues to anyone who s trying to break into the system Text mode on an x86 machine could be on a physical console supplied by deve con or deve tcon On any other type of machine you could be connecting to the target via a serial port or TCP IP connection Once you ve logged in After you ve logged in the system automatically runs the home username profile script This script lets you customize your working environment without affecting other users For more information see Configuring Your Environment To
349. missing item If an item doesn t appear in the Launch menu the target likely doesn t specify a valid file e g the file doesn t exist If this doesn t help you solve the problem please let us know I ve created my own item but it doesn t appear in the Launch menu The target might not specify a valid existing file The launchmenu so plugin doesn t display items that don t have a target or that have a target that can t be resolved Make sure the target is either a full path or an executable that the shell can find use the which utility to determine this Modifying the Desktop menu The Desktop menu is the one that pops up when you right click anywhere on the Photon desktop 82 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Starting applications automatically Starting Configu October 6 2005 You can run phmenu from the command line by typing phmenu amp This utility lets you drag and drop the menu items to the trash or to a new location When the item is selected you can modify the label shown in the menu the hotkey and the command to run You can add new items by selecting the item you would like and dropping it into the desired location in the tree For more information see phmenu and pwm in the Utilities Reference applications automatically You can tell Photon to launch applications on startup To do this add the name of the application s execu
350. more information see phfont PHGFX The full command that you want the ph script to use instead of the default commands to start the graphics driver PHINPUT The full command that you want the ph script to use instead of the default commands to start the input driver PHINSTANCE The number of times that Photon has been instantiated For more information see phlogin2 and phlogin in the Utilities Reference PHOTON The name of the Photon device usually dev photon For more information see ph in the Utilities Reference PHOTONOPTS Windows hosted version only Additional options you want to pass to the Photon server when it starts PHOTON PATH The name of the root directory containing Photon files usually usr photon For more information see ph in the Utilities Reference PHWM The name of the Window Manager to start when you start Photon For more information see ph in the Utilities Reference Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting PHWMEXIT PHWMOPTS PTERMPAL PTERMRC PWMOPTS If you set this environment variable Photon disables the confirmation dialog when you exit Photon For more information see pwm in the Utilities Reference Options you want to pass to the window manager when it starts For more information see pwm in the Utilities Reference The pathname of the palette file for pterm The name of a local configuration file fo
351. ms If the hardware didn t get set up correctly the MAC address may not always appear as shown above The first six digits of the MAC address are the vendor ID Check the entries against the list at http www cavebear com CaveBear Ethernet vendor html to see if the vendor ID is valid Then check the card ID the last 6 digits The card ID should be something semi random A display similar to 444444 is likely incorrect Current Physical Node ID The current physical node ID is shown if a card has been set up to spoof the ID of another card Basically a parameter is passed to the driver telling it that the node s ID is actually the value that appears Depending on the card some drivers will accept this What spoofing does on a higher software level is filter out the packets that were meant for this node ID This method is considerably slower than if you let the card filter out the packets on a hardware level Because the card is set in promiscuous mode it has to accept all packets that come in and use a software mode to sort them Another way of thinking about this is to compare it to a postal system where if we wanted to pretend to be someone else we would accept all mail from the Post Office However we would then have to sort all the mail This would take a much longer time compared with the amount of time the Post Office would take to presort the mail and give us only the mail addressed to us For more
352. n modification distribution or transfer of this software or any software which includes or is based upon any of this code is only permitted under the terms of the NX Open Community License version 1 0 see licensing qnx com for details or as otherwise expressly authorized by a written license agreement from QSS For more information please email licensing qnx com NAT rules the sample network looks like this box1 192 0 0 2 lt gt 192 0 0 1 Gateway 10 9 0 1 lt gt whole network 10 The box1 is internal machine the Gateway is the one running lsm ipfilter so The 10 9 0 1 is suppose the external internet On Gateway start io net like this io net d epic d speedo p tcpip forward ifconfig en0 10 9 0 1 ifconfig enl 192 0 0 1 mount Ttcpip lsm ipfilter so Now the rules first NAT rules map en0 192 0 0 0 8 gt 10 9 0 1 32 proxy port ftp ftp tcp map en0 192 0 0 0 8 gt 10 9 0 1 32 portmap tcp udp 20000 40000 mssclamp 1452 map en0 192 0 0 0 8 gt 10 9 0 1 32 The first line tells NAT to using the builtin ftp proxy The second line tells NAT to mapping any TCP UDP packet on en0 from 192 0 0 0 8 to 10 9 0 1 32 The lt num gt is the netmask It also tells NAT map the original port into a port range between 20000 40000 the mssclamp 1452 is optional in case your external interface has MTU less than 1500 for example a ppp0 running pppoe have MTU as 1492 The third line tells NAT mapping
353. n commands The filesystems that Neutrino supports Accessing other machines with Neutrino s native networking Setting up TCP IP Adding printers to your system and using them Adding USB devices terminals video cards and other hardware to your system Adding embedded HTTP services and dynamic content to embedded web applications XXVi About This Guide Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down Managing User Accounts Using the Command Line Using the Photon microGUI Working with Files Using Editors Controlling How Neutrino Starts Configuring Your Environment Writing Shell Scripts Working with Filesystems Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing TCP IP Networking Printing Connecting Hardware Setting Up an Embedded Web Server continued October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Note to Windows users To find out about Go to Keeping track of changes to your software and other files Backing up and restoring your files Making your Neutrino system more secure Analyzing and improving your machine s performance How many processes files etc your system can support How to get help Samples of buildfiles profiles etc Terms used in QNX docs Using CVS Backing Up and Recovering Data Securing Your System Fine Tuning Your System Understanding System Limits Technical Support Examples Glossary Note to Windows users In QNX documen
354. n has to scan the files and build a hierarchy based on the contents this can take a while to complete depending on the number of files and subdirectories that the plugin encounters I ve edited a target file How do I get the Launch menu to reflect the change The launchmenu so plugin watches only directories for changes because watching all of the files could take too time In addition directories are typically updated as items are installed and uninstalled so if an entry is added or removed from a directory the plugin picks it up on the fly If you ve October 6 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 81 Modifying the Desktop menu 2005 QNX Software Systems changed a file and you want the change to take effect immediately you can e restart the shelf type shelf amp on the command line Or e touch the directory containing the item The launchmenu so plugin refreshes the corresponding submenu What about packages installed with the old installer Will they show up The launchmenu_notify utility creates a tgt file that represents legacy and third party packages I ve installed a package with the old installer but I m not getting a launchmenu item What should I do Try the following 1 Run launchmenu_notify vvv from the command line This tells you which third party or legacy items exist need to be added and can be removed 2 Examine the list of existing items to see if one matches the
355. n qconn below The qconn daemon is a server that runs on a target system and handles all incoming requests from our IDE The qconn server spawns pdebug for debugging requests profiles applications gathers system information and so on Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 439 Neutrino specific security issues 2005 QNX Software Systems Qnet IPSec Like pdebug qconn is inherently insecure and is meant for development systems Unlike for pdebug we plan to give it a security model with some form of authentication This will let you leave qconn on production machines in the field to provide services such as remote upgrades and fault correction Qnet is Neutrino s transparent networking protocol It s described in the Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing chapter in this guide and in Native Networking Qnet in the System Architecture guide Qnet displays other Neutrino machines on the network in the filesystem and lets you treat remote systems as extensions of the local machine It does no authentication beyond getting a user ID from the incoming connection so be careful when running it on a machine that s accessible to public networks To make Qnet more secure you can use the maproot and mapany options which map incoming connections root or anyone respectively to a specific user ID For more information see npm qnet so in the Utilities Reference IPsec is a security protocol for the Internet Protoco
356. n the filesystem is unmounted When the clean flag is set chkfsys assumes that the filesystem is intact If chkf sys finds the clean flag off it tries to fix the problem The chk fsys utility supports a u option which overrides a set clean flag and tells chkfsys to run unconditionally You might want to override the clean flag when e dcheck discovers bad blocks e you ve intentionally deleted or zapped some files e you want to force a general sanity check Using chkfsys ona live system October 6 2005 The chkfsys utility normally requires exclusive use of the filesystem to provide a comprehensive verification of the disk CAUTION There is some risk in running chkfsys on a live system both chkfsys and the filesystem are reading and possibly writing the same blocks on the disk If you do this and chkfsys writes something it sends a message to the filesystem to invalidate itself and that makes the filesystem remount itself and go back to the disk to reread all data This marks any open files as stale you ll get an error of EIO whenever you read or write unless you close and reopen the files This can affect things such as your system log file Static changes in place on files or directories that the filesystem doesn t currently have opened will probably not cause problems If you re running an application that can t afford downtime or you couldn t run chkfsys because files were open for updating try
357. n you change floppy disks Don t remove a floppy while the driver is still reading or writing data floppies are quite a bit slower than hard disks so it can take a while Make sure the drive light is off Hard disks A self hosted system by default detects the disk controller that s installed on the system and then starts the appropriate driver for it October 6 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 315 Hard disks 2005 QNX Software Systems EIDE On a self hosted system the diskboot utility in the OS image starts the block I O drivers If you want to change the way that the driver is started you ll need to change the startup image and the options to diskboot For example diskboot o devb eide blk cache 30m For more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts and diskboot in the Utilities Reference EIDE interfaces use the devb eide driver which by default automatically detects the interface and devices attached to it This driver includes support for UDMA Ultra Direct Memory Access modes along with the generic PIO Programmed Input Output modes The supported hardware list includes adapters and their supported features see the introduction to this chapter You can start the devb eide driver without any options and by default it automatically detects the EIDE controller on the system devb eide amp When the driver starts it detects all EIDE devices attached to the chain For each
358. n0 our external interface will fall in this group The pass line is opened a secret port 8823 let who ever try to contact this port pass through So you could run a telnetd on that port and just let your trust people know that port The keyword quick make any packet matched this rule being proceed pass as of test against further rules The third line is to block any tcp udp packet who have a port not in range 20000 40000 our port mapping range That means we don t have any services on the gateway except using these port to do NAT and except the service we run on secret 8823 Also we log any blocked packet info into our internal log buffer so you could use ipmon oI to check it later This rule blocks most port scanning utils The forth line says if a TCP packet is coming in and it has the SYN flag set but ACK not set this is a regular TCP handshake packet We block it and log body means log the whole packet so we could use ipmon to examine it later Se Se Se Oe OE OE OOOH H H H H HHHH 498 Appendix A e Examples October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Configuration files for setting up a firewall ipnat conft Here s a sample configuration file for Network Address Translation NAT which you ll find in etc ipnat conf Copyright 2001 QNX Software Systems All Rights Reserved This source code has been published by QNX Software Systems QSS However any use reproductio
359. nager idle thread 450 starting 162 virtual directory 133 processes abnormal termination 136 176 address space 133 arguments 451 closing files while running chkfsys 423 CPU usage 449 environment inheriting 187 files maximum open per 466 ID 3 proc directory 133 procnto 450 information about 248 killing 39 limits 472 memory usage 451 priority 57 450 472 running remotely 248 statistics 449 451 terminating at system shutdown 14 PROCESSOR 185 PROCESSOR_ARCHITECTURE DOS variable 63 Index 553 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems PROCESSOR_IDENTIFIER DOS variable 63 procnto 472 See also kernel process manager loader 208 processID 450 resource database 167 shared memory 217 starting 162 virtual directory 133 product 135 products updates 477 profile file 184 profile d 130 profile d directory 201 profiles profile 158 185 default 131 ksh 186 201 troubleshooting 200 vi exre 149 Programmed Input Output See PIO promiscuous mode 345 PROMPT DOS variable 63 prompt command line default 11 setting 489 proxy override 94 ps 449 ps cfg 300 PS 2 keyboards 324 333 mice 324 333 PS1 PS2 63 489 pseudo terminals 125 psin 449 554 Index pterm 37 aliases 108 colors 109 configuration files 130 help 88 hotkeys 100 palette file 107 terminal type setting 38 66 200 PTERMPAL 107 PTERMRC 107 ptream so 75 putenv 196 pv 140 pwd 45 58 63 PWD 63 pwlock file 20 23 29 pwm configuration fi
360. nal buffer the number of IOLREAD messages remains constant regardless of the user record size and the throughput resembles that of the file descriptor 1K access in all cases with slight degradation at smaller record sizes due to the increased number of libe calls made Thus you should consider the anticipated file access patterns when you choose from these I O paradigms Pregrowing a file This example illustrates the effect of pregrowing a data file on an x86 PIL 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using the QNX 4 filesystem The table shows the times in milliseconds required to create and write a 256M file in 8K records October 6 2005 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 461 How small can you get 2005 QNX Software Systems Scenario Creation Write Total write 0 15073 15073 15 seconds ftruncate 13908 8510 22418 22 seconds devctl 55 8479 8534 8 5 seconds Note how extending the file incrementally as a result of each write call is slower than growing it with a single ftruncate call as the filesystem can allocate larger contiguous data extents and needs to update the inode metadata attributes only once Note also how the time to overwrite already allocated data blocks is much less than that for allocating the blocks dynamically the sequential writes aren t interrupted by the periodic need to synchronously update the bitmap Although the total time to pregrow and overwrite is worse than growing t
361. nario When you use setvbuf to force the standard I O buffering up to the 8K record size then the results come closer to the optimal file descriptor case the small difference is due to the extra code complexity and the additional memcpy between the user data and the internal standard I O FILE buffer File descriptor vs standard I O 460 Here s another example that compares access using file descriptors and standard I O on an x86 PII 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using the QNX 4 filesystem The table lists the rates in megabytes per seconds for writing and reading a 256M file using file descriptors and standard I O Record size FD write FD read Stdio write Stdio read 32 1 5 1 7 10 9 12 7 64 2 8 3 1 11 7 14 3 continued Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filesystems Record size FD write FD read Stdio write Stdio read 128 5 0 5 6 12 0 15 1 256 8 0 9 0 12 4 15 2 512 10 8 12 9 13 2 16 0 1024 14 1 16 9 13 1 16 3 2048 16 1 20 6 13 2 16 5 4096 17 1 24 0 13 9 16 5 8192 18 3 31 4 14 0 16 4 16384 18 1 37 3 14 3 16 4 Notice how the read access is very sensitive to the record size this is because each read maps to an IO READ message and is basically a context switch and message pass to the filesystem when only small amounts of data are transferred each time the OS overhead becomes significant Since standard I O access using fread uses a 1K inter
362. nclude the value of a parameter on the command line put a dollar sign before the parameter s name For example to display the value of your PATH environment variable type echo SPATH Sometimes you might want to execute a command and use the results of the command in another command You can do it like this command or with the older form using backquotes lt command For example to search all of your C files for a given string type grep string find name c The find command searches the given directory in this case and any directories under it for files whose names end in e The command substitution causes grep to search for the given string in the files that find produces Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 47 Shell 2005 QNX Software Systems Arithmetical expressions Braces To specify an arithmetical expression in a command line specify it as follows expression For example echo 5 7 You re restricted to integer arithmetic You can use braces to add a prefix a suffix or both to a set of strings by specifying prefix strl strN suffix where commas separate the strings For example my file c o expands tomy_file c my_file o Filename generation Instead of using a command to work on just one file or directory you can use wildcard characters to operate on many If you want to Use this wildcard Match zero or m
363. nder version control you can import the entire project with a single command 382 Chapter 17 e Using CVS October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems CVS basics All of the operations above need to know where the repository is There is no default The repository is simply a directory name you can specify it via a command line option or an environment variable Editors and CVS CVS frequently asks you for information by starting an editor with a template in it You can control which editor CVS invokes by setting the EDITOR environment variable For example to use the Photon editor ped put this in your profile export EDITOR ped For information about the available editors see Using Editors for more information about profile see Configuring Your Environment Creating a repository October 6 2005 First you must decide where the repository is to reside For this example it s SHOME evs To create an empty repository enter the following command cvs d HOME cvs init If you look in HOME evs you ll see a directory called CVSROOT It contains internal administrative files for CVS The d option to evs tells CVS where to find the repository The init command tells CVS to create a new repository The d option is considered a global option because it appears before the init command The general format of a CVS command is evs global options command command specific options file names Once you
364. nds on the result of running chkfsys If the disk is unrecoverable 430 If for any reason your disk is completely unrecoverable you might be able to use spatch see above to patch your files and directories In some cases you may need to reinstall Neutrino and restore your disk from your backup files If significant portions of the filesystem are irreparably damaged or important files are lost then restoring from backup might be your best alternative Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems What to do if your system will no longer boot If the filesystem is intact If your filesystem is intact yet the machine still refuses to boot from hard disk then either of the following is probably damaged e the partition loader program in physical block 1 e the Neutrino loader in the first block of the QNX 4 partition To rewrite a partition loader use fdisk fdisk dev hd0 loader To rewrite the QNX loader use dinit dinit b dev hd0t79 You should now be able to boot your system October 6 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 431 Chapter 19 Securing Your System In this chapter General OS security 435 Neutrino specific security issues 439 Setting up a firewall 441 October 6 2005 Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 433 2005 QNX Software Systems General OS security General Now that more and more computers and other devices are hooked u
365. ne arguments to grep In this case we re using xargs primarily for efficiency we could do something similar with just find Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts 209 Example of a Korn shell script 2005 QNX Software Systems find name ch exec grep i less which loads and runs the grep program for every file found The command that we actually used find name ch xargs grep 1 less runs grep only when xargs has accumulated enough files to fill a command line generally resulting in far fewer invocations of grep and a more efficient script The final piece less is an output pager The entire command may generate a lot of output that might scroll off the terminal so less presents this to you a page at a time with the ability to move backwards and forwards through the data The case statement also includes the following after the find command exit 0 good status This returns a value of 0 from this script In shell programming zero means true or success and anything nonzero means false or failure This is the opposite of the meanings in the C language The final block echo Use tfind stuff_to_find i echo where stuff_to_find search string m echo n echo e g tfind console_state looks through all files in a echo the current directory and below and displays all echo instances of console_state exit 1 bad status is just a bit of help if you pass incorrect argument
366. nents of Qnet 244 Components of TCP IP in Neutrino 260 Printing with the lpr utilities 281 Printing with spooler 301 Branching a file in CVS 391 Components of a QNX 4 filesystem in a disk partition 412 Contents of the root directory 414 List of Figures xix 2005 QNX Software Systems A directory entry 416 An inode entry 418 An extent block 419 QNX 4 file structure 420 XX List of Figures October 6 2005 About This Guide October 6 2005 About This Guide XxXi 2005 QNX Software Systems Typographical conventions October 6 2005 Typographical conventions Throughout this manual we use certain typographical conventions to distinguish technical terms In general the conventions we use conform to those found in IEEE POSIX publications The following table summarizes our conventions Reference Example Code examples if stream NULL Command options 1R Commands make Environment variables PATH File and pathnames dev null Function names exit Keyboard chords Keyboard input Keyboard keys Program output Programming constants Programming data types Programming literals Variable names User interface components Ctrl Alt Delete something you type Enter login NULL unsigned short OxFF message string stdin Cancel We format single step instructions like this To reload the current page press Ctrl R We use an arrow in directions for a
367. ng 131 134 172 311 337 flow control 336 interrupts 344 supported 311 477 hd 3 head branch 391 help documentation online 86 477 keyword index 89 searching 87 technical support 477 usage messages 56 help directory 135 help DOS command 59 Helpviewer 86 140 adding documentation 108 search database generating 171 table of contents files 140 Hewlett Packard printers 300 HID Human Interface Device 333 hidden files 65 118 wildcard characters and 49 hidview 333 hogs 449 HOME environment variable 20 63 184 Home key 39 home directory 18 20 22 26 28 46 132 184 root 134 HOMEDRIVE DOS variable 63 HOMEPATH DOS variable 63 host cfg directory 175 177 234 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index Host Signal Processor modems See HSP modems hostname 189 249 252 HOSTNAME 63 172 185 189 234 HOSTNAME file 172 hosts connections checking 275 IP addresses mapping 274 names must be unique 252 setting 172 valid characters 172 TCP IP 257 hosts hostname database file 128 258 274 hosts equiv 265 286 hosts lpd 286 hotkeys 100 HSP Host Signal Processor modems 355 HTML dynamic 369 371 372 374 file extensions 140 viewing 86 91 HTTP 369 HTTPD_ROOT_DIR 370 HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS 371 HTTP_ROOT_DOC 370 hubs USB 332 Human Interface Device See HID HyperText Markup Language See HTML October 6 2005 VO aperture 344 standard performance 455 460 redirecting
368. ng 4 212 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index Enhanced Host Controller Interface See EHCI Enter 39 enum 131 173 enum devices 131 134 172 311 337 enumerators 131 134 172 279 311 337 env 191 ENV 186 environment customizing 183 troubleshooting 200 environment variables ABLANG 78 104 110 ABLPATH 104 AB_RESOVRD 104 AUTOCONNECT 105 CMD_INT 372 COLUMNS 187 configuration strings compared to 188 DISPLAY 105 EDITOR 157 ENV 186 FLASHQUALITY 105 HOME 20 63 184 HOSTNAME 63 172 185 189 234 HTTPD_ROOT_DIR 370 HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS 371 HTTP_ROOT_DOC 370 IVE_HOME 105 JIPLUGIN_ARGS 105 LD_LIBRARY_PATH 187 LOGNAME 20 63 October 6 2005 PATH 54 63 65 185 187 372 DOS version 63 security 54 PATHINFO 372 PHEXIT DISABLE 105 PHFONT 105 PHFONTMEM 106 PHFONTOPTS 106 PHFONT USE EXTERNAL 105 PHGFX 106 PHINPUT 106 PHINSTANCE 106 PHOTON 106 359 PHOTONOPTS 106 PHOTON PATH 106 PHSHELF DISABLE 110 PHWM 106 PHWMEXIT 107 PHWMOPTS 107 preserving across logins 188 PRINTER 293 PROCESSOR 185 PS1 PS2 63 489 PTERMPAL 107 PTERMRC 107 PWD 63 PWMOPTS 107 PWM _PRINTSCRN_APP 107 RANDOM 63 DOS version 63 setting 187 SHELL 20 63 SOCK 267 SYSNAME 185 TERM 38 66 200 TMPDIR 63 185 187 Index 535 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems TZ 171 190 value displaying 47 VISUAL 157 epijs cfg 300 Epson printers 300 epson cfg 300 erase DOS command
369. ng Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Video cards October 6 2005 e devg ati_rage128 so e devg banshee so e devg chips so e devg flat so e devg i810 so e devg i830 so e devg igs5000 so e devg matroxg so e devg mq200 so e devg radeon so e devg s3_savage so e devg sis630 so e devg tnt so e devg tvia so e devg vmware so The modes detected are incorrect In some circumstances a card s modes file doesn t list all the modes that the documentation for the card says it should Sometimes there are variants of cards that are slightly different from what we have had internally or what the documentation describes You can try manually setting up the card see Manually setting up your video card above to see if that helps If it still fails you may need to contact Technical Support The video mode changed to a mode that doesn t work If you ve changed the video mode to a mode that either your monitor or graphics card doesn t support and that causes Photon to be displayed improperly you can revert to a previous mode as follows 1 Restart the system and boot into safe mode don t start Photon Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 363 Video cards 2005 QNX Software Systems 2 Clear the modes file From the command line type crttrap clear 3 Restart your system and try to detect your video card again The erttrap program hangs If crtt rap hangs i e it
370. ng TDK 8 sync 457 sys 135 sysconf 466 sysinit 167 168 170 172 246 SYSNAME 185 system administrator See root initialization local 176 chkfsys 424 limits 472 logger 124 126 167 170 page initializing 162 560 Index rebooting 14 recovering data after crash 424 shutting down 14 size reducing 462 starting 161 troubleshooting 178 statistics 449 451 status 449 rwhod daemon 266 troubleshooting boot failure 426 System Builder perspective IDE 462 SYSTEMDRIVE DOS variable 63 SYSTEMROOT DOS variable 63 T Tab key 44 tags 381 takeover attacks 437 talk UNIX command 3 tapes 311 tar 399 403 405 target files Launch menu 77 taskbar 71 75 taskbar so 75 taskkill DOS command 59 tasklist DOS command 59 TCP 257 TCP IP 3 257 339 clients 257 configuration files 128 customizing 175 full stack 261 263 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index network status 274 limits 473 Phindows configuring for 98 printing over 280 286 297 298 302 routing 259 servers 257 sockets 126 software components 260 stacks running multiple 266 tiny stack 261 262 network status 274 troubleshooting 272 technical support 477 Technology Development Kits TDKs defined 7 Extended Networking 257 441 497 Flash Filesystem amp Embedding 227 237 telnet 39 telnetd 265 TEMP DOS variable 63 temporary files 134 TERM 38 66 200 termcap 200 terminals canonical input buffer 467 clearing 39
371. ng of displayed text Vim has a gentler learning curve than vi and tolerates or minimizes the effects of common mistakes without losing any of vi s speed flexibility or power To start Vim choose Editors Vim from the desktop s Launch menu or type vim filename To learn more about Vim see www vim org Workspace ws October 6 2005 Workspace is a Photon based editor that accommodates many programming languages but is particularly useful for developing in C Workspace uses the make gdb and ctags utilities The editor also incorporates terminals web browsers an image viewer a file manager an archive viewer and other extras Chapter 7 e Using Editors 155 Third party editors 2005 QNX Software Systems File Edit Action Window Help First files Cut Ctrl n amama a ad eE amp J Paste a Ce EAS Untitleda x gt Delete Undo Ctri 2 Redo Indentation Select e Find Replace Preferences B mipsbe B mipsle my61 gt Gopt gt B pkgs gt B ppche gt Bproc gt Broot gt B sbin gt gt GBshle western European ISO 8859 1 Workspace provides font support and word wrapping and lets you edit hundreds of files simultaneously You can use regular expressions when searching Workspace supports context highlight
372. ngine or web server using web server profiles Caching can help Voyager display files and images faster In addition to the disk cache size you can specify Image Cache Size The image cache holds all images rendered to the screen If you find web pages with images not displayed or you have a high color monitor with a high color graphics driver running and the Use 256 colors only button is disabled you may need to increase the image cache size Cache n Pages Voyager might run faster if you have a large number of web pages cached however increasing the number of cached pages might use more memory Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 93 Surfing the web with Voyager 2005 QNX Software Systems Cache Verify Policy How often you want Voyager to compare the web page in the cache with the version on the Internet Voyager doesn t refresh its versions of files that are on your network i e URLs that start with file instead of http Ifa file has been changed click Reload to see the updated version Appearance tab In this part of the configuration dialog you can specify e the colors to use for links active links visited links text and background click an option s color swatch to view a selector to set the color for that option e the font for text headings and fixed width text e the default text size for a web page e whether you want the toolbar to include just icons just text or both If the b
373. nly Any limits would be imposed by the tools used to make the image which hopefully would be a subset of ISO9660 Disk size is also limited by the disk driver and io b1k NFS2 and NFS3 filesystem The limits for NFS2 and NFS3 filesystems include Filename length 255 bytes 470 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filesystem limits Pathname length 1024 bytes File size 2G 1 32 bit filesystem limit Directory size filesystem size and disk size Depends on the server 32 bit filesystem limit CIFS filesystem The limits for CIFS filesystems include Filename length 255 bytes Pathname length 1024 bytes File size 2G 1 32 bit filesystem limit Directory size filesystem size and disk size 32 bit filesystem limit The CIFS filesystem doesn t support chmod or chown Embedded flash filesystem The limits for embedded flash filesystems include Filename length 255 bytes Pathname length 1024 bytes File size filesystem size and disk size 2G 1 Directory size Limited by the available space October 6 2005 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 471 Other system limits 2005 QNX Software Systems File entries directory entries and file extents are connected by linked lists The longer these lists get the longer it takes to seek for a position in append to and get statistics about files Other system limits These
374. nment errors 0 CRO GPrOre nose bs cs oe ss esas oe ee oe 0 276 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking October 6 2005 Chapter 14 Printing In this chapter Overview of printing 279 Printing with lpr 280 Printing with spooler 299 Troubleshooting 304 October 6 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 277 2005 QNX Software Systems Overview of printing Overview of printing October 6 2005 The simplest way to print a text file is to send it directly to a printer For example if your printer is attached to your computer s parallel port you could simply type cat file gt dev par but there are a few problems with this e You don t get another command prompt until the file has been printed unless you add an ampersand amp to the end of the command e Ifthe printer is already printing something or it can t handle the type of file you ve sent the output might be garbled and you end up just wasting paper It s better to use spooling When you spool a print job it s placed in a queue until its turn comes up to be printed Neutrino provides two separate mechanisms for print spooling e the standard UNIX like lpr utility see Printing with lpr e the spooler utility see Printing with spooler You can use either or both depending on how you ve set up your machine and network e If you ve attached your printer to your machine s serial port you need to use the lpr family
375. nnectAttach and then sending data using MsgSend Common Internet File System aka SMB a protocol that allows a client workstation to perform transparent file access over a network to a Windows server Client file access calls are converted to CIFS protocol requests and are sent to the server over the network The server receives the request performs the actual filesystem operation and sends a response back to the client Card Information Structure October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems command completion A shell feature that saves typing type enough of the command s name to identify it uniquely and then press Esc twice If possible the shell fills in the rest of the name command interpreter A process that parses what you type on the command line also known as a Shell compound command A command that includes a shell s reserved words grouping constructs and function definitions e g ls al less Contrast simple command configurable limit A special variable that stores system information Some e g _PC_NAME_MAX depend on the filesystem and are associated with a path others e g SC_ARG_MAX are independent of paths configuration string A system variable that s like an environment variable but is more dynamic When you set an environment variable the new value affects only the current instance of the shell and any of its children that you create after setting the variable
376. nput of the program to its right The pipe lets you build complex operations from simpler building blocks For more information see Redirecting input and output in Using the Command Line The first piece find name ch uses another powerful and commonly used command Most filesystems are recursive through a hierarchy of directories and find is a utility that descends through the hierarchy of directories recursively In this case it searches for files that end in either c or h that is C source or header files and prints out their names The filename wildcards are wrapped in single quotes because they re special characters to the shell Without the quotes the shell would expand the wildcards in the current directory but we want find to evaluate them so we prevent the shell from evaluating them by quoting them For more information see Quoting special characters in Using the Command Line The next piece xargs grep 1 does a couple of things e grep is a file contents search utility It searches the files given on its command line for the first argument The 1 is another special variable in the shell that represents the first argument we passed to the shell script i e the string we re looking for e xargs is a utility that takes its input and turns it into command line parameters for some other command that you give it Here it takes the list of files from find and makes them command li
377. ns the session of its creator A process can alter its session membership via setsid A session can contain multiple process groups session leader A process whose death causes all processes within its process group to receive a SIGHUP signal shell A process that parses what you type on the command line also known as a command interpreter shell script A file that contains shell commands simple command A command line that contains a single command usually a program that you want to run e g less my_file Contrast compound command socket A logical drive in a flash filesystem consisting of a contiguous and homogeneous region of flash memory October 6 2005 Glossary 519 2005 QNX Software Systems socket In TCP IP a combination of an IP address and a port number that uniquely identifies a single network process software interrupt Similar to a hardware interrupt see interrupt except that the source of the interrupt is software spilling What happens when you try to change a file that the package filesystem manages if you re using it a copy of the file is transferred to the spill directory sporadic Scheduling algorithm whereby a thread s priority can oscillate dynamically between a foreground or normal priority and a background or low priority A thread is given an execution budget of time to be consumed within a certain replenishment period See also FIFO and round robin
378. nsisting of Java applications e g the QNX multiple java files class files Momentics PE IDE etc compressed into a single file jpg JPEG graphical image pv Photon viewer kbd Compiled Photon keyboard Photon mkkbd definition files kdef Source Photon keyboard mkkbd definition files mk Makefile source typically used make QNX Momentics within QNX recursive makes development system 0 Binary output file that results qcc make QNX Momentics from compiling a C C or development system Assembly source file pal Photon palette file Photon pfr Bitstream TrueDoc Portable phfont Font Resource file phf Bitmapped font file phfont qpr Neutrino installation package qnxinstall repository a gzipped tar archive of qpm qpk and qrm files qpm Neutrino package manifest Usually found in a package repository qpr qnxinstall qpk Neutrino package contents Usually found in a package 142 Chapter 6 e Working with Files repository qpr qnxinstall continued October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filename extensions Extension Description Related programs utilities qrm Neutrino package repository Usually found in a package manifest repository qpr qnxinstall S s Assembly source code file GNU assembler as QNX Momentics development system SO SO N Shared object qcc make QNX Momentics development system tar Tape archive tar Backing Up and Recovering Data tar gz tgz Compressed tape a
379. ntil one of them boots the system If none of the BIOS Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 163 Loading a Neutrino image 2005 QNX Software Systems extensions boots the system the BIOS presents some usually strange failure message For the network boot case the boot ROM usually bootp downloads an image from a server copies it into memory then jumps to the start of the image The boot image generally needs to run a network stack and starts some sort of network filesystem to retrieve or access additional programs and files You can use the mkifs utility to create the OS image For a sample buildfile for this sort of image see the Examples appendix For a disk based boot of a Neutrino desktop system the process of booting and especially system initialization is more complex After the BIOS has chosen to boot from the disk the primary boot loader sometimes called the partition loader is called This loader is OS agnostic it can load any OS The one installed by Neutrino installations displays the message Press F1 F4 to select drive or select partition 1 2 3 1 After a short timeout it boots whatever OS system is in the partition prompted for This loader is boot sys ipl diskpcl You can write a loader onto a disk by using dloader Loading a Neutrino image When you choose a QNX partition the secondary boot loader sometimes called the OS loader starts This loader is Neutrino specific and resides
380. ntly in use including Printer s Configuration file Photon filter Canon bjc cfg phs to bjc Epson epson cfg phs to escp2 Epson IJS epijs cfg phs to ijs Hewlett Packard pcl cfg phs to pel PostScript ps cfg phs to ps There s also a special filter phs to bmp that converts a Photon draw stream file into a BMP The configuration files specify the possible and default settings for the printer as well as which filter is appropriate for it When you print from a Photon application the application sends the file to be printed to the dev printers printer_name spool directory The Photon application may construct another configuration file for the printer that you selected depending on optional information that you provide If you have a file that s already in a form that the printer understands or for which there s a filter you can print it by copying it into the raw spooling directory cp my_file dev printers printer_name raw When the spooler sees the print job in dev printers printer_name raw it copies the job file to the spooling directory var spool printers printer_name host and invokes the appropriate filter which prepares the file and then sends it to the printer Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with spooler Photon application dev printers printer_name spool VY spooler Es var spool printers printer_name host x w File that needs
381. nto the network to help eliminate the number of packets that are being placed on the entire network Switching to a full duplex network also resolves these problems aborted excessive deferrals Aborted transmissions due to excessive deferrals mean that the NIC gave up trying to send the frame due to an extremely busy network You can resolve this type of problem by switching to a full duplex network Transmit Underruns Chips with a DMA engine may see this error The DMA engine copies packet data into a FIFO from which the transmitter puts the data on the wire On lower grade hardware the DMA might not be able to fill the FIFO as fast as the data is going on the wire so an underrun occurs and the transmit is aborted No Carrier on Transmit October 6 2005 When the NIC is about to transfer a frame it checks first to make sure that it has carrier sense much like before you dial the phone you check to make sure you have a dial tone While the NIC is transmitting the frame it listens for possible collisions or any errors These errors occur when a NIC is transmitting a frame on the network and it notices that it doesn t see its own carrier wave much Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 349 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems like when you are dialing a number on the phone and you can hear the dial tones being pressed These errors are caused by plugging and unplugging cables on the network and by poor opt
382. o be used on node2 Make sure there s an entry for node1 in etc hosts Local and remote printers What if we now want to move one of the two printers say 1pt2 from node1 to node2 294 Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with lpr October 6 2005 ih h E dev par1 dev parl TCP IP nodel node2 We have to change the etc printcap file on both nodes Likewise we need to change etc printcap on any other network nodes we wished to print from e On nodel lpt1 lp dev par1 sd usr spool output lpt1 lpt2 rm node2 rp lpt2 sd usr spool output 1pt2 e On node2 lpt1 rm node1 rp 1pt1 sd usr spool output lpt1 lpt2 lp dev par1 sd usr spool output lpt2 e On other nodes lpt1 rm node1 rp lpt1 sd usr spool output 1pt1 lpt2 rm node2 rp lpt2 sd usr spool output 1pt2 Make sure you have entries for node1 and nodez2 in the etc hosts file on each node You also need entries in the Chapter 14 Printing 295 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems etc hosts 1pd file on node1 and node2 for each node that you want to be able to use the printers If you ve set up your remote printing network according to the examples given you should be able to send a file in tmp test on no
383. o cards supported In this example there s one device 358 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Video cards October 6 2005 GLOBAL devices radeon For each device create a DEVICE name section This section configures the hardware specific settings In this example we set the e graphics driver DLL which is typically in the form devg device name so or in this case devg radeon so e hardware vendor and device ID and the PCI index see PCI AGP devices earlier in this chapter e number of displays supported by the device 2 in this case e plugins which in this case is the Photon plugin e Photon server which we leave blank to use the default Photon server specified by the PHOTON environment variable dev photon by default DEVICE radeon dllpath devg radeon so pci_vendor_id 0x1002 pci_device_id 0x4e44 pci_index 0 displays 2 plugins photon photon For each display create a DEVICE name number section These sections configure each display In this example each display has the same resolution 1024 x 768 color depth 16 bit color and refresh rate 60 Hz Notice that the second display Photon region is offset by 1024 the width of the first display DEVICE radeon 0 xres 1024 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 359 Video cards 2005 QNX Software Systems yres 768 bitpp 16 refresh 60 DEVICE radeon 1 xr
384. o imagine just how that trust could be violated Most local exploits involve some sort of elevation of privilege such as turning a normal user into the superuser root Many local attacks take advantage of a misconfigured system e g file permissions that are set incorrectly or a buffer overrun on a binary that s set to run as root known as a setuid binary In the embedded world where Neutrino is typically used local users aren t as much of an issue and in fact many systems don t even have a shell shipped with them Chapter 19 e Securing Your System October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems General OS security Effects of attacks Viruses October 6 2005 Another way of classifying exploits is by their effect Takeover attacks These let the user take the machine over or at least cause it to do something unpredictable to the owner but predictable to the attacker Denial Of Service DOS attacks These are just disruptions An example of this is flood pinging a machine to slow down its networking to the point that it s unusable DOS attacks are notoriously difficult to deal with and often must be handled in a reactive rather than proactive fashion As an example there are very few systems that can t be brought to their knees by a malicious local user although with such tools as the ksh s ulimit builtin command you can often minimize these attacks Using these divisions you can look at a s
385. o net command line 2 Set netnum to the next unique network interface device number starting at 0 3 Mount the PCNET driver into io net Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Device enumeration The second block of code tells the enumerator to do nothing if it detects devices 2002 or 2003 from vendor 1234 When you add device entries to prevent devices from being enumerated make sure that there aren t any action clauses after them Any group of actions clauses found after any single or set of device entries is used for those devices Place these device entries at the end of your overrides configuration file e If you want to change the way the enumerator starts TCP IP you have to override the definition of the basic io net command that s defined in etc systems enum include net By default the command is io net ptcpip If you want to enable IPSec add this code to your overrides file all set IONET_CMD io net ptcpip ipsec Host specific enumerators October 6 2005 To further customize the enumerators for your system configuration you can create a etc host _cfg SHOSTNAME system enum directory If this directory structure exists the re devices script tells the enumerators to read configuration files from it instead of from etc system enum Even if you have a etc host _cfg HOSTNAME system enum directory the enumerator looks for an oem dir
386. oad the following executable bin sh and pass it this script as a command line parameter The next few lines are comments that describe what the script does Then we see case S in 1 esac The case inis a shell builtin command one of the branching structures provided by the Korn shell and is equivalent to the C switch statement The is a shell variable When you refer to a variable in a shell put a before its name to tell the shell that it s a variable rather than a literal string The shell variable is a special variable that represents the number of command line arguments to the script The 1 is a possible value for the case the equivalent of the C case statement This code checks to see if you ve passed exactly one parameter to the shell The esac line completes and ends the case statement Both the if and case commands use the command s name reversed to represent the end of the branching structure Inside the case we find find name ch xargs grep 1 less This line does the bulk of the work and breaks down into these pieces Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Example of a Korn shell script October 6 2005 e find name ch e xargs grep 1 e less which are joined by the or pipe character A pipe is one of the most powerful things in the shell it takes the output of the program on the left and makes it the i
387. ociated driver Start the driver Once you ve located the correct driver for your hardware use io net to start the driver You can either start the driver as an option to io net or you can mount the driver into an already running copy of io net For example to start io net with the devn e1900 so 3Com 905 module type io net d e1900 t tcpip amp To mount the module type io net t tcpip amp mount T io net devn el900 so October 6 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 339 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems The driver automatically detects similar network adapters for multiple networks You can use the mount utility to mount different adapters Make sure the driver is communicating properly with the hardware Use the nicinfo utility to check if you re receiving and sending packets If you aren t receiving packets on a high traffic network the driver and the hardware might not be communicating Here s some typical output from this command Physical Node ID 0 cee eee eee 000102 c510D4 Current Physical Node ID 000102 c510D4 Current Operation Rate 000 100 00 Mb s full duplex Active Interface Type 06 MII Active PHY Address 20eeeeeee 3 Power Management State Active Maximum Transmittable data Unit 1514 Maximum Receivable data Unit 1514 Receive Checks
388. ocket runtime support This means you need to have a TCP IP stack running For more information see the TCP IP Networking chapter in this guide The Slinger server listens on the TCP port 80 Since this port number is less than 1024 Slinger needs to run as root As soon as it has attached to the HTTP port it changes itself to run as user ID 2 by calling setuid 2 Many embedded servers force the user to relink the server in order to add pages which compromises reliability because vendor and user code compete in a shared memory space Despite its size Slinger provides enough functionality to support accessing generated dynamic HTML via CGI or SSI Dynamic HTML The embedded web server lets you use create dynamic HTML in various ways e CGI e SSI e Data server CGI method October 6 2005 The embedded web server supports the Common Gateway Interface CGD 1 1 a readily available means of handling dynamic data The downside of CGI is that it s resource heavy because it often involves an interpreted language If you re using the CGI method you need to decide where to locate your cgi bin directory which contains all your CGI scripts To tell the embedded web server that you want to use the CGI method you need to use the HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS environment variable to tell it where to find the CGI scripts and executables For example Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 371 Dynamic HTML 2005 QNX S
389. of a directory name Dot and dot dot directories 116 Every directory in a QNX 4 filesystem contains these special links dot The current directory dot dot The directory that this directory appears in So for example you could list the contents of the directory above your current working directory by typing Ls 3 2 If your current directory is home fred ph helpviewer you could list the contents of the root directory by typing Is laalaa but the absolute path is much shorter and you don t have to figure out how many dot dots you need Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filenames and pathnames Flash filesystems don t support and entries but the shell might resolve them before passing the path to the filesystem You can also set up hard links with these names on a flash filesystem A note about cd In some traditional UNIX systems the ed change directory command modifies the pathname given to it if that pathname contains symbolic links As a result the pathname of the new current working directory which you can display with pwd may differ from the one given to ed In Neutrino however ed doesn t modify the pathname aside from collapsing references For example cd home dan test doc would result in a current working directory of home dan doc even if some of the elements in the pathname were s
390. oft commands Neutrino equivalents 59 238 compared to Neutrino 4 end of line characters converting 4 212 terminal types for telnet 39 time setting 201 variables Neutrino equivalents 63 wm 130 wm menu 108 wmswitch hotkeys 103 Word documents editing 152 word processing 5 words October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index command line editing 43 Z counting 50 Workspace editor 155 zap 422 workspace Photon 69 zero 127 hotkeys 102 103 zip file extension 140 world view 74 75 Zip disks 323 worldview so 75 write UNIX command 3 write 452 453 455 462 writer permission 137 ws 155 X x86 booting 161 BIOS 163 buildfiles 123 485 console driver 12 41 directories 123 limits 474 parallel port manager 338 resources database 167 serial adapter 335 xargs 52 209 xcopy DOS command 59 xml file extension 140 Y years leap 192 October 6 2005 Index 565
391. oftware Systems export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www cgi bin If you define HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS anybody can run scripts or processes that reside in that directory on your machine Therefore make sure you create a separate directory for these scripts to reside in Not defining HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS turns CGI functionality off causing all CGI requests to fail A N CAUTION Don t use bin or usr bin as your CGI directory Don t place any sensitive files in the cgi bin directory because doing so exposes them to anyone who uses the web server Make sure that the files in the cgi bin directory can be executable by anybody but modifiable only by root by running chmod 755 on the files in the directory For example suppose HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS contains usxr www cgi bin as the name of the directory If Slinger gets a request for the resource www qnx com cgi bin get_data cgi foo the get _data cgi script found in usr www cgi bin is executed and foo is sent as pathname information to get data cgi The foo directory is stored in the PATH INFO environment variable which is used to send extra path information Slinger sets several environment variables which can be used by CGI scripts For more information see slinger in the Utilities Reference SSI method Server Side Includes SSI is a type of command language that can be embedded in HTML files With SSI you can add dynamic content to your HTML Slinger uses the PATH and CMD INT
392. ol daemon 265 daemons 264 domain names daemon 266 super server 129 264 surfing 91 Interrupt Request line See IRQ io audio 326 io blk so 457 cache size 315 io graphics 356 358 io hid 333 334 io net 124 244 261 266 269 272 334 339 CIFS 228 NFS 230 printing with 286 Qnet 249 starting 172 247 io net directory 250 273 io usb 332 IOREAD 461 IP 257 addresses mapping hostnames to 274 filtering 441 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index sample configuration file 497 masquerading See NAT Network Address Translation nameservers 258 security 440 ipf 442 IPL Initial Program Loader 161 code 123 ipl diskpcl 164 ipnat 442 IPSec 440 enabling 175 ipstats 262 274 IRQ Interrupt Request line 344 ISA cards 326 modems 352 isapnp 327 353 ISDN 354 ISO images creating 407 ISO 9660 filesystem 313 ISO Latin1 supplemental character set 121 IVE HOME 105 J JOPLUGIN_ARGS 105 jabber 350 Japanese input method 200 jar file extension 140 Java archives 140 October 6 2005 plugins arguments to 105 Jaz disks 323 jed 155 JPEG graphical images 140 jpg file extension 140 Julian dates 192 K kbd device 324 kbd file extension 140 kbddev 324 kdef file extension 140 kernel See also microkernel callouts 162 starting 162 system page 162 key bindings 44 keyboard 59 keyboards AT style 324 configuring 324 definition files 140 focus assigning 83 international 59
393. ollisions that were encountered while trying to transmit frames The NIC checks for a carrier sense when it knows that the network hasn t been used for a while and then starts to transmit a frame of data The problem occurs when two network cards check for the carrier sense and start to transmit data at the same time This error is more common on busy networks When the NICs detect a collision they stop transmitting and wait for a random period of time The time periods are different for each NIC so in theory when the wait time has expired the other NIC will have already transmitted or will be still waiting for its time to expire thus avoiding further collisions You can reduce this type of problem by introducing a full duplex network Multiple Collisions on Transmit This error is due to a attempted transmission that has had several collisions despite backing off several times This occurs more frequently on busy half duplex networks If there are a lot of these errors try switching to a full duplex network or if the network is TCP IP based try introducing a few switches instead of hubs Deferred Transmits October 6 2005 Commonly found on half duplex networks this value doesn t mean that there are problems It means that the card tried to send data on the network cable but the network was busy with other data on the cable So it simply waited for a random amount of time This number can get high if the network is ver
394. on see Input drivers devi in the Utilities Summary in the Utilities Reference Photon environment variables 104 Environment variables set options and determine the behavior of your system You can use the command line to set environment variables that configure Photon but the command depends on the shell that you re using For ksh and esh you can use the export command Here s a list of environment variable specific to Photon For a general list of environment variables see Commonly Used Environment Variables in the Utilities Reference ABLANG A language code e g en_CA for Canadian English that a multilingual Photon application uses to determine what language to display For more information see International Language Support in the Photon Programmer s Guide for the currently supported codes see usr photon appbuilder languages def ABLPATH A list of directories where you want a multilingual Photon application to search for translation files For more information see International Language Support in the Photon Programmer s Guide and ph in the Utilities Reference AB_RESOVRD A path variable that lists directories to search for resource records for applications built with PhAB See the Photon in Embedded Systems appendix of the Photon Programmer s Guide Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Photon environment variables October 6 2005 AUTOC
395. ooler below The 1pd daemon spawns the filters their standard input is the data to be printed their standard output is the printer Standard error is attached to the 1 file for logging errors or you can use syslogd A filter must return an exit code of 0 if there were no errors 1 if the job should be reprinted or 2 if the job should be thrown away When 1prrm sends a SIGINT signal to the 1pd process that controls the printing 1pd sends a SIGINT signal to all filters and their descendants Filters that need to do cleanup operations such as deleting temporary files can trap this signal The arguments 1pd passes to a filter depend on the filter type e Output of filters are called with the following arguments filter wwidth 1length The width and length values come from the pw and p1 entries in the etc printcap database e Input if filters are called with the following arguments filter c wwidth llength iindent nlogin hhost acct_file Chapter 14 e Printing 291 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems The optional c flag is used only when control characters are to be passed uninterpreted to the printer when using the 1 option of lpr to print the file The w and 1 parameters are the same as for of filters The n and h parameters specify the login name and hostname of the job owner The last argument is the name of the accounting file from etc printcap e All other filters are called w
396. or modification time updates are ignored We don t currently recommend that you use DMA unless absolutely necessary not all disk drivers correctly support it so there s no facility to query a disk driver for the DMA safe requirements of its interface and naive users can get themselves into trouble In some situations where you know the total size of the final data file it can be advantageous to pregrow it to this size rather than allow it to 456 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filesystems be automatically extended piecemeal by the filesystem as it is written to This lets the filesystem see a single explicit request for allocation instead of many implicit incremental updates some filesystems may be able to exploit this and allocate the file in a more optimal contiguous fashion It also reduces the number of metadata updates needed during the write phase and so improves the data write performance by not disrupting sequential streaming The POSIX function to extend a file is ftruncate the standard requires this function to zero fill the new data space meaning that the file is effectively written twice so this technique is suitable when you can prepare the file during an initial phase where performance isn t critical There s also a non POSIX devctl to extend a file without zero filling it which provides the above benefits without the cost of erasing the contents s
397. ore characters Match any single character Match any characters or range of characters separated by a hyphen specified within the brackets Exclude characters specified within brackets 48 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Shell Hidden files i e files whose names start with a dot e g profile aren t matched unless you specify the dot For example doesn t match profile but does The following examples show you how you can use wildcards with the cp utility to copy groups of files to a directory named tmp If you enter The cp utility copies cp tmp All files starting with e g frd c flint cp fred tmp All files beginning with fred and ending with one other character e g freda fred3 cp fred 123 tmp All files beginning with fred and ending with 1 2 or 3 i e fred1 fred2 and fred3 cp ch tmp All files ending with c or h e g f rd c barn h cp o0 tmp All files that don t end with o cp html tex All files that end with htm1 or tex Redirecting input and output Most commands e read their input from the standard input stream stdin or file descriptor 0 which is normally assigned to your keyboard e write their output to the standard output file stdout or fd 1 which is normally assigned to your display screen e write any error messages to the standard error stream stderr or fd 2 wh
398. ot characters e Many of the filesystems that Neutrino supports use a 32 bit format This means that files are limited to 2G 1 bytes This in turn limits the size of a directory because the file that stores the directory s information is limited to 2G 1 bytes Querying filesystem limits You can query the path specific configuration limits to determine some of the properties and limits of a specific filesystem _PC_LINK_ MAX Maximum value of a file s link count PC_MAX_CANON Maximum number of bytes in a terminal s canonical input buffer edit buffer _PC_MAX_INPUT Maximum number of bytes in a terminal s raw input buffer PC_NAME_MAX Maximum number of bytes in a filename not including the terminating null _PC_PATH_ MAX Maximum number of bytes in a pathname not including the terminating null _PC_PIPE_BUF Maximum number of bytes that can be written atomically when writing to a pipe PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED If defined not 1 indicates that the use of the chown function is restricted to a process with appropriate privileges and to changing the group ID of a file to the effective group ID of the process or to one of its supplementary group IDs October 6 2005 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 467 Filesystem limits 2005 QNX Software Systems PC_NO_TRUNC If defined not 1 indicates that the use of pathname components longer than the value given by PC_NAME MAX will generate an
399. ot failure 426 command line 64 562 Index devb eide 317 disks checking for corruption 400 430 patching 423 environment setting 200 files 144 237 modems 355 Photon 107 printing 304 profiles 200 Qnet 248 system starting and shutting down 178 TCP IP 272 user accounts 32 video cards 362 TrueType fonts 140 198 trusted users 265 TTF ttf file extension 140 198 ttys configuration file 41 127 178 txt file extension 140 type DOS command 59 typeover mode 39 typing reducing 44 typographical conventions xxiii TZ 171 190 tzname 196 tzset 196 U uc tzt 193 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index UDMA Ultra Direct Memory Access 316 319 UHCI Universal Host Controller Interface 331 ulimit 473 Ultra Direct Memory Access See UDMA umask 139 185 umount 216 247 undeleting a zapped file 423 Unicode filenames 120 typing 151 156 unions directory 119 Universal Host Controller Interface See UHCI Universal Serial Bus See USB UNIX compared to Neutrino 3 unlink 224 unnamed semaphores limits 473 Unshielded Twisted Pair See UTP up arrow 39 53 update CVS command 394 usage messages 56 140 usb 330 USB Universal Serial Bus 330 mass storage devices 334 use command 3 56 use file extension 140 usegnet 131 172 246 USERNAME DOS variable 63 users accounts managing 25 reading etc passwd 21 troubleshooting 32 October 6 2005 adding 27 embedded systems 17 IDs 17 18 ass
400. ot loaders and so on onto the second drive To test that the copy was successful remove the original drive and put the backup drive in its place then boot the system from the backup drive The system should boot into Neutrino and look the same as your original drive Keep the backup in a safe location Ghost Images Some Neutrino users have used ghost images for backups but we don t recommend them Partition information might not be restored properly causing filesystems to not boot correctly If you run fdisk again on the drive the drive reports incorrect information and fdisk writes incorrect data to the drive Remote backups CVS 410 Remote backups are generally a much safer solution than storing a backup on a local system because a remote server is generally more reliable as the saying goes don t put all your eggs in one basket Depending on your situation it might make sense to buy a good system with lots of server grade hardware and then buy regular systems to develop on Make regular backups of your server Neutrino ships with a copy of the CVS Concurrent Versions System client utility In order to use CVS you need to have a CVS server preferably one that your company administers CVS lets you manage your source archives safely and remotely For more details see the Using CVS chapter in this guide Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems QNX 4 disk str
401. ot to do this Before shutdown and phshutdown shut down the system they send a SIGTERM signal to any running processes to give them the opportunity to terminate cleanly For more information on these utilities see in the Utilities Reference 14 Chapter 2 e Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down October 6 2005 Chapter 3 Managing User Accounts In this chapter What does a user account do 17 Account database 20 Managing your own account 24 Managing other accounts 25 Troubleshooting 32 October 6 2005 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 15 2005 QNX Software Systems What does a user account do This chapter explains how user accounts work how users can change their password by using the passwd utility and how system administrators can use the passwd utility and edit account database files to create and maintain users accounts In embedded systems the designer may choose to eliminate the account related files from the system disabling logins and references to users and groups by name even though the system remains fully multiuser and may have multiple numeric user IDs running programs and owning system resources If your system is configured this way most of this chapter won t be relevant to you What does a user account do October 6 2005 A user account associates a textual user name with a numeric user ID and group ID a login password a user s full name a home directory and a login she
402. ote printing using lpr SAMBA and NCFTP You can find SAMBA and NCFTP in the third party repository October 6 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 489 Configuration files for spooler 2005 QNX Software Systems Using lpr PNPCMD POSTSCRIPT printer_name is the name that you specified in the etc printcap file The following macros are expanded for each filter command line ps d lpr Pprinter_name Sd Device m PnP manufacture model id n Printer name s Spooldir name A real FileVersion Filter Filter phs ps phs to ps Supported Resolution 300 300 600 600 1200 1200 Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal Supported Orientation 0 Portrait 1 Landscape Supported Intensity 0 Min 100 Max Supported InkType 1 B amp W 3a Color CMY 4 Color CMYK Resolution 600 600 PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter Orientation 0 Portrait Intensity 50 InkType 4 Color CMYK NonPrintable 500 Left 500 Top 500 Right 500 Bottom ee ee ee ee if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _850DDE PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP Supported PaperSize 8500 8500 7250 11000 8262 5846 7000 11692 if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _25A854 Appendix A e Examples 8500 CLS PRINTER CMD POSTSCRIPT 11000 Letter 14000 Legal 10500 Exec 17000 B 11692 A4 8262 A5 9875 B5 16524 A3 October 6 2005
403. ou could edit the files twice but that isn t very efficient Instead you could get CVS to merge one branch onto another It s usually easier to merge a branch onto the head than vice versa To merge the changes in foo c in your Stella_1 0 branch into the version on the head go to where you have the head branch version checked out into your sandbox then type cvs update j Stella_1 0 foo c It s a good idea to check the file to make sure CVS merged the changes correctly never trust a machine Sometimes the changes you made in one branch conflict with those you made in another If this happens CVS displays a c before the filename when you merge the versions CVS leaves both versions of 392 Chapter 17 e Using CVS October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Removing and restoring files the conflicting lines in place but marks them with rows of greater than equals and less than signs You should edit the file to correct the discrepancies and then check the corrected version into CVS Removing and restoring files October 6 2005 When you remove a file from the repository CVS puts it into the attic Each directory in the repository has a subdirectory called Attic You can t check the Attic out into your sandbox but you can examine its contents through a web interface to CVS To delete a file say phoenix c 1 Remove the file from your sandbox rm phoenix c 2 Remove the file from the repo
404. ou get when you log in and then describes some of the setup you might need to do What happens when you log in October 6 2005 Before you start customizing your login environment you should understand just what happens when you log in because the nature of the customization determines where you should make it You should consider these questions e Does this change apply to all users or just to me e Do I need to do something only when I first log in or whenever I start a shell When you log in the system starts the login shell that s specified in your entry in the account database see etc passwd in Managing User Accounts The login shell is typically sh which is usually just a link to the Korn shell ksh When ksh starts as a login shell it executes these profiles if they exist and are executable e etc profile e SHOME profile Why have two profiles Settings that apply to all users go into etc profile your own customizations go into your own profile As you might expect you need to be root to edit etc profile There s actually a third profile for the shell The special thing about it is that it s executed whenever you start a shell see ksh s startup file below Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 183 Customizing your home 2005 QNX Software Systems Customizing your home Your home directory is where you can store all the files and directories that are relevant
405. ou need 280 Chapter 14 a user interface and a method of organizing and preparing print jobs spooling directories somewhere to store files waiting to be printed a way of preventing unauthorized access for remote printing a network manager capable of delivering the files to be printed some knowledge about the printer being used e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with lpr You need to log in as root to set up the lpr system User interface The line printer system consists mainly of the following files and commands etc printcap i i Any user Printing with the lpr utilities lpd Printer daemon that does all the real work lpr Program to enter a job in a printer queue lprq Spooling queue examination program lprrm Program to delete jobs from a queue lpre Program to administer printers and spooling queues only root can use this utility October 6 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 281 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems etc printcap A master database that describes printers directly attached to a machine and printers accessible across a network It describes the available printers and how to communicate with them and it specifies the values for important items e g the spooling directory 1pd printer daemon The 1pd program wh
406. our menus The section name must begin with a hyphen The plugin ignores any additional text in the name and any entries in the section For example this code separates the submenus from the rest of the items type d 80 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Modifying the Launch menu type cef The launchmenu so plugin won t place a separator at the start or end of the menu or next to another separator e Inlined targets as with target files you can specify targets within the menu file See the above section on target files for how to do this Troubleshooting How can I bind an icon to a submenu How can I supply alternate text for a submenu item say to translate it into a different language The launchmenu so plugin ignores files whose names begin with a period so the first step is to hide the directory by adding a period to the beginning of its name Next create a file with an extension of tgt the name doesn t matter as long as it doesn t begin with a period In the target field specify the full path to your new hidden directory You can then specify any additional information such as icons and translations Can I use files from elsewhere in the filesystem to build a menu Yes you can For example you can put a symbolic link into SHOME ph launchmenu that points elsewhere in the filesystem Note that because the plugi
407. owered to that of the thread that sent it a message Also used with mutexes Priority inheritance is a method used to prevent priority inversion priority inversion process A condition that can occur when a low priority thread consumes CPU at a higher priority than it should This can be caused by not supporting priority inheritance such that when the lower priority thread sends a message to a higher priority thread the higher priority thread consumes CPU on behalf of the lower priority thread This is solved by having the higher priority thread inherit the priority of the thread on whose behalf it s working A nonschedulable entity which defines the address space and a few data areas A process must have at least one thread running in it process group October 6 2005 A collection of processes that permits the signalling of related processes Each process in the system is a member of a process group identified by a process group ID A newly created process joins the process group of its creator Glossary 515 2005 QNX Software Systems process group ID The unique identifier representing a process group during its lifetime A process group ID is a positive integer The system may reuse a process group ID after the process group dies process group leader A process whose ID is the same as its process group ID process ID PID pty Qnet QNX QoS 516 The unique identifier representing a process A
408. p to insecure networks security has become a very important issue The word security can have many meanings but in a computer context it generally means preventing unauthorized people from making your computer do things that you don t want it to do There are vast tracts of security information in books and on the Internet This chapter provides a very brief introduction to the subject of security points you toward outside information and resources and discusses security issues that are unique to Neutrino OS security It should be fairly obvious that security is important you don t want someone to take control of a device and disrupt its normal functioning imagine the havoc if someone could stop air traffic control systems or hospital equipment from functioning properly The importance of security to an individual machine depends on the context e A machine behind a strong firewall is less vulnerable than one connected to a public network e One that doesn t even have a network connection is in even less danger Part of securing a machine is identifying the level of risk By classifying threats into categories we can break down the issues and see which ones we need to concern ourselves with Remote and local attacks October 6 2005 We can break the broad division of security threats also known as exploits into categories Remote exploit The attacker connects to the machine via the network and takes advant
409. pecific limits Limit x86 PPC MIPS SH 4 ARM System 64G 36 bit 64G 36 bit 1T 40 bit 512M 4G 32 bit RAM addressing addressing addressing 29 bit addressing addressing CPUs 8 8 8 1 1 Virtual 3 5G 3G 2G 2G 32M address space The hardware might further limit the number of CPUs t These are the absolute maximum limits for the virtual address space you can reduce them by setting the RLIMIT_AS resource with setrlimit 474 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits October 6 2005 Chapter 22 Technical Support October 6 2005 Chapter 22 e Technical Support 475 2005 QNX Software Systems October 6 2005 If you have any problems using Neutrino the first place to look for help is in the documentation You can view the online docs in the Photon Helpviewer or in a web browser The base directory for the documentation is usr help product Most of our manuals include an online index that you can access by clicking this button at the top or bottom of each help file Index However what do you do if you need more help The resources that are available to you depend on the support plan that you ve bought The Developer Support Resources include e public newsgroups see news inn qnx com e private newsgroups see news nntp qnx com e the myQNX account center where you can register your products so that you can download software and updates e Global Help Center available at any time of
410. pleting 44 DOS equivalents for 59 finding 54 multiple ona command line 45 recalling 39 53 remote execution 57 substituting 47 troubleshooting 64 usage messages 56 commit CVS command 386 commit filesystem level 458 Common Gateway Interface See CGI Common Internet File System See CIFS comp DOS command 59 compressed archive files 140 compressing 405 COMPUTERNAME DOS variable 63 COMSPEC DOS variable 63 Concurrent Versions System See CVS condvars limits 473 conf file extension 140 config 127 configurable limits 465 PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED 467 PC_LLINK_MAX 467 PC_MAX_CANON 467 PC_MAX_INPUT 467 PC_NAME_MAX 465 467 _PC_NO_TRUNC 468 PC PATHMAX 467 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index _PC_PIPE_BUF 467 _PC_VDISABLE 468 _SC_OPEN_MAX 466 configuration files 140 configuration strings _CS_ARCHITECTURE 189 CS_DOMAIN 189 243 CS_HOSTNAME 189 243 _CS_HW_PROVIDER 189 CS HW_SERIAL 189 _CS_LIBPATH 187 189 CS_LOCALE 190 CS MACHINE 190 CS_PATH 187 190 CS RELEASE 190 CS_RESOLVE 190 258 273 _CS_SRPC_DOMAIN 190 CS_SYSNAME_ 190 _CS_TIMEZONE_ 171 190 _CS_VERSION 190 environment variables compared to 188 setting 189 confstr 189 consoles 12 40 338 driver starting 41 166 168 mounting 124 switching 41 disabling 109 terminal type setting 38 66 200 virtual 41 70 74 75 context conf 128 control characters disabling 468 controllers type determining 312 conventions
411. proc qnetstats grep compiled k k k Qnet compiled on Jun 25 2003 at 17 14 27 running on qnet02 or cat proc qnetstats grep e ok e bad txd ok 19415966 txd bad 31 rxd ok 10254788 rxd bad dr 0 rxd bad L4 0 If you need help getting Qnet running our Technical Support department might ask you for this information Is the Qnet version correct Since Neutrino includes two versions of Qnet stacks that are incompatible in regard to packet format a conflict could arise and native networking might not work If this happens make sure that npm qnet so is a symbolic link to the same version of the Qnet protocol stack on both machines For more information see Software components for Qnet networking earlier in this chapter You can also use the ping command ping to verify if all other things such as network cards TCP protocol are working If ping works it s likely that the only problem lies with the versions of Qnet Is the hostname unique Use the hostname command to see the hostname This hostname must be unique for Qnet to work 252 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting Are the nodes in the same domain If the nodes aren t in the same domain you have to specify the domain For example ls net kenneth qnx com October 6 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 253
412. profile the changes don t go into effect until you next log in You should use your profile to do the customizations that you need to do only once or that you want all shells to inherit For example you could Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 185 Configuring your shell 2005 QNX Software Systems e set environment variables see Environment variables below e run any commands that you need e set your file permission mask see File ownership and permissions in Working with Files If you want to create an alias you should do it in your shell s profile see ksh s startup file below not in profile because the shell doesn t export aliases If you do set an alias in profile the alias is set only in shells that you start as login shells using the 1 option Don t start Photon applications in profile because Photon isn t running when this script is executed use the HOME ph phapps file instead For an example of profile see the Examples appendix ksh s startup file As described above the login shell runs certain profiles In addition you can have a profile that ksh runs whenever you start a shell whether or not it s a login shell This profile doesn t have a specific name when you start ksh it checks the ENV environment variable If this variable exists ksh gets the name of the profile from it To set up ENV add a line like this to your HOME pro
413. py of the correct partition information in case you ever have to do this step 4 Mount the partition and the filesystem At this point you have verified that the hardware is working at least for block 1 and that a valid partition is defined for Neutrino You now need to create a block special file for the QNX 4 partition itself and to mount the block special file as a QNX 4 filesystem mount e dev hd0 mount dev hd0t79 hd 428 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems What to do if your system will no longer boot This should create a volume called dev hd0t79 Depending on the state of the QNX 4 partition the mount may or may not fail If the partition information is correct there shouldn t be any problem Since the root already exists on a CD or on a remote disk on the network we ve mounted the local hard disk partition as a filesystem with the name hd Your goal now would be to run the chkfsys utility on the disk to examine and possibly fix the filesystem If you booted from CD and you don t suspect there s any damage to the filesystem on your hard disk e g the system was unable to boot because of a simple error introduced in the boot file or system initialization file you can see up a symbolic link to your hard disk partition in the process manager s in memory prefix tree ln sP hd If you run this command you can skip the rest
414. que e Are the nodes in the same domain Is Qnet running Qnet creates the net directory Use the following command to make sure that it exists ls net If you don t see any directory Qnet isn t running Ideally the directory should include at least an entry with the name of your machine i e the output of the hostname command If you re using the Ethernet binding all other reachable machines are also displayed For example joseph eileen Are io net and the drivers running October 6 2005 As mentioned before io net is the framework used to connect drivers and protocols In order to troubleshoot this use the following pidin command pidin P io net mem Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 249 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Look for the Qnet shared object in the output pid tid name 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 prio STATE code data stack 1 sbin io net 100 SIGWAITINFO 56K 684K 8192 516K 2 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 68K 3 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 68K 4 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 68K 5 sbin io net 200 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 132K 6 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 68K 7 sbin io net 21r RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 132K 8 sbin io net 10r RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 132K 9 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 132K 10 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 132K 1ldqnx
415. r although in most cases the builtin provides only the core functionality of the utility and isn t a complete replacement for it sed is a stream editor which makes it most useful for performing repeated changes to a file or set of files It s often used for scripts or as a utility within other scripts awk is a programming language for pattern matching and working with the contents of files You can also use it for scripting or call it from within scripts The third party repository includes per1 which like awk is useful for working with files and patterns The name per1 stands for Practical Extraction and Report Language In general a shell script is most useful and powerful when working with the execution of programs or modifying files in the context of the filesystem whereas sed awk and per1 are primarily for working with the contents of files For more information see e the entries for awk and sed in the Utilities Reference e Robbins Arnold and Dale Dougherty 1997 sed amp awk 2nd Edition Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates ISBN 1 56592 225 5 e Schwartz Randal L and Tom Phoenix 2001 Learning Perl Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates ISBN 0 59600 132 0 206 Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Running a shell script Running a shell script You can execute a shell script in these ways e Invoke another shell with the name of you
416. r approval rewrite the bitmap with data consistent with the files it was able to find and verify In addition to verifying block allocation bitmap chkfsys attempts to fix any problems it finds during the scan For example chkfsys can e unbusy files that were being written when a crash occurred e fix the file size in a directory entry to match the real data When to run chkfsys 424 It s a good idea to run chkfsys as part of your regularly scheduled maintenance procedures this lets you verify that the data on your disk is intact For example you might consider running chkfsys on your network servers every time they boot An automated check on the filesystem at boot time guarantees that chkfsys will attempt to fix any problems it finds during the scan To automate this process add chkfsys to the server s rc local file see Controlling How Neutrino Starts It s especially important to run chkfsys after a system crash power outage or unexpected system reboot so that you can identify whether any files have been damaged The chkfsys utility checks the clean flag on the disk to determine whether the system was in a consistent state at the time The clean flag is stored on disk and is maintained by the system The flag is turned off when the filesystem is mounted and is turned on Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Recovering disks and files whe
417. r more information see NFS filesystem in Working with Filesystems Conventions for naming nodes 242 In order to resolve node names the Qnet protocol follows certain conventions node name A character string that identifies the node you re talking to This name must be unique in the domain and can t contain slashes or periods The default node name is the value of the CS_HOSTNAME configuration string If your hostname is localhost the default when you Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Conventions for naming nodes first boot Qnet uses a hostname based on your NIC hardware s MAC address so that nodes can still communicate node domain A character string that npm qnet so adds to the end of the node name Together the node name and node domain must form a string that s unique for all nodes that are talking to each other The default is the value of the CS DOMAIN configuration string fully qualified node name FQNN The string formed by concatenating the node name and node domain For example if the node name is karl and the node domain name is qnx com the resulting FQNN is kar1 qnx com network directory A directory in the pathname space implemented by npm qnet so Each network directory there can be more than one on a node has an associated node domain The default is net as used in the examples in t
418. r pterm Windows hosted version only Options you want to pass to the window manager when it starts For more information see pwm in the Utilities Reference PWM PRINTSCRN_APP Troubleshooting The application to start when the Print Scrn key is pressed The default is snapshot Here are some problems or questions that you might have concerning Photon How do I change the color scheme in Photon You can change the color of the title bars within Photon for any given state To do this choose Launch Configure Appearance then select the Window tab In this tab you can choose one of the predefined schemes from the list or you can set each window state active and inactive and the title color independently I ve set an alias in my profile but it isn t set in my Photon terminals The shell doesn t export aliases In Photon the default pterm October 6 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 107 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems isn t started as a login shell and therefore doesn t read your etc profile and profile configuration files If you want an alias to be defined in all of your shells inside or outside a Photon terminal set the alias in your shell s startup file For more information see ksh s startup file in the Configuring Your Environment chapter in this guide Alternatively you can use the 1 option to run pterm as a login shell which causes it to r
419. r sends the print job to the printer you just name the remote printer in the filter command line of the configuration file used by spooler To try it first get your remote printer working using lpr see Remote printing to a TCP IP enabled printer using 1pr then do the following 1 Copy the configuration file from the printer you want to use in this case a PostScript printer cp etc printers ps cfg etc printers test cfg 2 Find the filter command lines in test cfg they look like this Filter phs d phs to ps Filter raw d cat These filter command lines are in the form source destination filter The phs filter command line tells the filter to process phs files by sending them through a filter called phs to ps before sending them on to the destination passed by spooler The raw filter command is for utilities that already produce the correct output for the printer 302 Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Printing with spooler 3 Change the phs filter command line from this Filter phs d phs to ps to this Filter phs ps phs to ps 4 Add a line to tell the filter to send all PostScript files to the remote printer rlpt2 Filter ps d lpr Prlpt2 What you ve done is change the destination from that given by spooler to ps so that after the phs file has been converted to a ps type by phs to ps it goes to the ps filter Then the ps filter line you added sends
420. r shell script as an argument sh myscript e Load your script as a dot file into the current shell myscript e Use chmod to make the shell script executable and then invoke it like this chmod 744 myscript myscript In this instance your shell automatically invokes a new shell to execute the shell script Example of a Korn shell script October 6 2005 As a quick tutorial in the Korn shell let s look at a script that searches C source and header files in the current directory tree for a string passed on the command line bin sh tfind script to look for strings in various files and dump to less case in 1 find name ch xargs grep 1 less exit 0 good status esac echo Use tfind stuff_to_find X echo where stuff_to_find search string T echo echo e g tfind console_state looks through all files in uw echo the current directory and below and displays all Chapter 10 Writing Shell Scripts 207 Example of a Korn shell script 2005 QNX Software Systems 208 echo instances of console_state exit 1 bad status The first line bin sh starts with a which indicates a comment so the line is ignored by the shell processing this script Yet many if not most shell scripts start with a line like this The initial pair of characters aren t important to the shell but the loader code in proento recognizes them as an instruction to l
421. r will work as expected If the device ID wasn t in the graphics enumerator we haven t tried that hardware and therefore can t guarantee it will work properly 366 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 Chapter 16 Setting Up an Embedded Web Server In this chapter Where should you put the files 369 Running Slinger 370 Dynamic HTML 371 Security precautions 374 Examples 375 October 6 2005 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 367 2005 QNX Software Systems Where should you put the files Neutrino ships with Slinger a very small web server optimized for embedded applications Since it supports Common Gateway Interface CGI 1 1 HTTP 1 1 and dynamic HTML via SSI commands it lets you easily add embedded HTTP services and dynamic content to your embedded applications For example you can write an application that monitors a printer and uses Slinger to update a remote client that displays the printer s status External Data arog app server SSI token Device e g a printer HTML page Where should you put the files A October 6 2005 Before you start the Slinger web server and begin creating your web pages you need to determine what directory structure is appropriate and where you should put your files CAUTION Be careful not to place your files in a location where your system is open to outsiders thereby
422. rchive gzip tar Backing Up and Recovering Data toc Helpviewer table of contents helpviewer file TTE TrueType fonts phfont txt ASCII text file Many text based editors applications and individual users ttf TrueType font file phfont use Usage message source for make QNX Momentics programs that don t embed development suite usage in the program source code QNX recursive make wav Audio wave file phplay xml Extensible Markup Language October 6 2005 file multiple uses including IDE documentation in a QNX Momentics PE development system Chapter 6 e Working with Files continued 143 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Extension Description Related programs utilities zip Compressed archive file gzip If you aren t sure about the format of a file use the file utility file filename Troubleshooting Here are a few problems that you might have with files I m trying to write a file but I get a permission denied message You don t have write permission for the file If you re the owner or root you can change the permissions see File ownership and permissions above I m trying to list a directory that I have write permission for but I get a permission denied message You need to have read or execute permission for a directory in order to list it See File ownership and permissions above I m having trouble with a file that has a space in its n
423. re s no route to another host you get a no route to host error netstat an List information about TCP IP connections to or from your system This includes the state of the connections or the amount of data pending on the connections It also provides the IP addresses and ports of the local and remote ends of the connections For the tiny TCP IP stack you have to use the following command as it doesn t support netstat cat proc ipstats For more information about netstat see the Utilities Reference 274 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting How do I make sure I m connected to other hosts Use the ping utility to determine if you re connected to other hosts For example ping isp com On success ping displays something like this PING isp com 10 0 0 1 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 0 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 1 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 2 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 3 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 4 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 5 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 6 tt1 255 time 0 ms This report continues until you terminate ping for example by pressing Ctrl C How do I display information about an interface October 6 2005 controller Use the nicinfo command usr sbin nicinfo
424. re Systems Modifying the Launch menu Multiple target files If the targets are spread across multiple target files for any reason you need to establish a logical grouping to sort the items in You do this by specifying a group entry in the target The value for this entry may be any string although we recommend you follow this convention to avoid potential conflicts Company name Product Family Name In most cases the company name alone should suffice although you may wish to be more specific depending on the number of product lines you offer After the plugin groups the items logically via the group entry it sorts the items alphanumerically by the order entry The order can be any string you can simply use numbers or you can choose a more elaborate scheme that will let you insert other items in the future Single target file Items specified in a single file can take advantage of implicit ordering That is in absence of a group entry they automatically inherit a value that s also available to all other targets within the same file In this case you need to specify only the order entry as described above Additional menu control Directories files and targets provide all the mechanisms necessary for populating menus with content and even allow for a degree of control in terms of ordering You can also use menu format control files named menu to fine tune overall menu presentation and visually group related items
425. reate files under dev shmem and grow them to any size depending on RAM resources Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 217 QNX 4 filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Although the RAM filesystem itself doesn t support hard or soft links or directories you can create a link to it by using process manager links For example you could create a link to a RAM based tmp directory ln sP dev shmem tmp This tells proento to create a process manager link to dev shmem known as tmp Most application programs can then open files under tmp as if it were a normal filesystem In order to minimize the size of the RAM filesystem code inside the process manager this filesystem specifically doesn t include big filesystem features such as file locking and directory creation QNX 4 filesystem 218 The QNX 4 filesystem the default for Neutrino uses the same on disk structure as in the QNX 4 operating system This filesystem is implemented by the s qnx4 so shared object and is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting a QNX 4 filesystem You can create a QNX disk partition by using the fdisk and dinit utilities This filesystem implements a robust design using an extent based bitmap allocation scheme with fingerprint control structures to safeguard against data loss and to provide easy recovery Features include e extent based POSIX filesystem e robustness all sensitive filesystem
426. red object that implements the tiny TCP IP stacks 260 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Choosing the right stack configuration npm tcpip so A symbolic link to the shared object thats implement the full TCP IP stacks It points to either npm tcpip v4 so or npm tcpip v6 so depending on what you ve installed io net Manager that provides support for dynamically loaded networking modules Network drivers devn Managers that form an interface with the hardware Choosing the right stack configuration October 6 2005 Neutrino supports TCP IP with two different stacks e atiny stack npm ttcpip so e a fully featured BSD TCP IP stack npm tcpip so The tiny stack is meant for resource constrained client applications where it isn t necessary to have all TCP IP services present for a list of the services not covered in the tiny stack see the limitations listed in the Utilities Reference The way that you set configuration parameters depends on which stack you use e If you re using the tiny stack use command line options e If you re using the full stack use the ifconfig and route utilities These methods are described below For either stack if you re using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP you can use dhcp client to set the configuration parameters for you as provided by the DHCP server Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 261 Choosing the rig
427. ript which etc system sysinit invokes The enum devices manager uses a series of configuration files to specify actions to take when the system detects specific hardware devices After it reads the configuration file s enum devices queries its various enumerators to discover what devices are on the system It then matches these devices against the device IDs listed in the configuration files If the device matches the action clauses associated with the device are executed You can find the enumerator configuration files in the etc system enum directory Here s some sample code from a configuration file device pci ven 2222 dev 1111 uniq sernum devc ser 1 driver devc ser8250 u sernum ioport1 irqg This code directs the enumerator to do the following when it detects device 1111 from vender 2222 1 Set sernum to the next unique serial device number starting at 1 2 Start the devc ser8250 driver with the provided options the device enumerator sets the ioport and irq variables To detect new hardware or specify any additional options you can extend the enumerator configuration files in the following ways e an oem directory e an overrides file e ahost specific set of enumeration files as described below The enumerator reads and concatenates the contents of all configuration files under the chosen directory before it starts processing Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 173 Device enum
428. rite has completed potentially milliseconds of dead time Throughput October 6 2005 Another key point is the performance of sequential access to a file or raw throughput where a large amount of data is written to a file or an entire file is read The filesystem itself can detect this type of sequential access and attempt to optimize the use of the disk by doing e read ahead on reads so that the disk is being accessed for the predicted new data while the user processes the original data e write behind of writes to allow a large amount of dirty data to be coalesced into a single contiguous multiple block write The most efficient way of accessing the disk for high performance is through the standard POSIX routines that work with file descriptors open read and write because these allow direct access to the filesystem with no interference from libe If you re concerned about performance we don t recommend that you use the standard I O lt stdio h gt routines that work with FILE variables because they introduce another layer of code and another layer of buffering In particular the default buffer size is BUFSIZ or 1K so all access to the disk is carved up into chunks of that size causing a large amount of overhead for passing messages and switching contexts There are some cases when the standard I O facilities are useful such as when processing a text file one line or character at a time in which
429. rl D Surfing the web with Voyager Photon ships with a web browser called Voyager that you can use to browse local HTML files or to browse the Internet Neutrino also includes an embedded web server called Slinger that you can use to build Internet access into embedded systems For more information see the Setting Up an Embedded Web Server chapter To start Voyager right click anywhere on the desktop and select Voyager or type voyager amp ata pterm prompt October 6 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 91 Surfing the web with Voyager 2005 QNX Software Systems File Edit View Go Hotlist Help q ono e S a e Back Forward Home Reload Font Print Hotlist Add Url Stop http www google ca search q QNX amp ie 150 8859 1 amp hl en amp meta Advanced Search Preferences Language Tools Google sea Search theweb pages from Canada Results 1 10 of abo Category Computers gt Software gt Operating Systems gt Realtime gt NX Realtime operati tem RTOS software development tools Sponsored Links QNX Software Systems Reliable RTOS and Productive Development Free Q 1Rtos R Tools for Embedded Premier sites Demos White papers Systems IntraLase cuts the risk of laser eye surgery with QNX based Free Info on Qux and other Rtos win eg3 comqnx SYSTEM se Description Canadian firm that develops maintains and markets QNX RTOS and related products Photon mic
430. rname password SAMBA password workgroup SAMBA workgroup server SAMBA server name printer SAMBA shared printer name Use of DEVICE_URI environment variable allows you to set this entry for the smbspool to automatically look for it when it isn t included in the command line Filter ps d smbspool 1 NULL none 1 1 Filter phs ps phs to ps Supported Resolution 300 300 600 600 1200 1200 Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal Supported Orientation 0 Portrait 1 Landscape Supported Intensity 0 Min 100 Max Supported InkType 1 B amp W 3 gt Color CMY 4 Color CMYK Resolution 600 600 PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter Orientation 0 Portrait Intensity 50 InkType 4 Color CMYK NonPrintable 500 Left 500 Top 500 Right 500 Bottom iS ee ee ee if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _850DDE PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP 8500 CLS PRINTER CMD POSTSCRIPT Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 7250 10500 Exec 11000 17000 B 8262 11692 A4 5846 8262 A5 7000 9875 B5 11692 16524 A3 p TERN St lt eo oe ne ee EE ee ee if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _25A854 PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP 2500C CLS PRINTER CMD PCL MLC PML POSTSCRIPT Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter October 6 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 493 PPP with CHAP authentication between two Ne
431. roGUI Category 4 _ B m Document Done Western European ISO 88 The Voyager browser At the top of the Voyager window you ll find a menubar a toolbar and site bar At the bottom of the window is a status bar that displays the current document security status which items are being loaded and the current encoding setting if you hover over a link the link destination appears in the status bar You can turn the toolbar site bar and status on or off Voyager supports several common image and multimedia file types including jpg gif and png for images and mpg wav au aif mp3 mp1 mp2 mpa mpv and m2p for audio and video You can view a Quick Reference Guide in Voyager at any time by clicking Help Quick Reference For more information about using Voyager see voyager in the Utilities Reference 92 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Surfing the web with Voyager Setting preferences Cache tab October 6 2005 To set your preferences for Voyager select Edit Preferences The configuration dialog includes these tabs Cache Appearance Connection Information Print Applications You can configure Voyager to use different rendering engines such as vserver netfront or Mozilla Some preferences are specific to the rendering engine See voyager in the Utilities Reference for more information about specifying a rendering e
432. roup below 30 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Managing other accounts 2 If you want this group to be the default for these users change their account entries in etc passwd to reflect their new default group ID 3 Recursively change the group ownership and permissions on home projects chgrp R projects home projects chmod R gtrw home projects 4 Remove access for all other users chmod R o rwx home projects For more details on permissions see File ownership and permissions in Working with Files Creating a new group To create a new group open etc group in a text editor then add a line that specifies the new group s name ID and members For example techies x 101 michel jim sue For more information about the fields see etc group earlier in this chapter CAUTION Do this work at a time when the system is idle As your text editor writes the etc group file back any application or utility that s trying to simultaneously read the etc group file e g 1s 1 newgrp might not function correctly Modifying an existing group October 6 2005 Each time you add a new user to a group e g when you use passwd to create a new user account you need to edit the etc group file and add the user to the appropriate group entry For instance if you Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 31 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Sys
433. rowser is using the net front server these options are also available e the scrollbar size in pixels e whether you want the browser to disable pop up windows generated by JavaScript Connection tab 94 In this part of Voyager s configuration dialog you can specify the following Use Proxy Server Enable this item if you use a proxy server s for HTTP FTP or Gopher or if you use a SOCKS host to connect to the Internet Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Surfing the web with Voyager Max Connections HTTP Proxy FTP Proxy Gopher Proxy SOCKS Host Proxy Overrides The maximum number of connections to the Internet allowed at any one time The IP address of the HTTP proxy server and the port number in the adjacent field The IP address of the FTP proxy server and the port number in the adjacent field The IP address of the Gopher proxy server and the port number in the adjacent field The IP address of the SOCKS host and the port number in the adjacent field The IP addresses of host computers that shouldn t go through the proxy server s Separate the hosts with commas Wildcards are supported To find out the correct settings see your Internet Service Provider ISP or system administrator Information tab October 6 2005 You can specify the following in this part of the configuration dialog Home Page Email Address Email Ser
434. rst matching topic is automatically displayed Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Getting help with the Helpviewer You can also simply type something in a pterm window and then press Ctrl Alt H Most QNX documents include a keyword index that can also help you find what you re looking for In the online docs click the keyword index button which appears at the top and bottom of each file Index Bookmarking a topic to view it again later If you find a topic that you want to view again later you can bookmark it This saves a quick link to that topic in the bookmarks list To bookmark your current topic select Bookmarks Add Bookmarks To view the list click the Bookmarks toolbar button Click an item in the list to view the topic Bookmarks also appear in the Bookmark menu You can remove bookmarks by viewing the bookmarked topic and then selecting Bookmarks Remove Bookmark Navigating around help files The Helpviewer provides the following ways to navigate through the documentation Task Menu command Shortcut Go to the topmost help topic home File gt Home Ctrl H topic in the help set Go to the previously viewed topic File gt Back Alt continued October 6 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 89 Getting help with the Helpviewer 2005 QNX Software Systems Task Menu command Shortcut Return to the nex
435. rue bin ls cat echo Actual filesystem using the package filesystem but the virtual filesystem that the package filesystem presents to the user looks like this ma aa of IBA B ls true passwd Virtual filesystem using the package filesystem 2 cat ec When an open style request comes to the virtual filesystem a lookup is performed The lookup determines if the file is indeed managed by Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 233 Package filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems the package filesystem If it is then the system redirects the request to the real location of the file inside the appropriate package The real location could be on any filesystem QNX 4 Linux DOS across the network via NFS CIFS or even cached locally a shadow filesystem You should use the package filesystem manager fs pkg to control which packages your node sees This style of redirection is similar to symbolic link Once the file is opened all I O requests go directly to the file s filesystem manager bypassing the package filesystem This way the package filesystem doesn t interfere with read write performance Your node creates a configuration file typically called etc system package or etc host_cfg HOSTNAME etc system packages where the HOSTNAME environment variable specifies the name of the client node This file tells the package filesystem which packages are to be presented to the client
436. s 2005 QNX Software Systems Input devices The devi set of drivers handles input under Photon The type of input device attached to your system determines which driver you need to use Photon input can consist of a single mouse a mouse and a keyboard or many mice at the same time provided you have the space The inputtrap utility automatically detects basic input devices non USB keyboards and mice The Photon startup script invokes this utility after starting the graphics adapters You can override the automatic detection by creating an input trap file etc system trap input hostname This is the default location you can change it if you want to Each line of this file invokes a driver e For devi hirun the line should contain only the arguments that you want to pass to it For example this file starts a PS 2 keyboard and a PS 2 mouse kbd fd d dev kbd ps2 mousedev e For other input drivers specify the name of the driver as well as the arguments Mice and keyboards Mice and keyboards both use the devi hirun driver The type of mouse attached to your system determines which options you need to use For a serial mouse you need to specify the correct protocol e g the Microsoft Mouse protocol Keyboards are detected on these interfaces e AT style adapters appear as dev kbddev e PS 2 keyboards appear as dev kbd If inputtrap detects a serial Microsoft mouse and a keyboard interfaced through the file d
437. s pci bios waitfor dev pci display_msg gt Starting Console Manager deve con n8 waitfor dev conl reopen dev conl1 display_msg gt Starting EIDE Driver devb eide blk cache 64M auto partition vnode 2000 ncache 2000 noatime commit low dos exe all waitfor dev hd0 waitfor dev hdl Mount one QNX 4 filesystem as and another as home Also mount a DOS partition and the CD drive mount dev hd0t79 mount dev hd1t78 home mount tdos dev hd1t12 fs hd1 dos mount tcd dev cd0 fs cd0 display_msg gt Starting etc system sysinit ksh c etc system sysinit libc so libcam so io blk so Appendix A e Examples 487 profile 2005 QNX Software Systems cam disk so fs qnx4 so fs dos so fs ext2 so cam cdrom so fs cd so data c seedres pci bios devb eide slogger ksh devc con mount profile When you create a new user account the user s initial profile is copied from etc skel profile see Managing User Accounts Here s what s in that file default profile if test tty not a tty then echo edit the file profile if you want to change your environment echo To start the Photon windowing environment type ph fi This profile runs the tty utility to get the name of the terminal that s open as standard input If there is a terminal profile simply displays a couple of helpful hints You might want to set some
438. s boot Reserve 64k of video memory to handle multiple video cards startup bios s64k PATH is the safe path for executables confstr _CS_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH is the safe path for libraries confstr _CS_LIBPATH i e This is the path searched for libs in setuid setgid executables PATH proc boot bin usr bin LD_LIBRARY_PATH proc boot lib usr 1lib 1ib dll procnto script startup script To save memory make everyone use the libc in the boot image For speed fewer symbolic lookups point to libc so 2 instead of libc so procmgr_symlink proc boot libc so 2 usr lib ldqnx so 2 Default user programs to priority 10 other scheduler pri 100 Appendix Ae Examples 485 qnxbasedma build 2005 QNX Software Systems Tell diskboot this is a hard disk boot b1 Tell diskboot to use DMA on IDE drives D1 Start 4 text consoles buy passing n4 to devc con o By adding e Linux ext2 filesystem will be mounted as well pri 100 PATH proc boot diskboot b1 D1 odevc con n4 Include the current libc so It will be created as a real file using its internal SONAME with libc so being a symlink to it The symlink will point to the last libc so so if an earlier libc is needed e g libc so 1 add it before the this line libc so Include all tie files for the default filesystems libcam so io blk so cam disk so fs qnx4 so fs
439. s XP command 238 drivers 134 CD ROM starting 168 character device command line interpreting 38 console 12 40 41 338 starting 168 debugging 6 determining which are running 237 disk starting 167 graphics Index 533 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems starting 106 input 324 starting 106 network 245 261 starting 172 Vesa 365 video 84 ds 374 DSL Digital Subscriber Line 267 268 dual monitors 358 dumper 133 136 176 dumps directory 176 DVDs 314 DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 265 Dvorak keyboard layout 59 Dyna touchscreens 325 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP dynamic HTML 369 371 372 374 Dynamic Linked Libraries See DLLs dynamic routing 259 Dynapro touchscreens 325 E Eclipse documentation 140 edited input mode 38 EDITOR 157 editors 147 AbiWord 152 default 157 emacs 43 153 534 Index ex 148 jed 155 ped 150 ged 148 vi 148 vim 155 Workspace ws 155 EHCI Enhanced Host Controller Interface 331 EIDE 313 316 ellipsis in command syntax 56 elm 5 emacs 153 command line editing 43 email 5 EMANATE 271 embedded filesystems creating 227 shell 206 systems flash filesystems 227 471 OS images 123 216 temporary storage in 217 user accounts 17 web server 266 369 security 374 Encapsulated Security Payload See ESP encryption passwords 21 random numbers for 176 End key 39 end of input 39 end of options 56 66 end of line characters converti
440. s aren t preceded by a hyphen e g more my_file Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 55 Utilities 2005 QNX Software Systems The entries in the Utilities Reference use some special symbols to express the command syntax You can specify one or more instances of the previous element For example in the more utility syntax the ellipsis after the operand file indicates that you can specify more than one file on the command line more myfilel myfile2 The enclosed item is optional You can use only one of the items e g a You don t actually type these symbols when you invoke the command For instance the syntax description for more is given as follows more ceisu n number p pattern pattern t tag x tabstop file You can combine multiple options that don t take an argument The ceisu notation is shorthand for c e i s u If an argument to a command starts with a hyphen you can signal the end of the options by using a double hyphen ls 1 my_file For more information see Utility Conventions in the Utilities Reference Displaying online usage messages If you want a detailed description of a utility see the Utilities Reference But if you just want a quick reminder of the syntax and options you can display the utility s online usage message by invoking the use command it s similar to man in UNIX and Linux For example to display the message for more type
441. s l inodes One file referenced by two links Note that you can create a link to a file only if the file and the link are in the same filesystem There are two other situations in which a file can have an entry in the inodes file e Ifa file s filename is longer than 16 characters the inode information is stored in the inodes file making room for a 48 character filename in the directory entry Filenames greater than 48 characters are stored within a longfilenames file which has room for a 505 character name a truncated 48 character name is also placed in the directory entry for use by legacy systems e Ifa file at one time had more than one link and all links but one have been removed the file continues to have a separate inodes file entry This is done because the overhead of searching for the Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 221 QNX 4 filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems directory entry that points to the inode entry would be prohibitive there are no links from inode entries back to the directory entries Removing links When a file is created it is given a link count of one As you add and remove links to the file this link count is incremented and decremented The disk space occupied by the file data isn t freed and marked as unused in the bitmap until its link count goes to zero and all programs using the file have closed it This allows an open file to remain in use even though i
442. s the requested mountpoint For example home The line must not start with a number sign or contain an equals sign The diskboot program ignores any leading and trailing whitespace e a multiple line configuration file In this case it must contain a mountpoint specification and can contain additional specifications All specifications are of the form token value The diskboot program ignores any whitespace at the start and end of the line and on either side of the equals sign The recognized tokens are mount or mountpt Where to mount this partition For example mount home opt or options Mount options either specifically for this mountpoint or generic Use commas not spaces to separate the options For example October 6 2005 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 169 etc system sysinit 2005 QNX Software Systems options ro noexec For more information see the documentation for mount and specific drivers in the Utilities Reference and mount and mount_parse_generic_args in the Neutrino Library Reference desc or description type The diskboot program recognizes and parses these tokens but it currently ignores the information The diskboot program recognizes the strings qnx4 ext2 and dos but currently ignores this token It determine the type based on partition numbers as described for diskboot above etc system sysinit The etc system sysinit file is a scr
443. s the same format as offset except that no leading sign or is allowed The default if time is omitted is 02 00 00 People frequently ask us for a complete list of time zones but maintaining such a list is outside our mandate of developing a realtime operating system Time zones are defined by local laws that we simply can t keep up with For example e The Canadian province of Saskatchewan always stays on standard time e In 1999 some islands in the south Pacific changed their time zones by a few minutes so that they could be the first places on earth to ring in the year 2000 The phlocale utility gets its list of time zones from etc timezone uc_tz _t but we don t guarantee that this file defines all of the world s time zones or that it s up to date This section examines some sample time zone settings The default time zone is Eastern time the short specification is EST5EDT Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 193 Setting the time zone 2005 QNX Software Systems Pacific time e Eastern Standard Time is 5 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC Standard time and daylight saving time both apply to this locale By default Eastern Daylight Time EDT is one hour ahead of standard time i e EDT4 Since it isn t specified daylight saving time starts on the first Sunday of April at 2 00 A M and ends on the last Sunday of October at 2 00 A M The full spe
444. s to the script it prints a description of how to use it and then returns a failure code 210 Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Efficiency Efficiency In general a script isn t as efficient as a custom written C or C program because it e is interpreted not compiled e does most of its work by running other programs However developing a script can take less time than writing a program especially if you use pipes and existing utilities as building blocks in your script Caveat scriptor Here are some things to keep in mind when writing scripts e In order to run a script as if it were a utility you must make it executable by using the chmod command For example if you want anyone to be able to run your script type chmod atx script_name Your script doesn t have to be executable if you plan to invoke it by passing it as a shell argument ksh script_name or if you use it as a dot file like this script name e Just as for any executable if your script isn t in one of the directories in your PATH you have to specify the path to the script in order to run it For example bin my_script October 6 2005 Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts 211 Caveat scriptor 2005 QNX Software Systems e When you run a script it inherits its environment from the parent process If your script executes a command that might not be in the PATH you shoul
445. se a filter program called 1pf for printing the files see Filters below 1f usr adm lpd errs Write any error messages to the file usr adm 1pd errs instead of to the console Remote printers October 6 2005 Printers that reside on remote hosts should have an empty 1p entry For example the following etc printcap entry directs output to the printer named 1p on the machine named ucbvax lp default line printer lp rm ucbvax rp lp sd usr spool vaxlpd Chapter 14 Printing 289 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Filters 290 The rm entry is the name of the remote machine to connect to this name must be a known hostname for a machine on the network The rp capability indicates that the name of the remote printer is 1p you can leave it out in this case because this is the default value The sd entry specifies usr spool vaxl1pd as the spooling directory instead of the default pathname usr spool output 1pd Filters are used to handle device dependencies and accounting functions Output filters Input filters Other filters Chapter 14 e Printing Used when accounting isn t needed or when all text data must be passed through a filter An output filter isn t suitable for accounting purposes because it s started only once all text files are filtered through it it doesn t pass owners login names and it doesn t identify the beginnings and ends of jobs Starte
446. sing the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Shell on the command line or in the ksh profile For more information about the bind command and the key bindings see emacs interactive input line editing in the documentation for ksh in the Utilities Reference for information about the profiles for ksh see also Configuring your shell in Configuring Your Environment Reserved words The Korn shell recognizes these reserved words and symbols case else function then do esac if time IL done fi in until elif for select while and uses them to build compound commands For example you can execute commands in a loop for i in c do cp i i bak done Entering multiple commands You can enter more than one command at a time by separating your commands with a semicolon For example if you want to determine your current working directory invoke pwd If you want to see what the directory contains use 1s You could combine the two commands as follows pwd ls As described in Pipes you can also use pipes to connect commands on the command line October 6 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 45 Shell 2005 QNX Software Systems Aliases You can define an alias in the shell to create new commands or to specify your favorite options For example the F option to the 1s command displays certain characters at the end of the names to indicate that the file is
447. sitory cvs remove phoenix c or cvs rm phoenix c 3 Commit your changes If you later need to restore the file 1 Determine the last revision number for the file cvs log phoenix c less 2 Go to the base directory for your sandbox e g evs and get the file specifying the last version number minus one For example if the deleted version of phoenix c was 1 4 you need to get version 1 3 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 393 Setting upa CVS server 2005 QNX Software Systems 5 evs checkout r 1 3 my_project phoenix c or cvs get r 1 3 my_project phoenix c The r option sets a sticky tag Go back to the directory where you want the file to go and rename the file or move it out of the way then clear the sticky tag mv phoenix c save_phoenix c cvs update A Rename the file or move it back and then add it to the repository mv save_phoenix c phoenix c cvs add phoenix c Commit your changes Setting up a CVS server Setting up a CVS server is similar to setting up a local repository see Creating a repository but you also have to the following 1 Make sure that etc services includes a line like this pserver 2401 tcp Make sure that etc inetd con has an entry like this but all on one line pserver stream tcp nowait root usr bin cvs cvs b usr local bin f allow root rcot_dir pserver 394 Chapter 17 e Using CVS October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Setting up a CV
448. so on Don t change any of the information in this directory 384 Chapter 17 e Using CVS October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems CVS basics October 6 2005 CAUTION If you create a new project by copying directories from one part of your sandbox to another don t copy the Cvs directory If you do your project probably won t get stored where you expect in the repository Now that we have a working copy we can create some directories and files to demonstrate how to check in and out We ll start with the standard Hello world C program It s good practice to keep all of your projects in separate directory structures so we ll also create a new directory for our project To make the project directory mkdir myproj Now we have to add this directory to the CVS repository cvs d HOME cvs add myproj It s time to create our test file Make sure you re in the project directory cd myproj Now use your favorite editor to create a file called foo c with the following contents include lt stdio h gt int main int argc char argv printf Hello world n Adding the file is very similar to adding the directory cvs add foo c Notice that we left out the d option to evs This is intentional When you check out a directory CVS creates a directory of its own Chapter 17 e Using CVS 385 CVS basics 2005 QNX Software Systems for status and administrative files so that
449. stems s dn Floppy disk filesystems s dn type number Filesystems on hard disk partitions The home directories of regular users are found here The name of your home directory is often the same as your user name A directory that contains essential shared libraries that programs need in order to run filename so as well as static libraries used during development See also usr lib and usr local lib The 1ib directory includes lib d1l1 Contains additional shared libraries that implement OS drivers and services such as drivers filesystem managers and so on For some examples of how shared libraries are used for certain types of drivers and services see Filesystems Native Networking Qnet and TCP IP Networking in the System Architecture guide For details about specific shared 132 Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Where everything is stored proc October 6 2005 objects in the 1ib d11 directory see their respective entries in the Utilities Reference Owned by the process manager procnto this virtual directory can give you information about processes and pathname space configuration The proc directory contains a subdirectory for each process the process ID is used as the name of the directory These directories each contain an entry as that defines the process s address space Various utilities use this entry to get information about a
450. still processes instead of shared objects Under Neutrino e You can dynamically start and stop filesystems e Multiple filesystems may run concurrently e Applications are presented with a single unified pathname space and interface regardless of the configuration and number of underlying filesystems A desktop Neutrino system starts the appropriate block filesystems on booting you start other filesystems as standalone managers The default block filesystem is the QNX 4 filesystem Setting up starting and stopping a block October 6 2005 filesystem When you boot your machine the system detects partitions on the block I O devices and automatically starts the appropriate filesystem for each partition see Controlling How Neutrino Starts You aren t likely ever to need to stop or restart a block filesystem if you change any of the filesystem s options you can use the e or u option to the mount command to update the filesystem If you need to change any of the options associated with the block I O device you can slay the appropriate devb driver being careful Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 215 Mounting and unmounting filesystems 2005 QNX Software Systems not to pull the carpet from under your feet and restart it but you Il need to explicitly mount any of the filesystems on it Mounting and unmounting filesystems The following utilities work with filesystems mount Mount a block speci
451. str to get the value of a configuration string The names of configuration strings start with CS and are in uppercase although getconf and setconf let you use any case omit the leading underscore or the entire prefix provided that the rest of the name is unambiguous The configuration strings include _CS_ARCHITECTURE The name of the instruction set architecture _CS_DOMAIN The domain of this node in the network CS HOSTNAME The name of this node in the network A hostname can consist only of letters numbers and hyphens and must not start or end with a hyphen For more information see RFC 952 If you change this configuration string be sure you also change the HOSTNAME environment variable The hostname utility always gives the value of the CS HOSTNAME configuration string CS_ HW_PROVIDER The name of the hardware s manufacturer CS HW SERIAL The serial number associated with the hardware _CS_LIBPATH The default path for locating shared objects For more information see Setting PATH and LD LIBRARY PATH below Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 189 Setting the time zone 2005 QNX Software Systems CS LOCALE CS_MACHINE CS_PATH _ CS_RELEASE CS RESOLVE The locale string The type of hardware the OS is running on The default path for finding system utilities For more information see Setting PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH below The current release l
452. support for the QNX_Drive_Copy utility You can make identical images of hard drives under Neutrino using simple utilities This is called making a raw copy of the drive If you have an identical hard drive manufacturer size model number you can simply attach the drive to the system Make sure you know which position the drive is set up as e g EIDE Primary Slave Once you ve attached the drive boot the Neutrino system The system should automatically detect the hard drive and create an entry in the dev directory for it The new entry should appear as dev hd1 if there are only two drives in the system If there are more than two then the drive could be hd1 hd2 and so on In this case use the fdisk to identify which drive is which The new drive shouldn t have any partitions set up on it and should be blank CAUTION Be absolutely positive about the drives before continuing because if you don t identify the drives correctly you could copy the contents of the blank hard drive onto your original drive and you ll lose all your data There s no way to recover from this Once you ve identified the drives type Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 409 Remote backups 2005 QNX Software Systems cp V dev hd0 dev hd1 where hdO is the original hard disk and hd1 is the new drive that you re copying to This command copies everything from the first drive including partition tables bo
453. system see the Working with Filesystems chapter October 6 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 411 QNX 4 disk structure 2005 QNX Software Systems Partition components A QNX 4 filesystem may be an entire disk in the case of floppies or it may be one of many partitions on a hard disk Within a disk partition a QNX 4 filesystem contains the following components e loader block e root block e bitmap blocks e root directory e other directories files free blocks etc Loader block Root block Bitmap blocks Root directory Other data Components of a QNX 4 filesystem in a disk partition These structures are created when you initialize the filesystem with the dinit utility 412 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems QNX 4 disk structure Loader block Root block The first physical block of a disk partition is the loader block It contains the bootstrap code that the BIOS loads and then executes to load an OS from the partition If a disk hasn t been partitioned e g it s a floppy this block is the first physical block on the disk The root block is the second block of a QNX 4 partition It s structured as a standard directory and contains a label field and the inode information for these special files e the root directory of the filesystem usually e inodes e boot e altboot The files boo
454. t Display the visitor s browser information Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 373 Security precautions 2005 QNX Software Systems lt config timefmt SA B d y gt This file last modified lt echo vars LAST_MODIFIED gt Display the date the page was last modified lt include virtual myfile shtml gt Include the file myfile shtm1 as inline HTML in the web page lt exec cgi counter pl gt Execute the CGI script counter p1 and put the output on the web page lt config cmdecho on gt lt exec cmd cd tmp 1s gt Display the contents of the tmp directory on the web page Data server method You can also handle dynamic HTML by using a data server process ds A data server lets multiple threads share data without regard for process boundaries Since the embedded web server supports SSI we ve extended this support by adding the ability to talk to the data server Now you can have a process updating the data server about the state of a hardware device while the embedded web server accesses that state in a decoupled but reliable manner For more information about the data server process and an example device monitoring application see the documentation for ds in the Utilities Reference Security precautions When you choose the directory for your data files we recommend that you e Don t place any sensitive files
455. t also 1s dev io net use tracelogger lprq lpr mkdir stty mv qnxinstall echo PATH export PATH new path see Utilities in this chapter or the docs for ksh lpr sin pidin and ps mv cp x continued Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 61 Neutrino for MS DOS users 2005 QNX Software Systems DOS command Neutrino command s runas schtasks shutdown sort taskkill tasklist time tracerpt tracert type ver xcopy diskcomp su crontab shutdown sort kill or slay sin pidin and ps date and rte traceprinter traceroute cat uname a cp Or pax These steps are the Neutrino equivalent to the DOS diskcomp command 1 Copy the master disk to a file cp dev fd0 referencecopy Compare other disks with the copy of the master file cmp referencecopy dev fd0 Copy the master file to a new floppy cp referencecopy dev fd0 62 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Neutrino for MS DOS users MS DOS local command interpreter variables The following table lists some builtin MS DOS local command interpreter variables and their equivalent Neutrino environment variables or commands DOS Local Neutrino equivalent CD PWD pwd COMPUTERNAME HOSTNAME SCOMSPEC SHELL SDATES Run the date utility date ERRORLEVELS see Parameters in the documentation for ksh SHOMEDRIVES Neutrino doesn t use dr
456. t and altboot contain images of the operating system that can be loaded by the QNX bootstrap loader Normally the QNX loader loads the OS image stored in the boot file But if the altboot file isn t empty you can load the image stored in it For more information see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter Bitmap blocks October 6 2005 Several consecutive blocks follow the root block The bitmap blocks form the bitmap for the QNX 4 partition One bit exists for each block on the partition thus one bitmap block is used for every 4096 disk blocks corresponding to 2M of disk space If the value of a bit is zero the corresponding block is unused Unused bits at the end of the last bitmap block for which there are no corresponding disk blocks are turned on Bit assignments start with the least significant bit of byte 0 of the first bitmap block which corresponds to QNX 4 block 1 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 413 QNX 4 disk structure 2005 QNX Software Systems Root directory The root directory follows the bitmap blocks The root directory is a normal directory see the Directories section with two exceptions e Both dot and dot dot are links to the same inode information namely the root directory inode in the root block e The root directory always has entries for the bitmap inodes boot and altboot files These entries are provided so pro
457. t has been completely unlinked This behavior is part of that stipulated by POSIX and common UNIX practice Directory links Although you can t create hard links to directories each directory has two hard coded links already built in dot dot dot The filename dot refers to the current directory dot dot refers to the previous or parent directory in the hierarchy Note that if there s no predecessor dot dot also refers to the current directory For example the dot dot entry of is simply you can t go further up the path There s no POSIX requirement for a filesystem to include or entries some filesystems including flash filesystems and dev shmem don t Symbolic links 222 A symbolic link is a special file that usually has a pathname as its data When the symbolic link is named in an I O request by open for example the link portion of the pathname is replaced by the link s data and the path is reevaluated Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems QNX 4 filesystem October 6 2005 Symbolic links are a flexible means of pathname indirection and are often used to provide multiple paths to a single file Unlike hard links symbolic links can cross filesystems and can also link to directories In the following example the directories net node1 usr fred and net node2 usr barney are
458. t incorporates various specialized editors for creating C and C programs buildfiles and so on For more information see the IDE User s Guide You ll find other editors in the third party repository including AbiWord Emacs JED Vim and Workspace Supported editors vi 148 Yov ll find a version of vi on every UNIX style operating system It s actually the Visual Interface to an editor called ex To start vi type vi filename The vi editor has two modes Command mode The keyboard is mapped to a set of command shortcuts used to navigate and edit text vi commands consist of one or more letters but ex commands start with a colon Insert mode Lets you type normally To switch to command mode press Esc to switch to input mode press one of e Iori to insert at the beginning of the current line or before the cursor Chapter 7 e Using Editors October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Supported editors e Aora to append text at the end of the current line or after the cursor e Oor o to open a new line above or below the cursor The two modes can make vi very confusing for a new user by default vi doesn t tell you which mode you re in If you type this when you re in command mode set showmode the editor indicates the current mode in the lower right corner of the display If you always want this option set you can add this command without the colon to the profile for vi
459. t to Press Move the backmost window to the front of the window stack Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI Alt Esc continued October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Hotkeys and shortcuts If you want to Press Cycle through the Alt Shift Esc windows Cycle forward or Ctrl Alt Enter or Ctrl Alt Backspace backward through the consoles Go to console n Ctrl Alt n where n is a digit from 1 through 9 Display the Desktop Alt Enter Menu Photon skips any empty virtual consoles when you cycle through them The wmswitch process which Photon starts automatically provides these shortcuts If you want to Press Cycle through the applications Alt Tab Cycle in reverse order though the applications Alt Shift Tab Exiting Photon A October 6 2005 If you want to exit Photon you can press Ctrl Alt Shift Backspace CAUTION Before entering this command make sure that no applications or utilities are running on your computer If there are files may be left open Moreover if you reboot when a critical update is in progress the filesystem might need maintenance Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 103 Photon environment variables 2005 QNX Software Systems If you don t want anyone to be able to use this method to exit Photon specify the b option on the input driver for your system For more informati
460. t topic after using the File gt Forward Alt gt File Back command Move up a level if you ve opened a File Up Ctrl U folder Open the topics pane if it s closed View View Topics Ctrl T Open the search results panel if it s View View Search Results Ctrl S closed View where the currently displayed View Where topic is located in the topics list View a list of previously viewed topics View History List Ctrl Y The online documentation also includes some navigation buttons at the top and bottom of each file ld Contents ae Next Index Navigation buttons in the online docs The Contents button moves you up in the document e Ina prose book it typically takes you to About This Guide e Ina reference book it takes you to the listing of items that start with a given letter For example if you re looking at the docs for abs this button takes you to the list of the functions that start with A 90 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Surfing the web with Voyager Viewing more than one topic at once You can view several topics at once by opening topics in a new topic window Each open topic window is indicated by a tab above the topic pane To open a new topic pane select File New Section or press Ctrl N You can view any open topic by clicking on its tab To close the current topic select File Close Section or press Ct
461. tab Use the Print tab to configure the way Voyager prints pages Select one of the four corners of the page icon to view the current header or footer format You can e enter a new format as listed under Formatting Codes in the dialog e click Disable to disable that header or footer e click Default to set the header or footer to the default setting Applications tab Use the Applications tab to configure helper applications for MIME content on web pages You can e click New Type to enter information about a new MIME type e click Edit to edit the currently selected MIME type e click Remove to delete the currently selected MIME type from the list Connecting to other systems Photon supports the following methods for connecting between computers running Photon e Phditto a self hosted utility that lets you view and interact with another Photon workspace in a network e Phindows a connectivity tool that lets you connect a Microsoft Windows platform to Photon and Photon applications on a remote Neutrino computer Phditto The phditto utility lets you connect to a Photon session that s running on another computer You can connect to an existing Photon session or start a new one This utility lets you interact with the remote Photon session as though you were working directly on that October 6 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 97 Connecting to other systems 2005 QNX Software Systems Phindows node
462. table to the HOME ph phapps configuration file For example ped amp pterm amp helpviewer amp If the file doesn t exist you need to create it and make it executable by changing its properties with the File Manager or by typing chmod x ph phapps ration tools Photon provides various configuration tools that let you change your Photon settings You can run them all from the command line and some you can start from the shelf or Launch menu Appearance pwmopts Appearance in the shelf or Launch gt Configure Appearance Select the background colors pattern and image settings as well as title alignment and window behavior including whether to e drag a full window or just its outline e assign keyboard focus by clicking in a window or have focus follow your pointer Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 83 Configuration tools 2005 QNX Software Systems e bring a window to the front by clicking in it Select the Background tab to set the desktop color and pattern or to select an image for the desktop backdrop Fonts fontadmin Map font substitutions set options such as anti aliasing and configure Asian identification For more information see The right fonts in Configuring Your Environment Graphics phgrafx Graphics in the shelf or Launch gt Configure Graphics Select graphics settings for Photon When you run phgrafx you can select from a list of available graphics mo
463. tarts In this chapter What happens when you boot 161 Loading a Neutrino image 164 diskboot 165 diskroot 169 etc system sysinit 170 Device enumeration 172 ete re d re sysinit 176 rc local 177 tinit 178 Troubleshooting 178 October 6 2005 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 159 2005 QNX Software Systems What happens when you boot What exactly happens when you start up your system depends on the hardware this chapter gives a general description You need to log in as root in order to change any of the files that the system runs when it starts up What happens when you boot When you boot your system the CPU is reset and it executes whatever is at its reset vector This is usually a BIOS on x86 boxes but on other platforms it might be a ROM monitor or it might be a direct jump into some IPL code for that board After a ROM monitor runs it generally jumps to the IPL and a BIOS might do this as well or it might jump directly to the start of the OS image October 6 2005 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 161 What happens when you boot 2005 QNX Software Systems 162 Reset Ty ROM monitor BIOS NS IPL OS boot image procnto B Boot script Initialization scripts and programs Booting a Neutrino system The IPL copies the boot image into memory and jumps to the startup The startup code initializes the hardware fills the system page with inform
464. tarts the driver devi dyna using the SC4 protocol 4 and a file descriptor that s attached to serial port 1 a d dev ser1 When you start the driver for the first time it returns an error stating that it can t read the calibration file To calibrate the touch screen use the calib utility while running Photon Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 325 Audio cards 2005 QNX Software Systems Audio cards ISA cards By default the operating system detects your audio card The enumerators identify the card and use io audio to start it Audio drivers in Neutrino are very simple to initialize When you use io audio you can use the d option to pass the driver io audio vv d audiope amp To see what other options you can use see the documentation for io audio in the Utilities Reference and for your specific card If the operating system doesn t detect your card properly you can manually start the driver In order to do this you need to identify the card You can find a list of supported hardware on our website see the introduction to this chapter ISA cards are either Plug and Play or not You typically have to manually set up non PnP ISA devices In order to identify your device you need to have the manual for your device or have a way to contact your device s manufacturer e g via their website There isn t currently a Neutrino utility that lists the ISA devices that are installed on a system Non
465. tation we use a forward slash as a delimiter in all pathnames including those pointing to Windows files We also generally follow POSIX UNIX filesystem conventions Assumptions e We assume that QNX Neutrino is already installed and running on your computer e This guide is intended for all users of a QNX Neutrino system from system administrators to end users e The online version of this guide contains links to various books throughout our entire documentation set if you don t have the entire set installed on your system you ll naturally get some bad link errors e g File not found October 6 2005 About This Guide XXVii Assumptions 2005 QNX Software Systems Disable PnP aware OS in the BIOS xxviii About This Guide October 6 2005 Chapter 1 Getting to Know the OS In this chapter How QNX Neutrino compares to other operating systems 3 How Neutrino is unique 5 October 6 2005 Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS 1 2005 QNX Software Systems How QNX Neutrino compares to other operating systems How QNX Neutrino compares to other UNIX October 6 2005 operating systems This section describes how the QNX Neutrino RTOS compares to UNIX and Microsoft Windows from a user s not a developer s perspective For more details about Neutrino s design and the philosophy behind it see the System Architecture guide If you re familiar with UNIX style operating syst
466. tches 236 packages file 236 packets broadcast 346 dropped 351 multicast 346 oversized 351 received 346 transmitted 345 346 pal file extension 140 palette file pterm 107 palette video 357 parallel ports 125 338 October 6 2005 parameter substitution 47 parent directory 116 222 417 partitions archiving 404 blocks 413 421 checking directory structure 422 creating 218 key components on disk 412 loader 164 mounting 168 root directory 414 scanning for consistency 424 party conf 129 passwd command 3 24 27 configuring 27 users removing 29 passwd file 20 entries 21 users removing 29 passwords etc pwlock 23 29 etc group 22 users removing 29 etc passwd 21 users removing 29 etc shadow 23 users removing 29 access permissions 20 backup files 32 129 bypassing 177 changing 24 27 characteristics of 24 database 20 forgotten 25 groups not supported 22 protecting encrypted 21 Index 549 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems removing 29 pasting command line 43 patches 236 PATH 54 63 65 185 187 372 DOS version 63 security 54 path DOS command 59 pathconf 466 PATHEXT DOS variable 63 PATH_INFO 372 pathname delimiter in QNX Momentics documentation XXiV pathnames about 114 absolute 115 indirection 222 mapping 8 119 maximum length 467 relative 115 truncating 468 pattern matching awk 206 grep 47 209 perl 206 pax 399 403 405 PC Cards 327 information displaying 328 PC
467. tely processes the keys that you use to edit the command line including completing commands and 42 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Shell filenames When you press Enter the shell processes the command line 1 The shell breaks the command line into tokens that are delimited by whitespace or by the special characters that the shell processes 2 As it forms words the shell builds commands e simple commands usually programs that you want to run e g less my_file e compound commands including reserved words grouping constructs and function definitions You can also specify multiple commands on the command line 3 The shell processes aliases recursively 4 The shell does any required substitutions including parameters commands and filenames 5 The shell does any redirection 6 The shell matches the remaining commands in this order special builtins functions regular builtins executables To override the order in which the shell processes the command line you use quoting to change the meaning of the special characters The sections that follow give the briefest descriptions of these steps ksh is a very powerful command interpreter For more details see its entry in the Utilities Reference Editing the command line The Korn shell supports emacs style commands that let you edit the command line October 6 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 43 Shel
468. tems have an existing group techies and want to add zeke to the group change techies x 101 michel jim sue to techies x 101 michel jim sue zeke You should do this at a time when you re certain no users or programs are trying to use the etc group file Troubleshooting 32 Here are some problems you might encounter while working with passwords and user accounts The passwd utility seems to hang after I change my password The passwd utility uses the etc pwlock file as a lock while updating the password database If the file already exists passwd won t run If the system crashes during the update and etc pwlock still exists passwd refuses to work until the system administrator removes the file If the password files are left in an inconsistent state as a result of the crash the system administrator should also copy the backup files etc oshadow and etc opasswd to etc shadow and etc passwd to prevent additional problems Why can t I log in in graphical mode If you enter your user name and password to the graphical login utility phlogin2 or phlogin and it silently returns you to the blank login form then e Your user name and password don t match an account in the system user names and passwords are both case sensitive or Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting e Your account has a login shell that isn t a stan
469. ter is down The printer has been marked as being unavailable with lpre Warning no daemon present The 1pd process overseeing the spooling queue as specified in the lock file in that directory doesn t exist This normally occurs only when the daemon has unexpectedly died Check the error log file for the printer and the syslogd log to diagnose the problem To restart an 1pd type lprc restart printer no space on remote waiting for queue to drain This implies that there isn t enough disk space on the remote machine If the file is large enough there will never be enough space on the remote even after the queue on the remote is empty The solution here is to move the spooling queue or make more free space on the remote machine lprrm error messages lprrm printer cannot restart printer daemon This case is the same as when 1pr prints that the daemon can t be started 306 Chapter 14 e Printing October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting lprc error messages couldn t start printer This case is the same as when lpr reports that the daemon can t be started cannot examine spool directory Error messages beginning with cannot are usually because of incorrect ownership or protection mode of the lock file spooling directory or lpre program lpd error messages The 1pd utility can log many different messages using syslogd Most of these messages are about files that can t be opened an
470. ternate OS image that s loaded if you press ESC during bootup see Controlling How Neutrino Starts A system file that contains a bitmap representing the disk regions in use by the filesystem Each block is represented by one bit if the bit is set the filesystem is using the block You must preserve the integrity of this file to prevent disk corruption After an unexpected shutdown run chkfsys to walk through the entire filesystem and validate this file s contents correcting them if necessary For more information see QNX 4 filesystem in Working with Filesystems and chkfsys in the Utilities Reference On a bootable filesystem this file contains the primary OS image that s loaded by the secondary boot loader on bootup For more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts as well as QNX Neutrino and QNX 4 bootloader partitions in the Neutrino Technical Notes A file that indicates which QNX 4 filesystem to mount as For more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts Contains additional data pointing to extra inode blocks required by files that occupy more than one extent i e more than one contiguous region on the disk device For more information see QNX 4 filesystem in Working with Filesystems 122 Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Where everything is stored bin boot October 6 2005 The directory also contains platform spe
471. tha tgt extension specify runnable targets within see Target files below e Other items beginning with a period are ignored For all other files the plugin creates a menu item Here s what happens when you select an item e If the file is a symbolic link it s resolved to the file that it points to e If the file is executable the plugin executes it e If the file isn t executable the plugin tries to determine an appropriate viewer for the file using the Photon file association mechanism see pfm in the Utilities Reference e Failing all else selecting the item does nothing For all items except tgt files the launchmenu so plugin uses the filename as the text to display for that item You can use any characters in the filename within the constraints of the underlying filesystem the plugin assumes that these filenames use UTF 8 encoding The ampersand amp takes on special meaning the plugin interprets the character that follows as an accelerator key for that item If you want to display a literal ampersand specify it as amp amp in the filename 76 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Modifying the Launch menu Target files October 6 2005 The launchmenu so plugin uses target tgt files to give you more control than simple files give over launchable targets and how they re represented within the menu You can use target files to spe
472. the program creates a rc rtc file for you that contains the above command After setting up the clock sysinit sets the HOSTNAME environment variable to be the name of the host system It gets this name from the hostname command or from etc HOSTNAME if that doesn t succeed A hostname can consist only of letters numbers and hyphens and must not start or end with a hyphen For more information see RFC 952 8 10 11 Then sysinit runs etc re d re devices to enumerate your system s devices see Device enumeration below This starts io net as well as various other drivers depending on the hardware detected If etc system config usegnet exists and io net is running sysinit initializes Neutrino native networking see the Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing chapter in this guide and npm qnet so in the Utilities Reference Next sysinit runs the system initialization script etc re d re sysinit see below If that fails sysinit tries to become a sh or if that fails a fesh so that you at least have a shell if all else fails Device enumeration Neutrino uses a device enumerator manager process enum devices to detect all known hardware devices on the system and to start the 172 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Device enumeration October 6 2005 appropriate drivers It s called by the etc rce d re devices sc
473. the maximum number of files that a process can have open type getconf _SC_OPEN_MAX In general you can t change the value of the configurable limits they re called configurable because the system can set them The Neutrino libraries provide various functions that you can use in a program to work with configurable limits pathconf Get the value of a configurable limit that s associated with a path sysconft Get the value of a limit for the entire system setrlimit Change the value of certain limits For example you can use this function to limit the number of files that a process can open this limit also depends on the value of the F option to procnto Filesystem limits 466 Under Neutrino filesystems aren t part of the kernel or core operating system they re provided by separately loadable processes or libraries This means that e There s no one set limit or rule for filesystems under Neutrino the limits depend on the filesystem in question and on the process that provides access to that filesystem e You can provide your own filesystem process or layer that can almost transparently override or change many of the underlying values The sections that follow give the limits for the supported filesystems Note the following Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Filesystem limits e Lengths for filenames and pathnames are in bytes n
474. the second would be 1 2 and the third 1 3 CVS automatically assigns the numbers and uses them internally You ll have to use these numbers on many occasions The changes in foo c are cumulative so revision 1 3 contains all the changes made between 1 1 and 1 2 as well as the changes made between 1 2 and 1 3 Basic operations How does CVS know when a file has changed Does it create a new revision every time you save a file You don t actually manipulate files directly in the repository Instead you create a copy of the repository on your hard disk You make any changes there and when you re satisfied with the changes you tell CVS to put those changes into the repository and create a new revision This process is called checking in The check in is the point at which you enter the reason for the change made How does your local copy of the repository get created This is the opposite of checking in Checking out creates a copy of the repository complete with state information Normally you ll want to take a snapshot of the current state of the repository but there are times when you want more control over which revisions of files are checked out There are many options for this including using symbolic names and explicit dates Repositories To check files in and out you must first create a repository For brand new projects you create new files and add them to the repository as you go For existing projects that aren t u
475. them Submit a line of input or start a new Enter line Recall a command see below Suspend the displaying of output Resume the displaying of output Attempt to kill a process Indicate end of input EOF Clear the terminal T or 4 up or down arrow Ctrl S Ctrl Q Ctrl C or Ctrl Break Ctrl D Ctrl L When you use the up or down arrow the character device driver passes a back or forward command to the shell which recalls the actual command Physical and virtual consoles The display adapter the screen and the system keyboard are collectively referred to as the physical console which is controlled by a console driver Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Character device drivers October 6 2005 Some systems don t include a console driver For example embedded systems might include only a serial driver devc ser The deve con and deve tcon drivers are currently supported only on x86 platforms To let you interact with several applications at once Neutrino permits multiple sessions to be run concurrently by means of virtual consoles These virtual consoles are usually named dev con1 dev con2 etc Photon provides virtual consoles even if your system doesn t include a console driver see Using the Photon microGUI When the system starts devc con it can specify how many virtual consoles to enable by specifying the n In a
476. ther UNIX like operating systems Neutrino pathname components are separated by a forward slash This is unlike Microsoft operating systems which use a backslash To explore the files and directories on your system use the 1s utility This is the equivalent of dir in MS DOS For more information see Basic commands in Using the Command Line or 1s in the Utilities Reference Absolute and relative pathnames There are two types of pathname Absolute paths Pathnames that begin with a slash specify locations that are relative to the root of the pathname space For example usr 1ib libmalloc so 2 Relative paths Pathnames that don t begin with specify locations relative to your current working directory October 6 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 115 Filenames and pathnames 2005 QNX Software Systems For example if your current directory is home fred a relative path of ph helpviewer is the same as an absolute path of home fred ph helpviewer The pathname home fred ph helpviewer actually specifies a directory not a regular file You can t tell by looking at a pathname whether the path points to a regular file a directory a symbolic link or some other file type To determine the type of a file use file or ls ld The one exception to this is a pathname that ends with which always indicates a directory If you use the F option to 1s the utility displays a slash at the end
477. ther files You also need to decide whether or not to compress your data to reduce the storage requirements for your backups The time lost to compression and decompression may be offset to a degree by the reduced time it takes to write or read the compressed data to media or to transfer it through a network To reduce the expense of compression you may choose to compress the backup copies of your data as a background task after the data has been copied possibly days or weeks after to reduce the storage requirements of older backups while keeping newer backups as accessible as possible Controlling your backup You should back up often enough so that you can recover data that s still current or can be made current with minimal work In a software development group this may range from a day to a week Each day of out of date backup will generally cost you a day of redevelopment If you re saving financial or point of sale data then daily or even twice daily backups are common It s a good idea to maintain off site storage Archiving your data 402 You can store backups of each of your files separately or you can store them in an archive with other files that you re backing up Files stored in an archive can be more readily identified as belonging to a certain time or machine by naming the archive more easily transferred in bulk to other systems transfer of a single archive file and can sometimes be more readily compr
478. ties Reference 126 Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Where everything is stored etec October 6 2005 dev tty A virtual device owned by the process manager procnto that resolves to the controlling terminal device associated with the session of any process that opens the file This is useful for programs that may have closed their standard input standard output or standard error and later wish to write to the terminal device dev ttypx dev ttyqr dev ttyrx The slave side of the corresponding dev ptypx file The program being controlled typically uses one of these files for its standard input standard output and standard error dev zero Supplies an endless stream of bytes having a value of zero The etc directory contains host specific system files and programs used for administration and configuration including etc acl conft Specifies permitted operations on a defined SNMP context See etc acl conf in the Utilities Reference etc autoconnect Automatic TCP IP connection configuration script See etc autoconnect in the Utilities Reference etc bootptab Network boot protocol server configuration file See etc bootptab in the Utilities Reference etc config A directory that contains system configuration files such as the ttys file that tinit uses to configure terminal devices Chapter 6 e Working with Files 127 Where everything is stored
479. ties for more information see the Utilities Reference The fdisk utility creates and maintains the partition block on a hard disk This block is compatible with other operating systems and may be maintained by other OS versions of fdisk although ours has the advantage of recognizing QNX specific information If the partition loader is missing or damaged fdisk can create it We recommend that you keep a hard copy of the partition table information for every disk in your network The dinit utility creates but the QNX 4 filesystem maintains the following e loader block e root block e bitmap blocks e root directory e inodes file e longfilenames file Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 421 File maintenance utilities 2005 QNX Software Systems chkfsys dcheck zap If something destroys the first few blocks of your filesystem you can try to recover them by using the r option to dinit and then running chkfsys For more information see dinit in the Utilities Reference The chkfsys utility is your principal filesystem maintenance tool This utility e checks the directory structure of an entire disk partition reports any inconsistencies and fixes them if possible e verifies overall disk block allocation e writes anew bitmap upon your approval The chkfsys utility assumes that the root block is valid If the root block isn t valid chk sys complains and gives up you ll need to tr
480. til it s gone 2 Open the appropriate file or files using the text editor of your choice and make the necessary changes 3 Unlock the password database by removing etc pwlock October 6 2005 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 23 Managing your own account 2005 QNX Software Systems Managing your own account As a regular non root user you can change your own password You can also customize your environment by modifying the configuration files in your home directory see Configuring Your Environment Changing your password 24 To change your password use the passwd utility if you re using Photon you can use phuser Either utility prompts you for your current password and then for a new one You have to repeat the new password to guard against typographical errors In phuser you can also choose an icon to represent yourself when you log in Depending on the password rules that the system administrator has set passwd may require that you enter a password of a certain length or one that contains certain elements such as a combination of letters numbers and punctuation If the password you select doesn t meet the criteria passwd asks you to choose another If other users can access your system e g it s connected to the Internet has a dial in modem or is physically accessible by others be sure to choose a password that will secure your account from unauthorized use You should choose passwords that
481. tility qnxinstall manipulates this file Its default location is etc system package packages The package filesystem also supports patching When patches are issued between releases the files for the patch are placed into a package as well The patch package overrides existing files from other packages without actually deleting them 236 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Inflator filesystem Inflator filesystem Neutrino provides an inflator virtual filesystem It s a resource manager that sits in front of other filesystems and decompresses files that were previously compressed by the deflate utility You typically use inflator when the underlying filesystem is a flash filesystem Using it can almost double the effective size of the flash memory For more information see the Utilities Reference The inflator utility is available only in the Flash Filesystem amp Embedding Technology Development Kit TDK Troubleshooting Here are some problems that you might have with filesystems How can I make a specific flash partition read only Unmount and remount the partition like this flashctl p raw_mountpoint u mount t flash r raw mountpoint mountpoint where raw_mountpoint indicates the partition e g dev fsO0px How can I determine which drivers are currently running 1 Create a list of pathname mountpoints find proc mount name 0 9
482. tioning devices can be planted in the POSIX pathname space as well Developers system administrators and users also appreciate Neutrino s adherence to POSIX the realtime responsiveness that comes from our devotion to short nonpreemptible code paths and the general robustness of our microkernel Neutrino s microkernel architecture lets developers scale the code down to fit in a very constrained embedded system but Neutrino is powerful enough to use as a desktop OS Neutrino runs on multiple platforms including x86 ARM MIPS PPC and SH 4 and it supports symmetric multiprocessing SMP Neutrino also features the Qnet protocol which provides transparent distributed processing you can access the files or processes on any machine on your network as if they were on your own machine Some of the functionality that this guide describes is available in Technology Development Kits TDKs kits that augment the base Neutrino OS platform with specialized value added technologies The TDKs currently include e Flash Filesystem amp Embedding e Extended Networking Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS 7 How Neutrino is unique 2005 QNX Software Systems e Symmetric Multiprocessing SMP e Multimedia e 3D Graphics e Critical Process Monitoring CPM We also supply Software Kits such as the Transparent Distributed Processing TDP SK Resource managers 8 A resource manager is a server program that accepts messa
483. to Filter be converted l i i B gt dev par gt File of the correct type Printing with spooler Normally spooler stores a file to be printed in a directory on disk then tells the filter where to get the file If you need to cut down on disk memory you can use the F option of spooler to disable the spooling of print files This option causes the spooler to send sections of a file to be printed directly to a FIFO buffer in piecemeal fashion the filter receives data to be printed from the FIFO and prints that part of the file When the buffer has been emptied spooler loads the next section of the file into the buffer and so on until the whole file has been printed October 6 2005 Chapter 14 Printing 301 Printing with spooler 2005 QNX Software Systems If you ask a Photon application for a print preview it sends the output to the preview utility If you want to view or manage the print queue start prjobs from the command line or select Utilities Print Manager from the Launch menu For more information see the Utilities Reference Remote printing over Qnet To print across Qnet print to net nodename dev printers printer_name spool The spooler program for the printer must be running on nodename Remote printing over TCP IP If you want to set up spooler to print on a remote printer you can pipe the print job to lpr This takes advantage of the fact that the filte
484. to locate faults Some of the typical queries are Are io net and the drivers running Is the TCP IP protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed What is the nameserver information How do I map hostnames to IP addresses How do I get the network status How do I make sure I m connected to other hosts How do I display information about an interface controller Are io net and the drivers running As mentioned before io net is the framework used to connect drivers and protocols In order to troubleshoot this use the pidin command pidin P io net mem Look for the TCP IP shared object in the output pid tid name prio STATE code data stack 77839 1 sbin io net 100 SIGWAITINFO 56K 384K 8192 516K 77839 2 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 68K 77839 3 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 68K 77839 4 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 68K 77839 5 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 68K 77839 6 sbin io net 200 RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 132K 77839 7 sbin io net 21r RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 132K ldqnx so 2 b0300000 300K 16K npm tcpip v4 so b8200000 584K 140K devn e1900 so b82b5000 56K 8192 272 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting You should see the npm t cpip v4 so or npm tcpip v6 so shared object and another for a network driver in this case devn e1900 so If you see npm ttcpip so instead of npm tcpip v4 so or npm tcpip v6 so in the abov
485. to run chkfsys with the f option chkfsys f dev hd0t79 This invokes a special read only mode of chkfsys that can give you an idea of the overall sanity of your filesystem Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 425 What to do if your system will no longer boot 2005 QNX Software Systems Recovering from a bad block in the middle of a file Hard disks occasionally develop bad blocks as they age In some cases you might be able to recover most or even all the data in a file containing a bad block Some bad blocks are the result of power failures or of weak media on the hard disk In these cases sometimes simply reading then rewriting a block will restore the block for a short period of time This may allow you to copy the entire file somewhere else before the block goes bad again This procedure certainly can t hurt and is often worth a try To examine the blocks within a file use the spatch utility When you get to a bad block spatch should report an error but it may have actually read a portion of good bytes from that block Writing that same block back will often succeed At the same time spatch will rewrite a correct CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check that will make the block good again but with possibly incorrect data You can then copy the entire file somewhere else and then zap the previously damaged file To complete the procedure you mark the marginal block as bad by adding it to the bad
486. to use a floppy disk you need to ensure that the floppy controller is enabled in the BIOS and that the BIOS is configured to recognize the correct type of floppy drive e g 1 44MB 2 88MB The driver uses these locations as default e I O port 0x3 0 e IRQ6 e DMA 2 If your controller is located at a different address you can change these locations in the driver s options 314 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Hard disks The default cache size specified by io b1k so is 15 of system memory which is excessive for devb fdc You ll probably want to reduce it to something more reasonable devb fde blk cache 128K amp The driver creates a dev f dx entry where x is the number of the floppy drive starting at 0 If no entry appears the BIOS settings might be incorrect or there could be a problem with the controller Check the output from sloginfo for clues Once you have an entry in the dev directory you need to mount the floppy disk The mount command detects the type of filesystem you re using e g DOS QNX 4 but you can also specify it on the command line e To mount a DOS formatted floppy disk type mount tdos dev fd0 fs dos_floppy Use mkdosfs to format DOS floppy disks and DOS hard drives This utility supports FAT 12 16 32 e To mount a QNX 4 formatted floppy disk type mount tqnx4 dev fd0 fs qnx_floppy You don t need to remount the drive whe
487. to you It s a good place to store your own binaries and scripts Your entry in the password database specifies your home directory see etc passwd in Managing User Accounts and the HOME environment variable stores this directory s name Your home directory is also where you store information that configures your environment when you log in By default applications pick this spot to install configuration files Configuration files are generally preceded by a period and run either when you log in such as profile or when you start an application such as jedrc Photon applications are a special case Applications that are run in Photon generally store their configurations in the HOME ph directory If you want to automatically start any applications when you start Photon put the commands in your HOME ph phapps file Configuring your shell There are many files that configure your environment this section describes some of the more useful ones e etc profile e SHOME profile e ksh s startup file etc profile The login shell executes etc profile if this file exists and is executable This file does the shell setup that applies to all users so you ll be interested in it if you re the system administrator you need to log in as root in order to edit it The etc profile file 184 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Configuring your
488. tory AbiWord is a free word processing editor that you can use to edit Microsoft Word documents It s supported on a variety of operating systems including Neutrino To start this editor choose Editors AbiWord from the desktop s Launch menu The interface looks like this 152 Chapter 7 e Using Editors October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Third party editors Emacs October 6 2005 Edit View ei D gt Page 1 1 Importing Document INS default For more information see http www abisource com Emacs Editor macros is a powerful and extendable editor that s available on many systems Although it can be initially confusing Emacs offers a wide variety of useful builtin features to supplement its text editing capabilities including searching and mail You can also expand Emacs s core functionality by writing your own macros in Emacs Lisp To start Emacs type emacs filename Emacs commands are usually keychords or a series of keychords For example if you re told to press Ctrl X Ctrl C you should press Ctrl X release it and then press and release Ctrl C The Ctrl key is frequently abbreviated as simply C so the above command could be Chapter 7 e Using Editors 153 Third party editors 2005 QNX Software Systems written as C X C C If a command starts with Esc you press and release the Esc key and then press the next key in the command
489. try refers to the directory itself by pointing to the entry within the parent directory that describes this directory The second entry is always for the dot dot link This entry refers to the parent directory by pointing to the first block of the parent directory Every directory entry either defines a file or points to an entry within the inodes file Inode entries are used when the filename exceeds 16 characters or when two or more names are linked to a single file If you ve enabled support for long filenames the root directory of the filesystem also includes the longfilenames file which stores information about files whose names are longer than 48 characters The first extent if any of a file is described in the directory inode entry Additional file extents require a linked list of extent blocks whose header is also in the directory inode entry Each extent block can hold location information for up to 60 extents Files with names greater than 16 characters and files that are links to other files are implemented with a special form of directory entry These entries have the QNX4FS FILE LINK bit 0x08 set in the i_status field For these files a portion of the directory entry is moved into the inodes file Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 417 QNX 4 disk structure 2005 QNX Software Systems Extent blocks 418 48 52 53 57 63 ao wn A O Directory entry l _ fname 48
490. ty Software section of the Download Center In either case you have to create an ISO image of the data that you want to burn to a CD You can do this with mkisofs a utility that s included with cdrecord Before you can create an ISO image you need to arrange the files into the directory structure that you want to have on the CD Then use mkisofs like this mkisofs 1 f r joliet quiet V My Label o my_iso_image iso This command creates an ISO image named my_iso_image iso with the label My Label using the Joliet file format allowing full 31 character filenames 1 following all symbolic links when generating the filesystem f and generating SUSP and RR records using the Rock Ridge protocol r Once you ve created the ISO image you can send the image to a system that can burn an ISO image or you can burn it using cdrecord cdrecord v speed 2 dev dev cd0 my_iso_image iso This command burns a CD at dual speed 2 using the CD burner called cdo from the ISO image called my_iso_image iso For more information see the documentation for cdrecord Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 407 Storage choices 2005 QNX Software Systems Ey For a list of supported CD drives see the README file that comes with the cdrecord source code Bootable CDs You can also make the CD bootable using cdrecord and its associated utilities as follows 1 Create a bootable floppy that calls th
491. ual console into a much larger desktop space which is three desktops wide by three desktops high You can run applications in different consoles and switch consoles by using keyboard shortcuts or the World View in the shelf If you right click anywhere on the desktop you see the Desktop Menu which lets you easily run frequently used applications configure Photon or shut down You can customize this menu see below 70 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Overview of Photon October 6 2005 Desktop Menu Terminal Voyager Media Player Installer Help Configure Shutdown Desktop menu The taskbar is the area at the very bottom of the screen It includes by default the Launch button the date and time and icons for applications that are currently running From the taskbar you can click an application icon on the taskbar to hide or show the application click the Launch button to launch an application get help or shut down the Photon session The shelf runs up the right side of your screen and lets you easily launch frequently used applications and utilities configure your system view system resource usage and switch consoles From the shelf you can toggle the appearance of shelf components by clicking on the component category An expanded component category appears with a next to it while a collapsed category appears with a launch an
492. ucture Remote filesystems Storing a second backup on a remote system is often a simple yet effective way to prevent the loss of data For example if you have a basic archive of your code in a separate directory on your local system and then the hard disk breaks down for some unforeseen reason you ve lost your local backup as well Placing a copy on a remote filesystem effectively lowers the chance of losing data we highly recommend it If you place a file on a non Neutrino filesystem you might lose the file s permissions Files under Neutrino like other UNIX systems have special file permissions see Working with Files that are lost if you store individual files on a Windows based filesystem If you create an archive see Archiving your data above the permissions are preserved Other remote backups There are other remote version systems similar to CVS that are available to Neutrino via third party solutions Many of them are free search the Internet for the tools that are right for your company and project QNX 4 disk structure If you ever have a problem with a QNX 4 filesystem you ll need to understand how it stores data on a disk This knowledge will help you recognize and possibly correct damage if you ever have to rebuild a filesystem The lt sys f s_qnx4 h gt header file contains the definitions for the structures that this section describes For an overall description of the QNX 4 file
493. ucture 415 substitution 46 unions 119 discovery 268 disk drivers 167 315 diskboot 165 315 320 booting without 487 diskcomp DOS command 62 diskpart DOS command 59 diskroot file 168 169 disks backing up 409 bitmap 122 414 block allocation verified by chkfsys 422 boot loader 164 October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Index corruption avoiding 122 determining if damaged 420 extents 219 files extending 219 identifying 409 initializing 412 loader blocks 413 partitions 218 412 patching 423 raw browsing 423 recovery procedures 423 regular maintenance procedure 424 restoring bad blocks in middle of file 426 root blocks 413 structure 411 DISPLAY 105 Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol See DVMRP d11 file extension 140 d11 directory 133 DLLs Dynamic Linked Libraries 133 140 dloader 164 DNS Domain Name Service CIFS 227 security 436 documentation online 86 477 keyword index 89 searching 87 Domain Name Service See DNS domain names daemon 266 domains 243 DOS October 6 2005 commands Neutrino equivalents 59 end of line characters converting 4 212 filesystems 224 mounting 168 floppies formatting 315 variables Neutrino equivalents 63 DOS Denial Of Service attacks 437 dot directory link 417 dot dot directory link 417 dot file 211 double buffering 459 down arrow 39 53 drag and drop 85 dragging 83 drawers 73 dribble bits 351 drive letters 117 driverquery Window
494. umming Enabled TCPv6 Transmit Checksumming Enabled TCPv6 Hardware Interrupt 0 0 e eee eee 0x5 DMA Channed Sitt CETERE E ROEE E EGS A 0 T O APEPEULE arians ENA S E N E 0xd400 0xd47f ROM Aperture rouser serant aN E 0 Memory Aperture ooro t tusser oo 6 Mba Sere lenses 0xe6000000 Oxe6000FFF Promiscuous Mode 02 eee eee eee off Multicast Support tin E eee eee Enabled Packets Transmitted OK 2000 104 Bytes Transmitted OK 0200008 10067 Broadcast Packets Transmitted OK 6 Multicast Packets Transmitted OK 1 Memory Allocation Failures on Transmit 0 Packets Received OK 0 ee ee eens 1443 Bytes Received OK 0 e eee eee eee 168393 Broadcast Packets Received OK 427970 Multicast Packets Received OK 37596 Memory Allocation Failures on Receive 0 Single Collisions on Transmit 0 Multiple Collisions on Transmit 0 Deferred Transmits 00 sees eee 0 Late Collision on Transmit errors 0 Transmits aborted excessive collisions 0 Transmits aborted excessive deferrals 0 Transmit Underruns 00 eee eee 0 No Carrier on Transmit 45 0 Jabber detected eee eee eee 0 Receive Alignment errors 0 Received packets with CRC errors
495. un profile If you want to you can change the Terminal item on the shelf so that it executes pterm 1 To do this right click the shelf and choose Setup Select the Terminal entry and change pterm to pterm 1 You should also change the Desktop pop up menu to match edit SHOME ph wm wm menu or run phmenu and add the 1 option to the pterm entry I would like to bypass the login prompt when booting my computer into Photon Is this possible Yes for more information see re local in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter How can I change the language layout of my keyboard Choose the Localization item on the shelf You can choose from several different keyboard configurations see International keyboards in Using the Command Line How can I add files to the Helpviewer such as help files for programs that I install or new documents found on the web I noticed that the File menu doesn t let you bring up a file requester and look for a help file The Helpviewer looks for files with an extension of toc in the usr help product directory Take a look at an existing toc file as well as the Context Sensitive Help chapter in the Photon Programmer s Guide To open an arbitrary file without creating the toc files use the Voyager browser instead of the helpviewer 108 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Troubleshooting October 6 2005 I tried to
496. unzip tar gzor tgz tar z ZOr F melt No matter how robust a filesystem is designed to be there will always be situations in the real world where disk corruption will occur Hardware will fail eventually power will be interrupted and so on The QNX 4 filesystem has been designed to tolerate such catastrophes It is based on the principal that the integrity of the filesystem as a whole should be consistent at all times While most data is held in the buffer cache and written after only a short delay critical filesystem data is written immediately Updates to directories inodes extent blocks and the bitmap are forced to disk to ensure that the filesystem structure on disk is never corrupt i e the data on disk should never be internally inconsistent If a crash occurs you can such utilities as fdisk dinit chkfsys and spatch to detect and repair any damage that happened to files that were open for writing at the time of the crash In many cases you can completely restore the filesystem Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 399 Backup strategies 2005 QNX Software Systems Sometimes the damage may be more severe For example it s possible that a hard disk will develop a bad block in the middle of a file or worse in the middle of a directory or some other critical block Again the utilities we ve provided can help you determine the extent of such damage You can often rebuild the filesystem in such a way
497. ur Environment October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Customizing Photon Customizing Photon Starting applications automatically If you want to run a Photon application whenever Photon starts put it in your HOME ph phapps file Put each command on a separate line For example to start the Photon editor when you start Photon include this line ped amp This file isn t a shell script so don t set any environment variables in it The right fonts October 6 2005 The Photon environment supports a wide variety of font types Any Unicode font should work inside of the Photon environment To configure your fonts run the Photon Font Administration tool fontadmin This tool lets you set up font mappings set global options for fonts and configure Asian Font options Font mappings let you tell the font server what font to substitute for another if the requested font isn t installed or doesn t contain the requested symbol If the symbol can t be found in any mapped font the system displays an empty box in place of the symbol The global options for fonts include Always Anti Alias This turns on anti aliasing which helps fonts look crisp and clean on the screen at practically any resolution Strict International Support If enabled the font manager uses the missing glyph and the font family style and size to locate a font to provide a Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 197 Customi
498. ur local subnetwork You can even run programs on other nodes The Qnet protocol provides transparent networking across a Neutrino network Qnet implements a local area network that s optimized to provide a fast seamless interface between Neutrino workstations whatever the type of hardware For QNX 4 the protocol used for native networking is called FLEET it isn t compatible with Neutrino s Qnet In essence the Qnet protocol extends interprocess communication IPC transparently over a network of microkernels taking advantage of Neutrino s message passing paradigm to implement native networking When you run Qnet entries for all the nodes in your local subnetwork that are running Qnet appear in the net namespace Under QNX 4 you use a double slash followed by a node number to refer to another node For more details see the Native Networking Qnet chapter of the System Architecture guide For information about programming with Qnet see the Transparent Distributed Networking via Qnet chapter of the Programmer s Guide When should you use Qnet October 6 2005 When should you use Qnet and when TCP IP or some other protocol It all depends on what machines you need to connect Qnet is intended for a network of trusted machines that are all running Neutrino and that all use the same endianness It lets these machines share all their resources with little overhead Using Qnet you can use Chapter 12
499. utorials and command summaries online In Neutrino vi is actually a link to elvis see the Utilities Reference The Photon editor ped is a simple graphical editor that s similar to editors that you ll find on other windowing systems It runs in a Photon window so you can t access ped through text consoles or console only systems Chapter 7 e Using Editors October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Supported editors October 6 2005 N Search Type Buffer Marker Help ee A E l E P EE s A Select All line 1 Column 1 Buffer 1 The Photon editor ped If you need to type international characters accents and diacritical marks you ll find ped useful because it supports UTF 8 To type international characters in ped use the compose sequences described in Photon compose sequences in the Unicode Multilingual Support appendix of the Photon Programmer s Guide To start ped choose Editors Ped from the desktop s Launch menu or type ped filename amp in a pterm terminal window For more information about using ped see the Utilities Reference Chapter 7 e Using Editors 151 Third party editors 2005 QNX Software Systems Third party editors AbiWord The third party repository includes at least these editors e AbiWord e Emacs e JED e Vim vi IMproved e Workspace ws Note that we don t support these editors or anything else in the third party reposi
500. utrino less This command lists all the HTML files that contain a string consisting of QNX followed by any characters followed by Neutrino The command line uses find to locate all of the files with an extension of html and passes the list of files to the xargs command which executes the given grep command on each file in turn All of the output from xargs is then passed to less which displays the output one screenful at a time This command uses quoting in various ways to control when the special characters are processed and by which process e If you don t put quotes around the htm1 the shell interprets the and passes to find the list of files in the current directory with an extension of html1 If you quote the htm1 the shell passes the string as is to find which then uses it to match all of the files in this directory and below in the filesystem hierarchy with that extension e Ina similar way if you don t quote the QNX Neut rino string at all the shell generates a list of files that match the pattern Quoting it once QNX Neutrino works for a single invocation of grep but this example has the added complexity of the xargs command e The xargs command takes a command line as its argument and the shell interprets this command line for each item that s passed to xargs If you don t want the QNX Neutrino string to be interpreted by the shell at all you need to put nested quotes around the pattern
501. utrino boxes 2005 QNX Software Systems 8500 14000 Legal 7250 10500 Exec 11000 17000 B 8262 11692 A4 5846 8262 A5 7000 9875 B5 11692 16524 A3 PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes The following script starts the Point to Point Protocol daemon pppd with a chat script waits for the modem to ring answers it and starts PPP services with CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol authentication After PPP services have terminated or an error on modem answer occurs it restarts and waits for the next call bin sh SERIAL_PORT 1 DEFAULT_SERIAL_PORT dev serl1 PPPD usr sbin pppd DO_CHAT chat v ABORT BUSY ABORT CARRIER ABORT ERROR TIMEOUT 32000000 RING ATA TIMEOUT 60 CONNECT d d d STTY bin stty ECHO bin echo LOCAL_IP 10 99 99 1 REMOTE_IP 10 99 99 2 if SSERIAL_PORT then SERIAL_PORT DEFAULT_SERIAL_PORT fi do some initialization SSTTY sane raw lt SERIAL_PORT while true do SECHO Waiting on modem SERIAL_PORT SECHO Starting PPP services PPPD connect SDO_CHAT debug nodetach auth chap SLOCAL_IP REMOTE_IP SERIAL_PORT done 494 Appendix A e Examples October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes The TIMEOUT is 32000000 because it s a long period of time before the timeout takes effect chat doesn t allow an infinite wait The
502. utrino specific security issues Neutrino specific security issues As the above section notes Neutrino is potentially vulnerable to most of the same threats that other UNIX style systems face In addition there are also some issues that are unique to Neutrino Message passing pdebug qconn October 6 2005 Our basic model of operation relies on message passing between the OS kernel process manager and other services There are potential local exploits in that area that wouldn t exist in a system where all drivers live in the same address space as the kernel Of course the potential weakness is outweighed by the demonstrated strength of this model since embedded systems generally aren t overly concerned with local attacks For more information about the microkernel design and message passing see the chapter on the QNX Neutrino microkernel in the System Architecture guide Our remote debug agent pdebug runs on a target system and communicates with the gdb debugger on the host The pdebug agent can run as a dedicated server on a port be spawned from inetd with incoming connections or be spawned by qconn The pdebug agent is generally run as root so anyone can upload download or execute any arbitrary code at root s privilege level This agent was designed to be run on development systems not production machines There s no means of authentication or security and none is planned for the future See the section o
503. v mqueue dev null dev parn dev pci dev phfont dev photon dev pipe A pathname space where entries for message queues appear for more information see mq and mqueue in the Utilities Reference A bit bucket that you can direct data to The data is discarded Parallel ports e g for parallel printers see stty for configuration and devce par for driver details in the Utilities Reference Adopted by the PCI server on the machine this device lets programs communicate with the PCI server See pci in the Utilities Reference Adopted by the Photon font server either io graphics using the phfont so library or phfont running as a separate process This file lets programs communicate with the font server See io graphics and phfont in the Utilities Reference A special file that programs use to attach to a Photon server running on this machine For more information see Photon in the Utilities Reference Adopted by the pipe manager The presence of this file tells other programs such as a startup script built into an OS image that the Pipe manager is successfully running dev ptypx dev ptyqx dev ptyrx The control side of a pseudo terminal device pair Pseudo ttys are numbered with a hexadecimal digit When more than 16 pseudo ttys are present devc pty uses the additional prefixes dev ptygq dev ptyr and so on as necessary to accommodate the additional ttys See deve pty in the Utilities
504. ver Underline links The complete URL of the web page you d like to appear each time you start Voyager Restart Voyager for the new home page to take effect Your email address The IP address of your SMTP server e g news qnx comor10 0 0 100 Enable this if you want the links on web pages to be underlined Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 95 Surfing the web with Voyager 2005 QNX Software Systems Display server errors Enable this if you want error messages to be generated by the host server Use Double Buffering Enable this option to use offscreen contexts for image rendering which makes for faster processing and less flicker UserAgent net front server only The UserAgent string Use 256 colors only Enable this if you want to reduce the amount of image cache required to store images while running your monitor in a high color or true color mode Auto Load Images vserver server only Enable this if you want images to be loaded when a page loads Fit into pane net front server only Toggle the NetFront Smart Fit feature This feature renders web content so that it fits into the width of the browser Disable Exception Dialog Disable alerts from the JavaScript alert function Enable WML net front server only Enable Wireless Markup Language WML support 96 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Connecting to other systems Print
505. vi export VISUAL vi export PS1 hostname s bin pwd gt bind z list Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 201 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems bind I complete esac The parameter is a concatenation of all the single letter options that are set for the script For more information see Parameters in the entry for ksh in the Utilities Reference 202 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment October 6 2005 Chapter 10 Writing Shell Scripts In this chapter What s a script 205 Available shells 205 Running a shell script 207 Example of a Korn shell script 207 Efficiency 211 Caveat scriptor 211 October 6 2005 Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts 203 2005 QNX Software Systems What s a script What s a script Shell scripting at its most basic is taking a series of commands you might type at a command line and putting them into a file so you can reproduce them again at a later date or run them repeatedly without having to type them over again You can use scripts to automate repeated tasks handle complex tasks that might be difficult to do correctly without repeated tries redoing some of the coding or both Such scripts include e etc config sysinit which runs when you boot a Neutrino desktop system see Controlling How Neutrino Starts e usr bin ph which starts Photon see Using the Photon microGUI Available shells October 6
506. vidual bytes within the filename may have any value except the following all values are in hexadecimal e 0x00 through 0x1F all control characters e 0x2F e 0x7F rubout e OxFF If you re using UTF 8 representations of Unicode characters to represent international characters the limit on the filename length will be lower depending on your use of characters in the extended range For more information on UTF 8 and Unicode see the Unicode Multilingual Support appendix in the Photon Programmer s Guide You can use international characters in filenames by using the UTF 8 encoding of Unicode characters If you re using the Photon microGUI this is done transparently you can enter the necessary characters directly from your keyboard and the display shows them correctly within the Photon file manager Filenames containing Chapter 6 e Working with Files October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Where everything is stored UTF 8 characters are generally illegible when viewed from the command line You can also use the ISO Latin1 supplemental and PC character sets for international characters however the appearance of these 8 bit characters depends on the display settings of your terminal and might not appear as you expect from within Photon or in other operating systems that access the files via a network Most other operating systems including Microsoft Windows support UTF 8 Unicode characters and their filenam
507. when you set a configuration string its new value is immediately available to the entire system connection A kernel object used with message passing Connections are created by client threads to connect to the channels made available by servers Once connections are established clients can MsgSend messages over them October 6 2005 Glossary 505 2005 QNX Software Systems console The display adapter the screen and the system keyboard are collectively referred to as the physical console A virtual console emulates a physical console and lets you run more than one terminal session at a time on a machine cooked mode See canonical mode core dump A file describing the state of a process that terminated abnormally critical section A code passage that must be executed serially i e by only one thread at a time The simplest from of critical section enforcement is via a mutex device driver A process that allows the OS and application programs to make use of the underlying hardware in a generic way e g a disk drive a network interface Unlike OSs that require device drivers to be tightly bound into the OS itself device drivers for Neutrino are standard processes that can be started and stopped dynamically As a result adding device drivers doesn t affect any other part of the OS drivers can be developed and debugged like any other application Also device drivers are in their own prot
508. wn network If you re on a network with a small and static over time number of gateways then you can use the route command to manually manipulate the TCP IP routing tables and leave them that way This is a very common configuration If a host has access to the Internet it likely added one static route called a default route This route directs all the TCP IP packets from your host that aren t destined for a host on your local network to a gateway that provides access to the Internet If you re on a network with more than one possible route to the same destination on your network you might need to use dynamic routing This relies on routing protocols to distribute information about the changing state of the network If you need to react to these changes run routed which implements the Routing Information Protocol RIP and RIPv2 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 259 Software components for TCP IP networking 2005 QNX Software Systems There s often confusion between routing and routing protocols The TCP IP stack determines the routing by using routing tables routing protocols let those tables change Software components for TCP IP networking To use TCP IP you need the following software components Client processes npm tcpip so or npm ttcpip so io net N X O Network drivers devn so i al Hardware Components of TCP IP in Neutrino npm ttcpip so Sha
509. wo separate revisions of foo c so now we can see what changed between them and why the changes were made To find out why we need to look at the log messages that were entered every time a commit was performed cvs log foo c RCS file home fred cvs myproj foo c v Working file foo c head 1 2 branch locks strict access list keyword substitution kv total revisions 2 selected revisions 2 description revision 1 2 date 2003 06 03 17 35 43 author fred state Exp lines 2 0 Added comments for clarity revision 1 1 date 2003 06 03 17 19 34 author fred state Exp A file to test the basic functionality of CVS To see what changed between the two revisions use the diff command cvs diff r1 1 foo c Index foo c RCS file home fred cvs myproj foo c v retrieving revision 1 1 retrieving revision 1 2 diff r1 1 r1 2 0al 2 gt This is a file to test cvs gt The last lines starting with diff r1 1 r1 2z show the actual differences using the standard diff format see the Utilities Reference Chapter 17 e Using CVS 389 CVS and directory trees 2005 QNX Software Systems You may have noticed that in the diff command above we specified only one revision by using the r option CVS assumes the second revision is the same as that of foo c in your sandbox We saw from the last status command that the working revision was 1 2 so that s the second revision We could have d
510. xtents e acount of all the blocks in all the extents defined by this extent block e pointers and block counts for each extent e a signature IamXblk The first extent block also contains a redundant pointer to the first file extent also described within the directory inode entry This lets you recover all data in the file by locating this block alone October 6 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 419 File maintenance utilities 2005 QNX Software Systems Files Files or file extents are groupings of blocks described by directory inode entries they have no structure imposed on them by the QNX 4 filesystem Most files in Neutrino have the following overall structure Signatures TMONX in dot entry of each directory Tay VA T dir SS S IamXblk in header of each extent block 4 S s dir file 6 SS Extent ME blocks 0 2 lt 0 0 E AEE a E m A Extent 1 Extent 2 Extent 3 Extent n QNX 4 file structure File maintenance utilities If a crash occurs you can use the following file maintenance and recovery utilities 420 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems File maintenance utilities fdisk dinit October 6 2005 e fdisk e dinit e chkfsys e dcheck e zap e spatch This section gives a brief description of these utili
511. y busy Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 347 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems Late Collision on Transmit errors 348 Late collision errors that occur when a card has transmitted enough of a frame that the rest of the network should be aware that the network is currently in use yet another system on the network still started to transfer a frame onto the line They re the same as regular collision errors but were just detected too late Depending on the protocol these types of errors can be detrimental to the protocol s overall throughput For example a 1 packet loss on the NFS protocol using the default retransmission timers is enough to slow the speed down by approximately 90 If you experience low throughput with your networking check to make sure that you aren t getting these types of errors Typically Ethernet adapters don t retransmit frames that have been lost to a late collision These errors are a sign that the time to propagate the signal across the network is longer than the time it takes for a network card to place an entire packet on the network Thus the offending system doesn t know that the network is currently in use and it proceeds to place a new frame on the network The nodes that are trying to use the network at the same time detect the error after the first slot time of 64 bytes This means that the NIC detects late collisions only when transmitting frames that are longer than 64
512. y restoring the root block with the dinit utility The dcheck utility checks for bad blocks on a disk by attempting to read every block on the drive When you specify the m option dcheck removes any bad blocks from the disk allocation bitmap bitmap If it finds the file bad_b1lks dcheck updates the bitmap and recreates the bad_blks file You can run dcheck a few times to increase your chances of recognizing bad blocks and adding them to the bad_blks file The zap utility lets root remove files or directories from the filesystem without returning the used blocks to the free list You might do this for example if the directory entry is damaged or if two files occupy the same space on the disk an error 422 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data October 6 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Recovering disks and files Recovering a zapped file If you zapped a file in error it s sometimes possible to recover the zapped file using the zap utility with the u option immediately after the deletion You can recover a zapped file using zap under these conditions e the directory entry for that now deleted file must not be reused e the disk blocks previously used by the file must not be reassigned to another file spatch You may sometimes find that files or directories have been completely lost due to disk corruption If after running chkfsys you know that certain key files or directories weren t recovered
513. ymbolic links No drive letters Unlike Microsoft Windows which represents drives as letters that precede pathnames e g C Neutrino represents disk drives as regular directories within the pathname space Directories that access another filesystem such as one on a second hard disk partition are called mountpoints Usually the primary disk based filesystem is mounted at the root of the pathname space A full Neutrino installation such as a self hosted QNX Momentics development installation mounts all additional disk filesystems automatically under the s directory For example October 6 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 117 Filenames and pathnames 2005 QNX Software Systems A S Z C cdo hd0 qnx4 2 So while in a DOS based system a second partition on your hard drive might be accessed as D in a Neutrino system you might access the second QNX 4 filesystem partition on the first hard drive as s hd0 qnx4 2 For more information on where to find things in a typical Neutrino pathname space see Where everything is stored later in this chapter To learn more about mounting filesystems see Working with Filesystems and Controlling How Neutrino Starts Pathnames that begin with a dot When you list the contents of a directory the 1s utility usually hides files and directories whose names begin with a period Programs precede configuration files and directories with a period to hide them fro
514. ystem and see which classes of attacks it could potentially be vulnerable to and take steps to prevent them A virus is generally considered to be an infection that runs code on the host e g a Trojan horse Viruses need an entry point and a host The entry points for a virus include e an open interface e g ActiveX Neutrino has none e a security hole such as buffer overflows these are specific to flaws in specific services based on a common industry standard code base These are limited since we ship only a limited set of standard BSD services The hosts for a virus are system call interfaces that are accessible from the point of entry an infected program such as sendmail or Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 437 General OS security 2005 QNX Software Systems an HTTP server The hosts are platform specific so a virus for Linux would in all likelihood terminate the host under Neutrino as soon as it tried to do anything damaging The viruses that circulate via email are OS specific generally targeted at Windows and can t harm Neutrino systems since they simply aren t compatible Most UNIX style systems aren t susceptible to viruses since the ability to do much damage is limited by the host We have never heard of a true virus that could infect Neutrino In addition since deployed Neutrino systems are highly customized to their designated application they often don t contain the software that
515. zing Photon 2005 QNX Software Systems substitute glyph If this option is disabled only the missing glyph is used to locate a substitute Enabling this option may provide more uniform text output but it significantly decreases performance Schema settings See the documentation for fontadmin for information about setting or changing the default font server schema settings The Asian Font options page shows you the Asian fonts that are installed and lets you pick the font file to use to render them The font files on your system are stored in usr photon font_repository This directory contains the following phf TTF ttf pir fontdesc fontdir Photon Font files These are bitmapped font files Each file contains information for a single size and style of the font TrueType Font files Bitstream TrueDoc PFR Portable Font Resource files containing hinted scalable definitions of fonts Each file may contain multiple fonts and multiple styles This is an older technology supported for legacy reasons Font classifications for example SERIF Directory of known fonts Each entry in this file contains information such as the name and type of the font its size and style a textual description of the font family and the range of characters defined within the font To be available to an application at least one font must be defined in this configuration file Entries in this file are static they

USER'S GUIDE - QNX Software Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents